# Welcome!

You are in a right place to learn more about StylemixThemes Products🎉

We're excited to have you on board and help you make the most of our powerful plugins and themes. The comprehensive guides and manuals will assist you in seamlessly navigating through the initial setup process, ensuring a smooth and enjoyable experience with our products.

## Explore Manuals

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>🔌<strong>Plugins</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/uEj8dlqyOxuemSYDpe4k">/pages/uEj8dlqyOxuemSYDpe4k</a></td></tr><tr><td>🎨<strong>Themes</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/aP7AurlgstN5rlpLyYue">/pages/aP7AurlgstN5rlpLyYue</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Plugins

Explore Manuals of Free and Premium WordPress Plugins

Our WordPress plugins are designed to save you time and boost your business with powerful no-code solutions. At StylemixThemes, we offer both [**free** ](https://profiles.wordpress.org/stylemix/#content-plugins)and **premium** plugins, backed by regular **updates** and 24/7 support. Want to explore the admin area before making a purchase? Feel free to browse our full plugin collection here:

{% embed url="<https://stylemixthemes.com/plugins/?utm_source=stylemix&utm_medium=docs&utm_campaign=homepage&utm_term=plugins_page>" %}
Check the Premium WordPres Plugins
{% endembed %}

## Explore Plugin Manuals

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><span data-gb-custom-inline data-tag="emoji" data-code="1f4d6">📖</span> <strong>MasterStudy LMS</strong></td><td>Create and sell online courses easily</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/masterstudy-lms">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/masterstudy-lms</a></td></tr><tr><td>🧮 <strong>Cost Calculator Builder</strong></td><td>Powerful price calculator and forms builder</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/cost-calculator-builder">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/cost-calculator-builder</a></td></tr><tr><td>🚗 <strong>Motors</strong></td><td>Car dealer, classifieds &#x26; listing plugin</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/motors-car-dealer-classifieds-and-listing">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/motors-car-dealer-classifieds-and-listing</a></td></tr><tr><td>🔍 <strong>Motors VIN Decoder</strong></td><td>VIN decoding and vehicle history checking plugin</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/motors-vin-decoder">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/motors-vin-decoder</a></td></tr><tr><td>📦 <strong>uListing</strong></td><td>Classified ads listing WordPress plugin</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/ulisting">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/ulisting</a></td></tr><tr><td>🛒 <strong>Floating Sticky Cart</strong></td><td>Handy floating sticky cart for WooCommerce</td><td><a href="https://woocommerce.com/document/floating-sticky-cart/?_ga=2.260008462.50802966.1632891186-766968665.1626429065">https://woocommerce.com/document/floating-sticky-cart/?_ga=2.260008462.50802966.1632891186-766968665.1626429065</a></td></tr><tr><td>📝 <strong>Checkout Custom Fields Builder for WooCommerce</strong></td><td>Custom checkout forms builder for WooCommerce</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/checkout-custom-fields-builder-for-woocommerce">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/checkout-custom-fields-builder-for-woocommerce</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Themes

Learn More about Premium WordPress Themes of StylemixThemes

Our WordPress Themes with exclusive design and adjustable admin panel meet the requirements of any business objective, irrespective of its size and niche. We believe that everyone deserves high-quality services. And we are ready to supply you with powerful equipment - unique, innovative, and flexible WP Templates. See our portfolio and try any demo:

{% embed url="<https://stylemixthemes.com/themes/?utm_source=stylemix&utm_medium=docs&utm_campaign=homepage&utm_term=themes_page>" %}
Check the Premium WordPres Themes
{% endembed %}

## Explore Theme Manuals

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>💼 <strong>Consulting</strong></td><td>Business, Finance WordPress Theme</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/consulting-theme-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/consulting-theme-documentation</a></td></tr><tr><td>🎓 <strong>MasterStudy</strong></td><td>Education WordPress Theme</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/masterstudy-theme-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/masterstudy-theme-documentation</a></td></tr><tr><td>🚗 <strong>Motors</strong></td><td>Car Dealer, Rental &#x26; Listing WordPress Theme</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/motors-theme-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/motors-theme-documentation</a></td></tr><tr><td>🦪 <strong>Pearl</strong></td><td>Corporate Business WordPress Theme</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/pearl-theme-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/pearl-theme-documentation</a></td></tr><tr><td>🏀 <strong>Splash</strong></td><td>Sport Club WordPress Theme for Basketball, Football, Hockey
</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/splash-theme-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/splash-theme-documentation</a></td></tr><tr><td>🪙 <strong>Crypterio</strong></td><td>NFT and Crypto Landing Page WordPress Theme</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/crypterio-theme-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/crypterio-theme-documentation</a></td></tr><tr><td>🏠 <strong>HomePress</strong></td><td>Real Estate WordPress Theme</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/homepress-theme-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/homepress-theme-documentation</a></td></tr><tr><td>🚚 <strong>Transcargo</strong></td><td>Transportation WordPress Theme for Logistics</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/transcargo-theme-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/transcargo-theme-documentation</a></td></tr><tr><td>🏭 <strong>Manufacturer</strong></td><td>Factory and Industrial WordPress Theme</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/manufacturer-theme-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/manufacturer-theme-documentation</a></td></tr><tr><td><span data-gb-custom-inline data-tag="emoji" data-code="2b50">⭐</span> <strong>Smarty</strong></td><td>School Kindergarten WordPress theme</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/smarty-theme-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/smarty-theme-documentation</a></td></tr><tr><td>🏋️ <strong>Health Coach</strong></td><td>Personal Trainer WordPress theme</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/healthcoach-theme-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/healthcoach-theme-documentation</a></td></tr><tr><td>🏨 <strong>Hotello</strong></td><td>Fully Functional Theme for Hotel Business</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/hotello-theme-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/hotello-theme-documentation</a></td></tr><tr><td>🔝 <strong>BeTop</strong></td><td>Coaching &#x26; Speaker WordPress Theme</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/betop-theme-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/betop-theme-documentation</a></td></tr><tr><td>🌲 <strong>Sequoia</strong></td><td>Elementor Landing Page WordPress Theme</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/sequoia-theme-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/sequoia-theme-documentation</a></td></tr><tr><td>🤝 <strong>Companion</strong></td><td>Corporate Business WordPress Theme</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/companion-theme-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/companion-theme-documentation</a></td></tr><tr><td>🧩 <strong>MasterStudy Templates</strong></td><td>Premium Templates for MasterStudy LMS Plugin</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/masterstudy-lms-starter-theme">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/masterstudy-lms-starter-theme</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Other Manuals

Besides plugins and themes, StylemixThemes developed mobile apps and other handy tools for WordPress. Here you can check the documentation of some of them:

## Explore Other Product Manuals

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Nuxy (for devs)</strong></td><td>Framework for option-related interaction </td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/nuxy">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/nuxy</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Motors App</strong></td><td>Car Dealership &#x26; Classified Listings Mobile App for Android &#x26; iOS</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/motors-app-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/motors-app-documentation</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>MasterStudy App</strong></td><td>LMS and Education Mobile App for Android &#x26; iOS</td><td><a href="https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/masterstudy-app-documentation">https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/masterstudy-app-documentation</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Introduction | MasterStudy LMS Documentation

**Thank you for choosing&#x20;**<mark style="color:blue;">**the best**</mark>**&#x20;WordPress LMS Plugin 🎉**

MasterStudy LMS will convert any WordPress website into a specialized online portal that supports all e-learning & LMS functionality unique to the industry. It gives you the tools to build and sell online courses. It manages all types of content, including videos, quizzes, lessons, slides, assignments, announcements, FAQs, emails, conferences, webinars, streams, certificates and more. This documentation covers all the great features of MasterStudy!

***

## Discover MasterStudy LMS

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>⭐️ Free VS Pro Plus Version</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-MdefydNyi9BfK_TeoW2">/pages/-MdefydNyi9BfK_TeoW2</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Getting Started</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-MdecWiCDlwh44wiiEUi">/pages/-MdecWiCDlwh44wiiEUi</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>️Pro Addons</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-MESMQElgFOoV6RiE_wN">/pages/-MESMQElgFOoV6RiE_wN</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>LMS Settings</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-MESMQEUQtR4QEx3tR09">/pages/-MESMQEUQtR4QEx3tR09</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>LMS Course Features</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-MdeqF1nDDQhOw-79a7J">/pages/-MdeqF1nDDQhOw-79a7J</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>LMS Analytics</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/CZwi6DLPWaJ1bQ8p1JOk">/pages/CZwi6DLPWaJ1bQ8p1JOk</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Plugin Translation</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/gMtBF9rZlY3rBsOS17SN">/pages/gMtBF9rZlY3rBsOS17SN</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Multilingual LMS</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3PApb0F4zGGwfRxqaFgM">/pages/3PApb0F4zGGwfRxqaFgM</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Changelog</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/Fl47uuJ5ERwR4adNMGYV">/pages/Fl47uuJ5ERwR4adNMGYV</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Email Management</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-Mdep_kHBxY0s-YX2H5e">/pages/-Mdep_kHBxY0s-YX2H5e</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Divi Builder Integration</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-MkKx58hJQZ9kTuAaSM3">/pages/-MkKx58hJQZ9kTuAaSM3</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Additional Features</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-MPhc0-lVQq5TeCE0FP6">/pages/-MPhc0-lVQq5TeCE0FP6</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>PayPal Payouts</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-MjT2RxtXIiIvsfRJurE">/pages/-MjT2RxtXIiIvsfRJurE</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>WooCommerce</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-Mdexo69pi3wfNfxNuEx">/pages/-Mdexo69pi3wfNfxNuEx</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Troubleshooting</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/s3uRDHrlKUn0TlcPLhzI">/pages/s3uRDHrlKUn0TlcPLhzI</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Developer's Guide</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/YmZit78Eydr9JQ2x0FC4">/pages/YmZit78Eydr9JQ2x0FC4</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Free Version and Pro Plus Version

<figure><img src="https://ps.w.org/masterstudy-lms-learning-management-system/assets/banner-1544x500.jpg?rev=3083431" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Free Version of the Plugin

<mark style="color:blue;">**MasterStudy WordPress LMS**</mark> plugin is a powerful online education, course, and learning management system plugin for WordPress that is available **free of charge**. MasterStudy LMS is packed full of exciting features. The system includes a powerful admin panel, a messaging system, spaces for posting quizzes and their results, and a place for course announcements.

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=WLRawpIgqJQ>" %}

MasterStudy LMS Free plugin includes the [MasterStudy Starter theme](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/), allowing you to quickly create a dream WordPress site for your education company.

{% embed url="<https://wordpress.org/plugins/masterstudy-lms-learning-management-system/>" %}
Link to the Free Plugin
{% endembed %}

## PRO Plus Version

<mark style="color:blue;">**MasterStudy LMS PRO Plus**</mark> allows you to apply tons of beneficial options. [**26 add-ons**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/certificate-builder) with extra premium features and more lesson types are available with the PRO Plus version of the plugin.

Another big premium option of the PRO Plus Version is full [**WooCommerce Integration**](/masterstudy-lms/woocommerce/woocommerce-integration) **and** [**Advanced Reports and Analytics**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/analytics-for-admin)**.** WooCommerce is the best solution for selling your courses online. The integration brings the ability to create LMS course products, set up a store, apply coupons and discounts, and manage bundles.

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=98LKgphFSCY>" %}

Overall, the MasterStudy WordPress LMS plugin offers a competitive solution to the issue of adapting your website for online education. The variety of tools and features available support every aspect of this business, and the creatively designed content is simple yet eye-catching. It will help attract potential customers looking to develop their knowledge in your field.

{% embed url="<https://r.freemius.com/3434/4723181/>" %}
Link to the Official Website of the Plugin
{% endembed %}

## Free vs PRO Plus Comparison Table

<table data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th width="336">Features and Addons</th><th data-type="checkbox">MasterStudy Free</th><th data-type="checkbox">MasterStudy Pro Plus</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><a href="/spaces/BP5ah3ZU6B3thBHJbnWV"><strong>Starter Template</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td> <strong>Payment Methods</strong><a href="/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0"><strong>(Offline Payment, PayPal, Stripe, Wire Transfer)</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/3PApb0F4zGGwfRxqaFgM"><strong>Multilingual LMS (WPML Integration)</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/gMtBF9rZlY3rBsOS17SN"><strong>Plugin Translation (Loco Translate)</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/047rYBKyxx3sjJcSGWrl"><strong>LMS Widgets</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdeqF1oqtZ4cQauA6Zp"><strong>All-In-One Course Builder</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/CrJwJMEdMurj6A7rDFbk"><strong>Modern Course Player (with Dark/Light modes)</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-Mder9CS2Zl8cjIYb-lk#text-lesson"><strong>Text Lessons</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-Mder9CS2Zl8cjIYb-lk#video-lesson"><strong>Video Lessons</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MderPCkfaaeL6UYHpuO"><strong>Quizzes</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdeuIM0tGgOnN7VReAr"><strong>Membership System</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Integrations</strong> (<a href="/pages/-MdeuoN7qumN__cqOs80"><strong>H5P</strong></a>, <a href="/pages/Lq9XvTaZmWPBU1iMfJ02"><strong>OttoKit</strong></a>, <a href="/pages/kIw4c0z4muuWO00i15Y2"><strong>PeepSo</strong></a>, <a href="/pages/c1qdqqgnFWHs1daReSN1"><strong>Studiocart</strong></a>, <a href="/pages/L550YgGClkicopQXhDFA"><strong>PrestoPlayer</strong></a>)</td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-Mdexo6A-_DgBopwJ7SO"><strong>WooCommerce Integration (75+ payment methods)</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/JnzyV0Ym7e8dEkGwKYPA"><strong>AI Lab</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/xRwb1940Y2uPJahs3mJB"><strong>Subscriptions</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/BvfVv0KW0fZvaPGUolTO"><strong>Audio Lessons</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdenB1eyEBtxq-e8gsp"><strong>Stream Lessons</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdepPqLRzcqUDJnTrsO"><strong>Zoom Lessons</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/nr604naQjMVLZETtr2zo"><strong>Google Meet Lessons</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/Ftac4m0bUZLIeyijtxB8"><strong>PDF Lessons</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-Mdeoibl-zUU4RxDX-of"><strong>Assignments</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/5xE34TW3xASwqh7S9rAI"><strong>Question Media</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/F6Y3UIvvC4TXCf5kvQYB"><strong>Social Login</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdepdKe4E2d8IELFo6Q"><strong>Certificate Builder</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-Mdep_kHBxY0s-YX2H5e"><strong>Email Manager and Branding</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdepjP_BuCf9uP5xPfb"><strong>LMS Forms Editor</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdemzC_gifOkeYdHDvh"><strong>Sequential Drip Contents</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdenktxwtyHAfgCygIS"><strong>Group Courses</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-Mdeou0Ajpnxd6JML4Hw"><strong>Course Bundles</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-Mdeoo56U8InwpCF36i9"><strong>Points System</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/AC8Vhafy1DVUTK35qV3X"><strong>Media File Manager</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdepVe9cGR4QL-gS9so"><strong>SCORM Courses</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdemoMYFexDepBlZP21"><strong>Trial Courses</strong></a> </td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdehiLukejLcYb1EiWx"><strong>Payouts</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/XxU7zcOVd382G9jJWiDF"><strong>Reports and Analytics</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdemUZjjeHfOftN8rQK"><strong>Online Testing</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-Mdep0NhehyjfhRPRjm1"><strong>Multi Instructors</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-Mdep6hqrelQ7d3BxF7H"><strong>Google Classrooms</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/TMn1PatGYg3aQBqkfVml"><strong>Grades</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdejrNBynKznEYRHYjp"><strong>Udemy Importer</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdekfkM_CJbccfwesDn"><strong>Prerequisites</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-Mden3qFNWx6ENfE7XES"><strong>Gradebook</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/Nx3e3jEIOx7Wi1E4UNEn"><strong>Upcoming Course Status</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/Elq92awCC5CnaDPt0zdg"><strong>Taxes</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MderHKDVtKM6kjledYj#required-video-progress"><strong>Required Video Progress</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/XUnMrrIYuaoou0X1a96f#coupons"><strong>Coupons</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/BvfVv0KW0fZvaPGUolTO#required-audio-progress"><strong>Required Audio Progress</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MderHKDVtKM6kjledYj#timecodes"><strong>Timecodes in Video Lessons</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/BvfVv0KW0fZvaPGUolTO#timecodes"><strong>Timecodes in Audio Lessons</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/zUCrTP4BtcogjG58OaY9"><strong>Video Lesson Questions</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Premium Payment Methods (</strong><a href="/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0#mollie"><strong>Mollie</strong></a><strong>,</strong> <a href="/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0#paystack"><strong>Paystack</strong></a><strong>)</strong></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdegdOYFs3M2RKt64Vr#course-page-styles"><strong>10+ Single Course Styles</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/SqgijE4dozEVAHPNvOuv"><strong>Video Preview for Single Courses</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/Cf704ca0m0dPdtSH1QlE"><strong>Sales Page for Instructor</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr></tbody></table>

{% hint style="success" %}
You can find more details and features on the [**official website**](https://r.freemius.com/16465/4723181/) of the plugin.
{% endhint %}


# System Requirements

To ensure optimal performance and avoid technical issues with the **MasterStudy LMS** plugin, please ensure your server meets the following requirements. If you are uncertain whether your server is compatible, contact your hosting provider for assistance.

Here are the **minimum** server requirements:

* **WordPress Version:** <mark style="color:green;">**6.3**</mark> or higher
* **PHP Limits**
  * PHP Version: <mark style="color:green;">**7.4**</mark> or higher
  * PHP time Limit ([max\_execution\_time](https://www.a2hosting.com/kb/developer-corner/php/using-php.ini-directives/php-maximum-execution-time/#:~:text=By%20default%2C%20the%20maximum%20execution,script%20and%20reports%20an%20error.)): <mark style="color:green;">**300**</mark>
  * PHP Post Max Size: <mark style="color:green;">**64 MB**</mark>
* **Database: MySQL &#x20;**<mark style="color:green;">**8.0**</mark> or higher OR **MariaDB** version <mark style="color:green;">**10.4**</mark> or greater.&#x20;
* **WP Memory Limit:** <mark style="color:green;">**256 MB**</mark> or higher
* **Server Modules** – `mod_rewrite, cURL`
* **Max Upload Size**: <mark style="color:green;">**64 MB**</mark>
* #### [**HTTPS**](https://wordpress.org/news/2016/12/moving-toward-ssl/) Support

{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** Using an older version of PHP may cause compatibility issues. We strongly recommend contacting your hosting provider to upgrade to the latest PHP version.
{% endhint %}

### Supported Browsers

As web technology advances, it's essential to keep your website updated. Older browsers may not fully support the features of our plugin. Below is a chart outlining the systems that our plugin supports:

<table><thead><tr><th width="236">Browser</th><th>Desktop Version</th><th>Tablet &#x26; Mobile Version</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Google Chrome</td><td><mark style="color:green;">100.x</mark> and above</td><td><mark style="color:green;">100.x</mark> and above</td></tr><tr><td>Microsoft Edge</td><td><mark style="color:green;">100.x</mark> and above</td><td><mark style="color:green;">100.x</mark> and above</td></tr><tr><td>Brave </td><td><mark style="color:green;">100.x</mark> and above</td><td><mark style="color:green;">100.x</mark> and above</td></tr><tr><td>Firefox</td><td><mark style="color:green;">100.x</mark> and above</td><td><mark style="color:green;">100.x</mark> and above</td></tr><tr><td>Safari</td><td>MacOS Safari <mark style="color:green;">14</mark> and above</td><td>iOS Safari <mark style="color:green;">14</mark> and above</td></tr><tr><td>Others</td><td>Latest versions preferred</td><td>Latest versions preferred</td></tr></tbody></table>

{% hint style="danger" %}
No versions of **Internet Explore**r are supported.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

Ensuring these system requirements are met will help you make the most of the **MasterStudy LMS** plugin and ensure a smooth, trouble-free experience.


# Plugin Installation

## Installation of the Free Version

{% hint style="warning" %}

#### **IMPORTANT**

Please, do not install the PRO version of the plugin before the free version. It may cause unexpected problems.&#x20;

Always install the Free version of the plugin before upgrading to the [**PRO version.**](#installation-of-the-pro-plus-version)
{% endhint %}

The installation process of the **MasterStudy LMS Plugin** is just like any other WordPress plugin.  Two ways of installation are shown in this manual.

In the first way, download the[ plugin](https://wordpress.org/plugins/masterstudy-lms-learning-management-system/) from the default repository of WordPress.

![](/files/-Mdowwjwk7Mhv4IxjcUt)

Go to the **Dashboard > Plugins > Add New.**

![](/files/-Mdp-Sz57O6BvJr4hGCy)

Click on the **Upload Plugin** button(1), select the **MasterStudy LMS Plugin,** downloaded from your local folders(2), click the **Install Now** button(3), and wait for the installation to finish.

![](/files/-Mdp0rf2M3a71fjWj7U9)

In the second way, follow the **Dashboard > Plugins > Add New** path.

![](/files/-Mdp-Sz57O6BvJr4hGCy)

On the opened page, search for the MasterStudy LMS Plugin(1), Install the plugin(2) and Activate it once it's installed.

![](/files/-Mdp45J7ve1LCc0LqyDG)

## Installation of the PRO Plus Version

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/yWh4lHxoV4o?feature=shared>" %}

The PRO Plus Version of the plugin can be purchased from our [official website](https://stylemixthemes.com/wordpress-lms-plugin/) and the following manual works with Freemius. If you are Purchased the MasterStudy LMS plugin from [AppSumo Deal](https://appsumo.com/products/masterstudy-lms/) please go to the next section.

{% content-ref url="/pages/MgbHjXX4Eap9sl3wxxN6" %}
[AppSumo Deal](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/appsumo-deal)
{% endcontent-ref %}

{% hint style="info" %}
Please note that the PRO Plus Version of the plugin works only if the Free plugin is activated on the website.
{% endhint %}

After purchasing the plugin you will get an email from Freemius with the link to the plugin zip package, your license code, and instructions on how to set up the LMS PRO.

![](/files/-Me-hHaSgJYJed8rA4Qo)

Once you get the package, follow the **Dashboard > Plugins > Add New** path. Click on the **Upload Plugin** button(1), upload the plugin from the Freemus(2), click the **Install Now** button(3), and wait for the installation to finish.

![](/files/-MdpO8JoNyibMe3X2VCv)

When the plugin is installed you need to **Activate** it.

![](/files/-MdpPVDaQYfdvBnIsyfS)

After clicking on **Activate Plugin**, you will be redirected to another page to activate your license. Use the License Key you received with your email and enter it in the field provided.

![](/files/-MdpQm8ENMjL5pHCyc7F)

![](/files/-MdpR8_f9qlarCtNkus4)

Click **Agree & Activate License** to confirm the activation.

After the activation, you will see the notification about successfully activating the PRO Plus version.

![](/files/-MdpRb1fvVpKt5GhsQMJ)


# Upgrading the License

In the **MasterStudy**, you have the option to upgrade your license to cover more sites or switch to a Lifetime plan. When upgrading from your current plan, you will only be charged a prorated amount, factoring in what you have already paid.

It can be done in two ways:

* [from **Stylemixthemes (Freemius) Account** dashboard](#upgrading-the-plan-via-stylemixthemes-freemius-account)
* [from the **Pricing** menu](#upgrading-the-plan-via-pricing-menu)

{% hint style="warning" %}
If you wish to change your plan within **30 days** of purchasing the plugin, you’ll only need to pay **the difference** between the plan prices. However, **after 30 days**, you will be required to pay the **full price** of the new plan.
{% endhint %}

## Upgrading the Plan via Stylemixthemes (Freemius) Account

1. Visit <https://stylemixthemes.com/account/> and log in using the credentials you received when you purchased the plugin:

<figure><img src="/files/Fh4WT3FErHP6yHpVZvZo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
In case you forgot your password, feel free to use the **Forgot Your Password** button to reset your password.
{% endhint %}

2. From the dashboard, move to the **Licenses tab** and choose the product that you want to change the current plan:

<figure><img src="/files/FOHPnENdhXSK4YoSGoNj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. On the opened sidebar click on Upgrade to then choose the plan that you want to purchase:

<figure><img src="/files/xQE1h0Wg1g5pq3dbC6GW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. Proceed with the checkout process in the opened pop-up and you are done!

<figure><img src="/files/PLNS4zplTAu6XpENJZDG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Upgrading the Plan via Pricing Menu

1. On the **Pricing page** at <https://stylemixthemes.com/wordpress-lms-plugin/pricing/>, select the plan that best suits your needs:

<figure><img src="/files/oFVsSRmy1Y4kuWpdcpBz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Click on the **Renewing or Upgrading** option on the opened pop-up:

<figure><img src="/files/3GO8cw5OY23Cvj3ErldG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. Enter your **License key** and complete the checkout:

<figure><img src="/files/11YCz7FtPUrcCdPRD9jI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Update The Plugin

We constantly improve our products and release regular updates. All updates are available for free.

{% hint style="info" %}
Both **Free** and **Pro Plus** versions follow the same steps in updating the plugin.
{% endhint %}

When it comes to updating, there are two ways to do it.

{% hint style="warning" %}
This documentation is for those who purchased **MasterStudy LMS Pro Plus** from our [**official website**](https://stylemixthemes.com) via **Freemius**.

Those who got the plugin via [**AppSumo**](https://appsumo.com/products/masterstudy-lms/) check [**this manual**](https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/appsumo-deal#how-to-update-the-pro-plugin) to update the plugin.
{% endhint %}

## First Way: MasterStudy Ecosystem

We have introduced the **MasterStudy Ecosystem**, which includes both free and Pro versions of MasterStudy, the MS Starter Theme, and other **integrated plugin updates**.&#x20;

MasterStudy seamlessly integrates with dozens of plugins. After each update, our team tests the compatibility of the new versions to ensure smooth performance. This rigorous testing allows users to confidently update their plugins and themes.&#x20;

{% hint style="success" %}
Therefore, updating via the **MasterStudy Ecosystem** is the best way to keep your plugins and theme up to date.
{% endhint %}

### How to update via MasterStudy Ecosystem?

Once you have an update, on any WordPress page you will get a special notification banner:

<figure><img src="/files/kz2Pmyo1SR87iODSKsDc" alt=""><figcaption><p>MasterStudy Ecosystem Update Notification on Plugins Page</p></figcaption></figure>

To begin updating, just click on the **Update All** button and wait patiently for the confirmation message:

<figure><img src="/files/Z7Tk4vbNdx55gditjnPV" alt=""><figcaption><p>Update All button</p></figcaption></figure>

## Second Way (Manual Updating)

To update the MasterStudy LMS Plugin manually, go to the **Dashboard > Plugins > Installed Plugins** page. The warning notification bar will be appearing at the bottom of the plugin informing that the new version is available.

![](/files/-MdpUB18Ay9TV9dUtgdJ)

Click on the **Update Now** link to update the plugin.

![](/files/-MdpVTWiuQ3Vuo-9LLZ8)

{% hint style="danger" %}
During updates **NEVER** **close the page** and wait patiently. You can close the page if and only if you see the **success or error message!**

Closing the page during the update makes the WordPress move to **Maintenance Mode!**
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
To avoid critical errors after updates, please disable automatic plugin updates. Despite rigorous testing, unforeseen issues may arise. To disable automatic plugin updates, go to the **Plugins** section of your WordPress dashboard and click on Disable auto-updates next to plugins.
{% endhint %}


# AppSumo Deal

This section of the documentation is valid for customers who bought the MasterStudy LMS Pro plugin from [AppSumo](https://appsumo.com/products/masterstudy-lms/). If you bought the MasterStudy LMS Pro from our [official website](https://stylemixthemes.com/wordpress-lms-plugin/) through Freemius you can skip this section and go to the next one.

{% content-ref url="/pages/-Mdef1AWvogFe3g\_aBAA" %}
[Update The Plugin](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/update-the-plugin)
{% endcontent-ref %}

### Redeem the new AppSumo code

After purchasing MasterStudy LMS Pro on [AppSumo](https://appsumo.com/products/masterstudy-lms/), you will receive a unique code and URL to create an account in Stylemix Support Portal.

Then go to the following link to create an account: [https://support.stylemixthemes.com/auth/appsumo?code=xxxxx](<https://support.stylemixthemes.com/auth/appsumo?code=xxxxx >)

\*Here xxxxx is the unique coupon code that you received.

On opened page fill out the required fields to create a new account:

<figure><img src="/files/rvfzbJ0fStMEKM9FYLMW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After filling out the form agree to the terms of the Service and Privacy Policy and hit the **Register** button:

<figure><img src="/files/7qbhilue4j8GafgiUj6r" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After creating an account you will be redirected to the Support account.

{% hint style="success" %}
If you are our existing customer and have purchased our other [themes](https://stylemixthemes.com/themes/) and [plugins](https://stylemixthemes.com/plugins/), it is required open the **AppSumo downloads** section in the support account and redeem a new code.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/lk0fw5AiP13jD3byKb0q" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Upgrading Pricing Plan

After signing up, you will see a notification about the successful activation of the AppSumo coupon code:

<figure><img src="/files/4h8ujIxr2LiEiy3y4qKx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**MasterStudy LMS** section displays information about your pricing plan including the assigned date, used AppSumo Redeemsion codes, and the number of sites that can be activated.

<figure><img src="/files/RHzRoTfUn5djqxCPk8Ub" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

To upgrade your currently active plan you can click on the <img src="/files/0QHqohO78jOVWTbrsKDp" alt="" data-size="original"> button. Then you can Redeem the new AppSumo Code to upgrade the Pricing plan:

<figure><img src="/files/RO55yK1ztk08IYctYOKl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After redeeming the new code, the Plan will be upgraded and limits will be updated:

<figure><img src="/files/h28WIgzPn5iJEa9sNa7K" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Downloading and installing MasterStudy LMS plugins.

Now time to download the MasterStudy LMS plugin files. To do this, download the Free and Pro version of the plugins:

<figure><img src="/files/0kanC8lEPC1Z5R5URkIE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The Pro version requires a Free plugin to be installed and activated on the website.

If you are the owner of the AppSumo 2 or 3 Code Tier, you can download the MasterStudy LMS Mobile App as well:

<figure><img src="/files/Nc8FOAszUooKfWH00q12" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
MasterStudy LMS Mobile App can be built following this [manual](https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/masterstudy-app-documentatioin/).
{% endhint %}

After downloading the MasterStudy LMS plugins (in a zip file), you need to install them on your WordPress:

<figure><img src="/files/R3uVjbaNWebNmqBO0typ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### MasterStudy LMS Pro plugin activation.

On the support account, the MasterStudy LMS License should be copied out to activate the MasterStudy LMS Pro plugin and receive regular updates:

<figure><img src="/files/r6wghKpNcqINWedZQm2j" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The license should be used after activating MasterStudy LMS Pro on the WordPress dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/EZPVBECQJvIT8k6KzRKC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Management of Active domains.

All domains where the MasterStudy LMS Pro plugin is activated will be listed in **Manage your domains** section:

<figure><img src="/files/NRxzx3fWg3fuiC7EjYuL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

There the active sites can be removed to use the license in other domains.

### How to update the Pro plugin

The free version of the MasterStudy LMS plugin can be updated from the WordPress dashboard when updates are available:

<figure><img src="/files/icsLsOvu9r0Q3zFyLasr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The Pro version of the MasterStudy LMS plugin can be updated manually in WordPress dashboard or through FTP by downloading the Latest version of the Plugin from your account:

<figure><img src="/files/ZiEICCOZP3lUCsNyVsli" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Updating the Pro plugin in WordPress Dashboard

To update the Pro Plugin in WordPress Dashboard go to the Dashboard > Plugins > Add new section and upload the downloaded the latest version of the Pro plugin:

<figure><img src="/files/bVZU8VAvdRfzMs6OvdVm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After clicking the **Install Now** button, WordPress warns that the plugin is already installed:

<figure><img src="/files/gGBzvsLLJ7jB2otbfGDb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

By clicking on **Replace current with upload** button the plugin can be updated.

#### Updating the Pro plugin through FTP (Expert)

Unzip the downloaded **.zip** file which will give a **masterstudy-lms-learning-management-system-pro** folder. Make sure your unzipping software does not create an extra directory with the same name nested into each other.

Retrieve your FTP login information from your hosting admin panel. Login to your FTP account via an FTP software ([FileZilla](https://filezilla-project.org/download.php) or similar) to access your website folders.

<figure><img src="/files/ZP9j6NPBPhqScQvTidLd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Once you access the FTP account, navigate to the WordPress Plugins directory ***YOUR\_HOSTING\_ROOT/YOUR\_SUBDIRECTORY/wp-content/plugins*** and remove the **masterstudy-lms-learning-management-system-pro** folder.

Upload by drag and dropping the previously unzipped **masterstudy-lms-learning-management-system-pro** folder into ***YOUR\_HOSTING\_ROOT/YOUR\_SUBDIRECTORY/wp-content/plugins*** directory. &#x20;

Congratulations, you have successfully updated the plugin!&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
**Is it safe to remove the plugin folder?**

Removing the plugin folder doesn't delete your current content and settings as they are located in the database. If you made custom changes in core files, then the update will override your modifications.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

### Support ticket creation

To contact our Premium Support ![](/files/ZW7xMBBKF85zsrTTJKXH) button should be clicked:

<figure><img src="/files/TJin9lZODYMEgc4JWbdE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After, filling out the form and describing the issue the support ticket can be created. Providing screenshots in the ticket to speed up the help process:

<figure><img src="/files/boV6QFIqYPI4TufEyww4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Update Billing Details and Access Invoices

## Update Billing Details

Updating or adding billing information to your entire Freemius account is a straightforward process. You have the ability to manage it all directly from your profile. To do it:

1. Log in to your account at[ ](https://stylemixthemes.com/)<https://stylemixthemes.com/> using the email address you used when you purchased the plugin. (My Account -> Dashboard Only)

<figure><img src="/files/u4PJ4ldvExcJWm2ubJQz" alt=""><figcaption><p>Landing Page of <a href="https://stylemixthemes.com">Stylemixthemes.com</a></p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/n4moxJFjI9lveID9ACmc" alt=""><figcaption><p>Reaching to Freemius account dashboard for plugins</p></figcaption></figure>

2. Go to the **My Profile** tab and update the needed information. There is no need to save, it will be done automatically.

<figure><img src="/files/gUbNGeT2TnqDueQpPi7v" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Please note that adding a VAT number won’t affect any already charged VAT. This modification will only apply to invoices generated in the future
{% endhint %}

## Access Invoices

Upon the purchase or renewal of your subscription, Freemius will send you an invoice email on our behalf. If you encounter difficulties in finding this email, there’s no need to worry. You have the convenience of downloading all your past invoices directly from your account.

1. Log in to your account at[ ](https://stylemixthemes.com/)<https://stylemixthemes.com/> as we did [previously. ](#update-billing-details)
2. Navigate to the **Orders History** tab and you can find the invoices for your orders there.

<figure><img src="/files/5JyF7i2IttAhrr5xlYjh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Just click on the **Invoice** button to download it.


# LMS Wizard

To help you better understand the LMS software, we came up with the idea to integrate the LMS Wizard. The Wizard will help you to configure the LMS settings depending on the decision to build a site for a single teacher or create a marketplace.

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=25s&v=BJlw10yJBv0>" %}

Right after activating the MasterStudy LMS plugin, you will be redirected to the Wizard. You can also access it through the **Dashboard > Tools > LMS Wizard**.

![](/files/T4LNym11l45uICV7a4re)

There are 7 simple steps that will take you through the primary setup of your website.

### Step 1. Business <a href="#step-1" id="step-1"></a>

The first step - **Business** - here you can select the business type of your website. You have two options: create a website for individuals or launch a marketplace. Mark the needed option.

![](/files/zmy1LYInPzznD9DS8pHG)

### Step 2. **Courses** <a href="#step-3" id="step-3"></a>

In the **Courses** stage, it is required to generate an archive page to display all LMS courses. Then, the appearance of the Courses page can be customized by selecting the layout, specifying the number of courses per page row, and so on.

![](/files/Ww0P3YyKH7eSvFMDX8tU)

### Step 3. **Single Course** <a href="#step-4" id="step-4"></a>

The **Single Course** settings allow you to enable the Redirect to checkout option and select necessary course tabs.

![](/files/GPQCeQfNNn1XD8QE2fMB)

### Step 4. **Curriculum** <a href="#step-5" id="step-5"></a>

The **Curriculum** makes it possible to select the quiz style.&#x20;

![](/files/GMmeF8wdgCNJS85O7FP7)

### Step 5. **Profiles** <a href="#step-6" id="step-6"></a>

In the **Profile's** setup Instructor registration can be disabled and you can show the registration form for instructors on a separate page.

![](/files/ZEg9aJySFU4YT1Yvrgci)

* When **Instructor Registration** is enabled, the checkbox "Register as an instructor" will appear on the registration form.
* You can enable showing the instructor registration form on a separate page and generate a page for the form automatically.

### Step 6. Finish <a href="#step-7" id="step-7"></a>

Once you finished, you can import demo courses or add your own courses. In the last step, useful links for [Video tutorials](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=V8Lttze18-I\&list=PL3Pyh_1kFGGDikfKuVbGb_dqKmXZY86Ve), Plugin documentation, and additional services can be found.

![](/files/JUcQWSq63fSnF0F5BlV7)

{% hint style="success" %}
By clicking the **Get MasterStudy Pro** button, the Pro version of the MasterStudy LMS plugin can be purchased.
{% endhint %}


# LMS Widgets

MasterStudy LMS Plugin includes ready widgets for popular page builders **Elementor, WPBakery, Gutenberg, and Divi.** Using widgets instead of shortcodes allows you to visually check the changes while building a website.

{% hint style="info" %}
To make the MasterStudy LMS widgets available for Divi Theme, the [MasterStudy LMS Divi Modules](https://wordpress.org/plugins/masterstudy-lms-divi-modules/) plugin should be installed and activated.
{% endhint %}

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MkKx58hJQZ9kTuAaSM3" %}
[Divi Builder Integration](/masterstudy-lms/divi-builder-integration/getting-started)
{% endcontent-ref %}

{% content-ref url="/pages/GEw5iD9h0dJ7ir81wdgX" %}
[Gutenberg Blocks](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets/gutenberg-blocks)
{% endcontent-ref %}

### Courses 4 in 1 (Elementor)

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_yJdPSVVLo8>" %}

The Courses 4-in-1 Widget is exclusively available for elementor and combines four widgets Courses Grid, Course Carousel, Featured Teacher blocks, and Courses Archive page.

<figure><img src="/files/EbFwTsagImC5JjkU3o8c" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Earlier the following LMS widgets were available separately:

* [**Course Carousel**](#courses-carousel): The Course Carousel widget engages with a stunning carousel of the best courses available.
* [**Courses Grid**](#courses-grid): This widget allows you or your instructors to showcase the full course catalog in an easy-to-navigate grid layout.
* [**Featured Teacher**](#featured-teacher): This widget allows you to highlight a teacher and their courses.
* [**Courses archive**:](#courses-archive) This is a page that displays all the courses available on your website.

The Courses 4 in 1 combines the widgets listed above into one widget and offers the following styles for course cards.&#x20;

* Style 1 - Classic
* Style 2 - Price Accent
* Style 3 - Price Button
* Style 4 - Full-Size Image
* Style 5 - Centered
* Style 6 - Info Accent

{% hint style="info" %}
The presets are fully customizable, by editing the styles it is possible to create unique card layouts.
{% endhint %}

#### Course Carousel

The Carousel type of Courses widget displays courses from selected categories on the website in carousel view.&#x20;

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Style 1" %}

<figure><img src="/files/N5saXWyMuwI5ZQvkHYER" alt=""><figcaption><p>Classic Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 2" %}

<figure><img src="/files/qNMPO9wC5vgiimtkqfSB" alt=""><figcaption><p>Price Accent Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 3" %}

<figure><img src="/files/EEZpf68cUqC56JHSKfoj" alt=""><figcaption><p>Price Button Style</p></figcaption></figure>

{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 4" %}

<figure><img src="/files/WmhUTVvIMYapPKWbU07w" alt=""><figcaption><p>Full-Size Image Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 5" %}

<figure><img src="/files/YzGKN1xIRmifthHiqK38" alt=""><figcaption><p>Centered Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 6" %}

<figure><img src="/files/84ppFGUmW7IlVKspm5xU" alt=""><figcaption><p>Info Accent Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

#### Courses Grid

The Grid type of Courses widget displays a number of courses from selected categories on the website in grid view.&#x20;

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Style 1" %}

<figure><img src="/files/Fej7HQ5gox8EmtPa4Nof" alt=""><figcaption><p>Classic Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 2" %}

<figure><img src="/files/Uw5d8lYqTCpRlYTURpdu" alt=""><figcaption><p>Price Accent Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 3" %}

<figure><img src="/files/eQCAVgTwAId5NAV0Nxbk" alt=""><figcaption><p>Price Button Style</p></figcaption></figure>

{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 4" %}

<figure><img src="/files/My1TSxqNwg4eWRTvrSRw" alt=""><figcaption><p>Full-Size Image Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 5" %}

<figure><img src="/files/oMjy1KANxQrrBpgmsD0y" alt=""><figcaption><p>Centered Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 6" %}

<figure><img src="/files/2AsQ2QaNwyOG9dmm71xw" alt=""><figcaption><p>Info Accent Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

#### Featured Teacher

The "Featured Teacher" type of Courses widget showcases an instructor with courses available.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Style 1" %}

<figure><img src="/files/yu2cN7GBRQk5XvCn78Rl" alt=""><figcaption><p>Classic Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 2" %}

<figure><img src="/files/jbvcNULIu0AkxjL2j79p" alt=""><figcaption><p>Price Accent Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 3" %}

<figure><img src="/files/gSahpmuiLJI5jdexdRa5" alt=""><figcaption><p>Price Button Style</p></figcaption></figure>

{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 4" %}

<figure><img src="/files/rRYtZwcog27GfzWjTo9b" alt=""><figcaption><p>Full-Size Image Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 5" %}

<figure><img src="/files/bmDivQPOix0Q5kJBFcxm" alt=""><figcaption><p>Centered Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 6" %}

<figure><img src="/files/elbYfOxC0K0be9LVpHc0" alt=""><figcaption><p>Info Accent Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

{% hint style="info" %}
To display instructors with their courses, instructors' registration should be enabled in LMS settings.
{% endhint %}

#### **Courses archive**

The Archive type of Courses widget displays all available courses on the site. Search results, load more buttons of the Course Grid, and course carousel widgets will be redirected to this page.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Style 1" %}

<figure><img src="/files/CGI1t52jtiMAXLtQhC6U" alt=""><figcaption><p>Classic Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 2" %}

<figure><img src="/files/ACLONpf7eW6jwBCw5sL2" alt=""><figcaption><p>Price Accent Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 3" %}

<figure><img src="/files/9K968qpeiszeLKw7WIaH" alt=""><figcaption><p>Price Button Style</p></figcaption></figure>

{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 4" %}

<figure><img src="/files/Um28L7JlFHMaIGBps6ZY" alt=""><figcaption><p>Full-Size Image Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 5" %}

<figure><img src="/files/QkelNuhfTAcUYEWmrk8Z" alt=""><figcaption><p>Centered Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 6" %}

<figure><img src="/files/Qkm3m9nqG0r1aH4Rsfzu" alt=""><figcaption><p>Info Accent Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

{% hint style="warning" %}
The 'Archive' type should be used only once on the website and the page should be set as an archive page in MS LMS > LMS settings > Courses section.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/9Ohi15Q1usPlEP6IASWm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MESMQEXiJ8THXL7bcTi" %}
[Courses](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/courses)
{% endcontent-ref %}

In the Courses Widget settings, you have the option to modify the filter's position or disable it entirely.

<figure><img src="/files/4eUrTk0RnzH7y4HboSns" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Instructors Carousel (Elementor)

Instructors Carousel widget is available for only Elementor Page builder and displays the users with Instructor user roles on the Website with their social links, number of courses, reviews, and overall ratings in Slider view. The widget has the following presets and they can be easily customized:

* Style 1 - Profile Picture Rounded
* Style 2 - Profile Picture Rounded Dark
* Style 3 - Bordered Card
* Style 4 - Squared Profile Picture
* Style 5 - Bordered Squared
* Style 6 - Profile Picture Above Container

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Style 1" %}

<figure><img src="/files/qV8X2BTrK3NOnTeQuhAY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 2" %}

<figure><img src="/files/XrPjEEVTz7T3p8HW69JO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 3" %}

<figure><img src="/files/kxBxOMCURVUo3UOSDTPP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 4" %}

<figure><img src="/files/JJFCB3GCpe1O1aVJaTXB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 5" %}

<figure><img src="/files/pQbezCCbisCkck7vm2XD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 6" %}

<figure><img src="/files/x4tMSLUqN3qHYd1BeXHL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

In carousel settings, AutoPay and Loop can be enabled:

<figure><img src="/files/PYbCC01pOOxMCTHJSDIK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Authorization Form (Elementor)

You can add a customizable **Sign Up** or **Login** form to your site with the Authorization Form widget for Elementor.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/YluTZntZpsIAqN602uKc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here you can choose the type of form to add:

<figure><img src="/files/XfmYiLA0lUQi8xbwBPtU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **General Form:** For all users.
* **For Instructors Only:** Tailored to instructors.

And also set the starting form to be Sign up or Login.

<figure><img src="/files/VmEkJlVNFF5hNDGwvJVZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Testimonials (Elementor)

The Testimonials widget is used to display customer testimonial information. It is useful to show prospective customers what other people are saying about your teaching platform.

<figure><img src="/files/X4FQiDEmhEoI703QH8MI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Site Authorization Links (Elementor)

The Site Authorization Links widget is used to add a login/register button to the custom header that is created with Elementor Header & Footer builder plugin:

{% embed url="<https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/masterstudy-lms-starter-theme/blocks-and-content/header>" %}

This widget performs two tasks for Logged in and Guest users differently:&#x20;

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Guest Users" %}

<figure><img src="/files/3gPzPhppPQtVwDJExCTY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Logged In Users" %}

<figure><img src="/files/EbeOo9o4J0MQYvEfTiOB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Featured Teacher

The featured Teacher widget highlights one of the users with Instructor user roles on the website with the courses.

<figure><img src="/files/kdz93m7UJ3CRwbuczWJu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Instructors Carousel

Instructors Carousel widget displays the users with Instructor user roles on the Website with their social links in slider view.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/oiKmFDTBDHHSnZr85xEJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The widget has two style presets:

* Profile Picture Rounded
* Profile Picture Square

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Profile Picture Rounded" %}

<figure><img src="/files/xBIFUv6Zb61eMthp9426" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

View all button lead to the Instructors archive page that was set in the [LMS settings](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/profiles#instructors-archive-page).
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Profile Picture Square" %}

<figure><img src="/files/pnoUZ8DJpVZ9qkP1B7BF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

The instructors can be sorted by their ratings or registration date.

### Single Course Carousel

The single Course Carousel widget displays the available courses in the slider. Each slide of the carousel includes single course information including price, category, level, and curse duration.

<figure><img src="/files/AKptbPUxTgYwQxjdqSp1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The courses on the carousel can be sorted by:

* Course Popularity
* Free Courses
* Courses Rating

<figure><img src="/files/hX4dpj9r9pgMMiaSowo3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Courses Search box

The courses Search box widget can be used to search Courses within a website by keywords. The Search results will be displayed on the [Courses archive page](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/courses).&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/LxqJYvMkA5rHRAVx37P3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The widget has two style presets and includes search suggestions:

* Search box wide
* Search box with a button

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Search box wide" %}

<figure><img src="/files/ltra2wIbv5kx16LDxdKJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Search box with button" %}

<figure><img src="/files/iWBHIMz9sqrcIPKPMA5L" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Courses Carousel

Courses Carousel widget displays courses on the website in carousel view.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/E2N8RU5RRJCXr7ESxvHm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The widget has two style presets and courses can be sorted by Course Popularity, Free Courses, and Courses Rating:

* Carousel with Course categories
* Carousel without Course categories

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Carousel with Course categories" %}

<figure><img src="/files/1YH37KCHhnEm4vFLaEpZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The View all button opens all courses in the [Courses archive page](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/courses).&#x20;
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Carousel without Course categories" %}

<figure><img src="/files/y1qlr2krOBTpqm4GBCWa" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The View All button opens all courses on the [Courses archive page](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/courses).&#x20;
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Courses Categories

Courses Categories widget is used to display the categories and sort courses by them. The widget has six styles presets:

* Style 1 - Category cards with the label below
* Style 2 - Category cards with label inside
* Style 3 - Category buttons
* Style 4 - Category colorful cards
* Style 5 - Category cards with images
* Style 6 - Category colorful cards wide&#x20;

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Style 1" %}

<figure><img src="/files/lyDVGRt10mnh3S8NICX9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 2" %}

<figure><img src="/files/QFUh4mPVaxtV8mrWZN52" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 3" %}

<figure><img src="/files/bmNremu5sm8IppioBCGX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 4" %}

<figure><img src="/files/y5G2XbFAI2syDATqKJCU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 5" %}

<figure><img src="/files/F1a7iYdtVaJg0iS8TguN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 6" %}

<figure><img src="/files/epzEw7rs4vV2qSNCIxlW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Courses Grid

The Courses Grid widget is used to display the available courses in Grid View. In widget settings, the Sort filter and Load more buttons can be disabled:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Default" %}

<figure><img src="/files/L2zaVGQP6rdFnkHJKBPq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Sort filter hidden" %}

<figure><img src="/files/AO2nWzfE5U7oIXdewIvc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Load more button hidden " %}

<figure><img src="/files/799uelKiHYoDgHRI9Wzd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Sort filter & Load more hidden" %}

<figure><img src="/files/OOLuucbvWHSdEpMHHx7G" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Recent Courses

The Recent Courses widget displays the latest created courses with their categories. The widget has the following style presets:

* Style 1 - Recent courses with Show More button
* Style 2 - Recent courses without Show More button
* Style 3 - Course Categories with transparent buttons

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Style 1" %}

<figure><img src="/files/5v3MDyjXJR8tfYiOWtuP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 2" %}

<figure><img src="/files/6Q10DJR4Zt89QJfJ5prT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 3" %}

<figure><img src="/files/T9b9i5dwVrfAyYY73z3C" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Certificate Checker (Pro version)

The Certificate Checker widget is used to validate certificates with Student's code which can be copied in the User account > Certificates section:

<figure><img src="/files/Mz87MIs3yB808S65irVR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

If the certificate is valid the following message appears:

<figure><img src="/files/Vo6sAEuPKbCusbNC7s2e" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Course Bundles (Pro version)

Course Bundles widget displays [bundled courses ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/course-bundles)of the Instructors:

<figure><img src="/files/YHyUW3fXGJYqAbl8qsry" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Google Classrooms (Pro version)

The Google Classrooms widget displays courses that were imported from Google using [Google Classroom](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/google-classroom) API.

<figure><img src="/files/xk8FtVhxY7m4Nm2k8B3k" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Gutenberg Blocks

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Kdxz5KZSsFc>" %}

Our LMS plugin seamlessly integrates with [**Gutenberg**](https://wordpress.org/gutenberg/)**,** the modern WordPress block editor, to provide a user-friendly and flexible content creation experience. With our custom Gutenberg blocks, you can effortlessly enhance your site with dynamic and interactive elements tailored to your e-learning platform. These blocks allow you to showcase courses, feature instructors, and create engaging course navigation, all within the intuitive Gutenberg interface. This integration ensures that you can build and manage your educational content with ease and precision, leveraging the full power of WordPress's latest editing capabilities.&#x20;

## How to Use MasterStudy Gutenberg Blocks?

### Adding MasterStudy Blocks

On the **Gutenberg editor** press the '+' button to add blocks:

<figure><img src="/files/tGCEDLSpiz7PLjR0aSxe" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

In the Blocks tab, you can see the available blocks to use. Find MasterStudy Blocks:

<figure><img src="/files/4ak0XuT3jtDMTb4uBxNU" alt=""><figcaption><p>MasterStudy LMS Gutenberg Blocks</p></figcaption></figure>

After adding blocks there are four types of settings you can play:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Visual Editor" %}
You can set the available presets and styles just in the visual editor part of the Gutenberg. For example here is how Visual Editor shows when you add Courses Grid:

<figure><img src="/files/rHBpzd9yHNv1CrQTmFJ3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Block Settings: General" %}
When you select the block on the **right sideba**r there will be page and block settings (preferences). In the general tab, you can change the texts inside of the block and modify other behavioral settings:

<figure><img src="/files/OwwZ8IvTZx25AHZtX1XR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Block Settings: Style " %}
In the **Style section** of the block, you can modify the look of all elements (cards, containers, buttons) that have been used to construct the block:

<figure><img src="/files/1MtgmVm6w17ZhXybc29L" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Block Settings: Advanced" %}
In the **Advanced tab** of the Block Settings, you can set the HTML Anchor tag, Additional CSS, and some other advanced settings:

<figure><img src="/files/uZ54r10o3Z1yD6Tlylkh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

{% hint style="success" %}
We see **Visual Editor** and **Block Settings: General** preferences of our blocks, as other settings are default and **almost the same** for all Gutenberg Blocks
{% endhint %}

### Enabling MasterStudy Blocks

If you **cannot find** them among the available blocks, open the **editor preferences**:

<figure><img src="/files/cxYX6s5F4FSDThn7mPFu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Move to the **Blocks tab** and enable **all MasterStudy Blocks:**

<figure><img src="/files/iALFG67t5m3OhRcNrczS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## MasterStudy Blocks

### Featured Teacher

The **MasterStudy** **Featured Teacher** block highlights an instructor on your site with better progress than others. You can showcase the instructor's profile, including their biography, the courses they teach, and any relevant achievements. This block helps to promote instructors and provide students with insights into their expertise and teaching style.

<figure><img src="/files/rIxzjb56ORMqqpbeyiCc" alt=""><figcaption><p>Featured Teacher</p></figcaption></figure>

#### Block Parameters

In the **Visual Editor,** you have to indicate a special picture to indicate the instructor and select the course card style:

<figure><img src="/files/AsQ3zbe2RG3mr9WW8i4R" alt=""><figcaption><p>MasterStudy Featured Teacher</p></figcaption></figure>

In the Block Settings you can change:

<div><figure><img src="/files/TPF4rjiI4WhQm6m4r4yX" alt=""><figcaption><p>General Tab of the Block Settings</p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/Tx7raJs1tP0vRrOA4OTW" alt=""><figcaption><p>(continued) General Tab of the Block Settings</p></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Courses Per Page** - indicate the number of courses of the instructor that have been displayed in the block
* **Courses Per Row** - indicate the number of courses per row
* **Instructor** - you can choose the specific instructor using it
* **Sort By** - use this setting to sort the courses of the courses
* **Course Category** - using it you can display only the courses of the specific category
* **Label** - using the toggle you can enable/disable the label 'Teacher of the Month'
* **Label Text** - indicate the text for the label
* **Position** - enable the toggle to display the position of the instructor
* **Biography** - enable the toggle to display the biography of the instructor
* **View All Button** - enable the toggle to display the special button that opens all courses of the instructor
* **Button text** - indicate the text of the View all Button
* **Button URL** - you can also indicate a specific URL to this button according to your needs

### Courses Grid

The **MasterStudy** **Courses Grid** block enables you to display a grid of courses on your site. It allows for customizable layout options to showcase your courses, including filtering by category, popularity, or rating. This block is perfect for presenting a detailed view of your course offerings, helping students easily find and choose courses that suit their interests.

<figure><img src="/files/83f3CxExLHGZkGWPKD9n" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Block Parameters

In the **Visual Editor** you can select the **Course Card Style** and change the text **'Courses Grid':**

<figure><img src="/files/rbP9OJL5X2jQyYKZi8bu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is the look of the course card presets on the front:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Classic" %}

<figure><img src="/files/O59TAlGivaXqNFeFqh3T" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Price Accent" %}

<figure><img src="/files/b4uCeAL2FHf5G7tiim5v" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Price Button" %}

<figure><img src="/files/qca6QGaTBrtFj9qDahV1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Full Size Image" %}

<figure><img src="/files/ht1WOPmW9SCpIa86YZ7i" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

In the Block Settings you can change the following:

**Layout:**

<figure><img src="/files/OlHbHSWn2uBgiiirMAiT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Courses Per Page** - indicate the number of courses per page
* **Courses Per Row** - indicate the number of courses per row. You can use the icon to select for mobile and tablet views as well.
* **Sort By** - choose the method to sort the courses that need to be displayed
* **Course Category** - choose the specific categories to display

#### Filter  (by taxonomy)

<figure><img src="/files/WD1HnBHZ76NaUm92G249" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

If you select the filter, you will get the following block settings:

<figure><img src="/files/KCe7BZOTDUsilaJ8rOmF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Filter by taxonomy** - disable it to hide the filter
* **Filter** - choose the style to display the filter:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Buttons" %}

<figure><img src="/files/WD1HnBHZ76NaUm92G249" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Tabs" %}

<figure><img src="/files/Qv5tZoWmONhoQAiNOusC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Select" %}

<figure><img src="/files/O7pqg7w8kFXNIw3R9CZq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

* **Options** - select the options to display. Available options are **Newest, Oldest, Popular, Overall rating, Price low, and Price high.**
* **Filter Position -** select the position of the filter: left, center, right.

#### Filter by Course Category

<figure><img src="/files/r6WDdevMBSF8WGCJ1pD6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Parameters are the same as [**Filter by Taxonomy.**](#filter-by-taxonomy)

#### Course Card

<figure><img src="/files/5kywJmoUgT2ZR6ldsMF7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Available **Block settings** for the **Course Card:**

<div><figure><img src="/files/vHjvENkHykJZG7AJUjEe" alt=""><figcaption><p>Course Card Block Settings</p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/iYJ1fZVGxMdqPLLSDSAm" alt=""><figcaption><p>(continued) Course Card Block Settings</p></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Card Preset** - select the one of the presets
* **Space between Cards** - indicate the space between cards in pixels
* **Card Items** - modify the items that have been displayed on the card. Use the hamburger icon (on the left side) you can change their orders.
  * **Rating** - inserts the rating of the course (with stars)
  * **Category** - inserts the category of the course
  * **Title** - inserts the title of the course
  * **Dataslots** - inserts a special division that consists of two data slots to add more data. Available data are **Views, Lectures, Duration, Leve,l Members,** and **Empty.**
  * **Divider** - inserts a divider (horizontal row) into the card
* **Featured Label Position** - choose the position of the featured label
* **Status Style** - select the style to display the status of the course
* **Status Position** - select the position of the status of the course

There is also a **Load More button** which can be **positioned** and **displayed** at the bottom of the course grid according to your needs.

<figure><img src="/files/ZNwbsHmlvLD3Fv7IMU7b" alt=""><figcaption><p>Load More Button</p></figcaption></figure>

### Courses Categories

The **MasterStudy Courses Categories** block provides an organized list or grid of course categories. Users can easily browse different categories to find courses that match their interests. This block helps in structuring your course offerings and improving user navigation.

<figure><img src="/files/fBoHZKnIuwGviYRi1lBt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Block Parameters

Available options in the **BlockSettings**:

<figure><img src="/files/nnenWx5iHTEidr2dJE72" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Presets** - select the preset according to your needs

{% hint style="warning" %}
Do not forget to indicate **special images and colors** for the [**Course Categories**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/courses-category)! Without them, you **will not get** the result you wanted in presets **Colorful, Sleek, Dynamic,** and **Dynamic with Title Below.**
{% endhint %}

* **Select Taxonomy** - the setting gives you the availability to display several categories only
* **Categories Per Row** - indicate the number of categories per row
* **Wrap** - disable the toggle to get a horizontal scroll of the categories. They will be displayed in a row.
* **Align Content** - choose the alignment

### Courses Archive

The MasterStudy **Courses Archive** block enables you to display a list or grid of all archived courses. This block is useful for keeping your site organized by providing a dedicated space for courses that are no longer actively running but are still accessible for reference or self-paced learning. Archive Pages can be specified in the **MasterStudy LMS Settings > Courses > Page Layout > Courses Page.** Learn More about the Archive Page:

{% embed url="<https://stylemixthemes.com/wp/what-is-a-wordpress-archive-page/>" %}

<figure><img src="/files/nHSe8YVZNZ8fsBwcG9So" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Block Parameters

In the **Visual Editor** choose the Course Card preset and indicate the text 'Courses Archive':

<figure><img src="/files/OapjqJFv8up4YeEcf31n" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

In the Block settings you can modify the layout parameters:

<figure><img src="/files/df5jIlGapLL0XHtOjamI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Courses Per Page** - indicate the number of courses of the instructor that have been displayed in the block
* **Courses Per Row** - indicate the number of courses per row

{% hint style="info" %}
Courses Archive block is constructed using **Courses Filter Columns**[**,**](#courses-categories) [**Course Card**](#course-card)**,** and [**a Filter by Taxonomy**](#filter-by-taxonomy). You can click on them and modify their settings according to your needs.
{% endhint %}

### Courses Carousel

The **Courses Carousel** block presents courses in a dynamic, sliding carousel format. You can highlight featured courses, new releases, or popular courses in a visually engaging way. This block is perfect for drawing attention to specific courses and encouraging user interaction.

<figure><img src="/files/WejLUg8WC19KKVhNwPPt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Block Parameters

In the **Visual Editor** of Gutenberg, you have to select the **card style preset** and change the **'Course Carousel'** text:

<figure><img src="/files/jIFihgKDcjyj3QN7yMEB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The available parameters in the Block Settings:

<figure><img src="/files/AczbKM4LiRLSUKtwYmDA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Layout**

* **Slides To Show** - indicate the number of courses that need to be displayed in the carousel
* **Slides in Carousel** - indicate the number of courses in the carousel
* **Sort By** - choose the method to sort the courses
* **Course Category** - choose the course categories that the courses need to be displayed
* **Autoplay** - enable the toggle to turn on the autoplay of the carousel so slides (courses) in it will change without pressing the navigation buttons
* **Loop** - enable the toggle to create a loop of slides so that once you reach the end of courses it will display the first one again&#x20;
* **Nav Arrows Position** - choose the position of the arrows in the navigation buttons&#x20;

### Courses Bundles

The **MasterStudy** **Courses Bundles** block allows you to display groups of related courses that are offered together as a bundle. This block is ideal for promoting bundled course packages, offering students a comprehensive learning path often at a discounted rate.

{% content-ref url="/pages/-Mdeou0Ajpnxd6JML4Hw" %}
[Course Bundles](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/course-bundles)
{% endcontent-ref %}

<figure><img src="/files/yW6jvRxTDwLIzMkbJGA6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Block Parameters

Available parameters in the Block Settings:

<figure><img src="/files/XpLlCWJBb30yov8USROw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Layout**

* **Number of bundles** - indicate the number of bundles that will be displayed on a page
* **Bundles per Row** - indicate the number of bundles per row
* **Select Bundles** - choose the bundles that will be displayed (or do not select to display all)
* **Order by** - select the method to order bundles
* **Alignment** - choose the alignment of the block

### Courses Search

The **MasterStudy** **Courses Search** block adds a search bar that allows users to quickly find courses by keywords. This block enhances the user experience by efficiently locating specific courses, making it easier for students to find exactly what they are looking for.

<figure><img src="/files/6l2IJXSwFAsIW7c1J7jz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Block Parameters

Available parameters in the Block Settings:

<figure><img src="/files/LCARX7v7dDC5ALbPQWqz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Layout**

* **Presets** - select the preset to display the search bar&#x20;
* **Categories** - enable the toggle to add categories dropdown to the search bar so users can search the courses only in the course category that they selected.

### Testimonials

The **Testimonials** block lets you display student or instructor testimonials on your site. You can showcase feedback and reviews in a visually appealing format, helping to build credibility and trust with prospective students. This block is perfect for highlighting positive experiences and success stories related to your courses and instructors.

<figure><img src="/files/UxvIUhDDEQqMtf8QKoAt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Block Parameters

In the **Visual Editor** add the **title, testimonial text,** and **the name** of the person who left those words:

<figure><img src="/files/ly9lmNH2FQudTuwURUeW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The available preferences in the **Block Settings:**

<figure><img src="/files/9jSIC5otZcgl9i6rw3yN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Testimonial Slide

* **New Slide**
  * **Add Slide -** adds a new testimonial slide

<figure><img src="/files/vRX8F911zHNmnJ6kiwE0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Colors** - choose the colors for the elements respectively

<figure><img src="/files/nFft2mj9G1mdDHLiuinK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Current Slide** - in this tab you can select the image for the current slide of the testimonial

<figure><img src="/files/gzNFazRjNpcAG78OXH9N" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Instructor Carousel

The **Instructor Carousel** block presents your instructors in a dynamic, sliding carousel format. You can highlight featured instructors, new additions, or popular teachers engagingly. This block helps to draw attention to your teaching staff and provides students with insights into the expertise available on your platform.

<figure><img src="/files/JDYMxVTsmNkYFnm4hr7V" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Block Parameters**

The available preferences in the **Block Settings:**

**Layout**

<figure><img src="/files/grxinhP7zqG4iFBLyoeq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Slides to Show** - indicate the number of slides to display
* **Slides in Carousel** - indicate the number of instructors that will be in the carousel
* **Order by** - choose the method to order instructors in the carousel
* **Instructors** - you can select the instructors to display manually
* **Autoplay** - enable the toggle to change the slides within the predefined time
* **Loop** - enable the toggle to change the slides in a loop, ensuring continuous and smooth transitions between instructors
* **Navigation** - enable the toggle to display navigation buttons (arrows)
* **Nav Arrows Position** - choose the position of the navigation buttons

#### **Instructor Card**

<figure><img src="/files/nYalbtZdtp5WrU9RbLfZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Presets** - choose the preset for the instructor's card
* **Position** - enable the toggle to display the position of the instructor (info will be inherited from the instructor profile, e.g: Lead Instructor, Professor of BA)
* **Biography** - enable the toggle to display the biography of the instructor (info will be inherited from the instructor profile)
* **Rating** - enable the toggle to display the rating of the instructor. Rating will be calculator automatically by the LMS
* **Rating Style** - choose the style to display the rating
* **Card Content Alignment** - select the alignment of the card contents
* **Show Socials** - enable the toggle to display the social accounts of the instructors

### Instructors Grid

The **Instructors Grid** block allows you to display a grid of instructors on your site. You can customize the layout to showcase various instructors. This block is ideal for presenting a comprehensive view of your teaching staff in an organized and visually appealing manner.

<figure><img src="/files/Mfkv9Uu9494oE8fGuytL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Block Parameters**

The available preferences in the **Block Settings:**

#### **Grid**&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/Dy8EAtGDnF6WJ4iFkatH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Instructors Per Page** - indicate the number of instructors to display in the grid
* **Instructors Per Row** - indicate the number of instructors to display in a row
* **Order By** - select a method to order instructors on the grid
* **Instructors** - you can choose the instructors to display on the grid manually

#### **Instructor Card**

<figure><img src="/files/nYalbtZdtp5WrU9RbLfZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Presets** - choose the preset for the instructor's card
* **Position** - enable the toggle to display the position of the instructor (info will be inherited from the instructor profile, e.g: Lead Instructor, Professor of BA)
* **Biography** - enable the toggle to display the biography of the instructor (info will be inherited from the instructor profile)
* **Rating** - enable the toggle to display the rating of the instructor. Rating will be calculator automatically by the LMS
* **Rating Style** - choose the style to display the rating
* **Card Content Alignment** - select the alignment of the card contents
* **Show Socials** - enable the toggle to display the social accounts of the instructors


# License Utilization

## Using One License for Live / Production, Staging, Dev, and Localhost Sites

The number of licenses purchased equals the number of sites where you can use them. Furthermore, in addition to each paid license, you can utilize one free license for development purposes. This free license is automatically available after the purchase.&#x20;

In practice, this means that localhost, staging, and development environments will not count towards the maximum resolution of licensed sites if their domain name is clearly a development or staging site.

### Top-Level domains that are considered as dev or staging:

* `*.dev`
* `*.dev.cc` (DesktopServer)
* `*.test`
* `*.local`
* `*.staging`
* `*.example`
* `*.invalid`
* `*.myftpupload.com` (GoDaddy)
* `*.cloudwaysapps.com` (Cloudways)
* `*.wpsandbox.pro` (WPSandbox)
* `*.ngrok.io` (tunneling)

### Subdomains that are considered as dev or staging:

* `local.*`
* `dev.*`
* `test.*`
* `stage.*`
* `staging.*`
* `stagingN.*` (SiteGround; `N` is an unsigned int)
* `*.wpengine.com` (WP Engine)
* `dev-*.pantheonsite.io` (Pantheon)
* `test-*.pantheonsite.io` (Pantheon)
* `staging-*.kinsta.com` (Kinsta)
* `staging-*.kinsta.cloud` (Kinsta)
* `*.mystagingwebsite.com'` (Pressable)

{% hint style="info" %}
Additionally, if your domain is `localhost` (with any port), it will also be treated as a localhost domain.
{% endhint %}

If you want to utilize a license on a dev site that doesn’t fit the criteria listed above you can deactivate the license from within the Account page in WP Admin dashboard, and then reuse the license.

## Multisite Network License Utilization

Each subdomain of the multisite counts as a separate site. Therefore, if, for example, you would like to activate a license for a 20-subsite network, you will need to purchase a license that can be activated on at least 20 sites, or multiple licenses whose combined activations limit is 20 or more. If there is a license for only one site, you can use only one subdomain of the multisite.

## License Synchronization

Sometimes, a user cannot activate a license on intermediate domains, even though [they are listed](https://stylemixthemes.com/account/#!/websites).

<figure><img src="/files/aQjF8uwvMvtDzXhGFSKt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

If it happens, a license needs to be synchronized by following **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Account**:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/ph3Wepr5DhWdxVQrMPWw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Fueature Request

You can influence the **MasterStudy LMS roadmap** by taking part in our [**Vote for Next Feature**](https://stylemixthemes.cnflx.io/boards/masterstudy-lms).

On any backend page of MasterStudy LMS, you will find a small round button in the bottom right corner. Clicking this button will take you to the MasterStudy Feature Request Page:

<figure><img src="/files/pPu5L1OxeUzI67VMsdc3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The features with the most votes will be preferred on the plugin development roadmap.

<figure><img src="/files/3NPQ8Td4sailUkmFO8MS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
By studying the statistics, we can conclude how many customers like you and how much they need this feature. We respect the wishes of our customers and try to make them a reality.
{% endhint %}


# General

The General Settings tab is where you can set up different general settings for your website. These settings affect the overall appearance and functionality of your site.

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=428s&v=BJlw10yJBv0>" %}

Here's an overview of the options available in the General tab:

<figure><img src="/files/eNiqjstNQ4ByiJ5WeHOy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Main color** - Set the core website color.
* **Secondary color** - Set the secondary color for the site.
* **Base colors** - These colors will be applied to [Course Player](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/course-player) pages, Authorization pages and popups.
  * **Accent** - Choose the color that will be applied to the buttons, quiz info and chosen options, progress bar, notice background, links and Trial course badge in the Course Player.
  * **Danger -** Choose the color that will be applied to the fields when they are required and not filled, the wrong options chosen in quizzes and the notification for the failed quizzes and assignments.
  * **Success -** Choose the color that will be applied to the wrong options chosen in quizzes and the notification for the passed quizzes and assignments.
* **Logo Upload -** here you can upload the image to use on the [**order print page**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/orders). This setting is a part of the order system. Note that this is not the place where you indicate your site logo.&#x20;
* **Number of featured courses** - Set how many courses will be shown as a featured product.
* **Restrict instructors from accessing the admin panel** - Enable this to restrict access for instructors to the admin panel. They will be redirected to their account pages.
* **Course Builder Font Family** - in this section, you can set the font family that will be used in [**Course Builder**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder).
  * **Font Family** - choose the necessary font family. Under the setting, there is a special **preview field** that you can use to check how the font family looks.&#x20;
* **Loading animation** - Adds loading animation for LMS pages and sections:

<figure><img src="/files/AiEd7tqc9yQsR1lUde3c" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Courses

The **Courses** tab allows you to have fine-grained control over how your courses are displayed and how they appear on your website.

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=600s&v=BJlw10yJBv0>" %}

## Courses Page for Elementor and Gutenberg

The MasterStudy LMS Courses Page can be created using two ways:

* **via MasterStudy LMS Plugin** - in this case, you have to[ indicate](#page-layout) an empty page as a Courses Page in the designated area. MasterStudy Plugin automatically generates it for you without any page builders.
* **via MS LMS Widgets for Page Builders** ([**Elementor,**](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets) [**Gutenberg**](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets/gutenberg-blocks), WP Bakery, etc) - pages can be constructed manually via special widgets of **MasterStudy** for these page builders. If you are using [**MasterStudy Starter Theme**](broken://spaces/1zK0RmXv45tSDVjxKB9X) or generated pages via [**LMS Wizard**](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-wizard), they have already been in your pages list as *Courses Page (for Elementor)* and *Courses Page (for Gutenberg)*.

{% hint style="danger" %} <mark style="color:red;">**IMPORTANT**</mark>\
The settings of this tab will apply to the [selected **Courses Page**](#page-layout) only. If you indicate the page constructed with **Elementor** or **Gutenberg**, these changes **will NOT be applied to them!**
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="success" %}
The look of the Courses page created using [**Elementor** ](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets)and [**Gutenberg**](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets/gutenberg-blocks#courses-grid) can be changed within these page builders.
{% endhint %}

The difference in the look of Courses Pages:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="via MS LMS Plugin" %}

<figure><img src="/files/3Yj8kYtbdw0wAp2EJpiG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="via MS LMS Elementor Widget" %}

<figure><img src="/files/TtUS58EkSen12W0q5g2q" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="via MS LMS Gutenberg Blocks" %}

<figure><img src="/files/YDBejih6qWJsEQ3AHmVg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

## Overview of the Courses tab

Here's an overview of the settings you can manage under the **MasterStudy LMS Settings** **> Courses** tab:

<figure><img src="/files/sz2XTlJWVycDBWTE3G6d" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Import demo courses** - When you click Start Import, all demo courses, questions, quizzes, and lessons will be uploaded to the site.

<figure><img src="/files/PsmczLTuRLpOXTzWqjaC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Page Layout

<figure><img src="/files/Akv5FH7YwFBKh2DgaOl4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Courses Page** - Choose the main page where all courses will be displayed.
* **Courses Page Layout** - Choose the layout for the courses page: **Grid** or **List.**
* **Courses per page** - Set the number of courses to display on one page.
* **Сourses per row** - Set the number of courses to show per row.
* **Load more types** - Choose how to load more courses. Available options are **Button** and **Infinite Scrolling.**

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Courses as Grid" %}

<figure><img src="/files/v2fiIUdyLWdhGsvshdVd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Courses as List" %}

<figure><img src="/files/gZQi40OnUftgX1eUw0Ks" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Load more as Button" %}

<figure><img src="/files/NAe0SwJ3BL8OnnsOVeFj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Load more as Infinite Scrolling" %}

<figure><img src="/files/Cv6qGds89Bc0yyxlyAWQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

## Course Card

<figure><img src="/files/Z6IrVppUxundbJBseer1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Course Card Style** - Select the display style for the course card.
* **Course Card Info** - Specify where to place the course card info: right or center.
* **Courses Image Size** - Enter the size for the course image.

{% hint style="warning" %}
From version 3.0.24 of the MasterStudy LMS plugin, these settings apply only to the Archive page of courses. WPBakery and Elementor users can now configure course card settings directly within [**LMS widgets**](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets). You can customize and change container heights and image sizes for cards.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
The look of **Course Cards** differs by page builder: [**Gutenberg**](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets/gutenberg-blocks#course-card)**,** [**Elementor**](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-wizard#step-3)**, or WPBakery.** You can compare them and choose the convenient page builder for yourself.
{% endhint %}

**Let's compare Course Card Styles:**&#x20;

{% tabs %}
{% tab title=" Default " %}

<figure><img src="/files/4P1iNee0vnercLlDqXMU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Price on hover" %}

<figure><img src="/files/DmLBfTpaONwqqmXaeU1w" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Scale on hover" %}

<figure><img src="/files/ZxHhpv3GUhpmBrtOIIqY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

## Lazy Loading, Category Slug, Featured Courses&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/3mGJrqeA17lGxp7u6eJz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Lazy loading -** Enable this if you want to load certain parts of a webpage, such as images until users need them. This can speed up page load times.
* **Category slug** - Put a unique slug to show in the URL before the [**courses category**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/courses-category), e.g. <https://example.com/blog/><mark style="color:green;">course-category</mark>/<mark style="color:yellow;">templates</mark> (<mark style="color:green;">course-category</mark> - **slug**, <mark style="color:yellow;">templates</mark>- **category**).
* **Show featured courses on top of the list page** - This option displays **featured courses** on the top of the course list page.
* **Number of featured courses on the Archive page** - Specify the number of featured courses to display on the **Archive Page**

<figure><img src="/files/8E8xPmN22NNWCQDH29tO" alt=""><figcaption><p>Featured Courses on the top of the Courses Page</p></figcaption></figure>

## Filters on the Archive Page

<figure><img src="/files/V20MjNOgf7MemiW6Tou5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Filters on the Archive page** - Enable course filtering by categories, there are 7+1 filters available that you can enable according to your needs. Available options are:
  * **Category** - filter by [course categories](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/courses-category)
  * **Subcategory** - filter by course subcategory
  * **Levels** - filter by course levels
  * **Rating** - filter by course rating
  * **Status** - filter by course status
  * **Instructor** - filter by the instructor
  * **Price** - filter by price
  * **Availability** - filter by course availability. This filter will be available if the [**Upcoming Course Status** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/upcoming-course-status)addon is enabled.

With these options, users can use the sidebar on the course listing page and filter the browsing depending on the chosen category. Every time they apply the filter they do not need to reload the page, every change displays instantly.

<figure><img src="/files/LPggi0LABIs9toBuzvrR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Please note when the filters are enabled, the number of courses per row will be **3** by default to ensure the **best look.**
{% endhint %}


# Course

The **Course** tab provides you with options to customize the appearance and functionality of your courses and lessons, as well as manage certain instructor activities on your e-learning platform.&#x20;

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=830s&v=BJlw10yJBv0>" %}

Here's an overview of the settings available under the **Course** tab:

<figure><img src="/files/sBM5h1NeafpA4JZK05qv" alt=""><figcaption><p>Overview of the Course Tab</p></figcaption></figure>

## Course Page Styles

<figure><img src="/files/CSRHSvNkYQe6qT1SsvIm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

As the course page is a key element that attracts students to enroll in your course, MasterStudy offers several beautiful styles for the course page to enhance its visual appeal.

You can select one of the **Native Templates** or create your own using **MasterStudy Course Widgets** for Elementor. Here are the available Advanced **Customizable Course Page Templates built with Elementor:**

<table data-view="cards" data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Masterclass</strong></td><td><a href="/files/DsHlvEigb1noVBvc85MO">/files/DsHlvEigb1noVBvc85MO</a></td><td><a href="https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/?course_style=masterclass-2">https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/?course_style=masterclass-2</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Minimalism</strong></td><td><a href="/files/BmeVztvMqLLo5xYbCQTZ">/files/BmeVztvMqLLo5xYbCQTZ</a></td><td><a href="https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/minimalism/?course_style=minimalism-3">https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/minimalism/?course_style=minimalism-3</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Streamline</strong></td><td><a href="/files/2HajTjK0LWjBGedridlT">/files/2HajTjK0LWjBGedridlT</a></td><td><a href="https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/fashion-photography-from-professional/?course_style=streamline-3">https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/fashion-photography-from-professional/?course_style=streamline-3</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

This is the list of **Native Templates:**

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Style 1" %}

### Default

The [Default](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/) course style presents a balanced and user-friendly layout, designed to streamline navigation and deliver course content with clarity and accessibility

<figure><img src="/files/4uzZp7YUpeRXoT2978VK" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Default Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 2" %}

### Classic

The [Classic ](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=classic)course style offers a clean and straightforward layout for easy navigation and a clear presentation of course content.

<figure><img src="/files/51ivplAQFYGOu3KUdeiu" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Classic Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 3 " %}

### Industrial

The [Industrial](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=modern) course page style features a modern and dynamic layout, tailored to accommodate complex course structures and engage learners with its visually immersive design.

<figure><img src="/files/CgLlpPE4pGTBtZXUbgxR" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Industrial Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 4" %}

### Timeless

The [Timeless](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=timeless) course style embodies a classic and elegant layout, offering a timeless appeal that prioritizes simplicity and ease of use, ensuring an enduringly enjoyable learning experience.

<figure><img src="/files/xktjsYW7Ano6FeORPu5T" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Timeless Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 5" %}

### Sleek with Sidebar

The [Sleek Sidebar](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=sleek-sidebar) course style showcases a contemporary design with a distinctive sticky sidebar feature, enhancing user experience with convenient navigation placed beneath it, providing easy access to course materials and resources.

<figure><img src="/files/LbsP6K1iktxsHVrwspul" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Sleek Sidebar Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 6" %}

### Minimalistic

The[ Minimalistic](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=minimalistic) course style offers a clean and uncluttered design, focusing on essential course elements for a streamlined learning experience.

<figure><img src="/files/7DiVklBXM5qepgxifuil" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Minimalistic Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 7" %}

### Dynamic

The [Dynamic](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=dynamic) course style presents course information in a fluid and interactive manner, utilizing dynamic elements and modern design principles to engage learners effectively.

<figure><img src="/files/um2TPpQwrOV7Bu3fx2oO" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Dynamic Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 8" %}

### Modern with Curriculum

The[ Modern with Curriculum](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=modern-curriculum) course style resembles our modern design but integrates the course curriculum into a sidebar on the left for enhanced accessibility.

<figure><img src="/files/PyNUnl03HrkN9hWcnla3" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Modern with Curriculum Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 9" %}

### Dynamic with Short Sidebar

The [Dynamic with Short Sidebar](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=dynamic-sidebar) course page style includes a sticky sidebar for effortless navigation throughout the course content.

<figure><img src="/files/fG1NVDxNqB6JBwd1PM0b" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Dynamic with Short Sidebar Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 10" %}

### Bold with Full Width Cover

The [Bold with Full Width Cover](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=full-width) course page style prominently features a full-width course photo at the top, creating a visually captivating introduction to the course content.

<figure><img src="/files/LGVxMZuQvdFHwBPP3Wct" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of Bold with Full Cover Course Page</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

To learn more about the feature, check this manual:

{% content-ref url="/pages/kphem8FVuWfW9foJUMem" %}
[Custom Course Pages](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/custom-course-pages)
{% endcontent-ref %}

## Course Reviews

<figure><img src="/files/JB4Pl9ftud4J7rhNaxYV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

With the help of the setting, you can control to display of [**course reviews**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/reviews) on all course pages, bundles, and widgets. Disabling this option will hide reviews **throughout the site.**

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Course Reviews ON" %}

<figure><img src="/files/bAFhr3cVBbZzBHwBQQ4C" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Course Reviews OFF" %}

<figure><img src="/files/dVHcLr3lFzXmJaayK3Pn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

{% hint style="info" %}
If the setting is **disabled**, all of the **related features** with [**Course Reviews**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/reviews) will **also be** **disabled**, such as the[ **Reviews tab**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/analytics-for-admin/reviews) in [**Analytics.**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/analytics-for-admin)
{% endhint %}

## Default Tab

<figure><img src="/files/9O79F7RZNJ58JdYpx8pv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

In this setting, you can select the **default tab** to be shown when opening the course page.

<figure><img src="/files/7OQMLHEl8oZxcDmZCGjx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Show Emoji in Quiz and Assignments results

<figure><img src="/files/dRr7JB1DICxwkvDMYHyA" alt=""><figcaption><p>Show emoji in Quiz and Assignments results</p></figcaption></figure>

There is an availability to enable displaying emojis once students fail or pass the quiz and assignments.

* Quiz/Assignment Passed Emoji - select an emoji from the list and it will be displayed once students **pass** the assignment or quiz.
* Quiz/Assignment Failed Emoji - select an emoji from the list and it will be displayed once students **fail** the assignment or quiz.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Passed Quiz" %}

<figure><img src="/files/CQ0ZLCEyMujszZLJ8n9U" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Failed Quiz" %}

<figure><img src="/files/tsDUSpLv5LEnjA4J5jBF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Passed Assignment" %}

<figure><img src="/files/hnTttWoe4PIJ82nAVzxo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Failed Assignment" %}

<figure><img src="/files/z8gEecg9NL6zdoVKeWb0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

## Course Tabs and Course Levels

<figure><img src="/files/BpTl4ocM9CZvuezJVxz4" alt=""><figcaption><p>Course Tabs and Course Levels</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Course tabs** - enable the tabs that need to be displayed on the course page
* **Course levels** - set the level of the course. Be more precise, and instead of common Beginner, Intermediate, and Advanced, indicate the exact level of your course. Just enter Level ID and Label, and add as many levels as you need.

## Instructor and Student permissions, Preferred Video Source

<figure><img src="/files/eRcbAx5IImTY7JRHu1th" alt=""><figcaption><p>Instructor and Student Permissions, Preferred Video Source </p></figcaption></figure>

* **Allow instructors to create new categories** - instructors can add new [categories for courses](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/courses-category) (e.g. Art, Computer Science, 3D design).
* **Allow Presto Player Source for Instructors** -instructors will be able to select videos from [Presto Payer Media Hub.](/masterstudy-lms/additional-features/presto-player-integration)
* **Auto-enrollment for Free Courses** - students will automatically enroll in free courses when they preview them.
* **Allow Adding Basic Info Section**  - enables to add basic info section on the course page. Can be used to provide very basic info about the course.&#x20;
* **Allow Adding Course Requirements Section** - enables to add course requirements section on the course page. Can be used to share course requirements with students before enrolling in the course.
* **Allow adding Intended Audience Section** - enables to add Intended Audience section on the course page. Can be used to describe who the course is designed for, any prerequisites or background knowledge required, and other relevant details to help potential students determine if the course aligns with their needs and goals.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Course Builder (Back-end)" %}

<figure><img src="/files/S63GtMrr4n2XghdNhFLz" alt=""><figcaption><p>Basic Info, Course Requirements, Intended Audience sections in the Course Builder ->Settings -> Main</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Course Page (Front-end)" %}

<figure><img src="/files/8LUkDLmB7Fee4qIFWRYi" alt=""><figcaption><p>Basic Info, Course Requirements, Intended Audience in the Courses Page</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

* **Preferred Video Source** - select the [video](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/how-to-add-video-to-the-lesson) sources that will be used in the courses.

{% hint style="info" %}
We recommend you use CDN to improve the site speed and performance if you are planning to upload large video files.
{% endhint %}

## Bottom Sticky Panel

The bottom sticky panel is a panel that contains a bunch of course settings and will be stuck to the bottom of the course page. It's very useful to get data easily while scrolling through the long course descriptions.

<figure><img src="/files/lhZKLx8pvkvIQeAvyGSz" alt=""><figcaption><p>Bottom Sticky Panel</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/X4QZoZ9xvWEyIeIH19i5" alt=""><figcaption><p>Bottom Sticky Panel Settings</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Enable Bottom Sticky Panel** - allow the display of the sticky bottom panel and select what to display there.

When enabled, on the course preview page you can see the bottom panel with the relevant info about the course such as - title, price, teacher, and category. You decide what to display on the panel by enabling available options.

## Popular and Related Courses

<figure><img src="/files/Hsg8SiKlnzD5I1f4ijCQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Popular Courses** - enables you to display a section with the top-rated courses on your platform in the single course page  (*usually on the sidebar of the single course page*).&#x20;
* **Related Courses** - allow to show related courses on the page and select the display option (*usually at the bottom of the single course page*)
  * **Show Related Course Based on** - choose how to pick the related courses: by category, author, or course level

{% hint style="info" %}
The display place of these sections may vary based on the [**Course Page Style**](#course-page-styles).
{% endhint %}

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Popular Courses" %}

<figure><img src="/files/3fOIwVhNoBzYf0sGGvvm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Related Courses" %}

<figure><img src="/files/VBpzTjtBr1Ps0MYdCQfO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

## Related Courses and Default Image for Course Completion

<figure><img src="/files/JA3AVNWUG5uUU5VtVpFM" alt=""><figcaption><p>Related Courses and Default Image for Course Completion</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Disable default image for course completion notification** - you can disable the display of the default image that is used for notifications about course completion and upload your own file for both notifications about failed courses and passed courses.


# Course Player

**The Course Player** tab of the MS LMS Settings will set up how students will see and learn courses on the LMS. You can reach it by following **MS LMS > Settings > Courses > Course Player:**

<figure><img src="/files/WFN3U9sqPgOVeI6NR8Yw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Default Theme

<figure><img src="/files/GKjsXkyyVqhibYqIcO6b" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Select the appearance of the course player by choosing between light and dark themes. This defines the overall look and feel of the player.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Light " %}

<figure><img src="/files/HpqneDzRM4BL5KFnAN94" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Dark" %}

<figure><img src="/files/saRK21aTJBtk90E6bPgP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

Students can change the mode at any time in their Course Player.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/PtpSRgjvVabQ9WlVIdDL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %} <mark style="color:blue;">**NOTE**</mark>&#x20;

If you have made **changes** in the **lesson text color**, these changes may display incorrectly when changing to dark mode.

Assigning a custom **Text Color** will display the text in that color regardless of the Course Player Mode **(Dark or Light).** If you copy text with a custom black text color, it appears black regardless of the mode, causing visibility issues in dark mode. The same applies to text with **white colors.**

Therefore, be cautious when working with **white and black** colors. When **copying** text from another website or document, ensure you **Clear Formatting** <img src="/files/iHYOjTc8NjBuHdclqkKq" alt="" data-size="line"> first in [**Course Builder Editor**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder#wysiwyg-editor)**.**
{% endhint %}

## Use Theme Fonts

<figure><img src="/files/w2cvhahaYY3QibbvLsT8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Enable this option to apply the fonts from your website’s theme to the lesson page. Disabling it allows the use of custom fonts of **MasterStudy LMS.**

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="MasterStudy Fonts" %}
**Use Theme Fonts** is <mark style="color:red;">**OFF**</mark>

<figure><img src="/files/5wgsr5F1f36oCKwnVC2k" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Fonts of the Theme" %}
**Use Theme Fonts** is <mark style="color:green;">**ON**</mark>

<figure><img src="/files/608P9dHz40oJ4wbcOUys" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

## Show Brand Icon in Navigation

<figure><img src="/files/eqCZNwH0hgLOUkq9xXfj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Display a logo in the course player's navigation bar to enhance branding. The logo will be visible to users in learning.

<figure><img src="/files/SaW8QXis1ZDKUTjZlgAp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Discussions Board Sidebar

<figure><img src="/files/3EKM3YUi3r00jdXkjKuI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Enable a sidebar for discussion boards to foster interaction between students and instructors. This feature supports community engagement.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Discussion is ON" %}

<figure><img src="/files/in39ZirOkaIz7QhVeAEy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Discussion is OFF" %}

<figure><img src="/files/khQArtnbGqwbPKB6qZRG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Lesson Q\&A Management

Users can leave comments on each lesson by clicking <mark style="color:purple;">**+Comment**</mark> or <mark style="color:purple;">**Reply**</mark> buttons.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/tzAUBt0fYP5TXMDEwWzG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Note that there is no moderation for comments in the discussion board. They will be published directly.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/tdyrkYVcwoPsZ1jJY01t" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Each lesson has its own dedicated discussion board, ensuring that discussions for one lesson are **not visible in others.**
{% endhint %}

Once a student leaves a comment, the instructor will be notified via email. By default, it will be enabled, but the admin can manage it in [**Email Manager.** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager/email-templates#q-and-a-message-email-to-instructors)&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/EBDVrTSPj6mBnHSWnsfs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Once the student gets his reply, he will also get an [**email notification**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager/email-templates#q-and-a-message-answered-email-to-students) about his comment.
{% endhint %}

Instructors can check the discussions in the Course Builder for each lesson. This can be done by following **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Courses > Edit with Course Builder:**

<figure><img src="/files/qjocua66hiV4jDNUumXQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Choose the necessary lesson and move to the **Q\&A** tab. In this tab, you can manage the discussion board for the lesson. There is an availability to edit, delete, and reply to students' comments on the discussion board.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/hRnW6n46qb0HlBgqiROw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Comments tab in WP Dashboard

Discussions can also be managed by following **WP Dashboard > Comments** section as well:

<figure><img src="/files/2IIskrnD24taWgtDLtxP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Use MasterStudy Player for Videos from YouTube & Vimeo

<figure><img src="/files/e8nyv7EexSCjqyMoxcLF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

When adding video lessons from [**YouTube** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/how-to-add-video-to-the-lesson#youtube-source-type)or [**Vimeo** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/how-to-add-video-to-the-lesson#vimeo-source-type)to your courses in **MasterStudy LMS**, the default settings include clickable icons that link to the original video sources. Removing these icons helps keep the video within the educational context of the course and discourages content sharing.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Visible YouTube Icon" %}
Use MasterStudy player for videos from YouTube is <mark style="color:red;">**OFF**</mark>

<figure><img src="/files/0e2KyOPZnmNSgumJG7Oy" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot which displays Visible YouTube Icon</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Invisible YouTube icon" %}
Use MasterStudy player for videos from YouTube is <mark style="color:green;">**ON**</mark>

<figure><img src="/files/bpEPM866eWH8Do6jaND6" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot which displays invisble YouTube Icon</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Visible Vimeo Icons" %}
Use MasterStudy player for videos from Vimeo is <mark style="color:red;">**OFF**</mark>

<figure><img src="/files/zkOFQXsKbC2nfdc0S3qj" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot which displays visible Vimeo share icons</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Invisible Vimeo Icons" %}
Use MasterStudy player for videos from Vimeo is <mark style="color:green;">**ON**</mark>

<figure><img src="/files/opc9JbQ16AcfyJgSsoww" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot which displays invisible VImeo share icons</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

For more information, refer to the related manual:

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MderHKDVtKM6kjledYj" %}
[Video Lessons](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/how-to-add-video-to-the-lesson)
{% endcontent-ref %}

## Lesson Notes

Lesson Notes settings enable students to take notes in lessons quickly, so they can later use them anytime.

<figure><img src="/files/9OJa66Sw8RBE35DeIH0V" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Once the setting is enabled, you can see the special <kbd>Take Note</kbd> buttons in lessons:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Video Lesson" %}
In full-screen mode, at the bottom right corner of the player, there is a special button that enables you to take a note with a timecode:

<figure><img src="/files/V3XFTYKwvTB4cJa7eo9Z" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Text/Audio Lesson" %}
In text and other lessons, the button appears once you select some text. After the note is taken, the text will be underlined in yellow.

<figure><img src="/files/xOEPJ0CBkBB9HcmP8iWv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

Once you click on the <kbd>Take Note</kbd> button, the special pop-up opens:

<figure><img src="/files/L4iXjF8vcQDqkDDDlUMP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Taken notes can be accessed in the Course Player in a special **Notes** tab:

<figure><img src="/files/0m1vlA6EoTxXW670epI1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

On this page, you can check the notes for the current lesson and the notes of the entire course as well.

Additionally, you can check notes in all courses from the student's profile, in a special Notes tab:

<figure><img src="/files/ZCmhbp3BGbSvMLlJxzO2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Notes of the student are available only to them. Instructors/admins can't access them.
{% endhint %}


# Reports & Analytics

Pro Plus Feature

In the Reports & Analytics tab of the plugin settings, you can enable or disable reports for instructors and students. For admin, it will always be accessible. Here is the overview of the tab:

<figure><img src="/files/waUeIkqTHQIjko61waSt" alt=""><figcaption><p>WP Admin > MS LMS > Settings > Reports &#x26; Analytics</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Reports for Instructors** - enable to display the advanced [analytics to instructors.  ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/analytics-for-instructors)
* **Show payout statistics to instructors** - enable to display of payout statistics for instructors in the [**Revenue tab**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/analytics-for-instructors/revenue).
* **Reports for Students** - enable to show [reports to students.](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/student-reports)
* **Email Reports** - a button that redirects to manage[ emails regarding the **Reports & Analytics**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager/email-templates#reports) feature.

Detailed information about the **Reports & Analytics** function of **MasterStudy LMS** can be checked here:

{% content-ref url="/pages/CZwi6DLPWaJ1bQ8p1JOk" %}
[LMS Analytics](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/analytics-for-admin)
{% endcontent-ref %}


# Quiz

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=1043s&v=BJlw10yJBv0>" %}

**The Quiz tab** lets you choose how your [**quizzes**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/quizzes) are presented to users on your e-learning platform.

<figure><img src="/files/dFwSLrxRd9Pmv9MNsfEs" alt=""><figcaption><p>WP Dashborad > MS LMS > Quiz</p></figcaption></figure>

## **Attempts to Retake Quizzes**

<figure><img src="/files/YlojKdVUJ6EGM9BZzmK1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can choose limited or unlimited attempts for students to retake quizzes if they cannot earn the required score or are not satisfied with the results. If the **Limited** option is selected **Attempts field** will appear in the Quiz Settings, where you have to indicate the number of attempts:

<figure><img src="/files/8MSOWfi6bO7xE4Dylr2i" alt=""><figcaption><p>Attempts field</p></figcaption></figure>

## **Quiz Attempt History**

The setting enables students to check their quiz attempt history. It helps them to understand the mistakes they made and perform better in their next attempts.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
To check the history, on the quiz page, there will be a special **History** tab:

<figure><img src="/files/D74ZmHSPjaHH2AegPKBi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
On this page, all of the attempts made by the student will be displayed:

<figure><img src="/files/NnWihCZ6lN4gusgRs1dS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
By clicking on the **Details** button, a brief attempt history can be checked.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

Alternatively, on the quiz page, they can change the attempt version using the dropdown as well:

<figure><img src="/files/HroazpHZWMjIgYzy1Wkl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## **Retake After Passing**

<figure><img src="/files/dQmvjtxn20Wfntzh3gJl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

By enabling this setting, students will have an opportunity to retake the quizzes even if they got the required mark. It helps them to improve their quiz grade, which directly impacts the course grade.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
If there is a limit on quiz retakes, the student cannot exceed it. They may only retake the quiz if they have remaining attempts.
{% endhint %}

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Retake After Passsing is ENABLED" %}

<figure><img src="/files/i2fDlbY281xJ9S7Ucx8d" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Retake After Passing is DISABLED" %}

<figure><img src="/files/E3ua0LscyQpfYeMy0dsl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

## **Quiz Style**

To conveniently organize a quiz view, you can choose the appropriate **Quiz style**. It allows you to display all questions at once (on one page) or break them down into many pages, so one separate question will be displayed on a separate page.&#x20;

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="One Page" %}

<figure><img src="/files/5SQkYsDhYecFneHWC0Qn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Pagination" %}

<figure><img src="/files/L4BiQJ9PeWGQTcx3jo13" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

{% hint style="info" %}
If you'd like to apply the style to one exact quiz only, you can do it [**via Course Builder**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/quizzes#quiz-paginated-style)**.**
{% endhint %}

* **Media type** - select how instructors can attach media for quiz questions. You have two options: **File Upload** and **URL (Text Input)**.


# LMS Pages

**The LMS Pages** tab in the MS LMS Settings menu provides options to configure and link various important pages that the Learning Management System (LMS) requires.&#x20;

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=1070s&v=BJlw10yJBv0>" %}

Here is the overview of the tab:

<figure><img src="/files/bA7JBNSrggyyWqwPasui" alt=""><figcaption><p><strong>MS LMS > Settings > LMS Pages</strong></p></figcaption></figure>

Here is the list of **available** LMS Pages:

* [**User Account**](#user-account)
* [**Instructor Public Profile**](#instructor-public-profile)
* [**Student Public Profile**](#student-public-profile)
* [**Wishlist**](#wishlist)
* [**Checkout**](#checkout)
* [**Course Page (for Elementor)**](#courses-page-for-elementor)
* [**Courses Page (for Gutenberg)**](#courses-page-for-gutenberg)
* [**Certificate Page**](#certificate-page)

## How to assign LMS pages?

There are several ways to assign pages as one of the LMS Pages.

### Generate LMS Pages

Generating LMS Pages is the **easiest** and **most efficient** way to assign pages **automatically.** MasterStudy LMS plugin **creates missing pages** and **assigns** them as LMS pages **with one click.**

If you have **missing** LMS Pages, you will get this banner as a warning:

<figure><img src="/files/LaOhSGlRgMPlsaAkODIK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can click on the O**pen Settings** button and use the **Generate Pages** button:

<figure><img src="/files/fsMTMWcZ95mdd5mWfKAM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
**After** Generating Pages, make sure your [**permalink's settings**](/masterstudy-lms/troubleshooting/404-errors#permalinks) are correct.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

### Manual Assign&#x20;

You can create **any page** and assign it as a  LMS Page. **MasterStudy** does the rest of the job itself and applies the required functionality itself.

1. Follow **WP Dashboard > Pages > Add New** and create **a new page**:

<figure><img src="/files/sSHZQLzrNXb51HbLlHz6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Go back to the **LMS Pages Tab** (MS LMS > Settings > LMS Pages) and **select** the page you created or any page you would like to assign. In the dropdown, there will be displayed [all the pages](#user-content-fn-1)[^1] that you have in your WordPress:

<figure><img src="/files/A1DF0HNa2cBStNgIIsZN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. Save the changes:

<figure><img src="/files/jYZmgNFCs0pA1TonH0t2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## User Account

<figure><img src="/files/7azZqknjZVgntkguvaaj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This page allows users to manage their account settings and information. It is where users can view and update their personal details, change passwords, and access other settings related to their profiles.

<figure><img src="/files/7UoqQCnOeCItLb2bsJoi" alt=""><figcaption><p>User Account for Instructor | Instructor Dashboard</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Based on the user role, this page can also be called **Admin Dashboard**, **Instructor Dashboard**, or **Student Dashboard**.
{% endhint %}

## **Instructor Public Profile**

<figure><img src="/files/0ipHyYEK8zRxFpM3HPYt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This page is used to display an[ **instructor's public profile**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/public-profiles#instructor-public-profile). It shows information such as their name, bio, experience, courses they teach, and more. The profile helps students understand more about the instructors before enrolling in courses.

<figure><img src="/files/Z1bEM8ZVMRgCfRQV0rj5" alt=""><figcaption><p>Instructor Public Profile</p></figcaption></figure>

{% content-ref url="/pages/J1TFY6acqFEthJ0VUAbl" %}
[Public Profiles](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/public-profiles)
{% endcontent-ref %}

## **Student Public Profile**

<figure><img src="/files/fMQr60NOLZ1vZhpIS5aM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This page displays a [**public profile of a student**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/public-profiles#student-public-profile). The profile shows details like the student's name, enrolled courses, and achievements. It helps foster a sense of community among students within the platform.

<figure><img src="/files/uKqdm9dzMrLWDhvwgHWi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% content-ref url="/pages/J1TFY6acqFEthJ0VUAbl" %}
[Public Profiles](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/public-profiles)
{% endcontent-ref %}

## **Wishlist**

<figure><img src="/files/9LYRSCmKnssLreRPNmYc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This page allows users to view and manage their saved courses. Users can add courses to their wishlist if they are interested in them but not yet ready to purchase. This is a convenient way for users to keep track of the courses they want to enroll in later.

<figure><img src="/files/MwZLcEIE7fy3px9lRDPg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## **Checkout**

<figure><img src="/files/OcHLl4VRwaWZjrJUQXBW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The checkout page is where users complete their course purchases. It is essential for the payment process and typically includes details such as billing information, payment methods, and the final price of the selected courses.

<figure><img src="/files/0dCn4zerIITqfNrRrRDF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## **Courses Page (for Elementor)**

<figure><img src="/files/fzJCQMe2Xvr3d4B4TGJt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

If you are using the **Elementor page builde**r, this is where you configure the page to display the list of available courses. This page shows course information, previews, and other details to help users select which course they want to enroll in.

<figure><img src="/files/nYfv0RLaF9jgpUq3rzM2" alt=""><figcaption><p>Courses page for Elementor</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
Note that, settings for this page **should be configured** with Elementor only. Once you build your Courses page with Elementor, **MS LMS Settings> Courses** setting will not be applied to it.

***

There can be o**nly one Courses page** with page builders: either with **Elementor** or **Gutenberg.**&#x20;
{% endhint %}

{% content-ref url="/pages/047rYBKyxx3sjJcSGWrl" %}
[LMS Widgets](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets)
{% endcontent-ref %}

## **Courses Page (for Gutenberg)**

<figure><img src="/files/yDlaemVQu2TXggtFABM2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

If you are using the **Gutenberg** page builder, you will need to set up this page to display the available courses. It works similarly to the [**Elementor courses page**](#courses-page-for-elementor) but is tailored for users who prefer Gutenberg's editing tools.

<figure><img src="/files/YDBejih6qWJsEQ3AHmVg" alt=""><figcaption><p>Courses Page with Gutenberg</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
Note that, settings for this page **should be configured** with Gutenberg only. Once you build your Courses page with Gutenberg, **MS LMS Settings> Courses** setting will not be applied to it.

***

There can be o**nly one Courses page** with page builders: either with **Elementor** or **Gutenberg.**&#x20;
{% endhint %}

{% content-ref url="/pages/GEw5iD9h0dJ7ir81wdgX" %}
[Gutenberg Blocks](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets/gutenberg-blocks)
{% endcontent-ref %}

## **Certificate Page**

<figure><img src="/files/BgMzhKty9cS104JBqdKi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This page is used for verifying certificates. When a user completes a course and receives a certificate, this page allows QR code redirection to verify the certificate's authenticity.

<figure><img src="/files/e4pGR2cBf7DUY6zVL3Dc" alt=""><figcaption><p>Sample Certificate Page</p></figcaption></figure>

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MdepdKe4E2d8IELFo6Q" %}
[Certificate Builder](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/certificate-builder)
{% endcontent-ref %}

## Memberships

<figure><img src="/files/o4EaqD3oNO9TRoYG5NPq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

On this page, all available membership plans on your LMS will be displayed. The page is available only if the [**Subscriptions** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/subscriptions)addon is enabled.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/EM5iqqyMSih8wHIhhIFT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% content-ref url="/pages/xRwb1940Y2uPJahs3mJB" %}
[Subscriptions](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/subscriptions)
{% endcontent-ref %}

[^1]: WP Dashboard > Pages > All Pages


# eCommerce

The **eCommerce** section of the LMS Settings brings together all the essential tools to manage the financial side of your LMS platform. It covers selecting your preferred **currency**, customizing the **checkout** experience, enabling popular **payment methods**, and setting up **payouts** for instructors. This section gives you complete control over your monetization strategy in one place.

To reach it, follow **MS LMS > Settings > eCommerce:**

<figure><img src="/files/mKodAfP6BuqmtXrZsv2k" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

It consists of four different tabs:

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Currency</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/KonDkMTIBxW870UjpCxh">/pages/KonDkMTIBxW870UjpCxh</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Checkout</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/XUnMrrIYuaoou0X1a96f">/pages/XUnMrrIYuaoou0X1a96f</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Payment Methods</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0">/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Payout</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-MdehiLukejLcYb1EiWx">/pages/-MdehiLukejLcYb1EiWx</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Currency

The **Currency** tab allows you to set the default currency used for your platform. You are free to design any currency using the settings under this tab for your LMS Platform.

To acceess the tab, follow **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Settings > eCommerce > Currency:**

<figure><img src="/files/giXLZoxQD6CLONMcluSa" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Transaction currency** - choose the currency to sell courses. It will be applied to Stripe and PayPal [payment methods](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods).
* **Currency symbol** - Specify the symbol for the currency used on the site. E.g., `$`, `€`, `£`.
* **Currency position** - Set the currency position against the price. Available options are **Left** and **Right**.
* **Thousands separator** - a symbol used to divide large numbers into groups of three digits, making them easier to read. For example, the number **one million** can be displayed as `1,000,000` or `1 000 000` depending on the chosen separator.
* **Decimal separator** - a symbol used to separate the whole number part from the fractional part in a decimal number. For example, the number **three and a half** can be written as `3.5` or `3,5`, depending on the chosen separator.
* **Number of fractional numbers allowed** - define how many digits can appear after the decimal separator in a price or value. For example, if set to 2, a price can be displayed as 19.99, while setting it to 0 would round it to 20.

<figure><img src="/files/HWU0Dnht792YSACNKb74" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Checkout

The **Checkout** tab lets you control how students complete their purchases on your platform. You can enable guest checkout, allow account registration during checkout, and more. Options here help you customize the buying experience to match your workflow and improve conversion.

<figure><img src="/files/SDrCj4p50vk2NyaMeowQ" alt=""><figcaption><p>WP Dashboard > MasterStudy > Settings > eCommerce > Checkout</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Select eCommerce Engine** - here you can choose the eCommerce engine to manage payments.&#x20;
  * **Native** - uses MasterStudy’s [**built-in payment methods**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods) in checkout
  * **WooCommerce** - option requires an active [**WooCommerce**](/masterstudy-lms/woocommerce/woocommerce-integration) plugin on your website. It uses WooCommerce to manage orders and sales. Payment methods, Cart and Checkout pages, and other related settings should be [configured](/masterstudy-lms/woocommerce/woocommerce-integration) in WooCommerce.
    * **Display courses on WooCommerce shop page** - enables you to display the courses on your website on the WooCommerce shop page.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
If **WooCommerce Checkout** is being used to sell courses, the[ **native payment methods of MasterStudy**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods) will be **deactivated automatically.** You have to set up payment methods from the[ **WooCommerce settings.**](/masterstudy-lms/woocommerce/woocommerce-integration#woocommerce-payments)
{% endhint %}

* **Guest checkout -** when this option is enabled, users can place orders without being logged in to your website, and it is required to create an account on the checkout page. *If WooCommerce Checkout is enabled, it is required to enable Guest Checkout in* [***WooCommerce Settings***](/masterstudy-lms/woocommerce/woocommerce-integration#guest-checkout) *as well.* &#x20;
* **Redirect to checkout after adding to cart**<mark style="color:red;">**\***</mark> - when this option is enabled, students who click the <kbd>Get Course</kbd> button on a course page will be redirected straight to the checkout page instead of the cart page. It's advantageous if you want to offer a faster, more direct enrollment flow.
* **Enable Coupon Codes** - adds a functionality to give discounts for courses, course categories, bundles, and memberships using coupon codes. The feature is not available when WooCommerce is active; it works only with MasterStudy's native payment methods. [*Learn more...*](#coupons)
* **Checkout Fields** - in this section, you can manage which fields should be displayed and filled by the user on the Personal Information section of the Checkout page:
  * **Country**<mark style="color:red;">**\*\***</mark> - Enable this option to collect the country of your customers during checkout. This option will always be enabled when taxes are enabled.
  * **Post Code**<mark style="color:red;">**\*\***</mark> - Enable this option to collect the post code of your customers during checkout. This option will always be enabled when taxes are enabled.
  * **State**<mark style="color:red;">**\*\***</mark> - Enable this option to collect the state of your customers during checkout. This option will always be enabled when taxes are enabled.
  * **Town/City**<mark style="color:red;">**\*\***</mark> - Enable this option to collect the city of your customers during checkout. This option will always be enabled when taxes are enabled.
  * **Company Name** - Enable this option to collect the company name of your customers during checkout.
  * **Phone Number** - Enable this option to collect the phone number of your customers during checkout.

<figure><img src="/files/nNR81RKpcy9IuinhKuIJ" alt=""><figcaption><p>Checkout page with highlighted Checkout Fields</p></figcaption></figure>

***

<mark style="color:red;">**\***</mark>*the feature does not function when WooCommerce Checkout is enabled.*\ <mark style="color:red;">**\*\***</mark>*these fields can not be disabled when* [*Taxes*](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/taxes) *are active*

## Coupons

**Coupons** in MasterStudy LMS allow administrators to create discount codes that students can apply during checkout to reduce the purchase price of courses, bundles, or memberships. Coupons can be configured with flexible rules, including discount type, usage limits, validity dates, minimum purchase requirements, and product restrictions. This feature helps run promotions, reward loyal students, and manage limited-time offers while maintaining full control over how and when discounts are applied.

{% hint style="warning" %}
Coupons feature works only with [**native** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods)MasterStudy payment methods. If you are using WooCommerce, you have to use [WooCommerce's coupon system](https://woocommerce.com/document/coupon-management/) instead.
{% endhint %}

### How to Create Coupons

First, make sure that you have enabled coupons from [plugin settings](#user-content-fn-1)[^1].&#x20;

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Follow **WP Admin > MasterStudy > Coupons**. All coupons on your website will be displayed here. Click on the <kbd>+ Add New</kbd> button:

<figure><img src="/files/9rhiB6QbiFmOLihhFfqh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
A sidebar will open on the right side, start to fill them one by one:

<figure><img src="/files/h4rZzRRhf2bh59lzVGGu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Title -** Internal name of the coupon used only for administrative purposes. This title is not visible to students during checkout.
* **Coupon Code -** The code that students enter on the checkout page to apply the discount. You can manually enter a custom code or generate one automatically.
* <kbd>Generate</kbd> **-** Automatically creates a random coupon code to ensure uniqueness and avoid conflicts with existing coupons.
* **Discount Type -** Defines how the discount is calculated. Choose whether the coupon applies a percentage-based discount or a fixed amount discount.
* **Discount Value (%/$) -** Specifies the discount amount based on the selected discount type. For percentage discounts, this value represents the percentage off. For fixed discounts, it represents the currency amount deducted from the total price.
* **Apply Coupon to -** Determines which items the coupon can be used for. You can apply the coupon to all courses, bundles, and memberships or restrict it to specific content types.
* **Status -** Controls whether the coupon is active or inactive. Only active coupons can be applied during checkout.
* **Start Date -** Sets the date when the coupon becomes available for use. The coupon cannot be applied before this date.
* **Start Time -** Defines the exact time when the coupon becomes active on the selected start date.
* **Set End Date -** Enables an expiration date for the coupon. Once the end date and time are reached, the coupon will no longer be valid.
  * **End Date -** Sets the date when the coupon becomes unavailable for use. The coupon cannot be applied after this date.
  * **End Time -** Defines the exact time when the coupon becomes inactive on the selected end date.
    {% endstep %}

{% step %}
If you want to give a discount to only specific courses/bundles/membership plans, select the *Specific courses/bundles/membership* option for the **Apply Coupon to** field and choose the necessary items:

<figure><img src="/files/Aj3hO4VCaR4jkdv4jlNL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
In the next part of the coupons addition, you can set usage limits and minimum purchase requirements:

<figure><img src="/files/47MuC1SGzcYR1SHPF9xo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Total Usage Limit -** Sets the maximum number of times this coupon can be used across all users. Once the limit is reached, the coupon becomes invalid and cannot be applied anymore.
* **Usage Limit Per User -** Defines how many times a single user can apply this coupon. When a user reaches this limit, the coupon will no longer be available for that user.
* **No Minimum Requirement -** Allows the coupon to be applied regardless of the order total or number of items in the cart.
* **Minimum Order Amount ($) -** Requires the cart total to reach at least the specified amount before the coupon can be applied. If the order total is lower, the coupon will be rejected.
* **Minimum Items Quantity -** Requires a minimum number of courses or items in the cart for the coupon to be valid. The coupon cannot be applied unless this quantity requirement is met.
  {% endstep %}

{% step %}
Check the coupon summary at the end one more time. If everything is OK, you can click the Create button to finish adding a new coupon:

<figure><img src="/files/9fRP30qKEYVt4if4q3CM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

### How to Manage (Edit/Delete) Coupons?

By following the **WP Dashboard > MasterStudy > Coupons,** you can see all the coupons on your website:

<figure><img src="/files/pFBCaYWSihyx6AwBFgBi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
You can use sorting and filtering options to find the coupons you need easily. Also, you can filter the coupons by date.
{% endhint %}

#### Modify Coupons

On the same page, click on the Edit button, and all the available coupon settings will be opened in a sidebar:

<figure><img src="/files/9JWTDdXUPPxhUxCZqk6I" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Delete Coupons

On the same page, select the coupons using the checkboxes in the first column, then choose the **Delete** from **Bulk actions:**

<figure><img src="/files/OMcybXqoNrF2gKhxCDfD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Using the Bulk Actions, you can change the status of multiple coupons at once.
{% endhint %}

### Order History with Applied Coupons

In the uses column, you can see the number of uses of the successfully applied coupons during checkout

<figure><img src="/files/MZiz2vLpINC9eaK7txIR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

For example: <mark style="color:purple;">**11**</mark>/<mark style="color:green;">**25**</mark>&#x20;

* <mark style="color:purple;">**11 -**</mark> number of successfully applied coupons in orders. Pending orders will not be counted.
* <mark style="color:green;">**25 -**</mark> [total usage limit](#user-content-fn-2)[^2] of the coupon.&#x20;

If there is no total usage limit for the coupon, the number of uses will be displayed only:

<figure><img src="/files/UY5bogCrGa9TKEhp5Lcy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

By clicking the number of uses, in a new tab, all the orders to which this coupon has been applied will be displayed (including pending and cancelled orders):

<figure><img src="/files/u64nYQDUQ42QDx2tMjiI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is the result:

<figure><img src="/files/507J2q6HzCro2gZ21eIw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### How to Apply Coupons in Checkout?

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
In the checkout, click on the *Have a coupon code?*:

<figure><img src="/files/N6AQ4sO9JoNyu7aNjhy2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Enter the coupon and click on the <kbd>Apply</kbd> button:

<figure><img src="/files/x0xHFp2J83Wh1scOrc53" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
You can see the applied coupon and the discounted amount:

<figure><img src="/files/lV3pMbULYqdCLEQb9Ymx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

If the coupon is not active, expired, does not include your item(s) in your cart, does not meet the minimum requirements, reached the maximum number of uses, or not started yet, the user will get an error with a clear reason of rejection:

<figure><img src="/files/gw6fitBdxGT2NrXfIgjU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

[^1]: WP Dashboard > MasterStudy > Settings > eCommerce > Enable Coupons

[^2]:


# Payment Methods

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/Lp-5KRA2nnk?feature=shared>" %}

In the **Payment Methods** section, you can configure the various native payment gateways of MasterStudy for your online platform. These payment methods allow you to accept payments from users for courses, products, or services as a **one-time payment.**&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
**One-time payment** means that the student pays for the course one time only and gets **full** access to its content forever. Moreover, courses can be sold with [subscriptions](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/subscriptions) and [points](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/point-system) as well.

***

If [**WooCommerce Checkout**](/masterstudy-lms/woocommerce/woocommerce-integration) is being used to sell courses, these payment methods (native payment methods of MasterStudy) will be **deactivated automatically.** You can manage the WooCommerce Checkout in **MS LMS > Settings > eCommerce > Checkout** tab.
{% endhint %}

{% content-ref url="/pages/-Mdexo6A-\_DgBopwJ7SO" %}
[Installation and Settings](/masterstudy-lms/woocommerce/woocommerce-integration)
{% endcontent-ref %}

Here's an overview of the available payment options and how to set them up. To access the tab, follow **MS LMS > Settings > eCommerce > Payment methods:**

<figure><img src="/files/WMcyUGSWxI13ragQ2WuN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
In the [**Offline Payment**](#offline-payment) and [**Wire Transfer**](#wire-transfer) options, when each order is placed, the admin should[ grant access](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/orders#how-to-update-order-status) to the course to students manually. In [**PayPal**](#paypal)**,** [**Stripe**](#stripe), [**Mollie**](#mollie), and [**Paystack**](#paystack), it has been designed to change the order status (grant access to the course) **automatically**.

***

However, we **highly recommend** checking **all of your payment methods** and **order statuses regularly.**
{% endhint %}

To get more info about orders, refer to this documentation:

{% content-ref url="/pages/-Mdercuklo\_mCRhfFIQx" %}
[Orders](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/orders)
{% endcontent-ref %}

## How to Set up Payment Methods?

In Payment Methods, you can set up different payment gateways. Among the options available are:

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><i class="fa-stripe-s">:stripe-s:</i> <strong>Stripe</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0#stripe">/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0#stripe</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><i class="fa-paypal">:paypal:</i> <strong>PayPal</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0#paypal">/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0#paypal</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><i class="fa-m">:m:</i> <strong>Mollie</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0#mollie">/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0#mollie</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"> <i class="fa-stack-exchange">:stack-exchange:</i> <strong>Paystack</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0#paystack">/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0#paystack</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><i class="fa-money-bills">:money-bills:</i> <strong>Wire Transfer</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0#wire-transfer">/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0#wire-transfer</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><i class="fa-building-columns">:building-columns:</i> <strong>Offline Payment</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0#offline-payment">/pages/-MdehCmnS48pym7Nyga0#offline-payment</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

To enable the needed option simply enable the toggle. By clicking the <i class="fa-circle-caret-down">:circle-caret-down:</i> icon, you get the additional settings to provide the required API keys to process the payments.

<figure><img src="/files/AIU44tFa6KfDP14mYNLO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Offline Payment

Offline payment is designed for manual transactions where students pay outside the platform, such as through cash in your office, checks, or any other method that is not automatic.

<figure><img src="/files/6aaZQsqS3p1ifpXzCDcj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

There is only one field in the settings, which is the **offline payment processing** text. Use this field to provide **clear instructions** on how to make offline payments. **For instance:**

> **"**&#x50;lease visit our office to pay via cash or check, or deposit the course fee to the specified bank account. Once the payment is confirmed, your course access will be activated.**"**

This is how it will look on the [**Checkout Page:**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/lms-pages#checkout)

<figure><img src="/files/jluNG3EKp1zlYeQAI2FD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After choosing the **offline payment** and clicking the **purchase button**, a student will have a **pending status** in the order:

<figure><img src="/files/aXMEJWEwJFc5qMsVF9g9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
After **receiving the payment**, you have to [**grant access**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/orders#how-to-update-order-status) to the respective students **manually.**
{% endhint %}

### Wire Transfer

Wire transfer is a direct payment method where students send payments from their bank account to your bank account.

<figure><img src="/files/mx3klHJEZOYDhpZgqss7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here are the settings that need to be filled in accordingly:

* **Account Number -** Provide the complete bank account number where the payments will be deposited.
* **Account Holder Name -** Specify the name of the account holder as it appears on the bank account.
* **Bank Name -** Mention the name of your bank.
* **Swift/BIC Code -** Include the SWIFT/BIC code for international payments, ensuring smooth cross-border transactions.
* **Checkout Description -** Add details on the payment process, such as:

> "Transfer the course fee to the account details provided. Include your name and course ID in the transfer remarks for identification. Email your transfer receipt to <support@example.com>."

This is how our setup will look on the Checkout page if a student wants to buy a course:

<figure><img src="/files/lZbjeseFj1ywbpZAjLcC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
Like [**Offline Payment**](#offline-payment), after **receiving the funds**, you have to [**grant access**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/orders#how-to-update-order-status) to the respective students **manually.** Until the confirmation, the order will be in **pending** status.
{% endhint %}

### PayPal

**PayPal** is a globally recognized payment gateway that allows students to pay using their PayPal balance, credit/debit cards, or linked bank accounts.

{% hint style="info" %}
You have to create a [**special app**](#how-to-setup-paypal-app) in your PayPal account to receive payment through the platform. We **don't need** a Client ID or Secret key, we just need to get a proper **PayPal Business Email.**&#x20;
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/NbCsmrQBkk0BlMKiTKLL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here are the settings that need to be filled in accordingly:

* **PayPal Business Email -** enter the email address linked to your PayPal business account. This is where payments will be directed. Check [**this out**](#how-to-setup-paypal-app) to obtain it.&#x20;
* **Payment Mode -** choose one of the **Live** or **Sandbox** modes:
  * **Sandbox** - choose sandbox mode to test PayPal functionality in a simulated environment without processing real transactions.
  * **Live** - choose the Live mode to start accepting real money.
* **Checkout Description -** provide instructions, such as:

> "You will be redirected to PayPal to complete the transaction."

#### How to Setup PayPal App?

{% hint style="info" %}
We will show the guide in **Sandbox (test) mode**. After configuring settings, make sure to change the mode to **Live** to start receiving real mone&#x79;**.**
{% endhint %}

1. Go to <https://www.paypal.com/> and sign in to your **PayPal business account**, then move to the developers' dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/FlsX3xT8rEBnYyXl9puC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Move to the **Apps & Credentials** tab:

<figure><img src="/files/H24bRukw9DqvIk8mDPv6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. To create an app, click on the **Create App** button:

<figure><img src="/files/G5WXLa3pq8t8drYSUSw8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. On the opened pop-up, name your app, indicate the app type, and create it:

<figure><img src="/files/OEPH1isTsFkpTTs0I4kI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

5. On the opened page, you can see your email associated with the app:

<figure><img src="/files/Iv2UFDmusy9VEvHRQuiy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

6. <mark style="color:blue;">Optional:</mark> If you want to change the email (rename), click on View Details:

<figure><img src="/files/4woJJGbdM487AsI8AkGW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

7. <mark style="color:blue;">Optional:</mark> Click on **Change Email:**

<figure><img src="/files/PWsdT4lrZ5siliuYK0XC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

8. <mark style="color:blue;">Optional:</mark> Write the new email and save the changes:

<figure><img src="/files/IGCcakr856k7o6PQz2HJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

9. <mark style="color:blue;">Optional:</mark> You have successfully updated the email:

<figure><img src="/files/X7Ar3NkaLBdGHSxVat7a" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

10. Paste the email in the designated area in the plugin settings and **Save Settings:**

<figure><img src="/files/1YiWb9CjG5bYdi7PDLHL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

11. After setting up everything and testing, you can change the mode to <mark style="color:purple;">**Live**</mark><mark style="color:purple;">:</mark>

<figure><img src="/files/FG9KmzdHXn9b7YhzKtzT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

On the [**checkout page**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/lms-pages#checkout), after selecting PayPal as a payment method, students will be redirected to the PayPal page to complete the transaction:

<figure><img src="/files/nMu0fQTeObWtqARKfSI1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Stripe

Stripe is a highly secure and flexible payment gateway that supports credit and debit card payments. It offers seamless integration for global transactions.

<figure><img src="/files/AmkBtIIj2CgcsQD4bpYb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Publishable Key -** [obtain this key](#how-to-obtain-stripe-api-credentials) from your Stripe account dashboard. It is used to identify your account for front-end transactions.
* **Secret Key -** provide [the secret key](#how-to-obtain-stripe-api-credentials) for secure communication with Stripe’s API.
* **Checkout Description -** you can provide any description to explain the payment method, such as:

> "Securely pay using your credit or debit card. We accept Visa, MasterCard, American Express, and more."

Here is how it will look on the checkout page:

<figure><img src="/files/OxkGsJqGEz0gEOYJeL8f" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### How to Obtain Stripe API Credentials

{% hint style="info" %}
We will show the guide in **Sandbox (test) mode**. After configuring settings, make sure to change the mode to **Live** to start receiving real mone&#x79;**.**
{% endhint %}

1. Visit <https://dashboard.stripe.com/login> and sign in or register. Then choose the app and move to the Developers dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/wQTtDrb7HG6WD949y8Dn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Jump to the **API keys** tab, copy the **Publishable Key** and **Secret Key**, and paste them to their designated areas in the **MasterStudy Settings:**

<figure><img src="/files/jmQ6hyYqD5ihhwXJXx5n" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. Here is the filled Stripe section in the Payment Methods tab:

<figure><img src="/files/EDPEuIqK9iIJ0IkHtMhH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. After testing your platform, you can switch to the **Live** mode to **accept real money**. In that case, Stripe should provide new API credentials:

<figure><img src="/files/3cP6PJpcKHTza1T5VpGb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Webhook Signature Key for Subscriptions

For [recurring payments](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/subscriptions), you must also provide the Webhook Signature key.&#x20;

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
To do it, search for `Create a webhook` from the search bar of [Stripe](https://dashboard.stripe.com/). Choose the one from the Workbench section as shown in the picture:

<figure><img src="/files/X8ZU0xpP35OxZ8HMaz7J" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Adjust the parameters as shown:

<figure><img src="/files/U71xjIfUNqCSDyoPI9lj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Choose **Webhook Endpoint**:

<figure><img src="/files/lcaSRdQQQ4Y3EjAiH2N4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Go back to plugin settings and copy the Webhookd Endpoint URL:

<figure><img src="/files/sguoKAh7GhGgAsIkOmgF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Paste the URL to the designated area in Stripe:

<figure><img src="/files/T8LEouV0tguBzlLAmCow" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Copy the given **Secret** key:

<figure><img src="/files/UrWfw2JUDTrlhpG6neY7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Paste it into the designated area and save the changes:

<figure><img src="/files/M7c4guUCgGfiYYZxIZVt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

### Mollie

:star:**Pro Plus Feature**

[**Mollie**](https://my.mollie.com/) is a European financial technology company that provides online payment processing services for businesses. It enables merchants to accept a wide range of payment methods through a single, easy-to-integrate platform. The company has become one of Europe’s fastest-growing payment service providers, known for its developer-friendly APIs and transparent pricing.

<figure><img src="/files/wL8pa8bVKIsDm2yF814y" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### How to Obtain Mollie API Credentials?

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Visit <https://my.mollie.com/dashboard/signup> and use the registration form to create your Mollie account (those who have an active account can freely use their existing account):

<figure><img src="/files/A5FmVUGXL6imUjGpUMvA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Choose the country that you have registered your business from the list:

<figure><img src="/files/Wdcpy2Kngrwdl4WaCXdJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Mollie serves businesses registered within the European Economic Area (EEA), the United Kingdom, and Switzerland. [Learn More.](https://help.mollie.com/hc/en-us/articles/115002116105-Can-I-use-Mollie-s-services-in-my-country)
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Enter your **Business Legal Name** in the designated field. If you did not find it on the list, click on the <kbd>Add Manually</kbd> button at the bottom of the page:

<figure><img src="/files/fiAduOIfjTKPHQ9NVUWJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Check the details of your business one more time and accept the Privacy Policy of Mollie:

<figure><img src="/files/7WaWXhiSI9hVBuImVUWZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %} <mark style="color:$primary;">**Optional:**</mark> You may be asked by Mollie to complete additional questions/surveys for support and promotional activities. Fill them according to your needs; however, **it's completely skippable.**

<figure><img src="/files/BVXgM26l0fuY39xHquk0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Our account is ready. Click the link to go to the dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/xi50kc1vDhXRVcKLRgWX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Now we have an account. But to receive funds and run transactions, you have to complete the remaining account setup, which can be tracked in the Onboarding Progress section of your dashboard. Without it, you can use this account for testing purposes only.

<figure><img src="/files/BhQoXTejDamEqa9RntPQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can follow the Mollie documentation to get more info:

{% embed url="<https://docs.mollie.com/>" %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
To get the credentials, go to the **Developers** tab on the sidebar:

<figure><img src="/files/8UWJxBQGUhiMNTxneItk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Under the **API Keys** tab, you will find the Live API key and Test API keys. We have to copy the **Live API Key** and paste it into the designated field in the MasterStudy plugin.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Live API key** can be obtained only if you complete your account setup. The test API key can only be used to test the transactions.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/W3CgNieLOYUDIGnUHwPF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Go to the **MasterStudy LMS > LMS Settings > eCommerce > Mollie** and paste the **Live API key** in the **API Key** field as shown:

<figure><img src="/files/nwy0ffrzkzbBWGfNJaJT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
On the same page, copy the **Webhook URL** for Mollie:

<figure><img src="/files/N9meqk5CIqAYa1azFjxV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Go back to the Mollie dashboard and move the **Webhooks** tab to the developers tab, then click on the <kbd>Create Webhook</kbd>:

<figure><img src="/files/qySvc3C2RmIhr1xEf8Gx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Paste the copied Webhook URL and adjust the other preferences as shown:

<figure><img src="/files/Piycl0XsAk9t5UXVnx4v" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

{% hint style="info" %}
Now you are ready to receive payments. We recommend testing transactions (buying a course, bundle, etc.) on your site with a test API key before going live.
{% endhint %}

### Paystack

:star:**Pro Plus Feature**

[Paystack](https://paystack.com/) is Africa-focused, and merchant onboarding is restricted to supported African countries/businesses.

<figure><img src="/files/vOswnMCSmivEDoMvm2fh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### How to Obtain Paystack API Credentials?

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Visit <https://dashboard.paystack.com/#/signup> and use the registration form to create your Paystack account (those who have an active account can freely use their existing account):

<figure><img src="/files/mHycrY32Gwc5DkaPT4HZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
After registration, you will have an account valid for testing purposes only. To receive the real funds, you must complete the rest of the account details under the Compliance tab:

<figure><img src="/files/fLtsUH6KhXfuVObQb0IC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Follow **Settings > API Keys & Webhooks** to find your keys. Let's check in the Test Mode first. Copy the **Test Secret key** from here:

<figure><img src="/files/dWhPz04vRqsp8kYOlUaq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
If you **complete the Compliance**, you will have your **Live API Keys** on this tab as well. You can freely use them on MasterStudy LMS instead of Test API Keys. [Learn More.](https://paystack.com/docs/)
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
On your WordPress dashboard, go to **MasterStudy LMS > Settings > eCommerce > Payment Methods > Paystack**, then paste the key into the designated field. At the same time, from here, copy the **Webhook URL** address:

<figure><img src="/files/dnNIhC6QpjLUq7VSWdZQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Go back to the Paystack dashboard, and paste the Webhook URL to the designated field. Save the changes:

<figure><img src="/files/MWfbeiLfBurYMWHkx2dh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

That's all, you are done. Change the Test API Key to the Live API Key once you are ready to receive payment via Paystack on your website.&#x20;

***

## Example: How to Purchase a Course?

1. So, if you decide to buy the course, click on the get now button, and you will see the available methods to purchase the course:

<figure><img src="/files/2zqGNnMPm2CeetQe6V60" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. We will choose the **One-time payment** option. After that, the course will be added to **the cart.** You can go there by clicking **Go to Cart** button:

<figure><img src="/files/21NYa2apU2n5tw1MkpQU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. There is an availability to add several courses to the cart. Review your order and choose the preferred [**payment method**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods), then proceed with the payment:

<figure><img src="/files/vw5Zz0PGYvbIgOsRWZLS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. After the successful payment, you will get the confirmation page with the order status:

<figure><img src="/files/Z1QPGgskK5mxlfPAJJe0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

To get more info about **orders** and how admin and instructors **manage** orders,  refer to his manual:

{% content-ref url="/pages/-Mdercuklo\_mCRhfFIQx" %}
[Orders](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/orders)
{% endcontent-ref %}


# Subscriptions

This page is part of the Subscriptions addon and has two setting:

<figure><img src="/files/Nz4ucln7JNyk3RIvxZIx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Allow Instructors to Create Course Subscriptions** - the setting enables instructors to set up subscription plans for their courses in Course Builder.
* **Manage Memberships** - the button directs you to the Membership Management tab, where you can create, edit, and organize various membership plans.

To learn more about subscription and membership features, check this manual:

{% content-ref url="/pages/xRwb1940Y2uPJahs3mJB" %}
[Subscriptions](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/subscriptions)
{% endcontent-ref %}


# Taxes

Pro Feature

**The Taxes** settings allow you to apply country-based tax rates to all product prices in your LMS. You can enable or disable tax calculations, choose how prices are displayed, and add tax rates for each country where you sell your courses.

You can easily use the toggle button to enable/disable taxes on your website.

<figure><img src="/files/oUBsdkExE5SJ61VdBSHn" alt=""><figcaption><p>WP Admin > MasterStudy > Settings > eCommerce > Taxes</p></figcaption></figure>

Here are the available settings:

* **Price Display Mode -** Choose how prices are displayed on the website.
  * **Prices exclude tax -** product prices are shown without tax. The tax will be added during the checkout process. However, on the course page&#x20;
  * **Prices include tax -** product prices already include the tax amount. The checkout process will not add extra tax on top.
* **Tax Rate By Country** - here, you have to set tax values manually for each country. For the countries not added to the list, the tax rate will be set to 0.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Price exclude tax" %}
Here you can see the same course, but a bit expensive because of the added taxes to the original course price set in course settings:

<figure><img src="/files/ep5MOnISNN9JKLWzD9Ju" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

On the checkout page, you can see the actual price of the course ($117.90 as subtotal) and the added tax:

<figure><img src="/files/MFmWRIAS8lRK4Mp4dePw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Prices include tax" %}
Here you can see the same course, but with the original price of the course set in the course settings:

<figure><img src="/files/GF0vgscI5s5WhYz4TMRK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

In the checkout page, you can see the breakdown of the course price with the added tax value:

<figure><img src="/files/2eDPpBzvGi5aV2X9OD8v" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### How to Add a New Country?

Adding a new country is a straightforward action.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
On the Taxes tab, choose the country you want to add from the list:

<figure><img src="/files/pT3SbQKYjqKJGq3S5hpQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Enter the tax rate as a percentage and save it:

<figure><img src="/files/k6qb0d665olcBVmDvee9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

For the United States, you can enter different tax rates for different states or use the same % for all states:

<figure><img src="/files/pu1gkPw2e2nCNqL5jxAc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
For countries not included in the list, the tax rate will be set to 0.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

That's it. Now users will be charged additionally for taxes during checkout according to the billing address (country and state) they enter in the form:

<figure><img src="/files/RL8VRZuCn3oRuD8XlU1I" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Payout

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/Lp-5KRA2nnk?si=-1OCyTTYwHwKh60N>" %}

This section of the MasterStudy eCommerce is a part of the [**Statistics and Payout**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/statistics-and-payouts) add-on, and it works only when that add-on is active. It enables you to send payouts to instructors for the courses they are associated with.

<figure><img src="/files/WKffUPqy1ov2VceT6CdN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Admin Commission (%) -** set the percentage of the course price that will be allocated to the admin. This amount **includes any payment gateway fees** and is calculated from the full course price. The remaining percentage will go to the instructor.
* **Instructor Earnings (%) -** set the percentage of the course price that instructors will receive. The total of instructor earnings and admin commission will always be equal to 100.

{% hint style="warning" %}
**NOTE:** Payouts are integrated with [PayPal Payouts API](https://developer.paypal.com/docs/api/payments.payouts-batch/v1/) and require a [PayPal Business](https://www.paypal.com/us/webapps/mpp/referral/paypal-business-account2) account for admins.
{% endhint %}

Follow the link below to correctly set up the Payout system on your website:

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MjT2RxtXIiIvsfRJurE" %}
[PayPal Payouts Setup](/masterstudy-lms/paypal-payouts-setup/general-settings)
{% endcontent-ref %}


# reCAPTCHA

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=1199s&v=BJlw10yJBv0>" %}

In the **reCAPTCHA tab of the MS LMS Settings**, you can integrate Google's reCAPTCHA API, specifically designed to enhance security and prevent spam on your website.

<figure><img src="/files/rxdqQYZ1V1RZiJnXufd0" alt=""><figcaption><p>WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Settings > reCAPTCHA</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="danger" %} <mark style="color:red;">**IMPORTANT!**</mark>

**Only** **reCAPTCH v3** is recommended to use. If you are using additional security plugins, such as Wordfence, which may add reCAPTCHA verification **across the entire site**, the reCAPTCHA tab of MS LMS Settings **should be left blank.**
{% endhint %}

## How to fill out the reCAPTCHA Form Correctly? <a href="#how-to-fill-out-the-recaptcha-form-correctly" id="how-to-fill-out-the-recaptcha-form-correctly"></a>

After visiting the [link](https://www.google.com/u/0/recaptcha/admin/create) provided, you can fill in the form fields like this:

{% embed url="<https://www.google.com/u/1/recaptcha/admin/create>" %}

<figure><img src="/files/1ozTp0NUXb6yNuCbS9iM" alt=""><figcaption><p>reCAPTCHA Form</p></figcaption></figure>

After clicking the submit button, on the opened page you can get your **Public Key** and **Secret Key:**

<figure><img src="/files/A4omOMuP3GbpiEBqb9wq" alt=""><figcaption><p>Site and Secret Keys</p></figcaption></figure>

Copy and paste those keys to their designated areas in the plugin settings. Do not forget to **save** the changes.

<figure><img src="/files/2WW64CB5lC3eBp0OXuAm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Profiles

In the "Profiles" section, you can configure various settings related to user profiles and registration on your website or platform.

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=1220s&v=BJlw10yJBv0>" %}

## General Tab

In the General settings of the **Profiles section**, you can set up the following options:

<figure><img src="/files/2WKnBNMWq539BraNBmaT" alt=""><figcaption><p>Overview of the General Tab of Profiles</p></figcaption></figure>

### Course Pre-moderation <a href="#enable-course-pre-moderation" id="enable-course-pre-moderation"></a>

<figure><img src="/files/x5GW5cDzQ0r8nbFDL7Up" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Once the setting is enabled, the course will have a **Pending** status until the admin approves it.

<figure><img src="/files/4jxGt1sVg23bcYC1dy4s" alt=""><figcaption><p>Pending Course in the Instructor Dashboard</p></figcaption></figure>

Admin can approve and publish these courses by **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Courses > Pending > Edit with Course Builder > Publish:**

<figure><img src="/files/h0eVcrXq2wpEsmut9EYz" alt=""><figcaption><p>Pending Courses in the Course tab of the MS LMS</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/QShuPtBDbnKEMjwKJR6d" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here are the available statuses:

* **Pending for Review** – the course has been submitted and is waiting for admin approval before going live.
* **Make Draft** – The course is saved as a draft and can be edited further before submission or publishing. It's not available for students to enroll in and is not visible on the courses page.
* **Publish** – The course is approved and visible to students on the site.
* **Rejected** – The course did not meet the requirements and has been declined by the admin. The instructor will be notified accordingly via email.

{% hint style="info" %}
The instructor will be notified via email once their course has been approved or rejected by the admin. You can manage the email template with the[ **Email Manager** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager/email-templates#emails-to-instructors)addon.
{% endhint %}

### Instructor Public Profile <a href="#instructor-can-add-students-to-own-course" id="instructor-can-add-students-to-own-course"></a>

**The Instructor's Public Profile** provides an overview of the instructor’s experience, courses, and student engagement. This profile highlights the instructor’s biography, social links, buttons to send messages, and their portfolio, enhancing their credibility and attracting potential students.

<figure><img src="/files/BT3jdcV7OdhEEzvmFWLI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Once you turn on the Instructor Public Profile, two more settings will also appear: [**Show reviews on the instructor's page**](#show-reviews-on-the-instructors-page) and [**Choose a layout for the instructor profi**](#choose-a-layout-for-the-instructor-profile)**le.**

#### **Show reviews on the instructor's page**

<figure><img src="/files/lG9CEB6kjeEmM08KEdh0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This option enables to display of **student reviews** for their courses:

<figure><img src="/files/bFmNGJV0mDusA87TbJUl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### &#x20;**Choose a layout for the instructor profile**

<figure><img src="/files/3rzccZWeZk4x3ZDkDS0m" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can choose one of the two layouts for the instructor's public profile. There is also an availability to check the **demo preview** by clicking the specified button.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Compact" %}

<figure><img src="/files/7JpEB9Ar5QaqlSzFM6dE" alt=""><figcaption><p>Try here: Live Demo Preview</p></figcaption></figure>

{% embed url="<https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/instructor-public-account/3139/?public=compact>" %}
Link to the Live Demo
{% endembed %}
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Extended" %}

<figure><img src="/files/GQxHhqbI5PHTrwGs6rkf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% embed url="<https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/instructor-public-account/3139/?public=extended>" %}
Link to the Live Demo
{% endembed %}
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Student Public Profile <a href="#instructor-can-add-students-to-own-course" id="instructor-can-add-students-to-own-course"></a>

**The Student Public Profile** highlights the student's achievements, completed courses, and active engagements within MasterStudy LMS. It serves as a digital portfolio, showcasing the student's progress and certifications.

<figure><img src="/files/AiEH9KmEhlohn92jGxlc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Once you turn on the Student Public Profile, two more settings will also appear: **Show progress on the student's page** and **Choose a layout for the student profile.**

#### **Show progress on the student's page**

<figure><img src="/files/leLuaEvOfPPeWmKwOgQl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This option enables to display **students progress statistics** on the platform:

<figure><img src="/files/cg2UiHEfgDvWOqotQLHj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### &#x20;**Choose a layout for the student profile**

<figure><img src="/files/3rzccZWeZk4x3ZDkDS0m" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can choose one of the two layouts for the student's public profile. There is also an availability to check the **demo preview** by clicking the specified button.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Compact" %}

<figure><img src="/files/Dir1JzlHtMVh3kvoE0xH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% embed url="<https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/student-public-account/3394/?public=compact>" %}
Try here: Live Demo Preview
{% endembed %}
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Extended" %}

<figure><img src="/files/BB8X3KP31coiw8ygqhKF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% embed url="<https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/student-public-account/3394/?public=extended>" %}
Link to the Live Demo
{% endembed %}
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Allow instructors to add students to their own course <a href="#instructor-can-add-students-to-own-course" id="instructor-can-add-students-to-own-course"></a>

<figure><img src="/files/LHeEcL1afhNBYcodQ3Ot" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

If this option is enabled, the instructor will have a tool in an account to add students **by email** or **import them using CSV files** into the course. Instructors will be able to add students to their courses right from the instructors' dashboard. Just hover on the course status and click on the **Manage Students:**

<figure><img src="/files/Sca5s3H3tiF7RZrLzkA7" alt=""><figcaption><p>Manage Students on Instructor Dashboard</p></figcaption></figure>

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MdesyyGhbtU7Eei4OJ3" %}
[Manage Students](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/manage-students-by-admin)
{% endcontent-ref %}

### Have a Question Form <a href="#instructor-can-add-students-to-own-course" id="instructor-can-add-students-to-own-course"></a>

<figure><img src="/files/ZyT4Dw7cDINHncCI7abt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This feature controls the existence of the **Have a Question** form on the **Profile Settings** of users:

<figure><img src="/files/MAeRej2V5ZO8gKnYWSCe" alt=""><figcaption><p>Student Dashboard > Have a Question</p></figcaption></figure>

It opens a special form where users can ask any question by filling out the form:

<figure><img src="/files/s0CwFypiAu1RgUqPEAiF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
The form can be customized using [**LMS Forms Editor**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/lms-form-editor) **> Enterprise Form** according to your needs.
{% endhint %}

After the submission, the admin will be notified via email:

<figure><img src="/files/l9qcD4nNB4gax5bnzTXs" alt=""><figcaption><p>Sample Email</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
The content of the email is also customizable using [**Email Templates > Enterprise Request.** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager/email-templates#enterprise-request-email-to-admin)
{% endhint %}

### Instructors archive page <a href="#instructors-archive-page" id="instructors-archive-page"></a>

<figure><img src="/files/ytIGXFBsgktdl9X9xf84" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This page will display all the site’s instructors (so they will be shown on one specific page):

<figure><img src="/files/UbgkqrPoLUYEV8cf3jRm" alt=""><figcaption><p>Instructors Archive Page</p></figcaption></figure>

### Cancel subscription page <a href="#cancel-subscription-page" id="cancel-subscription-page"></a>

<figure><img src="/files/oD5jsx0Hzopx66ZCLZKs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

If you want to display a link to the Cancel Subscription page, choose a page and add to the page content short-code `[pmpro_cancel]`.

{% hint style="info" %}
This is a feature of the [**Membership System**](/masterstudy-lms/additional-features/membership-system) of the **MasterStudy LMS**. To get more info, check[ **this manual.**](/masterstudy-lms/additional-features/membership-system)
{% endhint %}

### Side Profile Menu

**The Side Profile Menu** is a quick sidebar menu consisting of all elements in the Instructors and Students Dashboard, respectively to access them quickly:

<figure><img src="/files/tYIBSs9vdVRfrLP4h1la" alt=""><figcaption><p>Side Profile Menu for Instructor</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/4qniaXQJ3SwCvatCcBGk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

When you enable the setting y,ou will get the rest of the settings related to the **Side Profile Menu:**

<figure><img src="/files/lOm1BBu8ybRN3kNqk70y" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Side Profile Menu for Guest Users** - make the Profile menu visible or invisible for the guest users (this allows to display of a log-in form inside the side profile menu)
* **Side Profile Menu Position** - move it to the left or the right side of your page
* **Background Color** - choose the background color
* **Text Color** - choose the text color


# Authorization

In the Authorization settings of the **Profiles section**, you can set up the following options:

<figure><img src="/files/mb4MJqmRM5qhAI1A0Bcn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Let’s take a closer look at each option available in the Authorization section.

### Email Confirmation <a href="#enable-e-mail-confirmation" id="enable-e-mail-confirmation"></a>

All new registrations will get an e-mail with account verification. When users proceed with the registration on your website, they will get a confirmation email to complete the registration process and verify the email:

<figure><img src="/files/hrvOvyYPTdF9Q6hWLa6i" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Example of the activation email**

<figure><img src="/files/sj0IlZ08ecM4TXuRjwOy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Shortcode For Authorization Form <a href="#disable-instructor-registration" id="disable-instructor-registration"></a>

From this field, you can copy the shortcode for the authorization page. Add type="login" or type="register" to the shortcode to select the starting form, and then paste it into any page of your choice.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/JLCX4En67gUhffa13QOj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Example shortcodes:&#x20;

* For login: `[masterstudy_authorization_form type="login"]`&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/8I61tuOVBG6qU6N6rJHF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* For registration: `[masterstudy_authorization_form type="register"]`

<figure><img src="/files/r6FIAg8tL0oK3eh64B3r" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Turn off Registration for All New Users <a href="#disable-instructor-registration" id="disable-instructor-registration"></a>

<figure><img src="/files/1IpMqjvbQVdex1J3Wl3o" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This setting disables all new registrations on your LMS; however, **existing users** will still be able to sign in.

### Instructor Registration <a href="#disable-instructor-registration" id="disable-instructor-registration"></a>

When this option is turned on, the checkbox “**Register as an instructor**” is shown in the registration form:

![The screenshoot takent from the Masterstudy theme](/files/fhcaXWkhE7NSVfCmKJ31)

### Instructor Pre-Moderation <a href="#disable-instructor-pre-moderation" id="disable-instructor-pre-moderation"></a>

<figure><img src="/files/BrtjWyWACHVCtzsOZRYk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

When this option is enabled, the user role “instructor” is set automatically, otherwise, you need to do it manually by changing the user.

### Show Instructor Registration Form On Separate Page

Enabling "Show Instructor Registration Form On Separate Page" directs new instructors to a dedicated sign-up page.

<figure><img src="/files/PtzeWQYHuxCAO181GTVV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Instructor Registration Page

Administrators can select a specific page for redirecting instructors after they sign up with the Instructor Registration Page option. The setting shows only if the **Show Instructor Registration Form On Separate Page** setting is enabled.

<figure><img src="/files/aFaQzNgb9PpuPNjNFklh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Show A Link To A Separate Page In The Form

Choose Show in this option to add a direct link to the Instructor Registration Page on the authorization form.

<figure><img src="/files/SIf6ZNXufpJYVjbe3bMN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This is how it will look for your users:

<figure><img src="/files/8yNm2cEFgBHhYvh5O2pG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Shortcode For The Instructor Registration Form

<figure><img src="/files/ogYKhxi2QyrSBsQi6XS2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

To add an instructor registration form to any part of your page, simply copy and paste the shortcode below:

`[masterstudy_instructor_registration]`

This shortcode will automatically input the instructor registration form wherever you place it on your site.

### Password Requirements

<figure><img src="/files/ZhlHFw80qQM3fSOffxDt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Show Password Strength** - enables showing how the user-entered password is strong in the form of a progress bar. (*Available strengths are: **Bad, Normal, Good, Hard***)
* **Allow Weak Passwords** - enables the acceptance of weak passwords in the registration form. If disabled, the user will get an error once they use a weak password.

<figure><img src="/files/gENNXRMRyHNQcaeXLV0K" alt=""><figcaption><p>Registration form wirh Password Strength</p></figcaption></figure>


# Social Login

In this section of the **Profiles tab**, you can manage the **Social Login via Google and Facebook:**

<figure><img src="/files/jj8ZDibRZqAPmZsHuOEL" alt=""><figcaption><p>Social Login Settings </p></figcaption></figure>

You can get more info about this feature by **checking** the following documentation:

{% content-ref url="/pages/uPvXw8Dhgh9xtemyNmey" %}
[Social Login](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/social-login)
{% endcontent-ref %}


# Profile Menu Reordering

The **Profile** M**enu Reordering** is an awesome feature that gives you full control of menu item order in the Instructors and Students profile.

<figure><img src="/files/h11KPouMF58uxq9XJKRV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here are the Menu items for instructors and students in the front end:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Instructor" %}

<figure><img src="/files/WQJFJKqUl445am5vCsHr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Student" %}

<figure><img src="/files/qLgMOj2vouYdxAyxwH6A" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

In the **Profile Menu Reordering tab**, based on the selected user roles menu items change automatically:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Instructor Menu Items" %}

<figure><img src="/files/1ziztpnNAw55swmKTxV1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Student Menu Items" %}

<figure><img src="/files/al2lUoUa43Og1CLxBHpo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

There are **two columns:**

* <mark style="color:green;">**Enabled**</mark> - items in the column will be **accessible** to instructors/students in their profile menu
* <mark style="color:red;">**Disabled**</mark> -  items in the column will be **inaccessible** to instructors/students in their profile menu

To change the items between columns or their orders in the menu, use the drag & drop functionality and save the changes:

<figure><img src="/files/gum5BfWYoY6DQc4diuZa" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
Items labeled with :warning: sign are important and are not recommended to be disabled.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

### Example

Let's see an example. We want to disable the **Membership item** for **students**.&#x20;

1. Follow **MS LMS > Settings > Profiles > Profile Menu Reordering** and select the Student as a user role:

<figure><img src="/files/aW0TWpcciN9IzstVp8BA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Use the drag & drop and move the Memberships item to the Disabled Column, save the changes:

<figure><img src="/files/wslhpS9ECdA9ez04ViXQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. Here is the result before and after the changes:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Before" %}

<figure><img src="/files/LZVr7IJf3cm8TsOycEG1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="After" %}

<figure><img src="/files/WvT22AxUaKOMz6ZkluEu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

If the item is in the disabled column, it will not be displayed here as well:

<figure><img src="/files/y3wuPaP1MGIvZwvxmnsP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
You can follow the **same process** to **reorder** the menu items as well.
{% endhint %}


# Grades

Pro Plus Feature

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/OfDtaP-u6SE>" %}

The grades tab of the plugin settings contains several parameters to manage the [Grades Feature](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/grades) of the MasterStudy LMS. Here is the overview of the tab:

<figure><img src="/files/HmkpYGUDEKulznokLUjG" alt=""><figcaption><p> <strong>WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Settings > Grades</strong></p></figcaption></figure>

## Result Display

<figure><img src="/files/pnXUT8lpRyoWhBCJqBHk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Result Display** setting enables to display of the grade scores of the student in one of the three available formats:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Grade" %}

<figure><img src="/files/tJkf7vfMSNKRwiwJC4Cg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Point" %}

<figure><img src="/files/CnzJIOEmm9OGWuO30rVN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Percent (%)" %}

<figure><img src="/files/ly25Rg87LzbMp0CMpVYz" alt=""><figcaption><p>Grade</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

## Score Separator

<figure><img src="/files/iwtBT0shpEOxnXc91g2v" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Score Separator** is the symbol or text used to separate the score from the maximum value. This symbol is used wherever the **current score** of the student is displayed, **along with the maximum value** of the quiz or assignment.&#x20;

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Score Separator in Grades Tab" %}

<figure><img src="/files/VZ9tBQbHScKd7uc0Ocyp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Score Separator in Grade Details" %}

<figure><img src="/files/PSvrU8x1qIxOyKN36PW2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

## Grades Display on Course Page

<figure><img src="/files/MCFQhNxXpn6oh4RP4zHl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This setting enables you to control the display of the **Course Grade** in the[ **Single Course Page**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/course). Choose one of the available ways you want to display the grade:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Show as a separate tab" %}

<figure><img src="/files/ZOszZvPUesMYcYe1C6CC" alt=""><figcaption><p>View as a Student</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Show in Sidebar" %}

<figure><img src="/files/4lwLJHm3zLNVX59STUZc" alt=""><figcaption><p>View as a Student</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

**Grade Details** can also be viewed here as well:

<figure><img src="/files/0U0DjpCKqC6GFiGVJlgY" alt=""><figcaption><p>View as a Student</p></figcaption></figure>

## Grades Table

This is the place where you have to define the available grades in your LMS. You can design any grading system according to your needs. Initially, the Grades Table will come with the following predefined grades.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/Wo8dcmzH6jmR7X2cH35S" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Grade Name** - the label of the grade, represented in letters and symbols
* **Grade Point** - numerical value corresponding to the grade on a point scale
* **Grade Range** - the percentage interval that defines the scores required for a student to receive a specific grade

### How to Add  New Grades?

You can add new grades at the bottom of the [**Grades Table:**](#grades-table)

<figure><img src="/files/57WYLodi9mYpQ57OguqI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Grade Point** - numerical value corresponding to the grade on a point scale
* **Grade Name** - the label of the grade, represented in letters and symbols
* **Grade Range min, %** - specify the minimum range value for the new grade
* **Color** - select the color for the grade using the RGBA color picker

If you want to add new grades to the existing [**Grades Table**](#grades-table), there is only one rule you have to follow:

{% hint style="info" %}
The minimum range must be less than the previous one. In other words, Grades will always be entered in descending order.
{% endhint %}

Let's assume we have a C grade at the bottom of our grades table. It means C is the lowest grade in our LMS. But we want to add a C- grade as well.

<figure><img src="/files/7lEYDPYmcmH31O0ToHC5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

As you see from the picture, **30%** is the minimum range value for the grade C. So the minimum range of our new grade should be less than 30.  After filling required fields, click on the <mark style="color:purple;">**Add**</mark> button to add the grade.

<figure><img src="/files/qgiYiB8stH8WuOPsfBFl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can delete the last grade in the table using the trash 🗑 button:

<figure><img src="/files/NlneDtzjY1kb4CLvSfBj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
You **cannot delete** or **edit** grades **except for the last one**. To edit a grade that is not the last one, you must first delete the grades after it, making the grade you want to edit the most recent (last). Once you've made the desired changes, you can re-add the deleted grades.
{% endhint %}

***

**Detailed info** about the **Grades Feature** of **MasterStudy LMS** can be found in this manual:

{% content-ref url="/pages/TMn1PatGYg3aQBqkfVml" %}
[Grades](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/grades)
{% endcontent-ref %}


# Certificates

The **Certificates** tab in the MasterStudy LMS Settings allows administrators to manage and configure certificate settings for courses. Certificates are awarded to students upon successful completion of courses and can be customized to suit various needs. The settings in this tab provide options for enabling, configuring, and [**personalizing**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/certificate-builder) the certificates.

<figure><img src="/files/zeIW5d1lsmLIAySAOuH1" alt=""><figcaption><p>WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Settings > Certificates</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Certificate threshold** - specify the minimum percentage score a student must achieve to **be awarded** a certificate upon completing the course.
* **Allow instructors to create certificates** - grants instructors access to a dedicated Certificates tab in the backend, allowing them to create and customize certificates for their courses.
* **Use current student name on certificate** - certificates will use the user's current name from their profile. If disabled, the initially provided name will be displayed.

Additionally, there is a reference to **Certificate Builder**: a powerful builder that enables you to construct hundreds of beautiful certificates:

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MdepdKe4E2d8IELFo6Q" %}
[Certificate Builder](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/certificate-builder)
{% endcontent-ref %}

***

Students can download their certificates right after the course completion and from the **single course page:**

<figure><img src="/files/cUxUz5aHWRQmjKI2eyEb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Moreover, there is a special **My Certificates** tab in the **Students Dashboard**, where students can check their certificates:

<figure><img src="/files/j9hxqd4gl0GiVsibcIdY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
To achieve **optimal performance** with the Certificates feature, make sure to enable the **Certificate Builder Addon.**
{% endhint %}

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MdepdKe4E2d8IELFo6Q" %}
[Certificate Builder](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/certificate-builder)
{% endcontent-ref %}


# Privacy Policy

**The Privacy Policy** tab allows you to add the checkbox “I agree with the storage and handling of my data by this website” and a reference to the related page when users sign up for your website.&#x20;

<details>

<summary>What is a Privacy Policy Page?</summary>

A **Privacy Policy page** is a document or section on a website or application that explains how a company or organization collects, uses, stores, and protects user data. It is an essential part of any online service, ensuring transparency and compliance with legal regulations such as the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), California Consumer Privacy Act (CCPA), or other data protection laws.

</details>

<figure><img src="/files/ePm877c7Cxc8tPCflj5R" alt=""><figcaption><p>Privacy Policy Tab</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Privacy Policy Label** - enter the text that appears next to the checkbox where users agree to the storage and handling of their data by the website
* **Privacy Policy Page** - choose the page where your privacy policy is stored

{% hint style="info" %}
As each company's Privacy Policy is **different**, you have to [**create**](#user-content-fn-1)[^1] your privacy and policy page **yourself** and **assign** it here. **MasterStudy LMS** does not generate this page.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

It will be displayed like this in the front end:

<figure><img src="/files/J0ifqktLn2B94qXCjOsU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

[^1]: You can create a new page by following WP Dashboard > Pages > Add New Page.


# Shortcodes

You can use some elements from MasterStudy LMS with other themes simply by using shortcodes on any page and post.

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=1466s&v=BJlw10yJBv0>" %}

There is a list of special shortcodes that you can use to paste some elements and options into your website such as courses carousel, course categories, featured instructors, and much more.

<figure><img src="/files/PExigghRen2Q7nbUFzMS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
You can also use ready-to-use [**LMS Widgets**](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets) for **Elementor** and **WP Bakery**, and [blocks for Gutenberg](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets/gutenberg-blocks) to **design** your platform **easily**.
{% endhint %}

Below is the list of shortcodes with all available parameters and examples.

**1. Search box**: shows courses search box: `[stm_courses_searchbox]`

**Parameters** available: style - style\_1/style\_2

**Example**:

```
[stm_courses_searchbox style="style_1"]
```

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Style 1" %}

<figure><img src="/files/LX0NTkqzDSMvJEBqcZ1h" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 2" %}

<figure><img src="/files/5bNMtKfXhsZYuH7dZGbH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

**2. Courses Carousel:** shows the courses carousel: \[stm\_lms\_courses\_carousel]

**Settings** available:

* title (enter the module title)
* title\_color (change the color of the title, example #fafafa)
* query (sorting options - none/popular/free/rating; set by default as "none")
* prev\_next (enable/disable Previous/Next buttons; set by default as “enable”)
* remove\_border (enable/disable border removing; set by default "disable")
* show\_categories (enable/disable display of categories; set by default as "disable")
* pagination (disable or enable paginations, set by default as "disable")
* per\_row (specify the number of courses per row; by default — 6)
* taxonomy (term ID of stm\_lms\_course\_taxonomy taxonomy, only if show\_categories is "enable". example "233,255,321")

**Example:**

```
[stm_lms_courses_carousel title="Sample Title" title_color="#000000 
query="free" prev_next="disable" remove_border="enable" pagination="enable"]
```

<figure><img src="/files/ptdkMGXEyKCSWXshJFwz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**3. Courses Categories:** shows the [courses categories](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/courses-category) \[stm\_lms\_courses\_categories]

Settings available: style - style\_1/style\_2/style\_3/style\_4

* taxonomy (term ID of stm\_lms\_course\_taxonomy — taxonomy; example "233,255,321")

**Example**:

```
[stm_lms_courses_categories style="style_1" taxonomy=”23,56”]
```

<figure><img src="/files/FYq0hDSH5nQqzJq0Fp9K" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**4. Courses Grid:** show the courses grid: \[stm\_lms\_courses\_grid]

Settings available:

* hide\_top\_bar (shows the top bar - hidden/showing; by default — "showing")
* title (module title)
* hide\_load\_more (hide/show the button Load More - hidden/showing, by default — "showing")
* hide\_sort (hide/show sorting option - hidden/showing; by default — "showing")
* per\_row (the number of Courses Per Row; by default 6)
* image\_size (sets the image size - thumbnail/medium/large)
* posts\_per\_page (number of courses to show on the page)

**Example:**

```
[stm_lms_courses_grid title="Sample Title" hide_top_bar="hidden" 
hide_load_more="showing" per_row="3" posts_per_page="6" hide_sort="hidden" image_size="medium]
```

Follow **Settings > Media** from your dashboard panel to set the sizes for thumbnail/medium/large.

<figure><img src="/files/Seq63Bb5xmyHqP2UDM4r" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**5. Featured Teacher:** shows Featured Teacher: \[stm\_lms\_featured\_teacher]

**Settings** available:

* instructor (Instructor ID)
* position (Instructor Position)
* bio (Instructor Bio)
* image (enter image ID)

**Example:**

```
[stm_lms_featured_teacher instructor="5" position=“Sample Position” 
bio="Sample Bio" image="1150"]
```

<figure><img src="/files/7VJCvjqPn913NjoT0l1r" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**6. Instructors Carousel:** shows the Instructors carousel: \[stm\_lms\_instructors\_carousel]

Settings available:

* title (module title)
* title\_color (changes the color of the title)
* per\_row (number of Instructors per row; by default 6)
* per\_row\_md (number of Instructors per row on Notebook; by default 4)
* per\_row\_sm (number of Instructors per row on Tablet; by default 2)
* per\_row\_xs (number of Instructors per row on Mobile; by default 1)
* style (change the display style - style\_1/style\_2; by default "style\_1")
* sort (shows the option Sort By - default/rating)
* prev\_next (Enable/Disable Previous and Next Buttons; by default "enable")
* pagination (Enable/Disable Previous and Next Buttons, by default "disable")

<figure><img src="/files/8FPuho5aHy8RY8QR2Dku" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Example:

```
[stm_lms_instructors_carousel title="Sample Title" title_color="#000000" 
style="style_1" sort="rating" per_row_md="3" per_row_sm="1" pagination="enable"]
```

**7. Recent Courses:** shows Recent courses: \[stm\_lms\_recent\_courses]

Settings available:

* posts\_per\_page (Number of courses to show on the page)
* image\_size (sets the image size - thumbnail/large/medium)
* per\_row (the number of courses per row)
* style (changes display style - style\_1/style\_2; by default "style\_1")

**Example:**

```
[stm_lms_recent_courses posts_per_page="5" image_size="large" per_row="3" 
style="style_2]
```

<figure><img src="/files/KVSp8j2ZQjRfUAZiUzBY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**8. Single Course Carousel:** shows the carousel with a single course: \[stm\_lms\_single\_course\_carousel]

Settings available:

* query (Sorting options - none/popular/free/rating, by default "none")
* prev\_next (Enable/Disable Previous and Next Buttons; by default "enable")
* pagination (Enable/Disable pagination; by default "disable")
* taxonomy (term ID of stm\_lms\_course\_taxonomy taxonomy, example "233,255,321")

**Example:**

```
[stm_lms_single_course_carousel query="free" taxonomy=”23,56” 
pagination="enable" prev_next="enable"]
```

<figure><img src="/files/6wC4qcbn1RJROgnROk5v" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## For Pro version of the plugin <a href="#shortcodes-forproversionoftheplugin" id="shortcodes-forproversionoftheplugin"></a>

**9. Certificate checker:** enables the[ certificate checker](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/certificate-builder#certificate-checker-widget): \[stm\_lms\_certificate\_checker]

Settings available:

* title (module title)

**Example:**

```
[stm_lms_certificate_checker title="Certificate Verification"]
```

<figure><img src="/files/W38jdUb2MY48tLnRyhL5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**10. Course Bundles:** enables [course bundles](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/course-bundles) option: \[stm\_lms\_course\_bundles]

Settings available:

* title (module title)
* columns (number of columns - 2/3; by default 3)
* posts\_per\_page (number of posts per page)

**Example:**

```
[stm_lms_course_bundles title="My Bundles" columns="2" posts_per_page="2"]
```

<figure><img src="/files/k1lKBsocZRoBgXCM850N" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**11. Google Classrooms grid view:** shows the grid view of [Google classrooms](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/google-classroom): \[stm\_lms\_google\_classroom]

Settings available:

* title (module title)
* number (number of posts on the page)

**Example:**

```
[stm_lms_google_classroom title="Sample Title" number="6"]
```

<figure><img src="/files/IXaVMoJ8yOZ6OWMYTtzY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Import/Export

The **Import/Export** options allow you to apply the same settings configured in the plugin settings on your other websites where the MasterStudy LMS is active.

<figure><img src="/files/CdqB8dsrBYERxJPpTis4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Click the **Copy Settings** button to **export the settings**. The settings will be copied to the buffer:

<figure><img src="/files/bjmubyerQkwFPY3EFECn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

To import the settings, paste the copied settings into the **Import Options** area and click the **Import Settings** button.

{% hint style="danger" %} <mark style="color:red;">**IMPORTANT!**</mark>

Once you have **imported** the plugin settings, it will **overwrite all** previously made **configurations**. Please, proceed with caution.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/cFzO7DwPqBxzeLJmzEJD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Certificate Builder

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/oi_7pfhqhgw?feature=shared>" %}

The Certificate Builder addon lets you make and design your own certificates. These are given to students when they finish their course.

![](/files/ZP91seruntdsiRoHFLpM)

After clicking the Settings Icon you will be redirected to the Certificate builder.

<figure><img src="/files/XtKPzHgdbhdyCMPZvPOC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

On the left side, you can see a dashboard of ready templates you can choose from:

<figure><img src="/files/DfZwPXch2XpUmzoTMEKV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

On the right side, there is a sidebar with elements and backgrounds to be added.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/dOdrNyEmYcfnGg8X3MCY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Certificate Builder Elements

{% hint style="success" %}
**Certificate Builder Elements** are powered with hundreds of **Google Fonts** font families, enabling you to build certificates in **any** font **style, family,** and **language.**&#x20;
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/iYPqakhVgqx8jgGdUZbE" alt=""><figcaption><p>Google Fonts as an example of Text Field</p></figcaption></figure>

Here are the available elements to build certificates in **MasterStudy LMS**: &#x20;

* [**Section Certificate**](#section-certificate)
  * [Text](#text)
  * [Image](#image)
  * [Shape](#shape)
  * [Certificate code](#certificate-code)
  * [QR Code](#qr-code)
  * [Current Date](#current-date)
* [**Section Course**](#section-course)
  * [Course Name](#course-name)
  * [Details](#details)
  * [Progress](#progress)
  * [Course Duration](#course-duration)
  * [Start Date](#start-date)
  * [End Date](#end-date)
* [**Section Student**](#section-student)
  * [Student name](#student-name)
  * [Student code](#student-code)
* [**Section Instructor**](#section-instructor)
  * [Instructor name](#instructor-name)
  * [Co-Instructor name](#co-instructor)

Let's see each of the elements one by one :white\_check\_mark:

### Section: Certificate&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/AOiDDqnEQY4nzqhP0FDm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The Certificate section in the Elements tab provides essential tools for customizing and enhancing the design of course completion certificates. These elements allow for detailed personalization to create visually appealing and informative certificates.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Text" %}
The **Text element** allows you to add customizable text blocks to the certificate. This can be used for inserting labels, short descriptions about the course, or any additional notes or instructions. You can change the font, size, alignment, and color to match the desired certificate design.

<figure><img src="/files/PhVft4VKwSFhSDH21N1c" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Image" %}
**The Image element** enables you to upload and place images onto the certificate. This can include course logos, instructor signatures, or other decorative graphics to add branding and visual interest. Users can resize and position images as needed.

<figure><img src="/files/tMCGNPlNdjg3VAr2PB96" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Shape" %}
**The Shape** element provides the option to insert various geometric shapes, such as rectangles, circles, and other figures into the certificate layout. These can be used to create visual dividers, borders, or background elements for added structure and style.

<figure><img src="/files/3a9m1pmv6IqXgGq44rIE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Certificate Code" %}
**The Certificate Code** element is used to display a unique, auto-generated code on each certificate. This code serves as an identifier for verification purposes and ensures that each certificate issued is distinguishable and trackable.

{% hint style="success" %}
You can insert the **Certificate Checker widget** anywhere, so later users can use it to verify their certificates with the Certificate Code.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/AmunbaS8ymrMaGOZDjJT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="QR-Code" %}
**The QR Code** element inserts a scannable QR code that links directly to a page where the certificate [**can be verified**](#qr-code-verification). This feature enhances the certificate's functionality by allowing recipients or third parties to quickly verify its authenticity by scanning the QR code with a mobile device.

{% hint style="info" %}
You have to set up the [**Certificate Page**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/lms-pages#certificate-page) beforehand to make the function work.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/IqtWzpnAf99u66CpBddm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Current Date" %}
**The Current Date** element displays the date when the certificate is issued. This is essential for marking when the course is completed and the certificate awarded. It updates automatically, ensuring each issued certificate reflects the correct date.

{% hint style="info" %}
**MasterStudy LMS** inherits the date format from your website's WordPress settings
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/g5E4SOl0wTP2izQ8A3A4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Section: Course&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/D6hxjsmW6E3Xu1EYIynE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**The Course** section in the Elements tab contains elements related to the specific course details, providing a clear representation of the course information on the certificate.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Course Name" %}
**The Course Name** element displays the title of the course completed by the student.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/i6mtBjIUv0DitltWyEyR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Details" %}
**The Details** element provides space for the course content information. It includes the number of lessons, quizzes, and assignments completed by the student:

<figure><img src="/files/QsyoqSSZ9uY5FFQdEJ4o" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Progress" %}
**The Progress** element shows the student's progress in the course as a percentage.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/9vkrUqlEDZnr3eGcp5z1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Course Duration" %}
**The Course Duration** element indicates the total time of the course. The course duration should be specified in the course settings in [**Course Builder.**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder#settings)

<figure><img src="/files/x4l0yuec9rLKeJb1l1bf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Start Date" %}
**The Start Date** element marks the beginning date of the course. This provides context for the course timeline and helps track when the student began their learning journey.

<figure><img src="/files/xBbLECSHUr4lkOSfJPFM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="End Date" %}
**The End Date** element displays the completion date of the course.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/vfXGYmRSXX6wMEaeGyln" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Section: Student

<figure><img src="/files/8KW28spRuZ4StikhWreh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**The Student** section in the Elements tab includes elements specific to the certificate recipient, making it clear who has earned the certification.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Student Name" %}
**The Student Name** element shows the full name of the student receiving the certificate.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
In the [**Certificates tab**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/certificates) of the [**LMS Settings**](#user-content-fn-1)[^1], there is a special setting named "Use current student name on certificate". By using it, you can control the student name display on certificates if there are changes in student name after receiving the certificate.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/AiMKeNMWJZnpRYrxJBbf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Student Code" %}
**The Student Code** element provides a unique identifier for each student, helping in tracking and verifying the certificate. This code can be used internally for record-keeping and can enhance the certificate’s authenticity.

<figure><img src="/files/wKErf93EM1jJeKOjNDWT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Section: Instructor

<figure><img src="/files/QUxX2NZMd6UlX2XO3VOi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The Instructor section contains elements for the instructors involved in delivering the course, adding credibility and recognition to the certificate.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Instructor Name" %}
**The Instructor Name** element displays the instructor’s name on the certificate. This adds a personal touch and recognition for the instructor, linking them to the course and enhancing the certificate’s authenticity.

{% hint style="info" %}
If the instructor changes his name after the date the student got his certificate, the name of the instructor on the certificate **will also change.**
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/PePNEGcTZNMg9ALifvG6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Co-Instructor Name" %}
**The Co-Instructor Name** element allows for adding the name of a co-instructor if there is a co-instructor assigned to the course.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
If the co-instructor changes his name after the date the student got his certificate, the name of the co-instructor on the certificate **will also change.**
{% endhint %}

{% content-ref url="/pages/-Mdep0NhehyjfhRPRjm1" %}
[Multi-instructors](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/multi-instructors)
{% endcontent-ref %}

<figure><img src="/files/CyTOSgKPvEEsZDFIhKXM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

## Creating a Certificate

1. Go to the addon page and click on the Certificate addon settings.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/Vli3WK0mq4TotOPszjmR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. You will open the Certificate Builder.

<figure><img src="/files/XtKPzHgdbhdyCMPZvPOC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. You can use a premade template, select one from the left side of the builder and customize it according to your branding requirements.

<figure><img src="/files/DfZwPXch2XpUmzoTMEKV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. To create a new certificate, click on the + sign.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/Eggu1VDZGKc4JC5NBsMd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

5. Then choose the certificate's orientation: horizontal or vertical.

<figure><img src="/files/Ga8S4f5hxHFs6PB4hxhw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

6. You can add a background by clicking on "Select image".

<figure><img src="/files/Vrua3bfAHGV9ThcNSgoq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

7. In the open window, you can upload a background from your files.

<figure><img src="/files/VC7WBspIjsL24zU7OKKV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

8. After adding a background, go to the Elements section.

<figure><img src="/files/7D7Tb09OtllQqk2pE0yi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

9. Click on the element and place these elements as desired within the Certificate builder.

<figure><img src="/files/sSIyfI2xyhVBGdqe3VvX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

10. You can further personalize the element by adjusting the font, size, color, and alignment, and applying styling options like bold or italic.

<figure><img src="/files/LcXammunn7K3UXPBd4gf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

11. Add other elements to create your desired certificate.

<figure><img src="/files/Dq7X1FizptlhpECacTON" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

12. Name your template and click on the save button at the bottom of the page.

<figure><img src="/files/wj0BEWhT0jpRd4AgsZtq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

12. After saving, use the preview button to view your newly created certificate.

<figure><img src="/files/78eJqS2sbCBzumh7ktTe" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This is how it will look for your students after downloading the certificate:

<figure><img src="/files/fp6P6MaV6oXNuRE938wy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Linking Certificates

Certificates can be linked to the courses in 3 different ways:

* [**Default Certificate**](#linking-a-default-certificate) - one certificate template will be chosen and applied to all courses globally.
* [**Category Certificate**](#linking-a-certificate-to-categories) - different certificates can be linked to specific course categories. It ignores the Default Certificate. For example, you can design a modern certificate and assign it to the Software Engineering course category. All courses in this category will be accompanied by a certificate of completion.
* [**Certificates for Courses**](#linking-a-certificate-to-courses) **(individual)** - you can assign a template to one course specifically using Course Builder as well. It ignores the **Default Certificate** and **Category Certificate**.

{% hint style="info" %}
Additionally, you can turn off **Issue a certificate upon completion of the course** setting on [Course Builder,](#user-content-fn-2)[^2] and students will not get a certificate after completion.
{% endhint %}

To link a certificate to courses, go to the Link Certificate.

<figure><img src="/files/ddm8pbtcfS6R1apO0ZAq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Next, you'll see three tabs where you can assign a default certificate, one to the categories or courses.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/OquxrOBLqpwwAsiPoO5O" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Linking a Default Certificate

To assign another default certificate, click Change.

<figure><img src="/files/2RYfXMkBWjPiIzJgoc6N" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Choose a template you want to make the default and save the changes.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/carzHezLaH8fIt7amH7U" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You have changed the default certificate. Your students will get this default certificate in courses where you didn't specify the certificate.

<figure><img src="/files/ee0fSBDA48wD4niWMIQV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Linking a Certificate to Categories

In the Categories tab, click Set certificate on the category you want to set your own certificate.

<figure><img src="/files/Pr3N6OFgrHuCqwpp5tdI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

From the certificate choose a template and save changes.

<figure><img src="/files/cLnHRptXnOEgUEep0uzy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

So, you have set a certificate to the specific course and it can be unlinked and changed.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/IiE6q27Ri6K160RQbdWF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Linking a Certificate to Courses

To link a certificate to a specific course, go to the Courses tab.

<figure><img src="/files/NQg71EB7FkECbHdWExiD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You'll be redirected to the page with courses.

<figure><img src="/files/mXDObDfhGSUQ8KZOIggd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Choose the course you want to add a certificate and click on Edit with Course Builder.

<figure><img src="/files/qnkbpaedJf2xOa5P9EmL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Go to the Settings in the Course Builder.

<figure><img src="/files/jHwDgpnubfDIjY5FX1GR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Head over to the Certificate section.

<figure><img src="/files/ehUvfjmokBxPHoKnKwP2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Choose a template from the list.

<figure><img src="/files/RlQZ29Aw818c4td2NYkb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
The **Default by System** option applies the certificate set globally to the course.&#x20;

***

**Issue a certificate upon completion of the course -** if you disable this setting, students will not get the certificate after completing the course.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

Save changes. Students of the course will get this certificate after completion

<figure><img src="/files/VYjxQvmXZC3qaaqySBC2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Certificate Builder for Instructors

Instructors can also create certificates and assign them to their courses. First, make sure that you have enabled **Allow Instructors to Create Certificates** in the **MS LMS Settings**:

<figure><img src="/files/qybh0Ulap1FDHNWGAbJ8" alt=""><figcaption><p><strong>WP Dashboard > Settings > Certificates > Allow Instructors to Create Certificates</strong></p></figcaption></figure>

Instructors can access the feature by following their dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/EyAjEDehlK7abKMzW0fA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

On this page, the list of the previously created certificates of the instructors will be displayed. Instructors can create new certificates or modify the existing ones from here.

<figure><img src="/files/wRXIroetSxlDtNk5csPM" alt=""><figcaption><p>Instructor Dashboard > Certificates</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Certificates of other users are not accessible to edit to each other. However, they can use the certificates on your website in their courses.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

Instructors can link the certificates to their courses from the respective tab of the Course Builder:

<figure><img src="/files/ZEz7fOgs7KJ9DsYLVV51" alt=""><figcaption><p>Course Builder > Settings > Certificates</p></figcaption></figure>

## Certificate Verification

In **MasterStudy LMS,** certificates of completion can be verified in several ways.

### QR-Code Verification

QR-code verification is the best way to check the certificates. You have to put a special [**QR-code element**](#qr-code) using Certificate Builder.

<figure><img src="/files/o5FoE0aUIl9sbjv8Rheb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Once the QR code is scanned, the user will be redirected to the special public **Certificate Page** where the certificate, social media share, and download  button, and links to the completed course are displayed:

<figure><img src="/files/plZQC9rtfM1RwWPbDPY3" alt=""><figcaption><p>Certificate Page</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
To use this function, the Certificate Page should be selected in the **MasterStudy LMS Settings > LMS Pages > Certificate Page.**
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/dw0V6iwweJppeRKBKWmk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Certificate Checker Widget

Alternatively, certificates can be checked using their special[ **Certificate ID**](#certificate-code). To do it, a special Certificate Checker Widget for  [Elementor](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets#certificate-checker-pro-version) or WP Bakery should be placed on some page.  Alternatively, the following shortcode can be placed to get the **Certificate Checker:**

```
[stm_lms_certificate_checker title="Certificate Verification"]
```

<figure><img src="/files/G0Vb1OaPiSJZN3orF9MR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Users should paste the **Certificate ID** to verify it.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/Zu2tSqjdPR43tLQU2KJT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

[^1]: WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Settings > Certificates

[^2]: Course Builder > Settings > Certificate


# Subscriptions

The **Subscriptions** add-on allows you to offer students flexible access to your courses through recurring payments and membership plans. Instead of purchasing individual courses, learners can subscribe to a plan that grants access to selected courses, bundles, categories, or the entire site. Administrators can easily create and manage different subscription types, set pricing and billing periods, and control which content each plan includes, providing a convenient and automated way to run a sustainable learning platform.

<figure><img src="/files/f6J5RYNrMxjcaT2Q1IQK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<details>

<summary>What is the difference between Subscriptions and Memberships?</summary>

In **MasterStudy LMS**, both **Memberships** and **Subscriptions** provide recurring access to courses, but they differ in **how** that access is structured:

* **Memberships** are broader and usually define access based on **content grouping**. For example, a membership plan can include all courses in a specific [category](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/courses-category), or even the entire site. Students who join a membership can access everything included in that plan as long as their payment is active.
* **Subscriptions** are more **plan-based** and focus on giving access through **recurring payments** tied to a specific course or group of courses. A subscription is linked to a single course and automatically renews at a chosen interval.

</details>

## Addon Settings

{% hint style="warning" %}
The Subscriptions addon integrates MasterStudy's native subscriptions and membership system into your LMS. As the addon uses the [**native payment methods**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods) of MasterStudy LMS, it **will not be available** if you are using [Paid Memberships Pro](/masterstudy-lms/additional-features/membership-system) or [WooCommerce](/masterstudy-lms/woocommerce/woocommerce-integration) on your website. You have to deactivate these plugins to use the native membership system using the Subscriptions addon.

Moreover, only **Stripe** and **PayPal** payment methods can be used for subscription and membership purchases. Check one more time that you have provided their [**credentials correctly.**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods#webhook-signature-key-for-subscriptions)&#x20;
{% endhint %}

To activate the addon and give the subscriptions feature to your LMS, follow **WP Dashboard > MasterStudy > Pro Addons** and enable the Subscriptions addon:

<figure><img src="/files/l2PvPoj37IfBaIM94IND" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can reach the addon setting by clicking the gear icon on the Pro Addons page on the top right corner of the addon card, or by following **WP Dashboard > MasterStudy > eCommerce > Subscriptions:**

<figure><img src="/files/aB6E99JLYxzKsx74qr7f" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Allow Instructors to Create Course Subscriptions** - the setting enables instructors to set up subscription plans for their courses in Course Builder.
* **Manage Memberships** - the button directs you to the Membership Management tab, where you can create, edit, and organize various membership plans.

## Membership Plans

Membership plans on the website can be managed by following the **Membership Plans** tab:

<figure><img src="/files/vEnODJ2LAti2Tw1j3VtK" alt=""><figcaption><p>W<strong>P Dashboard > MasterStudy > Membership Plans</strong></p></figcaption></figure>

On this page, you can see all the available membership plans on your site. Here is the breakdown of the table by columns:&#x20;

* **Plan Title** – displays the name of the membership plan as it appears to users on the website.
* **Access Type** – defines the level or scope of content access provided by the plan, such as sitewide or category-based.
* **Renewal Period** – shows how often the membership renews automatically, for example, weekly, monthly, or yearly.
* **Certificate** – indicates whether completing courses under this plan includes certificate eligibility.
* **Trial** – displays the trial duration offered to new subscribers before the first payment is charged.
* **Price** – shows the membership cost, including the current price and any discounted or previous price.
* **Status** – allows enabling or disabling the membership plan to control its availability for users. You can use the toggles to control. Disabled plans will not be accessible to students.

### Create a New Membership Plan

Membership plans will be created for the entire site (all courses) or some specific course categories unless it's [**not restricted**](#how-to-exclude-the-course-from-memberships) in course settings.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
To create one, on the **Memberships tab**, just click on the <kbd>Add New Plan</kbd> button:

<figure><img src="/files/lHGylEdRaO2GmIDbeCak" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
On the opened page, you have to customize your own plan using the plan settings. On the left side, you can see the preview of the plan in real time. Start by providing the **General Info**:

<figure><img src="/files/vCRyuJZrZ6X1IqfcNDDc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### General Info:

* **Title** – sets the name of the membership plan displayed to users on the website.
* **Short Description** – provides a brief explanation or tagline for the plan.
* **Membership Access Type** – defines the scope of access, such as sitewide and category-based.
  * **Sitewide** – gives access to **ALL COURSES** on the website by purchasing the plan.
  * **Category-based** – gives access to all courses in the **selected course categories only**.
    * **Select Categories** – lets you choose specific course categories that will be available under this plan. The section appears if the category-based access type is chosen.
      {% endstep %}

{% step %}
Next, we have to set up the pricing for the plan:

<figure><img src="/files/LNviqf4oDDmVU0JL6GpT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Pricing

* **Price ($)** – determines the amount students pay for the plan (if there is no sale).
* **Billing Interval** – sets how often the payment recurs, such as daily, weekly, monthly, or yearly.
* **Billing Cycles Type** – specifies whether the subscription continues until canceled or for a fixed number of cycles.
* **Number of Cycles** – defines the total number of billing periods if the plan is limited. Available if the **Limited Billing Cycles** Type is chosen.
* **Offer Sale Price ($)** – enables a discounted price for the plan.
* **Sale Period** – allows you to schedule the start and end date and time for the sale price.
  {% endstep %}

{% step %}
Lastly, enter the features you want to highlight in the plan and turn on additional settings according to your needs:

<figure><img src="/files/0KOcsyNX37AZpoUAZzgz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Plan Features** –lists the benefits or privileges included in the membership plan. You can use dragging <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i> to reorder the features and <i class="fa-trash">:trash:</i> to delete the features/
  * **Enter Feature** – lets you add a new feature or highlight to the plan.
* **Trial Period (days)** – sets a free trial duration before the first payment is charged.
* **Mark as Featured** – highlights the plan on the website with a special label.
* **Do Not Provide Certificate** – disables certificates for courses taken under this membership.
  {% endstep %}

{% step %}
Once everything is ready, review them one more time and click on the <kbd>Create</kbd> button:

<figure><img src="/files/TaKVcHXATwwIRUeDw4kf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Now the plan is LIVE, and students can purchase it and get access to the courses that are included. You can check it from the [**Memberships page**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/lms-pages#memberships):

{% hint style="info" %}
First, make sure you have the **Memberships** page from plugin settings. If it's not set up yet, you can [**generate it**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/lms-pages#generate-lms-pages) with one click.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/7QIGghb6zFkriW11T7KA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

### Reorder, Modify, and Delete Plans

You can reorder, edit, and delete the plans right on this page using the specified buttons:

{% hint style="info" %}
Plans appear on your website’s [**Memberships page**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/lms-pages#memberships) in the same order as shown here. Make sure to arrange them carefully to display your plans in the most effective order.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/cC620O14yeLn6dPufZJS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="danger" %}
Before deleting the plan, ensure no active members are using it. Even if there is a student using the plan, you can not delete it.
{% endhint %}

### How to Exclude the Course from Memberships?

If you have a course that needs to be excluded from memberships and should be purchased in a different way, there is a setting called Not included in membership in course settings.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Edit the course you need with Course Builder:

<figure><img src="/files/TUafQHJV18JQDqRF6dQm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Move to the **Pricing** tab and enable the **Not included in membership** option.

<figure><img src="/files/TAB6eqeAYEPI1ANLLyht" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Now this course is not accessible with any membership plan.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Subscriptions

**Subscription** is a recurring payment option that gives students continuous access to the course and learning materials as long as their payment remains active. It simplifies enrollment and billing by automatically renewing access at regular intervals, such as weekly, monthly, or yearly. Subscriptions help instructors and administrators offer flexible pricing, retain learners for longer periods, and manage course access automatically without manual renewals.

{% hint style="info" %}
In short, the main purpose of a subscription is to charge students on a recurring basis (daily, weekly, monthly, or yearly) instead of selling lifetime access to a course.
{% endhint %}

### Create a New Subscription Plan

Subscription plans are created individually for each course. A plan made for one course cannot be used for another. To provide access to multiple courses or categories together, use [**membership plans**](#membership-plans) instead.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Edit the course with Course Builder:

<figure><img src="/files/TUafQHJV18JQDqRF6dQm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Move to the Pricing tab and enable Subscriptions:

<figure><img src="/files/8r7ViuXapSw4wuhND4EF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Click on the Add New button:

<figure><img src="/files/HfpUwZTRZiWpG8dw4ars" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
On the opened sidebar, provide the plan details, starting from the title to additional settings:

<figure><img src="/files/TFgy4A2PDFW8maSc8NJR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Title** – sets the name of the subscription plan that students will see on the course page.
* **Price ($)** – determines the amount charged to students for each billing period.
* **Billing Interval** – defines how often the payment recurs, such as weekly, monthly, or yearly.
* **Billing Cycles Type** – specifies whether the subscription continues until canceled or ends after a certain number of billing cycles.
* **Number of Cycles** – sets how many times the payment will be repeated if the subscription is limited.
* **Offer Sale Price ($)** – allows setting a discounted price for the plan.
* **Sale Period** – lets you schedule the start and end date and time when the sale price is active.
* **Trial Period (days)** – gives students a free trial for the specified number of days before the first payment.
* **Mark as Featured** – highlights the plan with a custom label, making it more noticeable on the course page.
* **Do Not Provide Certificate** – disables certificates for students subscribed to this plan.

{% hint style="success" %}
At the bottom of the sidebar, you can see the real-time preview of the plan.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Once you are done, review one more time and click on Create:

<figure><img src="/files/1mpZdzxedBJymRlxAsEm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
You can add as many plans as you need:

<figure><img src="/files/iBJuCmBHNl7NxHWGR2YZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

Here is how it will look on the course page:

<figure><img src="/files/KXu8IZu0dIOeHwpZ0y0N" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Modify and Remove Subscriptions

On the Pricing tab, you can see the active subscription for the course and delete or modify it with specific buttons:

<figure><img src="/files/9RahwGhBHOCdcMPHAwLz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Subscriptions and Memberships Management

### Admin

Admin has access to monitor and manage all subscriptions and membership sales on the **WP Dashboard >. MasterStudy > Subscriptions & Memberships** page:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/tFG59IaQzgvOu0ivzvHn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The page has been organized into two tabs:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Subscriptions" %}
Displays all subscription sales on the website with their status and other related info:

<figure><img src="/files/YD02NdGhdGVXLwp6TJ0T" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Memberships" %}
Displays all membership plan sales on the website with their status and other related info:

<figure><img src="/files/heBs5Cfu3bGgB0n3s49W" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

By clicking the View button, all related info of the purchased subscription/membership with payment history will be displayed:

<figure><img src="/files/pnWFJ0Q0duc0tbIXdo95" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is the result:

<figure><img src="/files/GKZvIydLBt9yYXOOWpvL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Additionally, the purchase will be available in the [**Orders**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/orders) page as well.
{% endhint %}

#### Cancel the Subscription/Membership

On the same page, the admin can cancel the subscription:

<figure><img src="/files/4KhTgh4Fn6xqh2WVMoQp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="danger" %}
Once the plan is cancelled, the student will lose access to all course materials included in the plan.
{% endhint %}

### Instructor

Instructors can also create and manage subscriptions and membership purchases for their courses directly from their dashboard by visiting the [**My Sales**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/orders/sales-page-for-instructor) tab:

<figure><img src="/files/2xLBd4ySJWmQZNNcxv8R" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Under the Subscription tab of the My Sales page, an instructor can also manage (check/cancel) the subscription of their own courses [as an admin.](#cancel-the-subscription-membership)

### Student

Students can also manage their purchased memberships and subscriptions on their dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/YW4AHb6ySW5JRajjUUmW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Example Purchase of Membership/Subscription

Let's summarize and check how students will purchase the subscription/membership plan we created. We will purchase a course right from the course page:

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Open the needed course and click on the **Get Course** button. You will see the available options:

<figure><img src="/files/TTMG0n2DJtcIEOIfrefA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Let's buy the course with Memberships. Choose the plan you liked and go to the cart:

<figure><img src="/files/rsiXOTpQNW8NX6UE2W5y" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Enter the billing info and a convenient payment method:

<figure><img src="/files/HxaroEsEA39EMYUZ1Ol6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

If the plan has limited billing cycles, related info will also be displayed:

<figure><img src="/files/j5E33ddvX0Mt30oDiIkG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

That's it! We have purchased the plan!

<figure><img src="/files/gHwBJMjXsyA1PlA7NWXY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## FAQ

<details>

<summary><strong>Can I include multiple courses in one plan?</strong></summary>

Yes. To give access to many courses at once, create a [**membership plan.**](#create-a-new-membership-plan)

</details>

<details>

<summary><strong>What happens if the admin deactivates a plan?</strong></summary>

New students can not enroll into the deactivated plan. Students who purchased it earlier will continue to pay and use it until the admin manually cancels their subscription.

</details>

<details>

<summary><strong>If the price changes, what happens to existing users?</strong></summary>

If a student bought the plan for ten dollars and the admin later changes the price to twenty, existing subscribers will continue to pay the original ten dollars.

</details>

<details>

<summary><strong>Can students buy multiple subscriptions at the same time?</strong></summary>

Yes. Students can purchase two or more subscriptions and keep them active simultaneously.

</details>

<details>

<summary><strong>How do recurring payments work?</strong></summary>

Payments are charged automatically at the chosen billing interval. Access continues as long as payments are successful.

</details>

<details>

<summary><strong>Can students cancel their plan?</strong></summary>

Yes. Students can cancel at any time from their account. Access remains active until the paid period ends.

</details>

<details>

<summary><strong>Are taxes applied to recurring subscription payments?</strong></summary>

Yes. If taxes are enabled, they apply not only to the first payment but also to every recurring charge in the subscription.

</details>

<details>

<summary><strong>What happens if a recurring payment fails?</strong></summary>

If a recurring payment does not go through, the system pauses the subscription, and access to the course is removed. Access will be restored once the payment is successful again.

</details>


# Email Manager and Branding

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BuD8xm_fGY4>" %}

**Email Template Manager** — LMS addon that will help you adjust your email messages and make them look good and clear.

To enable the addon, go to **MS LMS > Addons**. Find their Email manager addon and **Enable** it.

<figure><img src="/files/vUhLhTZIPYt1V8l5REIw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After enabling the addon, you can see the Email Manager settings menu on the dashboard under the MS LMS section:

<figure><img src="/files/mDhjMEcU8NNHVSlHTwjX" alt=""><figcaption><p>Email Manager Tab in the WP Dashboard</p></figcaption></figure>

Modifying outgoing emails in MasterStudy consists of two parts:&#x20;

* [**Email Branding**](#email-branding) - update the **visual elements** such as header & footer images, logo, and footer text.
* [**Email Templates**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager/email-templates) - modifying the **texts (main content)** of the email templates.&#x20;

## Email Branding

### Default Email Template

<figure><img src="/files/lXPjXPdpqmXX451G83lj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

All outgoing Emails of the MasterStudy LMS will be sent using the default Email template:

<figure><img src="/files/u6bfmiQIhuh7in0LdhhY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Header & Footer

By uploading a custom logo, and background images for the header & footer you can customize the template to match the general styles of the installed theme and your brand:

<figure><img src="/files/hPhaetEFbRMKRhDDgNtJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Header & Footer** - enables or disables the header and footer part of the email.
* **Logo** - appears at the top center of the Email header and the recommended size is 200x35 pixels, max height: 40px. File Support: jpg, .jpeg, or .png.
* **Header Background** - Background image for the header part of the email. The .jpg, .jpeg, or .png files are supported, and the recommended size is 700x95 pixels and max-height: 100px.
* **Footer Background** - Background image for the footer part of the email. The .jpg, .jpeg, or .png files are supported and the recommended size is 700x155 pixels, and the max height: 160px.
* **Entire Background Color** - Background overlay color.

<figure><img src="/files/xkKuYHfd42LevWnX3qrA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

When Header & Footer is disabled Emails will be sent without Branding:

<figure><img src="/files/iMVxJJuD7wQnEN7sk7Pq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Copyrights

In the Copyrights section, you can edit the content that displays the footer part of the email:

{% hint style="success" %}
By typing <kbd>{</kbd> you can get the list of available Smart Tags that can be used in any field of the email message, even in the subject.  Alternatively you can use the special <kbd>Add Smart Tag</kbd> button.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/jW0WFMt8zOYyJLt2Vxa8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Disable Email Branding

By disabling **Email Branding,** custom HTML templates can be used for each Email Template.

<figure><img src="/files/2qapQMuiDtV4Fs0NKLRt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
If Email Branding is disabled, you have to provide a custom HTML template for each email in the [Email Template](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager/email-templates). Check[ **this out**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager/email-templates#applying-custom-html-templates) to learn how to provide a Custom HTML email template.
{% endhint %}


# Email Templates

## Overview of Email Templates

On the settings page, you can find all the email templates you have on your website. By expanding them you will find some settings to adjust.  Switch the tabs to set up the required template.

<figure><img src="/files/dmGPTUAsBZnOeTCC6v8E" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Each email template consists of:

<figure><img src="/files/VUHwgvKbDi5T5Qmqh33W" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Condition - a** condition under which the email will be sent. You can disable it using the toggle, preventing emails from being sent under this condition.
* **Subject -** the subject line of the email.
* **Main Content Editor** - **WYSIWYG** (What You See Is What You Get) editor that gives you different options to style your text. There is an option to switch to an **HTML editor** using the <kbd>**<>**</kbd> button.&#x20;
* **Smart Tags -** shortcodes that the system will replace while email is sending. For example `{{current_date}}` smart tag will be replaced by the date on which this email is being sent.
* **Send Test Email** - special button to send test email to admin.

{% hint style="success" %}
Smart **Tags** can be used both in the **Main Email Body** as well as **Email Subject.**&#x20;
{% endhint %}

In addition to the <kbd>Add Smart Tag</kbd> button, you can type <kbd>{</kbd> symbol, and the system automatically displays the available smart tags that you can use in the main content or email subject:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/nnSqwgFSMaVKFUYl7IlY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Email Templates

Email templates for MasterStudy LMS have been organized into several tabs according to recipients and System Notifications.  &#x20;

### Emails to Admin

On this tab, all emails sent to the admin under different conditions can be managed.

<figure><img src="/files/IIULXwtUQoVZLW68vm4l" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is the list of email templates for the current tab:

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="241">Template Name</th><th width="455">Condition</th><th>Smart Tags</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>New User Signed Up </td><td>Sent when there is a new successfull user registration. It has been sent after the user activates his account if <a href="/pages/MYr7JV1cjgr9MPU3Ce4Z#enable-e-mail-confirmation"><strong>Email Confirmation</strong></a> is enabled.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – login of the user on your website</li><li><code>{{user_email}}</code> – email of the user registered on your website</li><li><code>{{registration_date}}</code> – date of registration</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of your website</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL of the website</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>New Course Action by Instructor</td><td>Sent when an instructor adds a new course.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{action}}</code> – added or updated action by instructor</li><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – instructor login</li><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – title of the course</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> - title of the website</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date when the instructor added the course</li><li><code>{{dashboard_url}}</code> - URL link to the admin dashboard</li><li><code>{{course_edit_url}}</code> - URL link to edit the course</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL link of the course</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Course Assigned to Student</td><td>Sent when a course is added to a user.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – course title</li><li><code>{{login}}</code> – student login</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - issue date of  the event</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL link of the course</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>New Order Notification</td><td>Sent when a new <a href="/pages/-Mdercuklo_mCRhfFIQx"><strong>order</strong></a> is placed.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – student login</li><li><code>{{student_email}}</code> - email address of the student</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - issue date of  the event</li></ul><p><strong>Additional Settings of the Template</strong></p><ul><li><strong>Date</strong> - inserts order creation date</li><li><strong>Order ID</strong> - inserts a unique Order ID</li><li><strong>Title</strong> - inserts the system-generated title</li><li><strong>Items List</strong> - list of courses, bundles, or group courses included in the order</li><li><strong>Customer Section</strong> - purchaser's info</li><li><strong>Button</strong> - a button redirects to check the full info about the order</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Course Assigned to Student with Membership</td><td>Sent when a course is added via <a href="/pages/-MdeuIM0tGgOnN7VReAr"><strong>membership plan.</strong></a></td><td><ul><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – course title</li><li><code>{{membership_plan}}</code> – plan name</li><li><code>{{login}}</code> - login of the student</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - issue date of  the event</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL link of the course</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Instructor Application Submitted<mark style="color:red;"><strong>*</strong></mark></td><td>Sent when a user submits the <a href="/pages/-MdepjP_BuCf9uP5xPfb"><strong>Become an Instructor form.</strong></a></td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – user login</li><li><code>{{user_id}}</code> – user ID</li><li><code>{{user_email}}</code> – email of the user</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> - title of the website</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> – application date</li><li><code>{{degree}}</code> – user’s degree</li><li><code>{{expertise}}</code> – field of expertise</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>New Enterprise Request</td><td>Sent when a user submits an enterprise request form.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{name}}</code> – name of the student</li><li><code>{{email}}</code> – email of the user</li><li><code>{{text}}</code> – message from the user</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> – request submission date</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> - title of your website</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> — URL link of your website</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Weekly/Monthly Summary Reports<mark style="color:red;"><strong>**</strong></mark></td><td>This condition sends emails to the admin to notify about the courses and their progress, revenue, reviews, and engagement on the platform. The email type is recurring, which means that the system will send an email to the admin according to the time setting that you set here:</td><td><ul><li><code>{{instructor_name}}</code> – name of the instructor</li><li><code>{{analytics_url}}</code> – URL that redirects to Analytics page</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> – request submission date</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> - title of your website</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> — URL link of your website</li></ul><p><strong>Additional Settings of the Template</strong></p><ul><li><strong>Frequency</strong> - set the frequency of the recurring email. Available options are weekly and monthly.</li><li><strong>Day of the week</strong> - choose which day of the week is the most suitable to send the email.  </li><li><strong>Time</strong> - choose the time of the day that the emails should be sent.</li><li><strong>Title</strong> - enter the subject of the email.</li><li><strong>Message</strong> - enter your introduction message that will be displayed before the analytics.</li></ul></td></tr></tbody></table>

*<mark style="color:red;">**\***</mark>fields of the **Become Instructor Form** may differ based on your setup in* [***LMS Forms Editor***](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/lms-form-editor)***.***\
*<mark style="color:red;">**\*\***</mark>Analytics for the email will be automatically added by the system.*&#x20;

### Emails to Instructors

On this tab, all emails sent to the admin under different conditions can be managed.

<figure><img src="/files/uKyG9dnTgDzm8twwIibB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is the list of email templates for the current tab:

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="240">Template Name</th><th width="436">Condition</th><th>Smart Tags</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Instructor's Course Published</td><td>Sent when a course created by the instructor is published.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – title of the course</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> - title of the website</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date when the course is published and accessible to students</li><li><code>{{course_edit_url}}</code> - URL link to edit the course</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL link of the course</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>New Q&#x26;A Message from Student</td><td>Sent when a new comment is posted in the lesson's <strong>Discussion</strong> section by a student. </td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – student login</li><li><code>{{comment_content}}</code> – a message content left by the student</li><li><code>{{lesson_title}}</code> – title of the lesson comment has been published</li><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – title of the course comment has been published</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL link of the course</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – the title of your website</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date when the message has been sent</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>New Order Notification</td><td>Sent to instructor when students buys his course or course bundle succesfully.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – student login</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL of the website</li><li><code>{{student_email}}</code> - email address of the student</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - issue date of  the event</li></ul><p><strong>Additional Settings of the Template</strong></p><ul><li><strong>Date</strong> - inserts order creation date</li><li><strong>Order ID</strong> - inserts a unique Order ID</li><li><strong>Title</strong> - inserts the system-generated title</li><li><strong>Items List</strong> - list of courses, bundles, or group courses included in the order</li><li><strong>Customer Section</strong> - purchaser's info</li><li><strong>Button</strong> - a button redirects to check the full info about the order</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Quiz Completed</td><td>Sent when a student completes a quiz.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – student login</li><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – course title</li><li><code>{{quiz_name}}</code> – quiz name</li><li><code>{{quiz_result}}</code> - final result of the quiz</li><li><code>{{quiz_completion_date}}</code> - date when student completed the quiz</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li><li><code>{{quiz_url}}</code> - URL link of the quiz</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>A Student Completed Course</td><td>Sent when student completes the course succesfully.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – student login</li><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – course title</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> – URL link of the course</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Lesson completion notification</td><td>Sent when student completes a lesson successfully.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – student login</li><li><code>{{lesson_title}}</code> – title of the lesson comment has been published</li><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – title of the course comment has been published</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL link of the course</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – the title of your website</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date when the message has been sent</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>New Course Enrollment</td><td>Sent when student enrolled to the instructor's course</td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> - the login of the instructor</li><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> - title of the course that has a new  enrollment</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date of enrollment</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>New Assignment Submission</td><td>Sent when a new assignment is submitted by a student.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – student login</li><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – title of the  course that the student completed an assignment</li><li><code>{{assignmentn_title}}</code> – title of the assignment in the course</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - issue date of  the event</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Course rejection notification</td><td>Sent when instructor's course rejectted by admin. Email will be active if <a href="/pages/-MdehSr-zKU7vzW8E7fL#enable-course-pre-moderation"><strong>Course Premodedration</strong></a> setting is enabled.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{admin_email}}</code> – email address of admin to contact</li><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – title of the rejected course</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - issue date of  the event</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Weekly/Monthly Summary Reports</td><td>This condition sends emails to instructors to notify them about their course progress, revenue, reviews, and the engagement of their students on your platform. This email type is recurring, which means that the system will send emails to instructors according to the time settings.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{instructor_name}}</code> – name of the instructor</li><li><code>{{analytics_url}}</code> – URL that redirects to the Analytics page</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> – request submission date</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> - title of your website</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> — URL link of your website</li></ul><p><strong>Additional Settings of the Template</strong></p><ul><li><strong>Frequency</strong> - set the frequency of the recurring email. Available options are weekly and monthly.</li><li><strong>Day of the week</strong> - choose which day of the week is the most suitable to send the email.  </li><li><strong>Time</strong> - choose the time of the day that the emails should be sent.</li><li><strong>Title</strong> - enter the subject of the email.</li><li><strong>Message</strong> - enter your introduction message that will be displayed before the analytics.</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Instructor Application Approved</td><td>Sent when admin <strong>approves</strong> the <strong>become instructor form</strong> submitted by user</td><td><ul><li><code>{{instuctor_name}}</code> – full name of the instructor</li><li><code>{{login_url}}</code> – URL that brings the instructor to the sign-in page</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – the title of your website</li><li><code>{{admin_comment}}</code> - the comment has been made in response to the request by the admin</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date of approval</li></ul></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Emails to Students

On this tab, all emails sent to the admin under different conditions can be managed.

<figure><img src="/files/SsN5QDZviC0VUMzxHoxK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is the list of email templates for the current tab:

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="273">Template Name</th><th width="419">Condition</th><th>Smart Tags</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Q&#x26;A Message Answered</td><td>Sent when there is a new reply to the question in the lesson's <strong>Discussion</strong> section</td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – user login who replied</li><li><code>{{comment_content}}</code> – a message content left by the user</li><li><code>{{lesson_title}}</code> – title of the lesson comment has been published</li><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – title of the course comment has been published</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL link of the course</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – the title of your website</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date when the message has been sent</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Students Manually Enrolled (via Manage Students)</td><td>Sent when student has been added to the course using Manage Students tab by admin/instructor.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{username}}</code> – student login</li><li><code>{{password}}</code> – student password to sign-in</li><li><code>{{lesson_title}}</code> – title of the lesson comment has been published</li><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – title of the course comment has been published</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL link of the course</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – the title of your website</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date when the message has been sent</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Order Notification</td><td>Sent when a user places a new order.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – student login</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - issue date of  the event</li></ul><p><strong>Additional Settings of the Template</strong></p><ul><li><strong>Date</strong> - inserts order creation date</li><li><strong>Order ID</strong> - inserts a unique Order ID</li><li><strong>Title</strong> - inserts the system-generated title</li><li><strong>Items List</strong> - list of courses, bundles, or group courses included in the order</li><li><strong>Button</strong> - a button redirects to check the full info about the order</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Course Assigned</td><td>Sent when a course is added to a student's account.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – course title</li><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – student login</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - issue date of  the event</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL link of the course</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Removed from Course</td><td>Sent when student has been removed from the course.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – student login</li><li><code>{{instructor_name}}</code> – name of the instructor who removed a student from the course</li><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – title of the course</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - issue date of  the event</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Reminder to Inactive Students</td><td>Sent when a student has not logged into the site for a specified number of days, reminding them to return and continue their learning.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – student login</li><li><code>{{login_url}}</code> - URL link to sign in </li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - issue date of  the event</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li><li><code>{{inactivity_period}}</code> - number of inactive days</li></ul><p><strong>Additional Settings of the Template</strong></p><ul><li><strong>Send After (Days of Inactivity)</strong> - set the number of inactive days after which the reminder email will be sent. </li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Student Completed Quiz</td><td>Sent when a student completes a quiz.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – student login</li><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – course title</li><li><code>{{quiz_name}}</code> – quiz name</li><li><code>{{quiz_result}}</code> - final result of the quiz</li><li><code>{{quiz_passing_grade}}</code> – <a href="/pages/-MderPCkfaaeL6UYHpuO#quiz-settings">passing grade</a> of the quiz</li><li><code>{{quiz_url}}</code> - URL link of the quiz</li><li><code>{{attempt_url}}</code> - URL link of the quiz attempt</li><li><code>{{attempt_number}}</code> - the order number of the quiz attempt</li><li><code>{{quiz_completion_date}}</code> - date when student completed the quiz</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Course Completed</td><td>Sent when student comletes the course succesfully.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> - student login</li><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> - course title</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL link of the course</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Course Enrollment Expired</td><td>Sent when course enrollment period of the studednt is expired. It works only in courses which is Time Limit <a data-footnote-ref href="#user-content-fn-1">enabled</a>.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – course title</li><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – student login</li><li><code>{{course_expiration_date}}</code> - expiration date of the course</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL link of the course</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Course Assigned with Membership</td><td>Sent when a user receives a course through a <a href="/pages/-MdeuIM0tGgOnN7VReAr"><strong>membership plan.</strong></a></td><td><ul><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – course title</li><li><code>{{membership_plan}}</code> – plan name</li><li><code>{user_login}}</code> - login of the student</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - issue date of  the event</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL link of the course</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>New Announcement Posted</td><td>Sent when the instructor posts a new <a href="/pages/Xq2cfVbJDCjUEpT3zdk4"><strong>course announcement.</strong></a></td><td><ul><li><code>{{mail}}</code> – content of the announcement</li><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – instructor login</li><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – title of the course</li><li><code>{{instuctor_name}}</code> – full name of the instructor</li><li><code>{{mail}}</code> - announcement content</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL link of the course</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> - title of the website</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date when the instructor published the announcement</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Assignment Graded</td><td>Sent when the status of a student's assignment is updated.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{date}}</code> - issue date of  the event</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>New Group Invitation</td><td>Sent when a user is invited to join a new group.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{group_name}}</code> – name of the group</li><li><code>{{admin_login}}</code> - login of the group admin who invited the student</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date of invitation</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> - title of your website</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of your website</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Enterprise Group Credentials Sent</td><td>Sent when a user is added to a <a href="/pages/-MdenktxwtyHAfgCygIS"><strong>group</strong> </a>with login credentials.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{username}}</code> – student's username</li><li><code>{{password}}</code> – password to access his profile</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> - title of your website</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> – URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{login_url}}</code> – URL link that redirects to the sign-in page</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date of  the event</li><li><code>{{group_name}}</code> – name of the group</li><li><code>{{admin_login}}</code> - login of the group admin who invited the student</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>New Course Assigned for Enterprise Group</td><td>Sent when a new course becomes available in the <a href="/pages/-MdenktxwtyHAfgCygIS"><strong>group</strong></a>.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{admin_login}}</code> – admin login</li><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> - student login</li><li> <code>{{group_name}}</code> – group name</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – site name</li><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – course title</li><li><code>{{user_url}}</code>  - URL link redirects to the student profile</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> – URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date of  the event</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Removed from Enterprise Group</td><td>Sent when group admin removes the student from the <a href="/pages/-MdenktxwtyHAfgCygIS"><strong>enterprise group</strong></a>.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{admin_login}}</code> – admin login</li><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> - student login</li><li> <code>{{group_name}}</code> – group name</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – site name</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> – URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date of  the event</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Course Progress Update</td><td>Sends emails to students to notify them about their progress on your platform. This email type is recurring, which means that the system will send emails to students according to the time setting that you set.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> - student login</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – site name</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> – URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date of  the event</li></ul><p><strong>Additional Setting of the Template</strong></p><ul><li><strong>Frequency</strong> - set the frequency of the recurring email. Available options are weekly and monthly.</li><li><strong>Day of the week</strong> - choose which day of the week is the most suitable to send the email.  </li><li><strong>Time</strong> - choose the time of the day that the emails should be sent.</li><li><strong>Title</strong> - enter the subject of the email.</li><li><strong>Message</strong> - enter your introduction message that will be displayed before the analytics.</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Course Now Available for Completion</td><td>Sent when a course becomes available for completion/enroll.  The template can be activated if <a href="/pages/Nx3e3jEIOx7Wi1E4UNEn"><strong>Upcoming Course Status</strong> </a>addon is enabled.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – title of the course</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - issue date of  the event</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> - student login</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL address of the course</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Course Available for Pre-Sale</td><td>Sent when a course is available for pre-sale. The template can be activated if <a href="/pages/Nx3e3jEIOx7Wi1E4UNEn"><strong>Upcoming Course Status</strong> </a>addon is enabled.</td><td><p></p><ul><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – title of the course</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - issue date of  the event</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> - student login</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL address of the course</li><li><code>{{instructor_name}}</code> - full name of the instructor</li><li><code>{{upcoming_date}}</code> - expected pre-sale date of the course</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Course Start Date Updated</td><td>Sent when the start date of a course is changed.  The template can be activated if <a href="/pages/Nx3e3jEIOx7Wi1E4UNEn"><strong>Upcoming Course Status</strong> </a>addon is enabled.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> – title of the course</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - issue date of  the event</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> - student login</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL address of the course</li><li><code>{{instructor_name}}</code> - full name of the instructor</li><li><code>{{upcoming_date}}</code> - expected pre-sale date of the course</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Course Certificate Issued</td><td>Sent when students earns a certificate by completing required progress in the course.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{date}</code> – certificate achieved date</li><li><code>{{certificate_preview}}</code> – preview image of the certificate</li><li><code>{{button}}</code> – button that redirects to the<a href="/pages/-Mdeh5W5VDHawA32QwLm#certificate-page"> <strong>Certificate page.</strong></a></li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL of the website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - issue date of  the event</li><li><code>{{course_title}}</code> - title of the completed course</li><li><code>{{course_url}}</code> - URL of the course</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Instructor Application Rejected</td><td>Sent when admin rejects the <a href="/pages/-MdepjP_BuCf9uP5xPfb"><strong>become instructor form</strong></a> submitted by user.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{instuctor_name}}</code> – full name of the instructor</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – the title of your website</li><li><code>{{admin_comment}}</code> - the comment has been made in response to the request by admin</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date of denial</li></ul></td></tr></tbody></table>

### System Notifications

Under this tab, you can manage the system notification emails sent to users, mainly about user account management.

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="243">Template Name</th><th width="426">Condition</th><th>Smart Tags</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Account Approval Required</td><td>Sends email notifications with the special URL-link to users to activate their newly registered accounts. Works  when <a href="/pages/MYr7JV1cjgr9MPU3Ce4Z#enable-e-mail-confirmation"><strong>Email Confirmation</strong></a> is enabled.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of your website</li><li><code>{{reset_url}}</code> – URL link that the user should click on to activate his account</li><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – login of the user on your website</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date of registration</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Welcome Email After Registration<br></td><td>Sends a welcome message to users  after the succesfull registration on your platform.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of your website</li><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – login of the user on your website</li><li><code>{{user_id}}</code> - unique ID of the user</li><li><code>{{login_url}}</code> – URL link that redirects to the sign-in page</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> - URL of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date of registration</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Password Reset Request</td><td>Sent when user clicks on the <strong>Forgot Password</strong> link on the sign-in/up page. </td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – login of the user on your website</li><li><code>{{reset_url}}</code> – URL link that opens a special page to reset the password and set a new one</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of your website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date of request</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td>Password Successfully Changed</td><td>Send when user changed his password.</td><td><ul><li><code>{{user_login}}</code> – login of the user on your website</li><li><code>{{blog_name}}</code> – title of your website</li><li><code>{{site_url}}</code> – URL link of the website</li><li><code>{{date}}</code> - date when the password changes</li></ul></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Adding Hyperlinks to Email Templates

Shortcodes can be added as hyperlinks to texts in the WYSIWYG editor. Let's see a clear example.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
To do it,  first copy or cut the smart tag added to the editor that returns the URL address:

<figure><img src="/files/0rEtqLkDJ8XpXpKfVDBm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Click on the **hyperlink** button and add the shortcode to the **URL** field:

<figure><img src="/files/1F7Terhk7iFDLy9xONFN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
That's it, here is how it will look:

<figure><img src="/files/3LdBTN3VS10WrFH779zr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Applying Custom HTML Templates

After disabling [**Email Branding**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager#disable-email-branding), you have to provide HTML templates for **each**[ **email template**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager/email-templates) using the **WYSIWYG** (What You See Is What You Get) editor. Use the <kbd>**<>**</kbd> button to switch to the **HTML editor**:

<figure><img src="/files/BBauCfu7DtnQmALGqiKz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After entering the HTML Code, you can press the <kbd>**<>**</kbd> button again to see how it appears:

<figure><img src="/files/Saxtx4DXqnqrF83cHk5Y" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The source code from the above screenshot generates the following content:

<figure><img src="/files/KULzSaOnKGPUacWYjVEX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
While adding custom HTML templates, it is necessary to use shortcodes from the Message section to send LMS emails properly.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/lcx3hzO5JMtQh9BkWt3R" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The user will receive the same email with the custom template:

<figure><img src="/files/FMVW6KYwKK4jpm7qMtn5" alt=""><figcaption><p>The Result of Custom HTML template</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
With the HTML codes you provided, all email templates can have their **unique** styles.
{% endhint %}

[^1]: Course Builder > Settings >  Access > Time Limits > Course  Expiratdion (days) &#x20;


# ✨AI Lab

Pro Plus Feature

**AI Lab** is a powerful add-on designed to simplify and accelerate course creation within your learning management system. By integrating artificial intelligence into the content-building process, AI Lab allows instructors to generate entire courses, lessons, quizzes, assignments, and even visuals from a single input.

Whether you are creating a course from scratch or enhancing existing content, **AI Lab** helps you work faster, smarter, and with more creativity. It removes the manual workload and lets you focus on teaching, while AI cares for structure, flow, and variety.

**✅ With AI Lab, you can:**

* Generate [**full course**](#how-to-generate-course-with-ai) structures with titles, descriptions, and outlines
* Create interactive and [**well-organized lessons**](#craft-lessons-with-ai)
* Automatically produce[ **quizzes and assignments** ](#craft-quizzes-with-ai)aligned with your content
* Add relevant images to your lessons using [**AI image generation**](#image-generation-with-ai)
* Instantly rewrite or[ **improve any text content**](#improving-content-with-ai) across your course

This documentation will guide you through installing the add-on, using each feature effectively, and customizing the output to fit your teaching style.

## AI Lab Addon Settings

AI Lab addon can be activated by following **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Pro Addons > AI Lab:**

<figure><img src="/files/fLmt1WpOUAX1ENC3WciL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Once you have enabled the add-on, you can reach its settings by clicking the gear :gear: icon or by following **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Settings > AI Lab:**

<figure><img src="/files/1P1XPegISGQxwnDV5ftq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **AI Lab Provider -** choose one of the available AI Providers. MasterStudy LMS is integrated with the most popular AI platforms to provide the best results. You can use any of them according to your needs. Available options are: *OpenAI, Grok, Gemini, Mistral, Claude.*
* **API Key** - Enter your API key for the selected AI Lab Provider. You can obtain the key [**by following these steps.**](#obtain-api-keys-for-ai-lab-providers)
* **Text Model -** Choose the desired AI Lab Provider model to generate text outputs.
* **Image Model**<mark style="color:$danger;">**\***</mark> - Choose the desired AI Lab Provider model to generate image outputs.
* **Number of Text Suggestions** - Select how many variations of AI-generated text you want to receive for each request.
* **Number of Image Suggestions** - Choose how many AI-generated image options to receive. The **DALLE-3** model will be used to generate images.
* **Instructor Access** - Enable or disable AI feature access for instructors. Use the "Manage" button to configure permissions.

<mark style="color:$danger;">**\***</mark> *Image generation is available only in **OpenAI, Grok,** and **Gemini**. If you choose Mistral and Claude as your provider, for image generation, you have to select a partner provider and provide its API Key.*

## Obtain API Keys for AI Lab Providers

There are 5 providers available for AI Lab:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><i class="fa-openai">:openai:</i> <strong>OpenAI</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/JnzyV0Ym7e8dEkGwKYPA#obtain-openai-credentials">/pages/JnzyV0Ym7e8dEkGwKYPA#obtain-openai-credentials</a></td></tr><tr><td><i class="fa-x-twitter">:x-twitter:</i> <strong>Grok</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/JnzyV0Ym7e8dEkGwKYPA#obtain-grok-xai-credentials">/pages/JnzyV0Ym7e8dEkGwKYPA#obtain-grok-xai-credentials</a></td></tr><tr><td><i class="fa-google">:google:</i> <strong>Gemini</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/JnzyV0Ym7e8dEkGwKYPA#obtain-gemini-google-credentials">/pages/JnzyV0Ym7e8dEkGwKYPA#obtain-gemini-google-credentials</a></td></tr><tr><td><i class="fa-mistral">:mistral:</i> <strong>Mistral</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/JnzyV0Ym7e8dEkGwKYPA#obtain-mistral-credentials">/pages/JnzyV0Ym7e8dEkGwKYPA#obtain-mistral-credentials</a></td></tr><tr><td><i class="fa-claude">:claude:</i> <strong>Claude</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/JnzyV0Ym7e8dEkGwKYPA#obtain-claude-anthropic-credentials">/pages/JnzyV0Ym7e8dEkGwKYPA#obtain-claude-anthropic-credentials</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Obtain OpenAI Credentials

To use the AI Lab features in MasterStudy, you need to connect your OpenAI account by entering your API key.

{% hint style="info" %}
OpenAI provides powerful language and image generation tools, but please note that these services **are not free.** Each time you generate text or images through the AI Lab, your usage is counted and charged according to OpenAI’s[ **pricing model**](https://openai.com/api/pricing/)**.** Charges depend on the number of tokens used in your requests or the number and type of images generated.

➡️ [**How to Set Up Billing?**](#how-to-set-up-billing)
{% endhint %}

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Visit <https://platform.openai.com/> and sign in with your **OpenAI** account. If you don't have one, you will need to create it first.

<figure><img src="/files/dqeHnv6GP7h3rzVp3ycB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
After logging in, you should be redirected to the API Keys tab <https://platform.openai.com/api-keys/>, and here you have to click on **Create New Secret Key:**

<figure><img src="/files/ufRhnUYHMFZ0uUKyWvIs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Set the parameters **as above**, **name** your project according to your needs, and click on **Create Secret Key:**

<figure><img src="/files/fnUkVg9ALNAkJ8mZoiWU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Copy the generated **Secret Key:**

<figure><img src="/files/vFHKUm3pRRDkvyWY5adb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Go back to the addon settings, choose OpenAI as provider, then paste the key into the designated field, and save the settings:

<figure><img src="/files/HK0LSeShJZWzw1DbbzTo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

Now you can go and [**set up billing**](#how-to-set-up-billing) to use the feature.

#### How to Set Up OpenAI Billing

OpenAI charges for its API based on usage, so if you haven’t already set up a payment method for billing, you’ll need to do so. **Otherwise, the API key you created won’t function.**

:heavy\_dollar\_sign: **OpenAI Pricing** 👉 <https://openai.com/api/pricing/>

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
To begin, click the settings (gear :gear:) icon in the top right corner of the **API keys** screen:

<figure><img src="/files/kPoP1nIvHooWmjDilJGA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
On the opened page, move to the **Billing tab a**nd click on **Add Payment Details:**

<figure><img src="/files/AaHd1tsD2BKo3hlY5g0a" alt=""><figcaption><p><a href="https://platform.openai.com/settings/organization/billing/overview">https://platform.openai.com/settings/organization/billing/overview</a></p></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Enter your card information and billing:

<figure><img src="/files/0i5W3a6ib85a3rjQR56v" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Set up the payment amount and/or automatic recharge settings according to your needs, and initiate the payment:

<figure><img src="/files/BHfLy5EZ5DnOtIeRbnNv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Now you’ve set up billing, it’s a good idea to set usage limits to control your monthly API spending. Simply click **Limits** in the left menu, set your desired monthly budget, and choose an email notification threshold according to your needs. Finally, click **Save** to apply your settings.

<figure><img src="/files/JzTe1mjc1hrU35k2xTD5" alt=""><figcaption><p><a href="https://platform.openai.com/settings/organization/limits">https://platform.openai.com/settings/organization/limits</a></p></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
You can also check the usage of your API right on the Usage section of the Addon Setting page:

<figure><img src="/files/2aNTYMCQIAAxra9TRpN8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

### Obtain Grok (xAI) Credentials

To use Grok models in AI Lab, you need to connect your xAI account by entering your API key.

{% hint style="info" %}
xAI charges for API usage on a pay-as-you-go basis, and there is no permanent free tier. Each time you generate text or images through AI Lab using Grok, your usage is counted and charged according to xAI's [**pricing model**](https://x.ai/api).

➡️ [**How to Set Up Billing?**](#how-to-set-up-billing-grok)
{% endhint %}

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Visit <https://console.x.ai/> and sign in with your **xAI** account. If you don't have one, you will need to create it first.
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Complete the short onboarding steps (use case, terms acceptance) if prompted.

<figure><img src="/files/utcUlVLnzSKzGDqK8ULt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
If you are creating a new account, you will be given a default API Key and an option to fill out your account. You can skip both:

<figure><img src="/files/k6B97g2T3sHW6VFWaHEI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
In the left sidebar, navigate to **API Keys**, then click **Create API Key:**

<figure><img src="/files/lzhtsfA8obH9uURhWYUh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
**Name** your key according to your needs (e.g., "MasterStudy AI Lab") and click <kbd>**Create**</kbd>**:**

<figure><img src="/files/ynUAx0CvaVx8gElR4dbW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Copy the generated **Secret Key**.&#x20;

{% hint style="warning" %}
**IMPORTANT**

It is only shown once — if you lose it, you'll need to revoke it and create a new one!
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/ITIJG87Dky63hnMM9qvn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Go back to the AI Lab addon settings, select **Grok** as your provider, paste the key into the designated field, and save the settings:

<figure><img src="/files/rcrQ027oNrMi2Ex5JGef" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

Now you can go and **set up billing** to use the feature.

#### **How to Set Up Billing (Grok)**

xAI charges per token used, so you'll need an active payment method before your key will work.

:heavy\_dollar\_sign: **xAI API Pricing** 👉 <https://x.ai/api>

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
In the [xAI Console](https://console.x.ai/), open the **Credits** (*Billing*) section from the left sidebar.

<figure><img src="/files/056gwFcQ7PLQD8LbjxWO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Click **Add Payment Method** and enter your card and billing details.

<figure><img src="/files/hiutJsAUD9glau3FupL0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

New xAI accounts typically receive a small amount of promotional credit that expires after a set period, so you may be able to test the integration before adding a card.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

### Obtain Gemini (Google) Credentials

To use Gemini models in AI Lab, you need to connect your Google account by entering an API key generated through Google AI Studio.

{% hint style="info" %}
Google offers a free tier for Gemini with limited rate limits, but higher-volume use through AI Lab will require billing to be enabled on the linked Google Cloud project. Charges follow Google's [**pricing model**](https://ai.google.dev/gemini-api/docs/pricing).

➡️ [**How to Set Up Billing?**](#how-to-set-up-billing-gemini)
{% endhint %}

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Visit <https://aistudio.google.com/> and sign in with your **Google** account. Then go to [Dashboard](https://aistudio.google.com/u/2/api-keys):

<figure><img src="/files/W9W8XzuHiutDCrgbwnsi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
In the left sidebar under the **API Keys** tab, click on the <kbd>Create API key</kbd> butto&#x6E;**:**

<figure><img src="/files/jvxQR6oWO4pZ78zLWyKr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Name your key and click on the <kbd>Create key</kbd> button:

<figure><img src="/files/2Gefw0ORl9JoSdVpBc3F" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Copy the generated key. Unlike some providers, Google AI Studio lets you view the key again later, but it's still best practice to store it securely right away:

<figure><img src="/files/uRnmUiEBfTrWv195FeCi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
Google now requires Gemini API keys to be **restricted** (scoped to the Generative Language API) rather than left unrestricted. Newly created AI Studio keys are restricted by default — if you're reusing an older key, confirm this under **API Keys** in AI Studio before proceeding.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Go back to the AI Lab addon settings, select **Gemini** as your provider, paste the key into the designated field, and save the settings:

<figure><img src="/files/emcWZ2MZAstgr8HoEQvO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

Now you can go and **set up billing** if you need higher usage limits than the free tier.

#### **How to Set Up Billing (Gemini)**

:heavy\_dollar\_sign: **Gemini API Pricing** 👉 <https://ai.google.dev/gemini-api/docs/pricing>

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
In AI Studio, go to <https://aistudio.google.com/app/apikey> and locate the Google Cloud project linked to your key.

<figure><img src="/files/8f8J6DwCMLKjlK0tyKKC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Free-tier and paid-tier keys use the same key format and endpoint — enabling billing simply removes the free tier's rate limits (requests per minute/day).
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

### Obtain Mistral Credentials

To use Mistral models in AI Lab, you need to connect your Mistral account by entering an API key generated through La Plateforme (Mistral's console).

{% hint style="info" %}
Mistral requires an active billing plan — including its free **Experiment** plan — before an API key will work. Usage beyond the free plan is charged according to Mistral's [**pricing model**](https://mistral.ai/pricing).

➡️ [**How to Set Up Billing?**](#how-to-set-up-billing-mistral)
{% endhint %}

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Visit <https://console.mistral.ai/> and sign up or sign in (email, Google, Microsoft, or Apple). If prompted, complete your workspace setup by providing an organization name.

{% hint style="danger" %}
Before creating a key, open **Billing** **>** [**Subscription** ](https://admin.mistral.ai/subscription)in the left sidebar and choose a plan — even the free **Experiment** plan must be explicitly selected. Skipping this step is the most common reason new keys fail with an authentication error.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/hohojD3PrqSQahjSq4Va" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
In the left sidebar, open **API Keys**

<figure><img src="/files/rHxT47fQWhPi1jh6bT78" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
From the opened pop-up, click <kbd>Create new key</kbd>**:**

<figure><img src="/files/kMcWZoox7YoqlEMs6KjM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Give your key a descriptive **name**, optionally set an expiration date, and confirm:

<figure><img src="/files/V0zbbuRqMn8e11LBoMix" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Copy the generated key immediately — Mistral only shows it once.&#x20;

{% hint style="warning" %}
**IMPORTANT**

If you lose the generated key, you'll need to generate a new one.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/VLCoVWADAG3XQeHRr8tU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Go back to the AI Lab addon settings, select **Mistral** as your provider, paste the key into the designated field, and save the settings:

<figure><img src="/files/ODuzxdOPHruYv46WXRGx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

#### **How to Set Up Billing (Mistral)**

:heavy\_dollar\_sign: **Mistral API Pricing** 👉 <https://mistral.ai/pricing>

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
In the[ Mistral console](https://console.mistral.ai/), open **Billing** from the left sidebar.

<figure><img src="/files/hf4cJk2riS2AFRVhpT1m" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Choose a subscription plan — **Experiment** (free, limited) or **Pay as you go** — and add a payment method if selecting a paid plan.

<figure><img src="/files/0ZqjjHTPHsZE4KdQq3lz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Then, move to the billing tab and set a monthly spending limit under your workspace's billing settings to avoid unexpected charges (optional).

<figure><img src="/files/zhrtrZ6zpp02UoJLTonM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

### Obtain Claude (Anthropic) Credentials

To use Claude models in AI Lab, you need to connect your Anthropic account by entering an API key generated through the Anthropic Console.

{% hint style="info" %}
Anthropic uses a prepaid credit system for API usage — you'll need to add credits before your key can make requests. Charges are counted according to Anthropic's [**pricing model**](https://www.anthropic.com/pricing).

➡️ [**How to Set Up Billing?**](#how-to-set-up-billing-claude)
{% endhint %}

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Visit <https://console.anthropic.com/> and sign up or sign in (email or Google).
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
If this is a new account, complete onboarding by confirming your details, creating an organization (your company name or a descriptive name), and accepting the terms. If you work individually, you can go with the individual plan:

<figure><img src="/files/f3wKlpJFzsC5d37tVwmg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
You might be asked to add funds to your account. However, this step is totally skippable.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
In the left sidebar, go to **Settings > API Keys**, then click <kbd>Create Key</kbd>**:**

<figure><img src="/files/g2ikZnTEr6iNXmhxBnhr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
**Name** your key (e.g. "MasterStudy AI Lab"), choose the workspace and permission level, and confirm:

<figure><img src="/files/1GDzgGkxJVjUYkW1tvcl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Copy the generated key immediately. It starts with `sk-ant-` and is <mark style="color:$warning;">**only shown once**</mark> — **if you close the dialog without copying it, you'll need to revoke it and create a new one:**

<figure><img src="/files/4EdqzthJ8iAZMHzQc0kb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Go back to the AI Lab addon settings, select **Claude** as your provider, paste the key into the designated field, and save the settings:

<figure><img src="/files/EzYJ5ByGSQqdnltuRfRZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

Now you can go and **set up billing** to use the feature.

#### **How to Set Up Billing (Claude)**

A freshly created key cannot make calls until billing is configured — requests will return a billing error otherwise.

:heavy\_dollar\_sign: **Claude API Pricing** 👉 <https://www.anthropic.com/pricing>

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
In the [Anthropic Console](https://platform.claude.com/settings/billing), click **Credits > Billing** in the left sidebar.

<figure><img src="/files/KHFxm5JVKawCq3sJnL5T" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Add a payment method and either pre-purchase credits or enable auto-recharge:

<figure><img src="/files/agUJhCpy5fc8sarf6OnL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Optionally, set a monthly usage limit as a safety cap, then confirm your settings.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## How to Generate Entire Course with AI

The AI Lab add-on allows instructors to generate an entire course in just a few clicks by harnessing the power of artificial intelligence. With a **well-structured prompt**, AI can create comprehensive, well-organized courses with **sections**, **lessons**, **descriptions**, and learning objectives. Based on your input, **AI Lab** will automatically generate:

* Course title, description, and image
* Sections and lesson outlines
* Lesson content with explanations and key points
* Quizzes for selected lessons
* Assignments to reinforce learning
* Suggested images for each lesson
* Course FAQs

{% hint style="info" %}
AI Lab can not generate **audio, video, Google Meet, Stream, or Zoom lessons**. You can use tools to [**improve their text content,**](#improve-content-with-ai) but these kinds of lessons should be [**created** ](#craft-lessons-with-ai)and added manually to the course.
{% endhint %}

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Go to the **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Courses,** then click on the  **Generate Course** button:

<figure><img src="/files/xqHNIyCJG4DsjMnkTgvJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
On the opened page, you will see a special field dedicated to generating a course via prompt using AI. Click on **Generate Entire Course:**

<figure><img src="/files/BinK1vxDPLM7cAvv1P2K" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
**Now, we need a clear and specific prompt that describes your course.**

{% hint style="success" %}

#### 💡 What to include in your prompt:

* **Who is the course for?** Mention the target audience and their skill level.
* **What will learners achieve?** Describe learning goals and outcomes.
* **What topics should it cover?** Name specific subjects, themes, or modules.
* **What should the course image depict?** Help create a relevant and eye-catching visual.
* **Preferred tone or style?** Casual, academic, motivational, etc.
* Optionally, include any preferences for how lessons are written (e.g., “use emojis,” “include examples,” etc).

:white\_check\_mark: **You can** [**later refine**](#improve-content-with-ai) **each lesson using other AI tools in the editor.**
{% endhint %}

📝 **Here is the example prompt:**

> I want to create a course called **"Digital Marketing Basics"** for **young entrepreneurs and students aged 16 to 35**.\
> The course should introduce topics like **SEO, content strategy, social media marketing, and email campaigns**.\
> Learners should gain enough knowledge to start promoting their own brand or freelance service online.
>
> For the course image, please show **a group of diverse students at laptops learning marketing tools** in a modern, colorful setting.\
> Use a **friendly, encouraging tone** with **real-life examples** and **emojis** in the text. Lessons should include short intros and 3–4 key points.

Enter the prompt in the designated area:

<figure><img src="/files/MV1jljYpoVSOyqM5Qpmc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Now, provide the rest of the details of the course and proceed by clicking the **✨Generate Entire Course** button:

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Note** that if you enable **Create course outline** **only** setting, AI will only generate section and lesson titles without any content.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/dDpTygXipx3PO6w5pk9K" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
It takes some time for AI to generate an entire course with lessons. Be patient and **do not close** the tab during the course generation:

<figure><img src="/files/QEWSVZS0qjcwHi1AYa0J" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
You will see the ready course preview with short and long descriptions, course cover image, and curriculum:

{% hint style="info" %}
When it comes to curriculum, only **section** and **lesson titles** will be generated. **Lesson content** will be generated in the next steps.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/bsOElJrky2OvLU4tpkHw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
If you do not like the AI-generated course, you have several options:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Regenerate Course" %}
You can do it by clicking the **Regenerate** button on the right sidebar. It simply regenerates the course without changing your original prompt:

<figure><img src="/files/9KUx6z7IfVDdY5BG6uCX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Change Prompt" %}
If you want to add something or change your ideas, you can try changing your prompt. It can also be done by clicking the **Change prompt** button on the right sidebar:

<figure><img src="/files/gHbYBHLgJjg2pfI83o2O" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Regenerate Curriculum" %}
If you are satisfied with everything except the course curriculum, you can try regenerating it by clicking the **Regenerate Curriculum** button on the top right side of the curriculum section:

<figure><img src="/files/RTbDPaQY0ZZsAgezD40l" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Once you are satisfied with the outputs, proceed by the **Save and Continue** button:

{% hint style="danger" %} <mark style="color:red;">**IMPORTANT**</mark>

**Be careful,** if you **close the tab without clicking the save button**, the generated course **will be lost**. It **will not be saved as a draft either.**
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/nDeToUzJ8Y8Xw4hrkToN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
After that, the system starts generating lesson contents. The same, wait patiently and do not close the tab:

{% hint style="info" %}
Images for the lessons will not be generated in this step. To include illustrations inside lessons, you have to individually add them via Content Generator.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/74PkHdKPvfbZz9qNn2WX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Once it's done, proceed by clicking the **Save and Continue** button:

<figure><img src="/files/ecqvb01PgD5mK6AZwUWv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Now, you can check the contents one by one and the rest of the settings.&#x20;

{% hint style="warning" %}
Please check each lesson, quiz, and assignment and their content one by one. **AI can make mistakes.** You can use individual **AI tools** in each lesson to improve text content and add relevant images.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/6be1jFtRm8FLrEQ5LQfo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Move to the Settings tab, and check the **course title, cover image, description,** and provide other relevant details (course category, level, duration, etc.):

<figure><img src="/files/iUkQXl0blOzn66I8sXSU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
In this step, set pricing for the course on the Pricing tab and check the Course FAQs on the FAQ tab:

<figure><img src="/files/oY8ISm8ha6KFtnN1cxZH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Now the course is ready to be published. You can change the course status from Draft to Published:

<figure><img src="/files/MolxSydMUzWqRobWLvdU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

Here is our **AI-generated** course:

<figure><img src="/files/wC9XovrvRcBFVg1L3Q4c" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Improve Content with AI

In the **existing lessons and assignments**, you can find small **Generate with AI** ✨ buttons on each text field.&#x20;

{% hint style="success" %}
These buttons are **available** in **all** types of lessons and assignments.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/dJVJrIIo2c1WjDa5Bkf6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

By clicking on them, you can get the **AI Text Generator** modals:

<figure><img src="/files/AwDhNgu9LqqGjPEbnDQE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Prompt Input Field** – Describe what you need help writing. For example: “Write a blog intro about AI in education” or “Generate a course title on web development.” This is the main instruction that guides the AI. **The more specific and structured your prompt is, the better the generated content will match your expectations.**
* **Words Limit** – Sets the maximum length of the output text, in number of words. Use this to control how long the generated content should be.
* **Type** – Select the desired output format. Once you change the type, **Word Limit** will also change to the preferred amount automatically. But you can freely change it.
  * **Title** - generates short text designed to be used as a title for the lesson
  * **Paragraph** - generates a medium-sized text designed to be used as a paragraph along with other content
  * **Article** - generates long text designed to be used as a full article that covers the topic fully
* **Tone** – Choose the desired tone of voice for the content. Options includ*e Formal, Casual, Engaging, Professional, and Conversational.*
* **Language** - choose the text output language

{% hint style="success" %}
Once you provide the nice prompt and adjust the rest of the settings according to your needs, simply click on the ✨**Generate** button.
{% endhint %}

## Image Generation with AI

Images can be generated manually for the lesson contents, course cover image, or anywhere that accepts media via the [**Media File Manager**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/media-file-manager). So, make sure you have **enabled it.**

{% hint style="info" %}
**AI Lab** uses **OpenAI's** [**DALL·E** ](https://openai.com/index/dall-e/)models to generate images.
{% endhint %}

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Go to the desired place and put the cursor where you want to add the AI-generated image:

<figure><img src="/files/PqD4jjBdi2QLA6QkdJjx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Click on the I**nsert Image** button from the **WYSIWYG** editor tools:

<figure><img src="/files/MUdykiwbWMjJZApHuJtr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
In the **General** tab, click on the **Browse files** button:

<figure><img src="/files/W3gLiAmk6bQ3gzOnd9qp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
On the opened pop-up, move to the **AI Generate** tab:

<figure><img src="/files/U5HDjIuuMRTrDmvsu3ai" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Describe the image you need in detail and choose the desired image style. Then simply click on the **Generate** button:

{% hint style="info" %}
It takes some time to generate an image. That's why do not close the tab and wait patiently.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/04627oxgncRACdL4n6n3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Based on the number of images you set in the[ **Addon Settings**](#ai-lab-addon-settings), AI Lab offers you several AI-generated images to select.&#x20;

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="1 Image Generated" %}

<figure><img src="/files/Pdl1PlSFf1HE8RsD7aGT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="3 Images Generated" %}

<figure><img src="/files/KrGc57FgI4UaYz6y9g0u" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
If you are not satisfied with the generated images, you can regenerate them or change the prompt. To use the image, click on the **Use Selected Image** button. It saves the image on your website and pastes it to the selected place:

<figure><img src="/files/IYhH2RwUNwhWd1uRO7GE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

Following the same steps, you can generate the **Course Cover Image** with AI as well:

<figure><img src="/files/s7WjMwvW9ZgY01QxInm6" alt=""><figcaption><p>Course Builder > Settings > Main > Image</p></figcaption></figure>

## Craft Lessons with AI

You can apply the power of AI to your existing lessons to improve their content, or in any courses, you can simply add new lessons with AI.&#x20;

{% hint style="success" %}
A**I Lab** will generate the **lesson title, short description,** and the **main text-based lesson content**. It also **generates images** for better illustration upon request. &#x20;
{% endhint %}

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Create any type of new lesson:

<figure><img src="/files/1bYo9aFrmaVnwTmt8ark" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
At the top of the lesson, there is a special section dedicated to creating lesson contents with AI. Click on Generate:

<figure><img src="/files/KDD4ExHvp3apUMNpXeNs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
After that, this menu opens:

<figure><img src="/files/kdNQE1b2MFA0RsTS4zLi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Prompt Input Field** – Provide a clear description of the lesson topic, target audience, key points, and any specific requirements or context. The AI will use this to generate the full lesson content. Additionally, describe the images you want to include as well.
* **Words Limit** – Set the maximum number of words for the AI-generated lesson. This helps control content length based on your needs.
* **Tone** – Choose the desired tone of voice for the content. Options includ*e Formal, Casual, Engaging, Professional, and Conversational.*
* **Images Limit** – Define how many images you want the AI to generate alongside the lesson. The **DALLE-3** model will be used to generate images.
* **Style** – Choose the appropriate image generation style.&#x20;
* **Language** - Choose the output language
* **Continue Manually** – If selected, it lets you skip AI generation and write the lesson manually.
  {% endstep %}

{% step %}
Write your prompt very carefully and in detail. Here is the example prompt:

> Generate a structured lesson script for a video titled “The Basics of Blockchain for Beginners.” The audience is university students with no prior experience in blockchain. The content should cover: what blockchain is, how it works, real-world use cases, and common misconceptions. Keep the tone formal, the style explanatory, and ensure that the script includes clear transitions and engaging explanations suitable for a 5-minute lesson video. Add one relevant image concept for visual aid.

Then, click on the ✨**Generate** button to proceed:

<figure><img src="/files/LZvYHzEgRtMpYmU2x6s3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
It takes some time to generate the lesson. Do not close the tab and wait patiently:

<figure><img src="/files/HfBymTda0BXTEI0Utiaj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
You got the success message with the contents generated.

{% hint style="info" %}
For **Audio, Video, Google Meet, Stream, and Zoom Lessons**, the rest of the content and lesson details should be provided **manually**.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/XdFWE0JGmQrAJtpDig4m" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Now you can click on the **Create** button to add the lesson to the course:

<figure><img src="/files/QuqydjTtEVA4CFGtRISb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Craft Quizzes with AI

Creating quizzes using AI Lab is also straightforward.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Create a new quiz or use the existing one. Inside the quiz, you will see the ✨**Generate Questions** button:

<figure><img src="/files/X6jnRKqFC00V3bpXibIp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
You will see **Questions Generator**:

<figure><img src="/files/9hzpPJsvXafu1LcrisaF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Prompt Input Field** – Describe the topic, audience level, key concepts, and any special focus areas. The clearer and more specific your instructions, the more relevant and accurate the generated questions will be.
* **Number of Questions** – Set how many quiz questions you want the AI to generate in one go.
* **Answers Limit** – Define the number of answer choices for each question (applies to formats like multiple or single choice).
* **Language** - Choose the output language
* **Preferred** [**Question Types**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/questions#question-types) – Select which types of questions should be included. Options are:
  * **Single Choice** – One correct answer from a list.
  * **Multiple Choice** – Multiple correct answers possible.
  * **True / False** – Binary statement-based questions.
  * **Item Match** – Matching items between two columns.
  * **Keywords** – Short-answer questions requiring a specific word or phrase.
  * **Fill in the Gap** – Questions with a blank that the student must complete.
  * <mark style="color:red;">**\***</mark>**Image Matching** – Generates *Item Match* questions where the answer options are AI-generated images instead of text.
  * <mark style="color:red;">**\***</mark>**Image Choice** – Generates *Multiple Choice* questions with AI-generated images used as answer options instead of text.

<mark style="color:red;">**\***</mark>*Please note that OpenAI has limitations on the number of image generation requests. If this limit is exceeded, the image will not be generated, and an error message will be displayed instead:*

<figure><img src="/files/mqqaR0huHutyp7lozVFC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}

#### **IMPORTANT**

Saving quizzes that contain AI-generated images may take longer than usual. This is because the images need to be downloaded from OpenAI's servers during the saving process.

Generating images consumes API tokens, which may lead to faster usage of your token quota and result in additional costs if you're on a paid OpenAI plan. Use this feature mindfully, especially when generating multiple images at once.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Write your prompt in detail and adjust the rest of the setting. Then, proceed by clicking the Generate button. Here is the example prompt:

> Create 5 intermediate-level quiz questions on the topic of “Introduction to Artificial Intelligence.” Focus on key concepts such as machine learning, neural networks, supervised vs unsupervised learning, and AI applications in daily life. Include a variety of question types like multiple choice, fill-in-the-gap, and true/false. Each question should have up to 4 answer choices.

<figure><img src="/files/klHmjCsV52ngNMrlcxEk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
**AI Lab** provides a preview of the questions. If you are not satisfied, you can change the prompt or regenerate the response. If you are not satisfied with only one or two questions, you can accept the response, then manually modify it as well:

{% hint style="warning" %}
Pay attention to each generated question and answer. **AI can make mistakes.**
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/sunoWXPXiM4b6ga7ISPI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Once you are done, you can save the settings, and that's it.

<figure><img src="/files/QDDYhjw6dz100oBoPpiT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

{% hint style="warning" %}
**IMPORTANT!**

Be careful and check all the content generated by AI. Because **AI CAN MAKE MISTAKES.**
{% endhint %}


# Grades

Pro Plus Feature

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/OfDtaP-u6SE>" %}

**The Grades** add-on makes it easier for teachers to check students' work. It enables one to evaluate quizzes and assignments with different types of grades (letters, points, or percents) and see all the grades in one place. This helps instructors keep track of how well students are doing in the course and increases engagement among students.

## **Why You Need Grades in Your LMS?**

* **Efficient Grading ⚡️:** The add-on streamlines the grading process, saving instructors valuable time.
* **Personalized Feedback 📝:** Teachers can provide tailored feedback to each student, enhancing the learning experience.
* **Centralized Gradebook 📊:** All grades are accessible in one place, making it easy to monitor student progress.
* **Improved Student Engagement 🚀:** Timely feedback and clear grading criteria motivate students to strive for excellence.

***

To enable the add-on simply follow **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Pro Addons > Grades** and enable the toggle:

<figure><img src="/files/7veZNMhTAyXKi15GUHCd" alt=""><figcaption><p><strong>WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Pro Addons > Grades</strong></p></figcaption></figure>

## Grades Overview

Students will get grades for each of their completed [**assignments** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/assignments)and [**quizzes**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/quizzes). After the course completion, their grade will be visible to them on the [**Single Course Page**. ](#course-grades)&#x20;

That's why we can divide the feature into:

* [**Assignments & Quizzes Grades**](#assignments-and-quizzes-grades)
* [**Course Grade**](#course-grade)

{% hint style="info" %}
Settings for the grades [**can be configured**](#grades-addon-settings) in MS LMS Settings.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

### Assignments & Quizzes Grades

This type of grade will be displayed in the[ **course player**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/course-player) and in the **grade details pop-ups.**&#x20;

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="in Course Player" %}

<figure><img src="/files/tJkf7vfMSNKRwiwJC4Cg" alt=""><figcaption><p>View as a Student</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="in Single Course Page" %}

<figure><img src="/files/Ina4lRRKA1RRlh5fKloR" alt=""><figcaption><p>View as a Student</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

Instructors can set the **passing grades** for [**assignments** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/assignments)and [**quizzes** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/quizzes)right on the course builder:

<figure><img src="/files/ZPNQwFbwVUYfJYfk539G" alt=""><figcaption><p>Course Builder</p></figcaption></figure>

By clicking the <mark style="color:purple;">**See Table**</mark> button, you can see the [**Grades table**](#grades-table) as well:

<figure><img src="/files/hHRS4e4i3N0cvSfsBMLR" alt=""><figcaption><p>Course Builder</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="danger" %}
If the Grades Addon is **disabled**, assignments will have only <mark style="color:green;">**Passed**</mark> and <mark style="color:red;">**Failed**</mark> statuses only. But in case you have decided to use Grades Addon, these assignments' results will be displayed in **grades** (points, percents, letter grades, [**etc**](#result-display)).

***

Because of this, if you have previously evaluated assignments before enabling the addon, their statuses will be changed in this format:

* <mark style="color:green;">**Passed**</mark>**&#x20;-> 100% (or&#x20;**<mark style="color:green;">**highest**</mark>**&#x20;grade)**
* <mark style="color:red;">**Failed**</mark>**&#x20;-> 0% (or&#x20;**<mark style="color:red;">**lowest**</mark>**&#x20;grade)**
  {% endhint %}

### Course Grade

**Course grade** is the **average grade** of the assignment and quiz results. The system weights each of  them equally and calculates the Course Grade by following the formula:

$$
Course Grade = \frac{\sum(Assignments\&Quizzes )}{NumberOfAssignments\&Quizzes}
$$

The **Course Grade** can be checked in the **My Grades** tab of the **Students Dashboard:**

<figure><img src="/files/n1KEqqHDTygG14q8l1Op" alt=""><figcaption><p>View as a Student</p></figcaption></figure>

Here you can find the Grades for all of the enrolled courses. There is also availability to get the data for the specific period using a date picker and the search fields:

<figure><img src="/files/okWd9oURUp0uBcqbnEWz" alt=""><figcaption><p>View as a Student</p></figcaption></figure>

By clicking any of the courses, students can get the detailed **Grade Info:**

<figure><img src="/files/8ytK9RKdHeGlhFOTsXRl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Admin and Instructors can also get this info in their dashboards:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Grade Details as Admin (Backend)" %}

<figure><img src="/files/z3fJaCTvKxshq4v76qDy" alt=""><figcaption><p>WP Dashboard > Grades</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Grade Details as Instructor (Frontend)" %}

<figure><img src="/files/EUJf30pz3VLl0rj4gEeP" alt=""><figcaption><p>Instructors Dashboard</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

## Grades Addon Settings

You can access the Grades settings by following **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Settings > Grades** or clicking the **gear**  :gear: **icon on** the **Pro Addons Page:**

<figure><img src="/files/HmkpYGUDEKulznokLUjG" alt=""><figcaption><p> <strong>WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Settings > Grades</strong></p></figcaption></figure>

### Result Display

<figure><img src="/files/pnXUT8lpRyoWhBCJqBHk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Result Display** setting enables to display of the grade scores of the student in one of the three available formats:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Grade" %}

<figure><img src="/files/tJkf7vfMSNKRwiwJC4Cg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Point" %}

<figure><img src="/files/CnzJIOEmm9OGWuO30rVN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Percent (%)" %}

<figure><img src="/files/ly25Rg87LzbMp0CMpVYz" alt=""><figcaption><p>Grade</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Score Separator

<figure><img src="/files/iwtBT0shpEOxnXc91g2v" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Score Separator** is the symbol or text used to separate the score from the maximum value. This symbol is used wherever the **current score** of the student is displayed, **along with the maximum value** of the quiz or assignment.&#x20;

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Score Separator in Grades Tab" %}

<figure><img src="/files/VZ9tBQbHScKd7uc0Ocyp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Score Separator in Grade Details" %}

<figure><img src="/files/PSvrU8x1qIxOyKN36PW2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Grades Display on Course Page

<figure><img src="/files/MCFQhNxXpn6oh4RP4zHl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This setting enables you to control the display of the **Course Grade** in the[ **Single Course Page**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/course). Choose one of the available ways you want to display the grade:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Show as a separate tab" %}

<figure><img src="/files/ZOszZvPUesMYcYe1C6CC" alt=""><figcaption><p>View as a Student</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Show in Sidebar" %}

<figure><img src="/files/4lwLJHm3zLNVX59STUZc" alt=""><figcaption><p>View as a Student</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

**Grade Details** can also be viewed here as well:

<figure><img src="/files/0U0DjpCKqC6GFiGVJlgY" alt=""><figcaption><p>View as a Student</p></figcaption></figure>

### Grades Table

This is the place where you have to define the available grades in your LMS. You can design any grading system according to your needs. Initially, the Grades Table will come with the following predefined grades.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/Wo8dcmzH6jmR7X2cH35S" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Grade Name** - the label of the grade, represented in letters and symbols
* **Grade Point** - numerical value corresponding to the grade on a point scale
* **Grade Range** - the percentage interval that defines the scores required for a student to receive a specific grade

#### How to Add  New Grades?

You can add new grades at the bottom of the [**Grades Table:**](#grades-table)

<figure><img src="/files/57WYLodi9mYpQ57OguqI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Grade Point** - numerical value corresponding to the grade on a point scale
* **Grade Name** - the label of the grade, represented in letters and symbols
* **Grade Range min, %** - specify the minimum range value for the new grade
* **Color** - select the color for the grade using the RGBA color picker

If you want to add new grades to the existing [**Grades Table**](#grades-table), there is only one rule you have to follow:

{% hint style="info" %}
The minimum range must be less than the previous one. In other words, Grades will always be entered in descending order.
{% endhint %}

Let's assume we have a C grade at the bottom of our grades table. It means C is the lowest grade in our LMS. But we want to add a C- grade as well.

<figure><img src="/files/7lEYDPYmcmH31O0ToHC5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

As you see from the picture, **30%** is the minimum range value for the grade C. So the minimum range of our new grade should be less than 30.  After filling required fields, click on the <mark style="color:purple;">**Add**</mark> button to add the grade.

<figure><img src="/files/qgiYiB8stH8WuOPsfBFl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can delete the last grade in the table using the trash 🗑 button:

<figure><img src="/files/NlneDtzjY1kb4CLvSfBj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
You **cannot delete** or **edit** grades **except for the last one**. To edit a grade that is not the last one, you must first delete the grades after it, making the grade you want to edit the most recent (last). Once you've made the desired changes, you can re-add the deleted grades.
{% endhint %}

## Regenerate Grades

In case there are changes in assignments or quiz results for the student, his course grade should be regenerated. This can be done by the [**admin**](#regenerate-grades-as-admin), [**instructor**](#regenerate-grades-as-instructor)**,** or even by [**the student**](#regenerate-grades-as-student) himself.&#x20;

Let's see some example cases:

> **CASE 1: Student Improved His Results**
>
> Let's assume student got B+ grade and he already completed the course and got his certificate. But he wanted to improve his results and retook the quiz(zes)/assignment(s). After that Regenerating Grades action should be taked to change the final Course Grade for the selected student.&#x20;

> **CASE 2: New Assignments or Quizzes Added**
>
> If there are new assignments or quizzes available in the course, but the student has already completed the course, these quiz or assignments do not impact to the student's grade. However, if he returns and starts to learn new course materials, the course grades can be regenerated.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
Actually, Grades can be **regenerated anytime**, there is nothing to lose in doing it. &#x20;

***

However, grades can not be manually entered or modified by admins or instructors in MasterStudy LMS! They are **automatically calculated** and can only **be regenerated.**
{% endhint %}

### Regenerate Grades as Admin

To regenerate grades as admin, open the Grades tab in the WordPress Dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/PLNHxw9i1UJUoigddz7n" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Choose the student and his enrolled course to open the grade details, then click on the <mark style="color:purple;">**Regenerate Grades**</mark> button:

<figure><img src="/files/i3NzQZYuLhGPVwQDj2ty" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Regenerate Grades as Instructor

Instructors can regenerate grades for their students in the **Grades** tab of the **instructors' dashboard**:

<figure><img src="/files/VpWBzXDmWWNwOlhJdWQc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Choose the student and his enrolled course to open the grade details, then click on the <mark style="color:purple;">**Regenerate Grades**</mark> button:

<figure><img src="/files/Zhp5lXfDFsqzbjOKj2SB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Regenerate Grades as Student

Like Instructors and admin, students can also regenerate their grades from their dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/n1KEqqHDTygG14q8l1Op" alt=""><figcaption><p>View as a Student</p></figcaption></figure>

Click on the desired course to open the Grade Details and click on the <mark style="color:purple;">**Regenerate Grades**</mark> button:

<figure><img src="/files/nve8KoXXgEB6qhkHAxd7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Drip Content

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=480s&v=98LKgphFSCY>" %}

The Drip Content addon ensures a structured learning flow by enabling content release either on specified dates or in a set sequence.

<figure><img src="/files/hSTBQP5xYLJw7AuQ7bCZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Settings in Drip Content Addon

There are several options for how you can set the sequence for course content.

<figure><img src="/files/aETHdl2B1Wqo5IQ3o2iO" alt=""><figcaption><p>WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Sequential Drip Content</p></figcaption></figure>

### **Sequential Lesson Lock**

Lessons will be locked in terms of the order, and students will not be able to get access to the second lesson until they complete the first one.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
This is a global setting and will be applied to all courses. However, inside the [**main settings of the course**](#lock-lessons-in-order), you can turn on this functionality for each course individually.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/TObhnvnBLhJwOKf0vrZg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

When the **Sequential Lesson Lock** is enabled, [**custom dependencies**](#settings-in-the-course-builder) in the Course Builder can not be set, as they will be configured sequentially according to the setting:

<figure><img src="/files/dvTvHTqwst093SZhgkhn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### **Lock the Lesson Till Its Start Time**

The lesson will be locked till its start time. You can define it when editing the lesson in the Course Builder.

<figure><img src="/files/mHS36z5LSXSAijIVIcCI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The lesson will be unlocked at its start time (for example, at 6:50 PM as in the screenshot), until then, students will be able to track the countdown.

![](/files/ftb0dBDOkRSFVrZfRvH4)

* **Unlock the lesson after a certain time after the purchase -** The lesson will be available a certain number of days after the purchase:

<figure><img src="/files/0Rel1SLhifGsVyN9UNpl" alt=""><figcaption><p>The Setting <strong>Unlock the lesson after a certain time after the purchase</strong></p></figcaption></figure>

As this lesson is not available, students can not complete it, and the next lessons also will not be available to study:

<figure><img src="/files/5Xaa29KoFMyPYCq124LU" alt=""><figcaption><p>Example of <strong>Unlock the lesson after a certain time after the purchase</strong></p></figcaption></figure>

## Settings in the Course Builder

1. Go to the Drip tab of the course you want to add drip content.

<figure><img src="/files/Nyn50USaiGXmBmmoOt0Z" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Click "Create new dependency".

<figure><img src="/files/LpN0ZbHPVnjJVfqz1Z8W" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. Drag and drop lessons, quizzes, and assignments in the order you want your students to take.

<figure><img src="/files/TNxW7W8BqR8IYoIPpHB7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. This is how it will look when you create an order. Don't forget to save the changes.

<figure><img src="/files/k99in9OSVuUt7v2UIskb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Students will unlock the next lesson only after they complete the parent one. As soon as you set up the sequence of the lessons, lessons that are not available will be marked as locked.

![](/files/zll8KEg5FYXzP1AREtx8)

This is how it will look on the Curriculum tab of the course page:

<figure><img src="/files/OmvSNyOL1s3EOaxwLlQV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Lock Lessons in Order

This is the individual application of the global [**Sequential Lesson Lock**](#sequential-lesson-lock) setting, and will be applied to this course only. If it is enabled, lessons will be locked in terms of the order, and students will not be able to get access to the second lesson until they complete the first one.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
The setting will be disabled if [**Sequential Lesson Lock**](#sequential-lesson-lock) is enabled.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/3i019v7iduLHF0M3vx22" alt=""><figcaption><p>Course Builder > Settings > Main > Lock Lessons in Order</p></figcaption></figure>


# Assignments

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/Zw3lDxCMyxk?feature=shared>" %}

With Assignments, you can check your students' knowledge and level up their experience in LMS. It will help you to incorporate different types of tasks into your courses.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/ZSsYT0b3BzyYPT65LwKT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Addon Settings

You can set up the Assignments addon by clicking on the settings icon after enabling the addon.

<figure><img src="/files/g0YQuAzT7tz9md9WID5C" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Number of allowed attempts to pass assignment -** Define the number of attempts students can take to pass the assignment.
* **Allow file attachment for assignments** - Enable this to allow everyone to attach files for assignments.&#x20;
* **Number of allowed attachments** - Choose how many attachments students can make.
* **Max file size (Mb)** - Define the maximum file size students can attach.
* **File extensions allowed to upload** - Define the file extensions students can attach and use commas without spaces to separate.
* **Allow audio recording for assignments** - Enable this if you want your students to upload audio recordings for assignments and instructors to upload audio recordings as a comment for the assignments.
* **Audio recording max size in MB** - Define the maximum size for audio recordings.
* **Allow video recording for assignments** - Enable this if you want your students to upload video recordings for assignments and instructors to upload video recordings as a comment for the assignments.
* **Video recording max size in MB** - Define the maximum size for video recordings.

### Assignments Addon Settings in Course Settings

<figure><img src="/files/E1VFsXuMtRh3hnZYOdI6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Show Emoji in Quiz and Assignments results** - Enable this if you want to show emojis when students pass or fail the quiz or assignment.&#x20;
* **Quiz / Assignment Passed Emoji -** Choose the emoji students will see when they pass the quiz or assignment.
* **Quiz / Assignment Failed Emoji -** Choose the emoji students will see when they fail the quiz or assignment.

That is how it will look for students:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="When they pass" %}

<figure><img src="/files/uzizZAH4yTazu5U67SNo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="When they fail" %}

<figure><img src="/files/H5GUMeUc9wBobl5mh8IB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Adding an Assignment to Your Course

1. Add a lesson in your desired course and choose the Assignment as a type of lesson.

<figure><img src="/files/MsAgUNULlEytM2TgtiXJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Write a name for the assignment.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/vZcdHSwnxB9UOPwaMMo2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Enter the number of attempts students can take for this assignment. Or you can leave it empty so that students can take the assignment unlimited times to pass it.

<figure><img src="/files/wscZCIp8Mih12nMMe2Uq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. Add your assignment content and format it up to your preferences. You can also add images and videos to the assignments.

<figure><img src="/files/FFz7omzVHPqSkMRWzeX0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. Click the Save button to save all changes.

### How Assignments will look on the student's page

When they open their assignment, they need to scroll down to start the assignment:

<figure><img src="/files/T1qXzJ6EaVneqKLuWXI9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After clicking on the Start Assignment button, they will see this:

<figure><img src="/files/xFOYLfTHifR2fA8by86K" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

In the open window, they can see the Requirements section and Box to type the text. Students can also attach files and record audio and videos. After submitting  the assignment, they will see this:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/9dNynpN01vORpYiuGWDQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Setting Deadlines (Time Limit) for Assignments

While creating the assignment or editing it in Course Builder, there is an ability to set deadlines (time limit) for it.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/D5KniT4A27tzzbsOqijB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Assignment duration** - set the duration for the assignment
* **Time Unit** - choose one of the hour, day or week as a time unit. They will set a time limit to complete the assignment.
* **Reset time limit when retaking an assignment** - the time limit resets to the initial value when the assignment is retaken.

{% hint style="info" %}
The time limit starts as soon as the instructor creates/saves the assignment.
{% endhint %}

Here is how it will look to students:

<figure><img src="/files/4XZVrGtNof5KMyvgkVRR" alt=""><figcaption><p>Before starting the assignment</p></figcaption></figure>

It also shows as a countdown while completing the assignment:

<figure><img src="/files/u9gwWgm0kZ6DhPLuGJ7r" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
If the student misses the deadline, the assignment marked as **Fail**. If there is no other attempts left in the assignment, instructor can manually reset the assignment result for the student to give him another chance.
{% endhint %}

### Adding audio and video recordings to the assignments as a student

Your students can add audio and video recordings to their assignments. That is extremely helpful in many cases, these are three of them:

* If you have language classes, for example, Arabic, and you want your students to pronounce the texts
* If you prepare your students for exams that have Speaking sections, for example, IELTS, HSK, TOEFL, TOPIK, etc, and want to have a real speaking mock exam.
* If you have a career coaching course and want your students to pass a real job interview. You can check your student's body language, their interaction and more.

Your students can record an audio for the assignment. For that, they need to click on the Record audio button:

<figure><img src="/files/bEYqyKUCjJqsJhYbGV1Z" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

That is how an audio will look after stopping recording:

<figure><img src="/files/99seTE2DIBuakJVB92X1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Your students can record a video for the assignment. For that, they need to click on the Record video button:

<figure><img src="/files/I5YcAZZyIWU67EJS6oxA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

That is how a video will look after stopping recording:

<figure><img src="/files/zKQZajPJOy0Qzj2QmPMZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After recording audio and videos, students can submit their assignments for review.

### Managing Assignments as an Admin

Assignments can be managed in the Assignments and Student Assignment sections of the plugin.

<figure><img src="/files/b2nKJ80cwcEw8MdmVYk7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

In the Assignments section, you can see all the assignments created on your platform. There will be assignments from different courses.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/UhqLokJnrKG3eSWh0I1z" alt=""><figcaption><p>This is a dashboard of all assignments in all courses throughout your LMS.</p></figcaption></figure>

In the Assignments dashboard, you can see:

* **Assignment** - The name of the assignment
* **Course** - The name of the course where the assignment was created.
* **Total** - The number of the students who clicked on Start Assignment button.
* **Passed** - The number of students who passed the assignment.
* **Non passed** - The number of students who failed the assignment.
* **Pending** - The number of student assignments that need your checking.

When you click on the **More** button, you will go to the Student Assignments section where you can review the assignments.

<figure><img src="/files/ogMfV4DWy5JpJDJ1i27C" alt=""><figcaption><p>This is a dashboard of the assignments students took in a particular assignment in a particular course.</p></figcaption></figure>

In the Student Assignments dashboard, you can see:

* **Student name** - The name of students who started or submitted the assignment.
* **Course** - The name of the course where the assignment was created.
* **Date** - The date when students started or submitted the assignment.
* **Attempt** - The number of attempts a student took for the assignment.&#x20;
* **Status** - The status of the assignment.

When you click the **Review** button, you can check your student's assignment.

### Managing Assignments as an Instructor

Instructors can manage assignments in the Assignments section of the plugin by clicking on three dots from their page:

<figure><img src="/files/0ofuYK1kSTtyKomYlbLo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is the Assignments dashboard an instructor will see this:

<figure><img src="/files/Az9fQyOBPwRhUn0AJ165" alt=""><figcaption><p>This is a dashboard of all assignments in all courses throughout your LMS where an instructor is assigned.</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Assignment** - The name of the assignment
* **Course** - The name of the course where the assignment was created.
* **Total** - The number of the students who clicked on Start Assignment button.
* **Passed** - The number of students who passed the assignment.
* **Non passed** - The number of students who failed the assignment.
* **Pending** - The number of student assignments that need the instructor's checking.

When an instructor clicks on the **View** button, they will go to the Student Assignments section where they can review the assignments. An instructor can also make a search and filter the assignments by the course name or the assignment status.

In the Student Assignments dashboard, you can see:

<figure><img src="/files/5JLQgBk3798pXBICAH0G" alt=""><figcaption><p>This is a dashboard of the assignments students took in a particular assignment in a particular course.</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Student name** - The name of students who started or submitted the assignment.
* **Course** - The name of the course where the assignment was created.
* **Date** - The date when students started or submitted the assignment.
* **Attempt** - The number of attempts a student took for the assignment.&#x20;
* **Status** - The status of the assignment.

When you click on the **Review** button, you can check your student's assignment.

### Checking and leaving a comment on the assignment from the student as an admin

<figure><img src="/files/WXZKcDXl5AOcAvY2pI7Z" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After clicking on the Review button, you will open the window to check your student's assignment.

<figure><img src="/files/qeBz5HjAnqZxIOtUfyic" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

When you scroll down, you can leave your reviews and comments in the Text box, attach files, record audios and videos. Choose the status for the assignment: failed and passed and click the Publish button.

<figure><img src="/files/nShjrGUlEkLa2z0bGf6E" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

That is what your students will see:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="When they pass" %}

<figure><img src="/files/5oRCZsuMQRhoKfaIEX95" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="When they fail" %}

<figure><img src="/files/JPqqFMgLdkyYB1jTSPYL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Checking and leaving a comment on the assignment from the student as an instructor

<figure><img src="/files/HskUcR2CFnnM8c9O2pcu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After clicking on the Review button, an instructor will open the window to check your student's assignment.

<figure><img src="/files/7KBLp8lTR61GbfhYcQvb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

When they scroll down, an instructor can leave their reviews and comments in the Text box, attach files, and record audio and videos. They can choose the status for the assignment: failed and passed and click the Submit Review button.

<figure><img src="/files/y0BMvYkttzbkwAT7fZhl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

That is what your students will see:

<figure><img src="/files/flYtpoIaL9nIgK5Dqm7N" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### How to manage the emails students and instructors get about the assignments

You can manage the emails in the Assignment section of the Email Manager addon settings.

<figure><img src="/files/9jkp23FQK8kF9HqdI6br" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

That's how it will look:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Assignment status change (for student)" %}

<figure><img src="/files/oL2tUVonnBduYcsE7dFW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="New assignment (for instructor)" %}

<figure><img src="/files/tS2bYLJQmS8iZnYP1hCj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}


# LMS Forms Editor

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=236s&v=98LKgphFSCY>" %}

## LMS Forms Editor Addon

The **LMS Forms Editor Addon** allows you to **configure** the plugin **built-in forms** such as **Profile form** (Registration), **Become Instructor request form**, and **Enterprise form** by adding the additional fields to the form.

![](/files/-MdfhMPu8xmAXcIitxGf)

To activate this option go to **STM LMS > Addons**.

![](/files/-MkaeE_ZrwYpbyTOeWkZ)

Find there the **LMS Forms Editor** addon and enable it.

![](/files/-MkaeKgqltc-DqJktNWN)

To get to the **LMS Forms Editor page** click the **settings icon** or refresh the page and navigate the **STM LMS > Forms Editor menu.** Welcome to the LMS Forms Editor page! Let's explore all the settings.

![](/files/-Mkae_7uRf-BNwIvztAK)

The LMS Forms Editor settings page contains two sections, let's conventionally name them the Top and Main parts.

![](/files/-Mdfhf2lB1KqEzgjEVjU)

On the **Top section**, you can **select between the forms** and **Save/Cancel** applied changes.

![](/files/-MdfhoMBBrBTKz0PiadL)

The **Main section**, which is the working space, composed of three parts. In the screenshot below, they are numbered in sequence:

![](/files/-MdfhzidFFUZLKmRnaAF)

In the **First column**, you can build the form by dragging and dropping your needed elements from the **Third (Elements)** **column**. Here, in the **Third** (Elements) **column**, located the elements that will be used as the form fields.

Once you have put your needed element in the First **column**, in the **Second column** the **element's settings** will be displayed.

![](/files/-MdfiBqi0qiLvg2vcwU0)

Now, let's walk through the **Elements settings** on the example of the **Become Instructor Form.**

On the Elements' settings first comes the **Field Name** Option. This field text will not be used on the user interface. The field is provided for the admin, to define the element's name to display it on the **Become Instructor request message**. This message sends to the admin email. Let's say you've created a **Become Instructor Form**. Now go to **STM LMS > Email Manager** section (The [Email Manager](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager) addon should be enabled).&#x20;

The Field ID will displayed like this:

{% hint style="warning" %}
Make sure that you enter a unique ID so that it will work properly.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/9v34uxkUNQ5bxOq0G7wF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Put on the First column the  **Single Line Text** element. On the **Field** **Label** section, enter the **field title** that will appear on the user interface:

![](/files/gJLMtSRu3MpjyodCqzvO)

Also, you can add a description for the field  under the **Field Description** area:

![](/files/Xav2MQh8GyPnXKkPB28n)

Enter the placeholder text on the **Placeholder** section:

![](/files/rge7fn7x5tEUURTOMUDv)

Enable the **Required field** option to make the field required to fill:

![](/files/fEu6RidPh4l6dE7oHhZS)

**Remember to save your changes**. On the above example, we have adjusted only one field the **Become Instructor Form**. Now, let's check it. Login under the student account, go to the user account page, and click the **Become an Instructor button**:

![](/files/-Me4afVbZROScuuMPCaQ)

![](/files/-Me4aiI5tNZwkD0YjePe)

**Let's move on!** Now put the **Email, Phone,** and **File Attachment elements.** The settings are similar to the Single Line Text element:

![](/files/-MdfjsBxlx-28O4EVwJ0)

Fill all the fields as you desire. Then, let's check what we built:

![](/files/-Me8HVyYqUUvuYEcfeXp)

In the same way, you can customize the **Enterprise form** and **Profile form**.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
The **Options** appear by dragging the **Radio Button**, **Drop Down,** and **Checkbox** elements in **Profile form**.
{% endhint %}

![](/files/-MePgDJJPkpYFKy4rJ6B)

{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important!**

Please be sure that you filled the **Options** fields as well, otherwise, the **Radio Button**, **Drop Down**, and **Checkbox** elements will be displayed without options list.
{% endhint %}

![](/files/-MePhbTLkndB2Dl6UMdr)

**Result:**

![](/files/-Me8SCoTi8UJyq2FmH0i)

####

#### Related Article:

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MdfkQ17JgdKbBLniTOw" %}
[How to edit the registration form?](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/lms-form-editor/how-to-edit-the-registration-form)
{% endcontent-ref %}


# How to edit the registration form?

In the **Profile form** customization section, you can add fields for the **Edit Profile** section and **Sign Up form.** All the information entered from the Sign-Up form will appear and can be edited on the Edit Profile form.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Profile" %}
![The screenshoot takent from the Masterstudy theme](/files/-Me4nFUCZVrFI9gJC6Wi)
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Registration" %}

<figure><img src="/files/dmKk9YzqnGF2qbUQuTLn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

In the Profile form, there are four default fields that are required. These are the **Name**, **Surname**, **Position**, and **Bio** fields. They can not be removed.

![](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2F-MDO9V_qgvV5cQdw04iz%2F-MXGKSXZTWR2lroLohDu%2F-MXGQwyGRid2rM74ESm7%2Fimage.png?alt=media\&token=f1cbf8a0-c9d4-4079-a1b4-e9db597df9d4)

{% hint style="info" %}
The **Position** field displays on the **Instructors** **profile**.
{% endhint %}

On the Profile form customization, to the settings of each element will be added additional options: **Show on Registration form** and **Show in public profile**.

![](/files/-Me5-qhNlz4ZTN2Ys0_N)

* **Show on Registration form** **-** adds dragged elements fields to the **Registration form**.
* **Show in the public profile** - displays the inserted info in the field on the user's **Public Profile**.

Now let's start to build the form. Add your needed elements to the form section. In the example below,  the **Phone**, **Drop Down**, **Text Area** and **Radio Button** elements are added:

![](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2F-MDO9V_qgvV5cQdw04iz%2F-MXGp-QbSuLEiKD7AU9d%2F-MXGsE959y__B6m1I-5Q%2Fchrome-capture%20\(4\).gif?alt=media\&token=5e2ddebd-719d-440e-a710-58aa3b24206d)

**Outcome:**

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Profile" %}
![](/files/-Me8i5pbb8IWHzQBKTOZ)
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Registration" %}
![](/files/-Me8hdFF8bJQRwV1Bm_q)
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}


# Prerequisites

Prerequisites are the requirements students must complete before they are able to enroll in the next course of a higher level.

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=1330s&v=98LKgphFSCY>" %}

You can enable the **Prerequisites** addon in the **MasterStudy LMS Settings > Addons** section of the WordPress dashboard menu.

<figure><img src="/files/ICdATlwJzJSgXEQEasc8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After that, you need to edit a course and set up the prerequisites settings of a course in the Course Prerequisites section of the [**Course Builder**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder). Edit any course with [**Course Builder**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder), and follow **Settings > Prerequisites.**&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/1HVm0JSseLUIvIOkh8CQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Prerequisite Passing Percent (%)** - specify the passing rate of prerequisite courses
* **Courses** - indicate the courses that should be completed before purchasing this course

{% hint style="success" %}
If students want to enroll in the course, they will see that it has a prerequisite, so they need to accomplish it first.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/nl5upfQEUm4FvACll3g1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Media File Manager

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=838s&v=98LKgphFSCY>" %}

**Media File Manager** allows you to manage your media files in various formats easily and provides convenient access to them.

To activate this feature, go to **MS LMS > Addons** and enable the **Media File Manager** add-on.

<figure><img src="/files/sjInKobt12M9auKHhag3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Each instructor's uploaded media files are **strictly confidential** and accessible **only to them**. The **Media File Manager** ensures that files remain private and are not shared with other instructors or unauthorized users. This guarantees the security of course materials, preventing unauthorized access or modifications. Administrators, however, retain the ability to manage and oversee media content to maintain platform integrity.
{% endhint %}

## Settings

The settings of the addon can be acces from the **WP Dashboard > Media File Manager** or by clicking the **gear** :gear: icon on the **Pro Addons** page:

<figure><img src="/files/S6tJeOxCzMdhoyfrzmIe" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is the overview of the Media File Manager addon settings:

<figure><img src="/files/91wNWPTRaYfB90Cx4oLx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Max File Size** - specify the maximum file size that can be uploaded via Media File Manager in MBs.
* **Allowed File Extension** - this field is used to restrict the types of files that can be uploaded. Any file not matching the listed extensions will be rejected by the system and user get an error message. To add multiple extensions, separate them with commas as shown in the screenshot.
* **Use Unsplash Images** - the setting activates the integration with [**Unsplash**](http://unsplash.com/)**.**
  * **Unsplash Acces Key** - provide the special key from Unsplash to use the feature. First, you have to [**obtain it**](#how-to-obtain-unsplash-access-key). The feature is totally free of charge.
* **Use Pexels Images and Videos** - the setting activates the integration with [**Pexels**](http://pexels.com/).
  * **Pexels API Key** - provide the special key from Pexels to use the feature. First, you have to [**obtain it**](#how-to-obtain-pexels-api-key). The feature is totally free of charge.
* **Use Pixabay Images and Videos** - the setting activates the integration with [**Pixabay**](http://pixabay.com/).
  * **Pixabay API Key** - provide the special key from Pixabay to use the feature. First, you have to [**obtain it**](#how-to-obtain-pixabay-api-key). The feature is totally free of charge.

{% hint style="info" %}
The maximum file size should not exceed the limits of the **Server (Max Upload Size):**\
[**System Requirements**](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/system-requirements).&#x20;
{% endhint %}

If you try to upload any file larger than the maximum size that you set in **Settings,** you will get the following error message:

![](/files/LvWtaBHhel8ikkwUAgdI)

If you try to upload a file with an extension that you did not specify as an allowed file format, you will get the following error message:

<figure><img src="/files/lYW7WRr6K3fsZcvs2BeZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Media Gallery Overview

When you click on any media file upload button inside **MasterStudy LMS**, the **'Media Gallery'** window will appear. It has been organized into several tabs:

<figure><img src="/files/yy6xnHOg3lRS5FwIHHco" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is the breakdown of the **Media File Manager** by tabs:

* **Explore** - this tab is a result of[ **integrations** ](#addon-integrations)with popular free stock, royalty free image and video search platforms like **Unsplash**, **Pixabay** and **Pexels**. You can search and use the media from them without leaving the Media File Manager. You have to turn on the integaration and provide necessary keys to activate the feature.
* **Library** - the consists of list of files stored on your website. You can use searching and filtering options to choose the necessary one. Additinally, you can rename and delete files from here.
* **Upload** - you can use thistab to upload new files to your website from your computer or via URL link,
* **AI Generate** - this tab is a part of [**AI Lab**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/ai-lab) addon. You can generate visuals [**based on your prompt**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/ai-lab#image-generation-with-ai). To make the feature work, **AI Lab** addon should be enabled and [**configured** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/ai-lab#ai-lab-addon-settings)accordingly.

## How It Works

You can benefit from this feature in several situations where file uploading is involved such as **Uploading Course featured images:**

![](/files/a7eNgj3jniSaRY1SLnct)

While attaching course materials, the **"Media Gallery"**  will be available:

<figure><img src="/files/1sX68baCBTi73YtY9kwc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### **Lessons**

The **'Media Gallery'**  window will appear when you upload the **Lesson Materials** while editing the **Lessons** image:

<figure><img src="/files/getEljU4xzVXo5mHoni4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can also take advantage of this feature while uploading a "**Video**" and **'Video Poster'** for video lesson type.

![](/files/q6p5Mk3Ws4vhkKsVkymo)

### Quizzes

When you add a new question and prefer it to be an image, the **Media Gallery** window will be available right after clicking the **'Image'** button:

![](/files/szsI04Tix4grz7EX0eT9)

It does not matter what type of question you want to add, this feature is available for all of them:

![](/files/Z1dg71wQapE1ixDuzxqs)

You can also add the answer to your question as an image with **Media Gallery**. To activate this feature, do not forget to click the **'Image'** icon on the right:

![](/files/sxkIZHtX1iCo0ZWv3F1X)

### **Bundles**

You can access the **Media Gallery** while creating a new Bundle by clicking the '**Upload Image'** button:

<figure><img src="/files/XVZBq4qhz8gJqR4ttdtx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Addon Integrations

Media File Manager of MasterStudy can be used with three popular royalty-free images & royalty-free stock platforms. You can easily get media from these platforms right in the Media File Manager without leaving the MasterStudy.&#x20;

To access the feature, simply move to the <kbd>Explore</kbd> tab and choose the necessary platform to search media:

<figure><img src="/files/1mP1u7iCb0ek7heV4iUx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Based on the chosen platform, you can choose to get image or video and it's type:

<figure><img src="/files/OjHoT50OPYwijRRUnN86" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<table><thead><tr><th width="187">Integration</th><th width="134" data-type="checkbox">Image</th><th width="134" data-type="checkbox">Video</th><th data-type="checkbox">Types (Orientation, Portrait,  Landscape tc.)</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Unsplash</td><td>true</td><td>false</td><td>false</td></tr><tr><td>Pexels</td><td>true</td><td>true</td><td>false</td></tr><tr><td>Pixabay</td><td>true</td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr></tbody></table>

### How to Obtain Unsplash Access Key

It's a completely free and pretty straightforward process.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Go to <https://unsplash.com/oauth/applications>. If you do not have an existing developer account, you will be required to create one.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
If you create a new account, make sure you confirm your email address. Unless you confirm your email address, you will not be able to create new applications.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/eLegtJrsZLlQV1VvuhE7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Click on the **New Application** to create a new one:

<figure><img src="/files/nBQehthknNU8qCcJKXnK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
On the next step, you will be asked to **accept** the **API Use and Guidelines.** Kindly check all of the options and click on <kbd>Accept Terms</kbd>:

<figure><img src="/files/8YLhr5YQduNpn9dzQUfX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Name your app  and provide a description, then click on <kbd>Create Application</kbd> button:

<figure><img src="/files/3kw4mVWjwC7czEEYQK2T" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
You will be redirected to the application page. Scroll down and find your **Access Key:**

<figure><img src="/files/zX4J4u11WDj2uWVrHjYc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Paste this key into the[ **addon settings**](#settings), into the designated area, and save the settings:

<figure><img src="/files/wzrt8gGgycxHLOQnKWKX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
**That's all, you are ready to use the integration** :tada:
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

### How to Obtain Pexels API Key

Getting credentials from Pexels is also a free and easy to follow process.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Follow this link <https://www.pexels.com/api/> and sign in. If you do not have an existing developer account, you will be required to create one.

<figure><img src="/files/g4BgwwovJ48ml0fhA7OG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Click on the <kbd>Your API Key</kbd> button:

<figure><img src="/files/XIH64h4G5lQAkZGGqfHZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Provide the necessary information as shown below:

<figure><img src="/files/OKXHbVDVR9H7l9LSPh48" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
That's it. Now you can copy your **API Key:**

<figure><img src="/files/3Pn2me7W80pZRLfGCUZa" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Paste the API key to the designated are in the[ **addon settings:**](#settings)

<figure><img src="/files/pitbB6qKXFvbkL7tZXMY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
That's all, you are **ready to use** the integration :tada:
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

### How to Obtain Pixabay API Key

It's a completely free and pretty straightforward process as other two integrations.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Go to <https://pixabay.com/api/docs/> and sign in. If you do not have an existing account, you will be required to create one.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/jgYtXCbcFYfJxCsYx92j" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
On the same page, scroll down to the section **Parameters** and cpoy your **Key** from here:

<figure><img src="/files/6hPRTJqAyk4pfbpwyfYq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Paste the key to the designated are in the [**addon settings** ](#settings)and save the changes:

<figure><img src="/files/xZA4UR5CWEIWRLWPVIZD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
That's all, you are **ready to use** the integration :tada:
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}


# Group Courses

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=558s&v=98LKgphFSCY>" %}

**The Group Courses** add-on in MasterStudy LMS is a powerful feature designed to simplify selling courses to groups of students usually at a discounted rate. Perfect for enterprises, organizations, or teams, this option allows course creators to set a special group price directly in the course builder, making it easy to offer bulk discounts. By catering to group enrollments, this feature not only increases sales potential but also provides excellent value for larger audiences looking for cost-effective learning solutions.

{% hint style="info" %}
The **Group Courses** addon **does not** have a **discussion feature** within a group. It is **only** for **group purchases.**
{% endhint %}

To activate the **Group Courses** feature, follow **MS LMS > Pro Addons,** find **Group Courses** Addon, and enable it.

<figure><img src="/files/Oj7PNd0mm3Z4ZAurtOck" alt=""><figcaption><p>MS LMS > Pro Addons > Group Courses</p></figcaption></figure>

## Group Courses Addon Settings

To open the add-on settings, click on the gear icon in the Group Courses addon in the pro addons page or follow **MS LMS > Enterprise Courses:**

<figure><img src="/files/txtw7g50YWCS5vpQjn5i" alt=""><figcaption><p> <strong>MS LMS > Enterprise Courses</strong></p></figcaption></figure>

* **Number of allowed members in a group** - set the maximum number of members allowed to join a group

## Set Enterprise Course Price

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
To set an enterprise price for a course, edit any course with [Course Builder](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder) by following **MS LMS > Courses > Edith with Course Builder:**

<figure><img src="/files/hZUfyBozmMiyzaaOXTQi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Move to the **Pricing** tab and find the **Enterprise Price (4)** field:

<figure><img src="/files/wQkMcEEZf0vvbE3aqjaR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Set the price and **Save** the changes:

{% hint style="info" %}
Make sure to set a **discounted enterprise price** when using the Group Courses feature. It is not mandatory but recommended as it is the main goal of the feature. For example, if a course costs `$62.90` for a one-time payment, **three** students purchasing it together could pay a total of `$149.90` instead of `$188.70` (the regular price for three individual purchases).
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/YLCQGt0rZWRsJba7yDsF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Now on **the course page**, there will be a button that enables you to buy it for a group:

<figure><img src="/files/9UHf3OPMOT36sDDTHtr1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Buy a Course for Group

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Purchasing a course for the course is a straightforward action. On the course page, click on the **Buy for Group** button:

<figure><img src="/files/i9FjriZPcGQ2AuAksxhZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
If the student did not buy the course with a group before, he can create a new group by clicking the **Create Group** button.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/qYWVNKu2S8Nnu4zL7azg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Enter the **Group name** and add the student emails that you want to buy the course with and click on the **Create Group** button:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/d9bMz3G5NXaI6sIqGyvN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
The maximum number of students in a group here will be inherited from the[ **addon settings.**](#group-courses-addon-settings)
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Now we have a group to purchase the course. After the group creation, you will be redirected to the first step: **group selection**. Here you can add another group as well. But now we have a group. Choose the group and proceed by clicking **Add to Cart** button:

<figure><img src="/files/GR0xJ32GFzLnyqcmQMJZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Complete the checkout:

<figure><img src="/files/IgQS6gCsnxQXcm2W7Klz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
That's it. You will be redirected to the order page after the successful checkout:

<figure><img src="/files/wGUTyUIdcyFaHLK2Wu98" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
Only one member of the group will buy the course for a group. Other members will **automatically** get access to the course.&#x20;
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Groups Management (student)

Students can manage the groups **they created** in their dashboard by following the **Groups** tab:

<figure><img src="/files/pTrqCK0NVqhHnuK4G1qk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Only the **Group Admin** (the one who created the group) can access the group settings. The group will not be visible on other students' dashboards.
{% endhint %}

By clicking the eye :eye: icon, you can see the detailed info about the Group:

<figure><img src="/files/paqHxwTq4eK8u4rr7vZu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

On the opened page you can see the students list with the list of courses that students bought with this group. Here you can also **change** the **Group Admin** or **remove** the student from the group:

<figure><img src="/files/m6mabmrRtRyEGF9rPTlx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### How to Create a Group

&#x20;**New Group creation** can be done here as well:

<figure><img src="/files/w11AMy0XNqPY558H35oZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
The process is the same as we did [here.](#buy-a-course-for-group)
{% endhint %}

### How to Edit a Group

To edit the group, just click on the **pencil** :pencil2:  icon:

<figure><img src="/files/hjrGI5bdd6O2YC8hhU7i" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can rename the group or kick the students from the group. After completing the modifications click on the **Edit Group** button:

<figure><img src="/files/wORIEmqN1JWwWyPUtGyb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Once the student is **removed** from the Group, he will also lose access to the purchased course content.
{% endhint %}

### How to Delete a Group

To delete a group click on the :x: icon:

<figure><img src="/files/QrkcowtG6iNcVQ03SBMe" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After your confirmation, the group will be deleted.

### How to import groups via CSV <a href="#groupcourses-howtoimportgroupsviacsv" id="groupcourses-howtoimportgroupsviacsv"></a>

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
First of all, you need to create a CSV with your group details. You can download the sample CSV here:

{% file src="/files/oLWePQ1GDTeNwEUusr2S" %}
Sample CSV for Group import
{% endfile %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
On the [**Groups**](#groups-management-student) tab, click on the **Import Groups (csv)** button and select the `.CSV` file:

<figure><img src="/files/uJ8g6rmoM76Eq5P4bpxL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
After the file selection, click on the Create Groups button:

<figure><img src="/files/EvhD31H7mHx07zjAKU9E" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Groups successfully imported:

<figure><img src="/files/5RztllcOyDlkOj32ErpZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Groups Management (admin)

Admin also has a special Enterprise Groups tab in his dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/ewhhSeGo5p9GNnxTMQc9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
On this tab, the admin can add, delete, and modify the groups on a website.
{% endhint %}


# Question Media

Question Media addon enhances quizzes by adding media such as images, audio, and videos to the quiz questions. This not only makes the quizzes more engaging and accessible but also caters to different learning styles. For example, images help in visualizing complex concepts, audio aids in listening comprehension, and videos provide in-depth explanations or demonstrations.

<figure><img src="/files/9pVyYWF8rfgDS5wYEUbJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Adding media to quiz questions

1. Navigate to the Course Builder by clicking on Edit with Course Builder of the desired course from your course list on your WP dashboard.

<figure><img src="/files/l19hrkKcUrNacaVEyuUM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Add a Lesson with a Quiz to your course. To do this, find and click the "Add Lesson" button,&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/XC0GJu3k4hMqnlTYf4Ip" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Then select the quiz option.

<figure><img src="/files/xz1N5yLsdAyRK3JgIRHt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. Name Your Quiz by typing in a title for your quiz and click on "Create".

<figure><img src="/files/UXnM8g45CdSGjmApGVig" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. Add Quiz Questions by clicking on the "+ Question" button within your newly created quiz.

<figure><img src="/files/K3lcoBFfgzoFStNTyzoB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

5. Choose the Quiz Type from the options provided (e.g., multiple choice, true/false, etc.).

<figure><img src="/files/auspfHoDUjLVSHUWck2A" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

5. Insert Media into a Quiz Question by locating the image and video icon next to the quiz question field.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/H8X8tXkTaYm6Pwd2ROVP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

6. Click on this icon to upload or link your desired image, video, or audio file to the quiz question.

<figure><img src="/files/hYabu5Dff1HO7L9tYMIR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can upload images and audio from your computer. For videos, you can insert them from different sources.

<figure><img src="/files/NZxWW5SlPoyVVJINMGWf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

To insert videos into your quiz question, select from the following source types:

* **HTML (MP4):** Upload an MP4 file directly from your computer and add a poster image to represent the video before it's played.
* **YouTube:** Insert videos hosted on YouTube by pasting the video URL.
* **Vimeo:** Use the Vimeo option to add videos hosted on Vimeo by providing the video link.
* **External Link:** Paste any direct video link from the web.
* **Embed:** Use the provided embed code from a video hosting service to insert the video.
* **Shortcode:** Use a shortcode to embed the video.

This is how the quiz will look with media added for your students:&#x20;

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Image" %}

<figure><img src="/files/W0uUOLQ935ogDG5i3Opm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Video" %}

<figure><img src="/files/WzHaI7Wocn8C0RYqiGzf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Audio" %}

<figure><img src="/files/HMmoRyX5VhskAJ1imQHn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}


# Social Login

Social Login addon allows students to log into the LMS with their Google or Facebook accounts for quick and secure access without needing to remember additional passwords.

<figure><img src="/files/icpcYBC0tDTc1W9JDH9z" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Settings in Social Login Addon

<figure><img src="/files/ydt1aS62Bgl3BLZsepy7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The Social Login addon has these settings: &#x20;

* **Social login position in authorization form**: This setting allows you to choose where the social login buttons are displayed on the login form: on top or bottom.
* [**Login via Google**](#setting-up-login-via-google):  You can allow login with a Google account. When you can enable this setting you need to provide the following details:
  * Client ID: The unique identifier assigned by Google to your application.
  * Client Secret: A secret key provided by Google to secure the application's communications.
  * Redirect URL: This is a redirect URL to copy and paste to the Authorized redirect URL in the Google API Console.
* [**Login via Facebook**](#setting-up-login-via-facebook): You can also allow users to log in using their Facebook account. To do this, you must configure:
  * App ID: The unique identifier for your application on Facebook.
  * App Secret: A secret code given by Facebook to protect your application's interactions.
  * Redirect URL: This is a redirect URL to copy and paste to the Authorized redirect URL in the Google API Console.

## Setting up Login via Google

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/NCE3ynXKzGI>" %}

To enable login via Google for your users, you need to create and configure a Google App. The steps below guide you through this process. You can also read [Google's documentation ](https://developers.google.com/google-ads/api/docs/get-started/oauth-cloud-project)and set up a Google app.

### **Creating a Google App**

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Visit the [Google API Console](https://console.developers.google.com/apis/) and sign in with your Google account credentials if you haven't signed in.

<figure><img src="/files/NpsWnPCrZ0sRX5P5MAmX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
If you don't have a project, create one by clicking on "Select a Project" and "New Project". If you already have one, select your project from the top bar.

<figure><img src="/files/8t7V3OnIhzEkltkacbln" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Name your project and click "Create".

<figure><img src="/files/dIlCo8FYnVNhvfjwIVm8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
On the left, click "OAuth consent screen".

<figure><img src="/files/5G1cYIXK1oYcAg6k2aYj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Click on the Get Started button:

<figure><img src="/files/UfixQ91OXqVRDr2qeRtx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Name your app and indicate the user support email:

<figure><img src="/files/BwuK0iAytLPnCTbQNYG9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Select a User Type (choose "External" for public Google account login).

<figure><img src="/files/w5MulvtVmskfQSOGPZSP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Enter the email addresses that receive notifications for the project:

<figure><img src="/files/9NP3zltBSOUhMjMy4QvK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Agree to the terms and conditions, then click on <kbd>Create</kbd>:

<figure><img src="/files/8692fwQ2BYhtIeb03uBh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Go to the **Clients** tab and click on <kbd>Create Client</kbd>:

<figure><img src="/files/EQ2eMhCe3X3xYoXVeumX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Choose '**Web application'** as the **Application type**, then **name** your OAuth Client (its internal naming and won't be visible to users):

<figure><img src="/files/7OEEV05XXYH5fbOeOhsv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
For the Authorized Redirect URI, go back to addon settings and copy the Redirect URL, then paste it into the designated field. Click on <kbd>Create</kbd> to proceed:

<figure><img src="/files/sjyqAC00WYwKORSWGmrY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/U8uSutt2To8hLmrk9mxe" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
After creation, note your "Client ID" and "Client Secret" from the modal or Credentials section. You need to save them to use later.

<figure><img src="/files/wAVLNV1T49ziB9AVNR86" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

### **Publishing Your Google App**

To make your app available to all users:

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Navigate to the "Audience" tab on the left and click on <kbd>Publish app</kbd>:

<figure><img src="/files/uNQnH8sJBRGpfJ9kaAJ7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Confirm the publication:

<figure><img src="/files/7a9jbpJZOq8cuC4SU3fB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
After setting up your Google App, go to the **Settings** of the MasterStudy Social Login addon in your site's dashboard and input your "Client ID" and "Client Secret" accordingly.

<figure><img src="/files/LE9XT5qqkMOBhRquMtgW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

That is how login will look with **Login via Google** enabled and set up:

<figure><img src="/files/2znK6MApczvRV9TY1RzO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Setting up Login via Facebook

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/mx8iZ57m4DA>" %}

To enable Facebook social login on your site through the MasterStudy Social Login addon, first, you have to create a Facebook App. This step-by-step guide will walk you through creating your Facebook App.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
**Important**: From February 1, 2023, Facebook now requires businesses to complete a Business Verification to use the Facebook Login feature. This change means that only verified businesses can offer Facebook login on their websites. Individuals without Business Verification cannot use this feature. Find more information in[ Facebook's official announcement](https://developers.facebook.com/blog/post/2023/02/01/developer-platform-requiring-business-verification-for-advanced-access/).
{% endhint %}

### Creating a Facebook app

{% hint style="danger" %}
To obtain Advanced Access and expand your permissions, you must complete the [Business Verification](https://developers.facebook.com/docs/development/release/business-verification) process. Begin this process by navigating to the "Verification" tab on the left side.
{% endhint %}

1. Go to [Facebook for Developers](https://developers.facebook.com/products/facebook-login/) and go to **Log in** (**Get Started** - if you have logged into your Facebook account) on the right corner.

<figure><img src="/files/51RU5tBoNK1DTcXVtlrS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Sign in using your Facebook credentials.

<figure><img src="/files/Ct9Pp2szMZnpL1oyaalE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. You will be redirected to the Developers' app creation dashboard. Click Create app on the right.

<figure><img src="/files/L2fl4Z2RZPTyMbJTNphO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. Choose **"Other "** for user case settings.

<figure><img src="/files/pyrGniDHUDtRRXIA33lM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

5. Select **Consumer** for an app type.

<figure><img src="/files/hfIoLN8RG4MPtGC2Eb8F" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

6. Fill in the fields for the app details and click on the Create app.

<figure><img src="/files/HSu8QAdld2WJYprcSKRR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

7. Then you need to add a Facebook login to your app.

<figure><img src="/files/C1J5wrHjKyuJIYzrJiUI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

8. Select the Web platform for your app.

<figure><img src="/files/vpKao5opYYUPS50546Wa" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

9. Enter the URL of your website.

<figure><img src="/files/YABMjIwYG7WTvQWKMaC6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

10. You can leave steps 2,3 and 4 without changes.

<figure><img src="/files/JMt0zBdff5kJqx0Ae4Fq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

11. In the final step of adding a Facebook login to your app, you can see all of Facebook's necessary documentation with guides.

<figure><img src="/files/KLTyd3UtsoiUImzSZCGy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

12. Go to the Settings of Facebook login.

<figure><img src="/files/RMIjawogu3NP2lW3iEiu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

13. Copy the Redirect URL from the Social Login addon settings.

<figure><img src="/files/O8dGI3iVhau4pNwAsO0C" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

14. Paste the URL into the "Valid OAuth redirect URIs" field in your Facebook App settings and save the changes.

<figure><img src="/files/nEsx2hRiiDHQCx0F4Yc8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
If a blank page shows up after clicking on the **"Save changes"** button, simply refresh your browser to ensure the changes are saved.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

15. Ensure you enter a URL that links directly to your publicly accessible privacy policy in the "Privacy Policy URL" and "Terms of Services" fields in the Basic app settings.

<figure><img src="/files/XyanWmlvpN7Z2g3yKB8t" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

16. On the "Permissions and Features" section under App Review, find "public\_profile" permission and choose "Request advanced access". [Business verification ](https://developers.facebook.com/docs/app-review#business-verification)is required to get the permission.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/SNKbn28AFk0RMPdDT8HN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

17. Confirm advanced access for the public profile.

<figure><img src="/files/zbPDjzacYhdRyfcWqBB2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

18. Answer data handling questions and click Submit.

<figure><img src="/files/jU3JPWIBHD6RffrCkDHX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
You may be asked additional questions based on your answers. For example, Facebook may ask to **provide instructions to** **access the application** to complete the analysis.  In this case, you have to provide the URL link to your login page and explain that you are using the app to set up a social login. Below is the example answer:

*"I am using this app to configure the Facebook Social Login on my website. By following this link you can check my sign-in/sign-up page: <https://yourwebsite/login>"*
{% endhint %}

19. Under the "Permissions and Features" section, locate the "Email" permission and select "Request advanced access". [Business verification ](https://developers.facebook.com/docs/app-review#business-verification)is required to get the permission.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/mtznMK9H4JBKcBhRHEU0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

20. Confirm advanced access for email.

<figure><img src="/files/UgC04xGvRBSvqfDL3IFm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

21. Answer data handling questions and click Submit.

<figure><img src="/files/FdX2B051gImmATty2VD2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

22. Then confirm submitting the answers to the questions.

<figure><img src="/files/Msamww2QrEeMqQofltkS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

23. You will get this popup after submitting it.

<figure><img src="/files/s4GAjrjZK8K28sASzCck" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

24. Then you can change the mode of the app to Live. Turn the switch and click the Start checkup.

<figure><img src="/files/rUV11xM7P9gjIN6s4za2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

25. Certify data use by clicking the box and continue.

<figure><img src="/files/FmG125rv7D9NayuqGi7w" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

26. Certify compliance with Platform Terms and Developer Policies and continue.

<figure><img src="/files/rk1PRUJfEwWgO58A9paF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

27. Click data use checkup for your app and click Submit.

<figure><img src="/files/1BDMGsga6JvABIJfWbAF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

28. You have changed the app mode to Live.

<figure><img src="/files/3ZAgnIyUjoxeJ6544WVr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

29. Next, go to the Basic App Settings and copy App Secret and App ID.

<figure><img src="/files/XyanWmlvpN7Z2g3yKB8t" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

30. Paste them to the following fields of the Social Login settings on your WordPress dashboard.

<figure><img src="/files/ApTK8NscjHGQjpYcK9Xy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

That is how the Facebook login enabled and set up will look:

<figure><img src="/files/sVmg0wFo3CjP267s3rvk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Course Bundles

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=668s&v=98LKgphFSCY>" %}

One course bundle includes multiple courses that can be sold at one price as a package.

<figure><img src="/files/0l6YTtdfGJXP1Nl4lN2P" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

To activate Course Bundles go to **MasterStudy LMS -> Addons** and enable the addon.

<figure><img src="/files/9ddxj30xrpqBuEQe0nkR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Course Bundle Add-on Settings

To reach the settings of the add-on follow **WP Dashboard -> MasterStudy LMS -> Course Bundle Settings**  or click on the **Gear icon:**

<figure><img src="/files/OxQ2Sjs8R5t5xBi2q0iB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here you can:

<figure><img src="/files/M18dzxpmcOk7Q4nISnlt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Bundles Quantity Limit** - set the bundles’ quantity limit
* **Courses in Bundle Quantity Limit** - set limitations on the number of courses in one bundle (by default the limit is 5 courses)

## How to Create a Bundle?

{% hint style="info" %}
Courses in a bundle must be **by the same author.** Mixing courses from different authors is not permissible.
{% endhint %}

1. Both admin and instructors should follow their **dashboard in front-end** to create bundles:

<figure><img src="/files/Y1Xahc7A2rBywqT3WucV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Click on the **Add New Bundle** button:

<figure><img src="/files/M97rYrn9NEugAWT0FkyU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. Indicate the courses to include your bundle, set name, image, description, and price then **save the bundle:**

<figure><img src="/files/QP83jWNUScha9ZUId4Ik" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

5. Your created bundle will be visible on the **Bundles page** of the **Instructors' Dashboard**. From here you can **edit, delete**, or make the bundle **drafted:**

<figure><img src="/files/9WT1GUcIumzE2EIBwx8e" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
A separate page **should be created** using **the** M**asterStudy LMS Course Bundles Widget** for bundles from scratch to make them visible to students. You can use **Gutenberg, Elementor,** or **WP Bakery** to create or edit this page.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/cD3pmigRnRDUHp3Pm4ju" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## How to Create Course Bundles Page?

1. Follow your WordPress Dashboard  **Pages -> Add New**:

<figure><img src="/files/Vlm0ku9u4k6XyX1arSLE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. From this page, you can use your favorite page builder - Gutenberg, Elemenetor, or WPBakery.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/uEsr3RYmyAnZMoEDOvAp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
We will show how to do it for each of them.
{% endhint %}

### Elementor Course Budnles Widget

1. Edit the page with **Elementor:**

<figure><img src="/files/cxWyCEMZSFYZDo7p51l5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Search for the **Course Bundles** widget and use **drag\&drop** to add it to the page:

<figure><img src="/files/pHLN32YfHQ69dT2BmQTo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. Adjust the content settings of the widget according to your needs:

<figure><img src="/files/uKULjuZyh5m5T9LzTxfs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Title** - set the title for the widget
* **Select Bundles** - you can set which bundles to display
* **Columns** - set the number of columns to be displayed
* **Posts Per Page** - set the number of posts to be displayed per page

4. Click on the **Publish** button to publish the page:

<figure><img src="/files/aDSSOD7zwG2nCe5wOw7v" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Gutenberg Course Bundles Block

1. On the **Gutenberg editor** press the '+' button:

<figure><img src="/files/C1bup76tUsbecbBhdyP6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Search for the Course Bundles and add it to the page:

<figure><img src="/files/n4OCMdBQe5JgzVxlAVaE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. Adjust the Block Parameters and Publish it:

<figure><img src="/files/XpLlCWJBb30yov8USROw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Layout**

* **Number of bundles** - indicate the number of bundles that will be displayed on a page
* **Bundles per Row** - indicate the number of bundles per row
* **Select Bundles** - choose the bundles that will be displayed (or do not select to display all)
* **Order by** - select the method to order bundles
* **Alignment** - choose the alignment of the block

### WPBakery Course Bundles Widget

Open **WPBakery Page Builder** and click on the **Add new element** button.

From the list of elements choose the STM Courses Bundle (or use the search).

<figure><img src="/files/MbK05OTSdROLLgSI26oL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

In the popup, you will see several settings to adjust your page.

<figure><img src="/files/mI5wj1saXg3ZL6AHXekm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here you can enter the title, choose the number of columns to display on the page *(available options - 2 and 3)*, and set the number of posts per page.

<figure><img src="/files/EUXrw92GFpzmJj0IurLa" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Upcoming Course Status

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/wlZ3BnmpHkk>" %}

With the Upcoming Course Status, you can create and promote courses that are not yet available for enrollment. This addon lets you give a preview of the upcoming courses and a countdown to the launch date.

<figure><img src="/files/vHqQs1qsQ8D3vpiSMwd1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Addon settings

<figure><img src="/files/pZfjNVtlliG0hCWWMwBO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Allow instructors to enable Upcoming course status** - Enable this setting if you want instructors to set up the Upcoming course status.
* **Allow course preordering** - Enable this setting if you want your students to buy the course but can’t start until the specified course launch date.
* **Allow upcoming courses to be added to the Course bundles** - Enable this setting if you want to add upcoming courses to the [**Course Bundles**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/course-bundles)**.**

### How to Create a Course with Upcoming Status

The status will help to announce courses and display them on the site under Coming Soon status. To set up this, go to the Settings tab in the Course builder, head over to the Access section and enable Upcoming Сourse Status.

<figure><img src="/files/b2EU1av4ijpgeY5KoJpS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After enabling the Upcoming course status addon, you will see these settings:

<figure><img src="/files/AV4WjCqlp91FTV57QmNQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Notification text about upcoming courses** - You can write the text for notification of this upcoming course.
* **Coming soon end date** - Choose the date you want to publish the course.
* **Coming soon end time** - Choose the time you want to publish the course. The countdown will disappear when the time for publishing your upcoming course comes.
* **Allow preordering -** Your students can buy the course but can’t start until the specified course launch date. This will work only if you enable this feature in the Addon Settings.
* **Allow email notifications -** Your students will get notified about the updates.
* **Show course author, category and rating -** Enable this if you want to show course author, category and rating.
* **Show course price** - The price of the upcoming course will be shown to students. But note that the price will be shown only if you enable preordering in the addon settings and the Course builder.

How it will look on

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Course Card" %}

<figure><img src="/files/AHORAbWCfbBaQffgt8Bc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Course Page" %}

<figure><img src="/files/5d5La4iq9E1jpOprtVfm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Managing Courses with an Upcoming Course Status

Admins can see the upcoming courses in the **Courses** section of their admin dashboard.

<figure><img src="/files/7l4o3EyHzpYx62Zr5d6K" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can click on **Manage Students** to see the list of students signed up for the upcoming course.

<figure><img src="/files/uuPf5zHUA35gURFvfBEx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here you can also see students' names, email, status, progress and the date they subscribed for this upcoming course.

<figure><img src="/files/yvcfcCDyOF9xDnmgW3L0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### How to Keep Students Updated about the Upcoming Courses

To do that, enable email notification in the Course builder. Students will see a bell on the screen and when they click on it, this will show up:

<figure><img src="/files/htYfRxTYjkcI4yCnin9I" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can get their emails and send them updates. This is what they will see:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="When they turn on the notifications" %}

<figure><img src="/files/6kbpmN01vVkzrND9GLF8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="When they turn off the notifications" %}

<figure><img src="/files/QnJgpItAadQIAKSpmxEl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### How to change the email notification texts students get&#x20;

You can change the messages your students will get after subscribing to the upcoming course in the Upcoming section in the [**Email Manager addon**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager) settings.

<figure><img src="/files/ATjUlXNKVqivxQj5Nf8p" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can enable three types of notifications for subscribers:

1. When the course becomes available to start learning:

<figure><img src="/files/PziTZ6EwtiX8EnunBWy0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. When the course becomes available for presale:

<figure><img src="/files/7FJOIe4NUcVGTOt51608" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. When the course start date changes:

<figure><img src="/files/p28umAu0UB9vtxoFLOgm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This is the email template example your students will get:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/mDtz5EfZfFvoOuKVFdOb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Course preordering

You can set up your course for pre-sale. To do that, you should enable course preordering in the Course Builder. &#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
Important: The Show course price setting must be enabled for preordering to work
{% endhint %}

That is how your students will see the Course page when preordering is enabled:

<figure><img src="/files/7aH935zH4MxwBmKs2dzN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Students can preorder their upcoming courses by making payments via [Stripe](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods#stripe), [PayPal](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods#paypal), and [WooCommerce](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods). Check out the documentation on each payment gateway to learn how to set up them.


# The Gradebook

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=1509s&v=98LKgphFSCY>" %}

You can collect statistics on students' progress in the courses with the **Gradebook feature**. To enable the feature, follow **MasterStudy > Pro Addons > The Gradebook:**

<figure><img src="/files/o1r6R7i4kuBsBBiPDkvp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

&#x20;There are no addon settings. Right after the addon activation, instructors can get access to the **Gradebook** from their dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/HJd4DuNYtzWQMgaPSF17" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

On this page, all the courses in your LMS will be displayed. Select the course you need to load statistics.

<figure><img src="/files/XI8glGVpH8SIFGtQNyMN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here you can get information like: *All time course students, Course average progress, Course passed quizzes, Course passed lessons, Course enrolled by subscription, and Course passed assignments*.

Click on the **Load Student Statistics** button to get detailed statistics about the students in the course:

<figure><img src="/files/D9YM2REUi65Tp26iJqZM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can check the engagement in your LMS using the **Advanced Analytics** feature of MasterStudy:

{% content-ref url="/pages/CZwi6DLPWaJ1bQ8p1JOk" %}
[LMS Analytics](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/analytics-for-admin)
{% endcontent-ref %}


# Google Meet

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/rgjEGTZMjbc?feature=shared>" %}

[Google Meet](https://meet.google.com/) is a video conferencing platform developed by Google. It allows users to host and join online meetings, webinars, and virtual classrooms. With features like screen sharing, real-time captions, and a grid view for multiple participants, Google Meet facilitates smooth and interactive communication and collaboration.

<figure><img src="/files/LEu6Duv5XvdytfqDgYED" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Google Meet add-on can enhance your video conferencing experience by providing additional capabilities and allowing the creation of meetings directly from MasterStudy LMS. In the manual below you will find:

1. [Configuration of Google Meet addon from WordPress Dashboard.](#enabling-google-meet)
2. [Configuring App Credentials.](#configuring-app-credentials)
3. [Connecting to Google Meet as Administrator.](#connecting-to-google-meet)
4. [Connecting to Google Meet as Instructor.](#connecting-to-google-meet-1)
5. [Google Meet settings.](#google-meet-settings)
6. [How to create Google Meetings](#creating-google-meetings).
   1. [Creating Google Meetings as an Administrator.](#creating-google-meetings-as-an-administrator)
   2. [Creating Google Meetings as an Instructor.](#creating-google-meetings-as-an-instructor)
7. [Google Meet Lesson.](#google-meet-lesson)

## Configuration of Google Meet addon from WordPress Dashboard <a href="#enabling-google-meet" id="enabling-google-meet"></a>

Initially, you have to enable the Google Meet Add-on from **WordPress Dashboard** > **MS LMS > Addons** section:

<figure><img src="/files/MGLcNfzN2EFfyGcvoayc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

To enable the addon, scroll and locate Google Meet, then switch it on. Following that, you will see a new tab labeled Google Meet under MS LMS to access the **settings** of the addon.&#x20;

Upon the initial opening of the settings, the Setup Wizard automatically appears, initiating the configuration process by requesting Google App Credentials:

<figure><img src="/files/uZJbKllEwtqOl5Omnzmp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Configuring App Credentials

In order to establish a connection with Google Meet, it is necessary to generate Google Credentials beforehand. This can be accomplished by accessing the Google Developer Console.

{% embed url="<https://console.cloud.google.com/>" %}

<figure><img src="/files/fbFX9oOWh4Wo0zSJAFXE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

By simply following the steps outlined below, it is easy to obtain API keys.

{% hint style="info" %}
In order to get API credentials, it is necessary to have SSL enabled for your website.
{% endhint %}

### Step 1. Creating a New Project

From the top left corner, **select a project** to use for credentials. If you do not have a project created, please follow along.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/ZmozZI7RCoc9S28JwrAY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After assigning a name to the project and, if necessary, choosing an organization, the project will be designated as yours.

<figure><img src="/files/az3WO2wrUWoUPwTtUwlf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### **Step 2. Enabling APIs & Services.**

From **Quick Access** select "APIs & Services":

<figure><img src="/files/eUwBLVKTzlmllbBrBn5h" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Alternatively, you can access "APIs & Services" through the Navigation menu:

<figure><img src="/files/zn4oNYJr2PrQwbzt5tcH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

From opened Dashboard, click **Enable APIs and Services.**

<figure><img src="/files/bNdpcnHnQGSObTmuUMyG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### **Step 3. Adding Google Calendar API to the project.**

Type the "Google Calendar" into the search field of the Google API Library to initiate a search.

<figure><img src="/files/T6e8LvWFrATN7qergJBK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Select the **Google Calendar API** from the search results:

<figure><img src="/files/UMbF9CN8CI0ZYyep5EjN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

To activate the Google Calendar API for this project, simply click on the **Enable** button.

<figure><img src="/files/RkQGiuNoEpwkTSoPbNK2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### **Step 4. Creating Credentials for** Google Calendar API

From the Google Calendar API dashboard click on the "**Create Credentials**" button:

<figure><img src="/files/8emodnBMEg5SbK07rjea" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Choose "**User data**" as the data type and proceed by clicking on the Next button.

<figure><img src="/files/wWL37WevC9hAF2xGLMOQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

In the section for the "OAuth Consent Screen", provide the name of your application and include your User support email and Developer Contact email.

<figure><img src="/files/tGfMb70P6xb0aHVQJ9VZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Upon saving the App details, you will be directed to the "Scopes" section, which can be skipped:

<figure><img src="/files/mhzqM3Jhn6QdQVJloZFg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After that, you can select the OAuth Client ID. Select Web application as your application type. Subsequently, you will need to establish an **Authorized redirect URI**.

<figure><img src="/files/9uMODzMMzMIAQ7T14ffh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

For the "Authorized redirect URI" go back to your WordPress admin dashboard.

You will find a link to copy in the 2nd step of the Google Meet setup wizard in MS LMS > Google Meet.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/TkeNGr3TJvphjeqh4Im9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Instructors can get the URL in the second step of the Google Meet setup wizard on their User Account:

<figure><img src="/files/69a2BUSHenpXb6kxPDEQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Copy that link and go back to the Google developer console and paste the link in the designated area for the Authorized redirect URI.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/pEGCEs8qD9J8IXGDdL9y" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This serves as the redirect URI required by the Google Calendar API. Click on the Save button, and once you do that, you will have finished the task.

After creating the credentials, you can then **download the JSON file** from the credentials dashboard. Simply click on the download icon to continue.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/E97Qk5GJwcP7wZiRYxGf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### **Step 5. Publsihing App.**

Finally, access the **OAuth consent screen** section and select the option to **Publish** the app.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/NPXxgtbSQRmxNiAxf8MU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

By doing so, you will enable the authorization for MasterStudy LMS and Google to utilize this integration. This step holds significant importance, as neglecting it could result in encountering an error. Therefore, ensure that you perform this step diligently.

## Connecting to Google Meet as Administrator <a href="#connecting-to-google-meet" id="connecting-to-google-meet"></a>

{% hint style="warning" %}
[This section](#connecting-to-google-meet) is only for **Admins**. Instructors should configure these settings in frontend by following [**this manual.**](#connecting-to-google-meet-1)
{% endhint %}

Once you have obtained your JSON file, you can easily establish a connection between MasaterStudy LMS and Google Meet by following a few additional steps. Simply navigate to the 3rd step of the Google Meet setup wizard in the WordPress Dashboard > MS LMS > Google Meet option:

<figure><img src="/files/KexdeOtJ7L0cd73maLjs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Upload the JSON file here and once uploaded it will authenticate your website with the API credentials:

<figure><img src="/files/QqR6FuzPdChk9oinxm8M" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can click the Next button to continue.

In the next step of the wizard, grant access to your Google account and allow all the permissions you want to have MasterStudy LMS with Google Meet.

<figure><img src="/files/qCw6TExkJcU8e54W7fIe" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
If you want to change anything and use a different JSON file, click **Reset Credentials**.
{% endhint %}

In the next step select your account&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/KFZoYW9CTK6WYTk3pUA4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

to grant permissions:

<figure><img src="/files/zS3DeX0x2qMyuJej9AHn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

That's all! You have completed the integration setup.

***

## Connecting to Google Meet as Instructor <a href="#connecting-to-google-meet" id="connecting-to-google-meet"></a>

{% hint style="warning" %}
[This section](#connecting-to-google-meet-1) is only for **Instructors**. Admins should configure these settings in backend by following [**this manual.**](#connecting-to-google-meet)
{% endhint %}

Instructors can configure Google Meet from their user account:

<figure><img src="/files/6CZ3OTGobLGYuvEjAUec" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
To allow Instructors to use Google Meet, the addon should be enabled by the Site administrator on WordPress Dashboard > MS LMS > Addons section.
{% endhint %}

By opening Google Developers Console Instructors should create their own API credentials by following the manual below:

{% embed url="<https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/google-meet#configuring-app-credentials>" %}

While Creating the credentials you can move to the next step of the Wizard to copy the **Web Application URL**:

<figure><img src="/files/69a2BUSHenpXb6kxPDEQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Once you have obtained your JSON file, you can easily establish a connection between MasaterStudy LMS and Google Meet in the third step of the wizard:

<figure><img src="/files/nLZY8mmWHMaST3ZNP2PP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Upload the JSON file here and once uploaded it will authenticate your website with the API credentials:

<figure><img src="/files/TDt75oOlTQEjBWb2xyUy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can click the Next button to continue.

In the next step of the wizard, grant access to your Google account and allow all the permissions you want to have MasterStudy LMS with Google Meet.

<figure><img src="/files/p6ikcydRK3v2of5CizmA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
If you want to change anything and use a different JSON file, click the **Reset Credentials** button.
{% endhint %}

In the next step select your account:

<figure><img src="/files/KFZoYW9CTK6WYTk3pUA4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

and grant permissions:

<figure><img src="/files/zS3DeX0x2qMyuJej9AHn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

That's all! You have completed the integration setup.

***

## Google Meet settings

Google Meet Settings allows editing time zone, remainder time, or switching Google accounts.&#x20;

The Google Meet settings have the following look on the WordPress admin dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/PU3djoetPWFvErOz2SyM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The Google Meet settings have the following look on Instructor's dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/yJNJJDcmCFGnI49tEHX6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Meet account status -** Displays the status of the connection between the Google account and add-on through API.
* **Default timezone -** You can set default time zone settings for newly created meetings.
* **Default reminder time (minutes) -** Time to get a reminder email notification before the meeting starts.
* **Send updates -** Select type of the notifications to receive by Email.
* **Reset credentials -**  Reset current API settings, and allows uploading new JSON file with new Google API Credentials.
* **Change account -** Option to change Google Account to conduct the meetings.

## Creating Google Meetings

Google Meetings can be created from both the WordPress dashboard and Instructor accounts.

### How to create Google Meetings as an Administrator

To create Meetings as an Administrator navigate to **WordPress Dashboard > MS LMS > Google Meetings** section and click on **Add New** Butto&#x6E;**:**&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/fzl64PMUy4LU9UAlHtjo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can name your meeting and put the date, time, timezone, and meeting summary.

<figure><img src="/files/GiLsh6CH79kUKZ9N2EfS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

In this section, you can also set event visibility for the meeting:

* Private: people who were not invited should get permission to enter the meeting;
* Public: the meeting will be accessible to everyone.

<figure><img src="/files/JMpMOhpxU7MnZf3hTseO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Then, click the “Create” button to publish the meeting. After publishing the meeting, they can be sorted by their date and started directly from the dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/YCjV1hSColTukUNOTs0U" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After starting the meeting, the host can invite other participants and manage the process.

<figure><img src="/files/3HqZWYv2o3YcbthsMV1a" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### How to create Google Meetings as an Instructor

Instructors can create Google Meetings when adding a new lesson:

<figure><img src="/files/EeI9n5D0xOgJEuDYQkDz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Set the title of the meeting and fill out the fields(date, time, timezone, event visibility, and meeting summary) and Save Changes:

<figure><img src="/files/Ei9TDZ953LkiTNep3lwU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After publishing, Instructors can edit, remove, or stat meetings directly from the dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/AqEYdm0IhVsvUybWaPbY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After starting the meeting, the host can invite other participants and manage the process.

<figure><img src="/files/3HqZWYv2o3YcbthsMV1a" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Google Meet Lesson

Google Meet integration allows you to create Google Meet lessons directly from Course Builder:

<figure><img src="/files/gwZLnyevrpS7oYUFJomq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After filling out the Meeting details simply click on the "Create" button to save the lesson for the Course.

<figure><img src="/files/PhsE0oZEAGWSsJzHSm25" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
When the "**Add Enrolled Students as Attendees**" option is enabled while creating the meeting, enrolled students of the meeting will be considered as meeting participants. Students will receive Email Notification which includes a link for the meeting.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

The content of the Lesson will be displayed for students before Metting starts:

<figure><img src="/files/EcIv567H9GSxgdT5aeHC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

In Conclusion, Google Meet integration includes more features compared to Zoom Lesson.

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MdepPqLRzcqUDJnTrsO" %}
[Zoom Conference](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/zoom-video-conferencing)
{% endcontent-ref %}

The main breakthrough in integration is that it allows each instructor to create separate Meetings and manage them on their own.


# Zoom Conference

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/X3VfOxaf2GM>" %}

To use Zoom and implement the service in your work, you need to enable the **Zoom Conference Addon**. To do this, from your dashboard panel, navigate to **MS LMS > Addons**. Find the Zoom Conference Addon and **enable** it.

<figure><img src="/files/WI5plKWHCQJAGhWiRbnr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can click on the **Settings** <i class="fa-gear">:gear:</i> icon in the top right corner to open the **Addon Settings.**&#x20;

## Addon Settings

Settings of the Zoom Conference addon can be reached from the WP dashboard as well:

<figure><img src="/files/9YGNRr6WDSXed6vjA25g" alt=""><figcaption><p>WP Dashboard > MasterStudy > Zoom Settings</p></figcaption></figure>

* [**Server to Server OAuth Credentials**](#server-to-server-oauth-credentials)
  * **Account ID** – Unique identifier of your Zoom account required for authenticating API requests.
  * **Client ID** – Public identifier of your Server-to-Server OAuth app created in the Zoom App Marketplace. It allows your LMS to connect with your Zoom account securely.
  * **Client Secret** – Private key paired with the Client ID used to authorize and authenticate API communication between your LMS and Zoom.
* [**Meeting SDK Credentials**](#meeting-sdk-credentials)
  * **Client ID** – Identifier of your Zoom Meeting SDK app that enables users to join meetings directly from the browser or within your LMS interface.
  * **Client Secret** – Secret key for your Meeting SDK app, ensuring secure authentication when users join or host meetings via the embedded Zoom SDK.
* **Generate Password** – When enabled, the system automatically generates a secure password for each new meeting or webinar. If disabled, meetings will not have a password unless manually set.

<details>

<summary>What are Server-to-Server OAuth credentials, and why are they needed?</summary>

Server-to-Server OAuth credentials are used to connect your LMS directly to your Zoom account through a secure API connection. They let the system perform Zoom-related actions — such as creating, updating, or deleting meetings — automatically on behalf of instructors, without requiring each user to sign in to Zoom.\
You can get these credentials by creating a **Server-to-Server OAuth app** in the Zoom App Marketplace. Once added, your LMS will be able to manage meetings and webinars seamlessly.

</details>

<details>

<summary>What are Meeting SDK credentials, and what do they do?</summary>

Meeting SDK credentials enable the **Join in Browser** feature that allows participants to join Zoom meetings directly inside your LMS interface — no external Zoom app required. These credentials authenticate the embedded meeting experience securely and ensure smooth integration.\
You can obtain them by creating a **Meeting SDK app** in the Zoom App Marketplace and entering the provided Client ID and Client Secret into your addon settings.

</details>

## How to Obtain APIs?

To obtain API credentials, visit the **Zoom App Marketplace** at <https://marketplace.zoom.us/> and sign in with your Zoom account. If you don't have a Zoom account, you can create one using this [link](https://zoom.us/signup).

<figure><img src="/files/jyykBr0YaOiVrFKvha1D" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Our plugin requires Server-to-Server OAuth and Meeting SDK APIs to connect with Zoom and use its functionalities.

{% hint style="info" %}
To make the Zoom Credentials work, the **SSL** should be activated on your domain.
{% endhint %}

### Server-to-Server App Credentials <a href="#server-to-server-oauth-credentials" id="server-to-server-oauth-credentials"></a>

1. On the **Zoom App Marketplace** page, click **Develop** and select **Build App** from the dropdown menu.

<figure><img src="/files/EF4vxUdhBBD0MT72sOD5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. In the popup window, choose **Server-to-Server OAuth App** and click on the **Create** butto&#x6E;**:**

<figure><img src="/files/hH6wNmRXS1rb4jnXRlS2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. Give a name to your App and click on **Create**:

<figure><img src="/files/I4Jzn5qZR0IE4bAJM78m" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. After completing this step, the system will automatically create API credentials, available in the **App Credentials** section.

<figure><img src="/files/E1TAN8EcRn1fsuELu9o5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

5. After selecting **Continue**, you will be taken to the **Information** page. On this page, you are required to enter essential details for your app, including your email and a description. Please ensure you accurately complete the following fields in the **Information** section:

* **Company Name**
* **Developer Contact Name**
* **Developer Contact Email**

<figure><img src="/files/HWLmBVXUB3eKpJtZKI1h" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

6. You can skip the next step, **Feature.**
7. Next, to ensure the plugin functions correctly, navigate to the Scopes tab and select **Add Scopes**.

<figure><img src="/files/sNYROcvLj7vXK1IS0LBy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Required Scopes

{% hint style="warning" %}
Permission issue error notices may appear while creating the meetings or webinars when any of the listed Scopes are not enabled.
{% endhint %}

You can use **the search bar** of the scopes menu to speed up the process:

<figure><img src="/files/lRzkRg78aBy4ZKM2YEyL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Below you can see all required scopes:

**Account**

* View account info
  * View an account's settings (account:read:account\_setting:admin)
  * View an account's settings (account:read:account\_setting:master)
  * View an account's settings (account:read:settings:admin)
* View and manage account info&#x20;
  * Update an account's settings (account:update:settings:admin)
* View and manage sub accounts
  * Update an account's options (account:update:options:admin)
  * Update an account's owner (account:update:owner:master)
  * Update an account's settings (account:update:settings:master)

<figure><img src="/files/UICAkVw2P1eHzNJvn4Kw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Meeting**

* View all user meeting summaries&#x20;
  * View a meeting's summary (meeting:read:summary:admin)
* View all user meetings
  * View a meeting's chat message (meeting:read:chat\_message:admin)
  * View a meeting's invitation (meeting:read:invitation:admin)
  * View a user's meetings (meeting:read:list\_meetings:admin)
  * View a user's upcoming meetings (meeting:read:list\_upcoming\_meetings:admin)
  * View a meeting (meeting:read:meeting:admin)
* View and manage all user meetings&#x20;
  * Delete a meeting (meeting:delete:meeting:admin)
  * Update a meeting (meeting:update:meeting:admin)
  * Update a meeting's status (meeting:update:status:admin)
  * Create invite links for a meeting (meeting:write:invite\_links:admin)
  * Create a meeting for a user (meeting:write:meeting:admin)
* View live streaming meeting token information&#x20;
  * View a meeting live streaming join token (meeting:read:live\_streaming\_token:admin)&#x20;
* View local archiving meeting token information&#x20;
  * View a meeting local archiving join token (meeting:read:local\_archiving\_token:admin)

<figure><img src="/files/yON1VxbuE74OgPtqhpPO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**User**

* View all user information&#x20;
  * Verify a user's email (user:read:email:admin)
  * View a user's assistants (user:read:list\_assistants:admin)
  * View a user's permissions (user:read:list\_permissions:admin)
  * View users (user:read:list\_users:admin)
  * View a user's settings (user:read:settings:admin)
  * View a user's token (user:read:token:admin)&#x20;
  * View a user (user:read:user:admin)&#x20;
* View user's zak token
  * View a user's Zoom Access Key (user:read:zak:admin)
* View users information and manage users
  * Delete a user (user:delete:user:admin)
  * Update a user (user:update:user:admin)
  * Create a user (user:write:user:admin)

<figure><img src="/files/JIqnmSzULYkDr9Z4mt2U" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Zoom Events**

* Manage event speaker information&#x20;
  * Remove an event's speaker (zoom\_events:delete:speaker:admin)&#x20;
  * Update an event's speaker (zoom\_events:update:speaker:admin)&#x20;
  * Add a speaker to an event (zoom\_events:write:speaker:admin)&#x20;
* View all events information&#x20;
  * View an event (zoom\_events:read:event:admin)
  * View events (zoom\_events:read:list\_events:admin)
* View event's Access Link&#x20;
  * View zoom event access links (zoom\_events:read:list\_access\_links:admin)

<figure><img src="/files/wj0mAmBv8sz494SUfohq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Webinar**

* View all user Webinars
  * View a webinar's participant (webinar:read:participant:admin)
  * View a webinar (webinar:read:webinar:admin)
* View and manage all user Webinars
  * Delete a webinar (webinar:delete:webinar:admin)
  * Update a webinar's status (webinar:update:status:admin)&#x20;
  * Update a webinar (webinar:update:webinar:admin)
  * Create invite links for a webinars (webinar:write:invite\_links:admin)
  * Create a webinar for a user (webinar:write:webinar:admin)
* View and manage sub account's user webinars
  * Delete a webinar (webinar:delete:webinar:master)
  * View a webinar (webinar:read:webinar:master)
  * Update a webinar (webinar:update:webinar:master)
  * Create invite links for a webinars (webinar:write:invite\_links:master)
  * Create a webinar for a user (webinar:write:webinar:master)

<figure><img src="/files/YDmOTuzoBpVXuf7uYzd2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Reports**

* View report data
  * View webinar detail reports (report:read:webinar:admin)
  * View daily usage reports (report:read:daily\_usage:admin)
* View sub account's report data

  * View webinar detail reports (report:read:webinar:master)

<figure><img src="/files/3uTcPP6gIqPPbFOSensM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Once you've added all the necessary Scopes, click on the **Done** button.

{% hint style="info" %}
To learn more about scopes and expand the functionality of the app, read [Zoom's doc about OATH Scopes](https://developers.zoom.us/docs/integrations/oauth-scopes-overview/).
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/GMasQiX1FIC3tgZGGPad" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Click **Continue** to go to the final step.

<figure><img src="/files/KpDk9fxM8Wok8sq5iDJm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

8. Finally, activate the Server-to-Server App:

<figure><img src="/files/JQFc7MQQdN8etVYPfjbK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

9. Copy the **Account ID, Client ID,** and **Client Secret** and paste them into the respective fields on the **Zoom Settings** page in your dashboard and save the settings:

<figure><img src="/files/pXT8IJfKcB5uzukXg0LT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Meeting SDK Credentials

{% hint style="success" %}
Zoom Meeting SDK offers video-conferencing features that mirror the meeting experience in the Zoom Client. Meeting SDK is required to make **Join In Browser** work.
{% endhint %}

1. Go to the **Zoom App Marketplace** at <https://marketplace.zoom.us/>

<figure><img src="/files/LlwjJQTuKJ8ojhMvTogt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. On the **Zoom App Marketplace** page, click **Develop** and select **Build App** from the dropdown menu

<figure><img src="/files/zzXYyqgjBfWUNNSx7R02" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. In the pop-up window, choose **General App**:

<figure><img src="/files/gX0VH6ZuOQGXEDWIMnzd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. On the opened page, name the App according to your needs:

<figure><img src="/files/bhOzfezflnkx4BIdGLRw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

5. In the B**asic Information** page, choose **Admin-managed** as the app management type and **save** it:

<figure><img src="/files/qH9o5ISvA5F6dxR89JiB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

6. Indicate your site URL (including the https part) in the **OAuth Redirect URL** field on the same Basic Information page (e.g, <mark style="color:green;"><https://yourwebsite.com></mark>):

<figure><img src="/files/kCKk7ldUBH5FUxubIt8R" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

7. Jump to the **Embed** tab and enable **Meeting SDK**:

<figure><img src="/files/5Zq3HGaHeI1WzhFPd4Mb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

8. Move to the **Scopes** page and click on **Add Scopes:**

<figure><img src="/files/IWl2qo2XHsU94tg4n24r" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

9. Add the following scope and click on **Done**:

* **User > View user's zak token** (`user:read:zak:admin`)

<figure><img src="/files/oUMzvsN0GDFMrU1QMrmk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

10. Copy the **App Credentials** and paste them to the designated area in eRoom settings and **save the changes:**

<figure><img src="/files/pFWW4zLiLNgljF7vXaLB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/viRvfjxvCbYzG748At0b" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## How to use Zoom Meetings? <a href="#zoomvideoconferencing-howtousezoommeetings" id="zoomvideoconferencing-howtousezoommeetings"></a>

{% hint style="info" %}
To make sure the instructors can select a Zoom Conference lesson type in the Frontend Course Builder, go to **WP Dashboard** > **Users > Select user > Edit User**. Scroll down to the Zoom Settings, find the Meeting Host section, and Select Host from the dropdown menu.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/1uuBQVRZmWzzwPrzBH91" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The Zoom Conference addon allows you to easily add new users. Those users can be added as **Hosts**, which means that they will be able to host and create their own meetings.

{% hint style="info" %}
Please note that for each Instructor on the website, the admin should specify the **Host**. Multiple instructors can be applied to the same Host if you have a free Zoom account with only one Host available. In that case, those instructors can add and conduct video sessions themselves. But they can't stream conferences at the same time.

***

If there are many instructors and there is a possibility of having conferences at the same time, you need to purchase a premium Zoom plan with a larger number of hosts: <https://zoom.us/pricing>
{% endhint %}

To add a new user, go to **WP Dashboard >** **Zoom Conference > Users > Add User**, and on the new page, fill in the necessary information and save.

<figure><img src="/files/sFEgdtSxvpKH2Uyf9Kq1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

On this page, you can see all the users in your account.

<figure><img src="/files/wOqsrQetb4AgzIInMp3S" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## How to Create Zoom Lessons?

Creating Zoom lessons after setting up the add-on is quite a straightforward process.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Edit the course you want to add a Zoom lesson to with **Course Builder**:

<figure><img src="/files/ew1uEV32WpoUuJi5aT3u" alt=""><figcaption><p>WP Admin > MasterStudy > Courses</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Add a new lesson the choose Zoom Lesson as the lesson type:

<figure><img src="/files/ucHEMra3IvF8is1nSw6A" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Give a title to the lesson and provide other lesson details:

<figure><img src="/files/bHlPKJsjNXPJdweMwDQ6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

Here is the look of the lesson on Course Player for students:

<figure><img src="/files/uaj88Q4Cmndv8xuXrGfX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Multi-instructors

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=1132s&v=98LKgphFSCY>" %}

The Multi-Instructors add-on is a powerful feature designed to enhance collaborative teaching by allowing the assignment of multiple instructors to a single course. This functionality offers several benefits, making it an invaluable tool for educational institutions and e-learning platforms.

<table><thead><tr><th width="432">Features</th><th data-type="checkbox">Instructor</th><th data-type="checkbox">Co-Instructor</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Add/Create/Reorder/Modify/Delete <strong>All Types of Lessons, Assignments, and Quizzes</strong></td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:red;">*</mark>Managing <strong>Assignments &#x26; Quizzes</strong></td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td>Changing <strong>Course Info</strong> (Description, Info, Price, FAQ etc)</td><td>true</td><td>false</td></tr><tr><td>Manage Students</td><td>true</td><td>false</td></tr><tr><td>Creating Course Announcements</td><td>true</td><td>false</td></tr><tr><td>Participating in <strong>forum Discussions</strong></td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a data-footnote-ref href="#user-content-fn-1">Managing Course Reviews</a></td><td>false</td><td>false</td></tr></tbody></table>

<mark style="color:red;">\*</mark>*co-instructor can only manage the assignments that has been created by himself.*&#x20;

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Course Builder for Instructors" %}

<figure><img src="/files/tqi5Ti301vg5VaA09FKk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Course Builder for Co-instructors" %}

<figure><img src="/files/NfH8EpXZ66uuLZ4TWzgX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

To activate this option go to **MasterStudy LMS -> Addons**. Find there the Multi-instructors addon and enable it.

<figure><img src="/files/hGEjrARsQ7J6gk1PhZnl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## How to Assign a Second Instructor to the Course?

1. After enabling the addon, edit any of your existing courses with **Course Builder** by following MasterStudy LMS -> Courses -> Edit with Course Builder:

<figure><img src="/files/nQ6sY6KuAC7Tpkd0nRrx" alt=""><figcaption><p>Editing the Course with Course Builder</p></figcaption></figure>

2. Navigate to **Settings -> Main -> Co-Instructor** and select the instructor that you want to assign, then **save** the changes:

<figure><img src="/files/POPSy9m0UQCBU2TgMJuI" alt=""><figcaption><p>Assigning second instructor</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Please note you can add a user as a co-instructor only if he or she is registered on the website as an Instructor (user role).
{% endhint %}

On the **Course Page**, it will be displayed like this:

<figure><img src="/files/yQU8Ycuo8f9ccAXAfNzz" alt=""><figcaption><p>Co-Instructor Feature on the Course Page</p></figcaption></figure>

Co-Instructor (second instructor) can edit the course from the **Co-Courses section** on his Instructor Dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/4w3fWHGk7zxm9JCOshpV" alt=""><figcaption><p>Co-Courses</p></figcaption></figure>

[^1]: Only admin can do it)


# Statistics & Payouts

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=1023s&v=98LKgphFSCY>" %}

This add-on allows you to manage all payments and track affiliated statistics for the sold courses, such as Total Profit, Total Payments, get statistics for a specific period, etc. Also, you can proceed with payments for course authors manually or automatically.

You can enable the Statistics & Payouts addon in the **STM LMS > LMS Settings > Addons** section of the WordPress dashboard menu.

![](/files/-MjSwea5yfRLHGd2SIm5)

{% hint style="info" %}
**To review the step-by-step guide on how to set up Payouts -** [**Click Here**](/masterstudy-lms/paypal-payouts-setup/general-settings)**.**
{% endhint %}

## Sale Statistics For Instructors <a href="#statistics-and-payouts-statisticsforthecourseauthors" id="statistics-and-payouts-statisticsforthecourseauthors"></a>

Take control of sales by viewing the statistics. Analyze what courses are selling the least and improve overall income.

Instructors can track sales and earning statistics from the profile menu - Payout section.

![](/files/-MjSxzQmJi7cxLkgdfXw)

The Statistics page consists of Earnings graph and Sales pie chart.

![](/files/-MjSybxMfPsgdn6HOzGU)

![](/files/-MjSytOi4bbg8dm9BdHV)

Also, instructors can review total earnings and individual sales for each course.

![](/files/-MjSyz1LZ4nrAB3dkdj6)

## Sale Statistics For Admins <a href="#statistics-and-payouts-statisticsforthecourseauthors" id="statistics-and-payouts-statisticsforthecourseauthors"></a>

Website administrators can see statistics of user's purchase histories, course authors' earnings, and proceed payments for course authors. &#x20;

Navigate to **MS LMS > Statistics** to load a sales history. On this page, administrators can see order statistics and sort data with a different option.

![](/files/-MjSzWuvj3f7azQ4n5Ir)

{% hint style="warning" %}
**NOTE:** Statistics dashboard loads history of all orders made on the website including WooCommerce orders. However, the Total Earnings are calculated without WooCommerce orders.
{% endhint %}


# Trial Courses

Trial Courses addon lets your potential learners try out your online courses for free. You can give trial access to specific lessons within your courses and attract more learners.

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=968s&v=98LKgphFSCY>" %}

Allow your students to try some of the lessons for free with the Trial Courses feature.

![](/files/vbYypoUAoNDVvoWxlxSd)

## How to set up the Trial Courses addon

To enable Trial courses,  go to the Pro Addons and enable it.

Click on the Settings icon, which will appear on the dashboard after enabling the addon, and enter the number of free lessons you want to be in the course.

You can also allow everyone access to trial courses without login. For this, enable Guest access to trial courses by switching the toggle.

<figure><img src="/files/yRDYU4GQ95t3ABktl5p3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This is how users will see the free lessons with the guest access:

<figure><img src="/files/IyttScp8TtRq6pGvkfTJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This is how users will see the free lessons without enabling the guest access:

<figure><img src="/files/VpTJlSgJhUsV63Nt00kh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

When they click on the “Enroll course” button, there will be a popup that requires signing up or logging in:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/6BR7cTv8XdTFDxeOIehX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Now, when you create a new or edit an existing course in the Access section under the Settings tab enable the Trial Course feature by dragging the slider to the right.

<figure><img src="/files/tksMYOoOKLLnRi1pX7mQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Saved settings (number of free lessons) will be applied automatically to the course. Students will be able to complete free lessons on the trial course without purchasing. The rest of the content will be accessible only after they buy the course.&#x20;

Once the free trial lesson is completed, a student will be offered to buy the course to unlock the rest of the content.

<figure><img src="/files/JHwcVSXwiZOU0YF093NY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This is how the trial course and preview will look on the Curriculum tab of the course page:

<figure><img src="/files/STvuu8I131y2LRzChx5k" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The color of these badges can be changed in the **Accent** color of the [**General** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/general)**LMS settings**. For example, let's try changing it to green.

<figure><img src="/files/rsspg046lSlNTownfkei" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

That's how it will look when the **Accent** color is changed:

<figure><img src="/files/6NqZKG5BK6fEr4VywyPs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Audio Lesson

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/sNmXeINHDFI?feature=shared>" %}

The **Audio Lesson Addon** for MasterStudy LMS introduces a new and engaging way to deliver course content. Now you can share audio lessons by uploading audio files or adding them from Spotify or SoundCloud. This addon allows educators to create audio-based lessons using various audio formats, enhancing the learning experience by catering to auditory learners. You can mix audio lessons with text, video, and quizzes to create a comprehensive learning experience. Below is a detailed guide on how to use the Audio Lesson Addon effectively.

#### Key Features

* **Support for Multiple Audio Formats:** The addon supports MP3, OGG, and WAV files.
* **External Audio Links:** Easily integrate audio files hosted on external platforms like Spotify and SoundCloud.
* **Seamless Integration:** Fully integrates with existing MasterStudy LMS courses and lessons.
* **Multimedia Mixing:** Combine audio lessons with text, video, and quizzes for a rich, interactive course experience.

### Enabling the Audio Lesson Addon

1. **Access Addons:**
   * Navigate to your WordPress admin dashboard.
2. **Open MasterStudy LMS Addons:**
   * Go to `MS LMS` > Pro`Addons`.
3. **Enable the Audio Lesson Addon:**
   * Find the Audio Lesson Addon in the list of available addons.
   * Toggle on the button next to the Audio Lesson Addon to enable it.

<figure><img src="/files/h4Qem2UU0bHh6EJ8ypc1" alt=""><figcaption><p>Enabling Audio Lesson addon</p></figcaption></figure>

### **Set Preferred Audio Source:**

* Before uploading audio files, click on `Preferred Audio Source` in the settings => Course.
* Tick whether or not you will upload audio file formats directly

<figure><img src="/files/D3lxRkH85c4j0seFtma9" alt=""><figcaption><p>Choose the Preferred Audio Source Type</p></figcaption></figure>

### Creating an Audio Lesson

1. **Navigate to Course Builder:**
   * From the WordPress admin dashboard, go to `MasterStudy LMS` > `Courses => Add New Course`.
   * Select the course you want to add an audio lesson to or create a new course.
2. **Add New Lesson:**

   * In the course builder, click `Add Lesson`.
   * Select `Audio Lesson` from the lesson type options.

<figure><img src="/files/ItRAvkZvQutFRAXY6hAN" alt=""><figcaption><p>Audio Lesson</p></figcaption></figure>

**Upload Audio Files:**

* Click on `Upload Audio` to add MP3, OGG, or WAV files from your computer.
* Alternatively, you can add external links by selecting the `Add External Link` option and entering the URL of the audio file from platforms like Spotify or SoundCloud.

**Configure Lesson Settings:**

* Enter the lesson title and description.

**Publish the Lesson:**

* Once all details are filled in, click `Publish` to make the audio lesson available to your students.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Audio File Upload" %}

<figure><img src="/files/ty0vdVvOSfvgiLcS0neb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Audio Lesson View" %}

<figure><img src="/files/W5wJLiF5kaBsLNEuyXSe" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Managing Audio Lessons

* **Edit Existing Lessons:**
  * To edit an audio lesson, go to `MasterStudy LMS` > `Courses`, select the course, and click on the lesson you wish to edit.
  * Make the necessary changes and update the lesson.

Let's say we want to enhance our lesson by integrating a SoundCloud podcast.

To do this, follow these steps:

1. Navigate to SoundCloud and find the podcast you wish to embed.
2. Click on the 'Share' button and select 'Embed' to generate the embed code for the podcast.
3. Copy the generated embed code to your clipboard.

<figure><img src="/files/VykvrUc8WR57Cu7l4YMq" alt=""><figcaption><p>Copying embedded code from SoundCloud</p></figcaption></figure>

Next, edit the lesson where you want to include the podcast:

1. Open the lesson in your preferred editor.
2. Switch to the source code or HTML view of the lesson.
3. Paste the copied embed code into the desired location within the source code.

<figure><img src="/files/sd4DHIKxMjObTvgd52FX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Example of embedded SoundCloud code:

```html
<iframe width="100%" height="300" scrolling="no" frameborder="no" allow="autoplay" src="https://w.soundcloud.com/player/?url=https%3A//api.soundcloud.com/playlists/1586853385&color=%23ff5500&auto_play=false&hide_related=false&show_comments=true&show_user=true&show_reposts=false&show_teaser=true&visual=true"></iframe><div style="font-size: 10px; color: #cccccc;line-break: anywhere;word-break: normal;overflow: hidden;white-space: nowrap;text-overflow: ellipsis; font-family: Interstate,Lucida Grande,Lucida Sans Unicode,Lucida Sans,Garuda,Verdana,Tahoma,sans-serif;font-weight: 100;"><a href="https://soundcloud.com/takeiteasyrec" title="Take It Easy Records" target="_blank" style="color: #cccccc; text-decoration: none;">Take It Easy Records</a> · <a href="https://soundcloud.com/takeiteasyrec/sets/deep-house-2023" title="Deep House 2024" target="_blank" style="color: #cccccc; text-decoration: none;">Deep House 2024</a></div>
```

<figure><img src="/files/fbbBhplR7sBmswwJxj7i" alt=""><figcaption><p>Edited Audio Lesson View</p></figcaption></figure>

By following these steps and examples, you can seamlessly add enriching SoundCloud and any external podcasts to your lessons.

## Required Audio Progress&#x20;

The **Required Audio Progress** feature ensures that learners listen to a certain percentage of a lesson’s audio before marking it as complete. As they listen, a progress indicator displays how much of the audio has been passed, and the **Complete** button remains disabled until the specified listen threshold (e.g., 75% or 100%) is met—this helps maintain course quality by requiring students to fully engage with the content.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Required Audio Progress** is **available in all audio source types** except **Embed** and **Shortcode** types. They **do not** function with them, as those methods **lack direct access** to the audio player's time data, preventing progress tracking.
{% endhint %}

### How to Set Required Audio Progress Percentage?

This is quite a straightforward process.&#x20;

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Create or edit any audio lesson except **Embed** and **Shortcode** source types in [**Course Builder**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder) and write down the **Required Audio Progress** **(%)** percentage to see:

<figure><img src="/files/eNMRBtObDoxkhM6KyBTK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
**Save** the changes:

<figure><img src="/files/gHF6EkVnQTZVhiboQ8yX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

Here is how it will look to students:

<figure><img src="/files/WzVo0QZbTMabaIzijmy9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Because the Required Audio Progress feature only **controls the lesson’s completeness**, a student can still **access the next lesson** via the **curriculum** or a direct link **even if** they haven’t met the watch percentage.

***

However, if you want to prevent moving to the next lesson without completing this lesson and ensure proper lesson sequencing, you can use the [**Drip Content**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/drip-content) **add-on.**&#x20;
{% endhint %}

## Timecodes

**Timecodes** let you link specific points of audio to text in your lesson, so learners can jump straight to the exact moment they need. This is especially helpful for longer audio with multiple topics, allowing students to quickly navigate to relevant sections without manually scrubbing through the entire audio.

{% hint style="warning" %}
Timecodes **are available in all audio source types** except **Embed** and **Shortcode** types. They **do not** function with them, as those methods **lack direct access** to the audio player's time data, preventing progress tracking and timestamp jumps.
{% endhint %}

### How to Add Timecodes to Audio Lessons?

This is quite a straightforward process.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Create Audio lesson in [**Course Builder**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder)**:**

<figure><img src="/files/EbUhBscEUcS3lIg0Vr4A" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Choose any source type except embed and shortcode types, then provide the rest of the information:

<figure><img src="/files/ShTFm94yLb9QpoaGD1pC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

### Timecodes Format

Scroll down to the **Lesson Content** section and wrap the timestamp and its title/description in curly braces `{} in.` For example:

```
{wrapped text 01:25}
```

* This signals the LMS that “<mark style="color:purple;">**01:25**</mark>” is a timestamp for your audio, and “**wrapped text**” is simply a label or description.

You can use the timestamp in different positions like this example:

```
#Timestamp at the beginning
{01:25 wrapped text}

#Timestamp in the middle
{wrapped 01:25 text}

#Timestamp at the end
{wrapped text 01:25}
```

<figure><img src="/files/RiwAEsqfmfRjhqQvjTPR" alt=""><figcaption><p>Example of Timecodes in Lesson Content</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
To get timecodes easily, there is a **Listen Audio** button that opens the audio you provided right in the[ **Course Builder:**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder)

<figure><img src="/files/7aFGU6HHEjq3EAcw7DYL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/FQ8pq6EpeoAK9MqHKq6U" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Here you can see how it will look to students:

<figure><img src="/files/bAcAEldj9G2uKws9QXbY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

### Timecodes in Discussions

Students and instructors can use the timecodes to highlight the exact moment of the audio and video lessons. They have to follow [**the same format**](https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/audio-lesson#timecodes-format) as in the Course Builder:

<figure><img src="/files/2Xl06Q6EMY8mQW1LkLSO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is how it will look after the submission:

<figure><img src="/files/RqN12TdctaQULr26SPxx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Live Streaming

The Lesson Live Stream enables instructors to conduct online classes by utilizing third-party services, specifically the video platform YouTube. This feature allows you to engage with your students effectively by providing study materials, enabling them to contribute comments and questions through the Live Chat, and receiving immediate feedback.

You can also save the stream as the video lesson and add it to one of the lessons, so the students who missed Live Stream will be able to watch it later.

![The screenshoot taken from the Masterstudy theme](/files/uRxD2H5L1IubOEpWmxNX)

To activate live streams, go to **MS LMS > Addons** and enable the addon.

![](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2F-MDO9V_qgvV5cQdw04iz%2F-MSX2VnYXUKaoiSG8H8T%2F-MSXL87Pou1ppBs_46XW%2Fimage.png?alt=media\&token=f6dc370e-fa77-4079-94df-a6883baf6504)

Once enabled, navigate to **MS LMS => Courses => Add New Course**. When adding the lesson type, select **Stream**.

<figure><img src="/files/1k9QK3cG1WhmDrEFIjgZ" alt=""><figcaption><p>"Select 'Stream lesson' as the lesson type when adding a new course.</p></figcaption></figure>

Then you have 2 options for adding a Stream lesson:

## **Option 1: Copy the stream URL directly from other channels.**

To do this, go to YouTube, select the live video, click on the **share** button => click on **embed**, and copy the link needed for the live stream lesson.

<figure><img src="/files/XWbkhKcMPIJQ7KUziMW7" alt=""><figcaption><p>Copying the embedded code for your stream lesson from YouTube: Step 1</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/meaa9BeVb1kMn1OJKGND" alt=""><figcaption><p>Copying the embedded code for your stream lesson from YouTube: Step 2</p></figcaption></figure>

Make sure the iframe code where you need to copy just a part of it. The link should include the "**embed**" word. Copy the link as shown in the image above.

Use this link to add the video to the lesson page. Just paste it in the Stream URL field.

<figure><img src="/files/k7uMU3Hcvgr34eLVuKfe" alt=""><figcaption><p>Pasting the embeded code in the Stream URL field</p></figcaption></figure>

Once you've completed the lesson details, fill in the date, time, duration, description, and content fields. Finally, click the "**Create**" button and then "**Publish**" to make the lesson live and viewable by your students.

<figure><img src="/files/kRD3mJeET9oCdBhrPTy5" alt=""><figcaption><p>Fill in the information in the Stream lesson &#x26; Publish</p></figcaption></figure>

Upon publishing your course, students will see a countdown timer alongside detailed lesson information, as shown below

<figure><img src="/files/LlDJXCMXBJrgFncFQcI4" alt=""><figcaption><p>Published Course view</p></figcaption></figure>

## **Option 2: Copying live video link from personal YouTube channel**

&#x20;Use YouTube to launch a live-stream lesson.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
Learn [here](https://support.google.com/youtube/answer/2474026?hl=en) how to use live streaming on YouTube.
{% endhint %}

To embed a stream directly into the lesson, make sure the stream is **unlisted** on YouTube so that users with the link can access it.

{% hint style="info" %}
Why do you need to create an unlisted video?

1. **Limited Visibility**: Unlisted videos are not publicly searchable on the platform. They can only be accessed by users who have a direct link to the video. This allows for more control over who can view the content.
2. **Sharing Privately**: Unlisted videos are a great way to share videos privately with specific individuals or groups without making them public.&#x20;
   {% endhint %}

To create an unlisted live video, you typically need to use a platform that supports live streaming (like YouTube) and offers the option to make your stream unlisted

<figure><img src="/files/XRAJxCa1JaZNk9EiBUPZ" alt=""><figcaption><p>Creating unlisted YouTube Stream</p></figcaption></figure>

Once your live stream is active,  copy the stream's link.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/WQg9ZwFzbRKa8LuW5FmD" alt=""><figcaption><p>Copying the share link of the Stream</p></figcaption></figure>

As a next step, to securely copy the embed code, it is recommended to open a new incognito or private browsing tab. This helps isolate your browsing activity. Once the new tab is open, paste the link and locate the "share" and"embed" buttons, which an icon or a menu option might represent. Clicking on this button will typically display the embed code itself. Now, carefully highlight the entire code snippet. Right-click within the highlighted area and select "copy" from the context menu. With the embed code safely stored on your clipboard, you can return to your main browsing window and proceed to the platform where you want to embed the content.

<figure><img src="/files/76aqjEv0QVZVLiebnW3t" alt=""><figcaption><p>Copying YouTube Stream's embed code</p></figcaption></figure>

Make sure you paste the code and update the settings as explained above.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/92dSKA2Yqgw0es5Segkz" alt=""><figcaption><p>YouTube Live Video Stream</p></figcaption></figure>


# Point System

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=736s&v=98LKgphFSCY>" %}

Award students for their progress and activity by applying the **Point Reward System**. Boost motivation, engagement, and attention Span with this feature and make courses more effective and fun.

<figure><img src="/files/HLHJuqLWwV0623SyPENz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

To activate the Points Reward System go to **MasterStudy LMS > Addons**. Find the **Points System addon** and **Enable** it.&#x20;

{% hint style="success" %}
When a student wants to buy a new course there will be an additional option of buying it for points. Also, learners will be shown the exact amount they lack to purchase.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/UHOj0IyvhZ6KzB15j1uS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Point System Settings <a href="#point-system-settings" id="point-system-settings"></a>

To reach the settings of the Point System just click on the **Gear** icon in the Addons tab or follow **WP Dashboard > MasterStudy LMS > Points System Settings:**

<figure><img src="/files/oHhXWiUdQ4gz8oGAdVOi" alt=""><figcaption><p>Point System Settings</p></figcaption></figure>

Here is the overview of the Point System Settings:

<figure><img src="/files/QPLNjI4xgnvVZeruBA1Y" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

It consists of **2 tabs:**

* [**Interface**](#interface-tab)
* [**Points Distribution**](#points-distribution)

### Interface Tab

Here is the Overview of the Interface tab. On this page you have to indicate the look and general settings for the points:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/aquFB89venEirVmrHX50" alt=""><figcaption><p>Interface Tab</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Point Image** - add a new image that will typify your points;
* **Point Label** - enter a label for the points;
* **Point Rate** - specify any number that you want to be equal to USD 1;
* [**Enable Affiliate Points**](#pointsystem-affiliatelink) - your users can share their[ affiliate link](#how-to-use-affiliate-points), and get points for the activity of users, they invited;
* **Affiliate Points Percent** - set the number of percent, the user will receive from the affiliate;

<figure><img src="/files/2bndOJDbtJgT9jnk9TVM" alt=""><figcaption><p>Points in the Instructors Dashboard</p></figcaption></figure>

### Points Distribution

In **Points Distribution**, you can set the point amount for each activity on your site. For example, for registration on the website, a user gets 50 points.

<figure><img src="/files/e2UWsdTiKa5blreHE7Ho" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Registration** - Indicate the number of points that students will get for registering on your website.
* **Course Purchase** - Specify the number of points awarded to students when they purchase a course from your platform.
* **Passing Assignment** - Determine the points students earn upon successfully passing an assignment.
* **Course Completion** - Define the points students will receive after completing an entire course.
* **Passing Quiz** - Set the points awarded to students for passing a quiz, even if it's not with a perfect score.
* **Passing Quiz with 100%** - Allocate additional points for students who achieve a perfect score of 100% on a quiz.
* **Lesson Completion** - Provide points to students each time they complete a lesson within a course.
* **Joining Group** - Reward students with points for joining a study group or any other relevant community group on your platform.
* **Making Friends** - Award points to students who engage with the platform by making new friends.
* **User Registered (Affiliate)** - Set the points given to students for registering on your platform through an affiliate link.
* **Course Purchased (Affiliate)** - Indicate the points awarded for purchasing a course through an affiliate link.

## How to Check Points?

Admins, instructors, and students can check the number of gained points on their dashboards.&#x20;

1. Just click on the Earning history to see the points you gained.

<figure><img src="/files/s6sskAyQgaxekizwTouA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/rfToyUKnhMgNSkJnkV34" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. On the opened page, all of the points history will be displayed:

<figure><img src="/files/o6I2HYklBQQ32ZNMp4Qd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. By clicking on **How to get more?** students can open the page with the **Points Distribution** and learn what activities can bring them more points.

<figure><img src="/files/KLTOLtYmOYbttMih8G55" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Managing Student Points (admin)

The admin can access the Point Statistics from the dashboard.

<figure><img src="/files/M1fj0dksAb3QIOqXbxHx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

On the Student Points page, you can check all students' points and get the full statistics for the selected student:

<figure><img src="/files/xFwx2NsWP17NUi6P822i" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Admin can re-allocate the points to the students for the event or entirely delete the event and the points that the students gained because of this event:

<figure><img src="/files/eQ75zvQoWVswLOBks8a5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## How to Set the Course Price in Points? <a href="#pointsystem-affiliatelink" id="pointsystem-affiliatelink"></a>

1. Admin and instructors can set the price of the course in points as well via [**Course Builder**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder#pricing). Follow MasterStudy LMS > Courses > Edit the Course with Course Builder:

<figure><img src="/files/En92PKIsWssLY0BzgPFi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Move to the Pricing and indicate the course price in terms of Points, save the changes.

<figure><img src="/files/t6uj5wUv7VjCBsokQSOd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. So, now students can buy the course using their points:

<figure><img src="/files/xqrADDfc9EnFt1RThqZh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## **Affiliate Link** <a href="#pointsystem-affiliatelink" id="pointsystem-affiliatelink"></a>

Affiliate Link is an additional feature in the Point Reward System. An amazing opportunity to add affiliate marketing and transform it into a game.

### **How to use Affiliate Points?**

1. First of all, you need to activate the **Affiliate Points**. Go to the [**Interface tab**](#interface-tab) of the Point System Settings and **Enable Affiliate Points**. Then, set the amount of percent students will receive from the affiliate.

<figure><img src="/files/DKbcYW6Qe11Ya66vIUqt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. After this, students will be able to copy and share the link which will be available on their profile settings. It allows them to earn points for the activities of users they invited via that link.

<figure><img src="/files/cw1KqRku3YxIWIBNjIjV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/iMv5v64NB6WfDuQErT3w" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. Let students earn points for referring visitors and sign-ups.

<figure><img src="/files/ViEfUCVfAlKPuhSXR5uj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# SCORM

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=892s&v=98LKgphFSCY>" %}

## What is SCORM?

**SCORM** (Sharable Content Object Reference Model) is a set of technical standards for e-learning software products. It defines how online learning content and Learning Management Systems (LMS) communicate and interact. **SCORM** ensures that e-learning content can be easily shared, reused, and tracked across different systems and platforms.

Key features of **SCORM** include:

1. **Interoperability**: **SCORM** content can work across various LMS platforms.
2. **Reusability**: **SCORM**-compliant courses can be reused and adapted for different learning environments.
3. **Tracking**: **SCORM** allows LMS to track learners' progress, including quiz results, time spent, and completion status.
4. **Sequencing**: **SCORM** defines how the learner navigates through the course material.

**SCORM** is widely used in e-learning platforms to ensure standardized, compatible learning experiences across multiple systems.

{% hint style="info" %} <mark style="color:blue;">**IMPORTANT**</mark>

SCORM is **a** **full course**. You can not edit the contents of the **SCORM** course via **LMS.**&#x20;

* It is not possible to add several SCORM as lessons or quizzes.
  {% endhint %}

> For users who want to add a SCORM file for each lesson, **there is a&#x20;**<mark style="color:green;">**third-party solution**</mark>**:**

{% embed url="<https://www.nextsoftwaresolutions.com/experience-api-for-masterstudy-lms/>" %}

## How to Enable SCORM in MasterStudy LMS?

**MasterStudy** **LMS** fully supports SCORM courses via a special addon. This addon allows you to use different content authoring tools to create courses and sell them with your LMS. Thanks to SCORM compatibility standards of eLearning content you can use it on **MasterStudy LMS** by simply uploading the content to your website.

To start using the addon go to **MasterStudy > Addons**. Find the **SCORM** addon and enable it.

<figure><img src="/files/YnAWjVZtHr2DGqOpk5Gi" alt=""><figcaption><p><strong>MasterStudy > Addons</strong></p></figcaption></figure>

## SCORM Addon Settings

To reach the settings of the addon simply click on the gear icon on the **Pro Addons** page:

<figure><img src="/files/YzgKLcFbbHmvGSwLkx5x" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Alternatively, you can follow **WP Dashboard > MasterStudy LMS > SCORM Settings:**

<figure><img src="/files/zXlkqIGMrqv4fIF9P4NU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Allowed Extensions inside SCORM zip

This setting lets you specify which file extensions can be included in SCORM-compliant ZIP files uploaded to the MasterStudy LMS. By controlling the permitted file types, you can ensure that the content uploaded within SCORM packages is secure, compatible, and appropriately formatted for LMS usage.

<figure><img src="/files/PA0w2BIa1TnKrjB1NC3y" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Enter the file extensions you wish to allow inside the SCORM ZIP file, separated by commas (without spaces). You can specify any valid file type to ensure it is supported during the SCORM package upload process. Here is an example:

```
php,json,c,ipynb
```

{% hint style="info" %}
Some common extensions have already been added, including `css, js, woff, ttf, otf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, html, json, xml, pdf, mp3, mp4, xsd, dtd, ico,` and `swf.`
{% endhint %}

## How to Create a SCORM Course?

1. First, create an ordinary course as usual. Follow **WP Dashboard > MasterStudy LMS > Courses > Add New Course**:

<figure><img src="/files/uQcsys1xcNnoRY2sTtF0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Fill the basic course details (title, category, image) on the opened page to **create a course**:

<figure><img src="/files/q2jK8kvHvJN6aoEDLZCs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. On the opened [**Course Builder**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder), you can see the **Import SCORM** button. Click on it and upload `.zip` version of the SCORM course:

<figure><img src="/files/vgTLkHeic257JkMJBgoL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
Only one file can be uploaded as a SCORM package!
{% endhint %}

4. You are done! As we mentioned earlier, the contents of the SCORM course **can not be edited** in LMS. However, you can set other settings of the **SCORM course** like ordinary courses:

<figure><img src="/files/aqzRDNi1hKheWQETA0M7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

5. SCORM courses will have their own Course Player. That's why the default [**Course Player**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/course-player) of the **MasterStudy LMS** can not be applied to the SCORM Courses:

<figure><img src="/files/KKYmyYy5YoDfPBRmazL7" alt=""><figcaption><p>Example of the SCORM Course Player</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
The appearance of the course will correspond to the system you used to create the SCORM course content.
{% endhint %}

***

{% hint style="info" %}
Following the same steps, you can upload the SCORM package to the existing course by simply editing it with[ **Course Builder**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder). But please note if there were lessons in the curriculum, they will be **deleted** after the SCORM package is uploaded.
{% endhint %}

## How to Get a Certificate for the SCORM Course?

Once the students complete the SCORM Course they can see their course progress on the **course page:**

<figure><img src="/files/h4QrWeq2x3tocBMy7PcM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

By clicking on the **Details** button, they can download their certificates:

<figure><img src="/files/eTGQJnhi8sXWIkBnkqip" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Google Classroom

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=1174s&v=98LKgphFSCY>" %}

**Google Classroom** add-on is an additional feature created specifically to ease the process of structuring classes and your workflow. With a new function, you can connect your Google Classroom account with your website and import the needed classes. Students will get a special code to enter the right class.

<figure><img src="/files/8csKoJx4y8kDWxauq6gY" alt=""><figcaption><p>WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Pro Addons</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
To successfully use this feature, you need PHP version 7.2 or higher.
{% endhint %}

## How to get API Credentials <a href="#how-to-get-api-credentials" id="how-to-get-api-credentials"></a>

Firstly, you need to create an app in the **Google Console** to get credentials.&#x20;

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Follow to <https://console.developers.google.com/apis/credentials> to open the Google Developers Console:

<figure><img src="/files/bZBDrLHHv5Cc7173SzAS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
You can use the existing projects or create a new project to keep your console organized.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/v92si3WPWgs1QJyi2X6r" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
A new project can easily be created simply by providing its name.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
On the Credentials page,  click on the **Create Credentials** button.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/OcYZ2GCddI2AEUc9ZfBH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
From the dropdown menu, select the option **OAuth Client ID**.

<figure><img src="/files/FsmqiBddxlGEsJTGxSPY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
On the opened page:

* choose  the application type as **Web Application**;
* give a **name** to it (eg, *Google Classroom for MS LMS*)
* click on the **Add URI** button on the **Authorized redirect URIs** section

<figure><img src="/files/tAB3bfXkHt4aXXQGijIH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Now we have to get the Redirect URI from MasterStudy LMS. Go back to the admin panel of your website, and follow **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Addons > Google Classroom** and click on the :gear: gear icon. It opens the addon settings.

<figure><img src="/files/nHpbaEiZqhgrVY3WY9Gc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
At the top of the opened page, you will find the Redirect URI Link. Kindly copy it:

<figure><img src="/files/9tvox4cNzdqolGZKhSqW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Paste this link to the designated area and click on the **Create** button:

<figure><img src="/files/9JlprESqvPwTWfM30JYl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Usually, it will take several seconds to process. However, it may take 5 minutes to a few hours forthe  settings to take effect
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
The following messages confirm that you have created the **OAuth Client** successfully. You can see the **Client ID** and **Secret key** here as well:

<figure><img src="/files/eRftvAeMNhzhvYx2dgWA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Later you can find this key in the same (Credentials) page by following this:

<figure><img src="/files/2bXBdOQbCoAx9IXuIqx6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

### Download the JSON File

Now we have to download the **JSON** file of our **OAuth Client**. Click on the **download** :arrow\_down: button to do it:

<figure><img src="/files/u2AGaD8sOlbz7KlTld2L" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Now API for the Google Classroom service should be enabled. Find the Library menu on the **APIs & Services:**.

<figure><img src="/files/8vymNrVas6LXWy0vPSmC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Using the search bar, search for the **Google Classroom** and choose it:

<figure><img src="/files/Bk0DbZ5uPKwwyVto2B0p" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Click on the Enable button to enable it:

<figure><img src="/files/mOnbyM9ViFgekTFHIEWo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
That's it. We have successfully obtained our working credentials to use for **Google Classroom.**
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Importing Google Classrooms <a href="#importing-google-classrooms" id="importing-google-classrooms"></a>

Importing existing Google Classrooms is also a straightforward action.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Follow **WP Dashboard > Classrooms> Import Classrooms** and upload the [**downloaded JSON file**](https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/google-classroom#download-the-json-file)**,** then click on the **Load Credentials** button:

<figure><img src="/files/GakvHNDZMzlaOpXFKf1O" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Now, we need to get an access token. Click on the **Get Access Token** button. You will be offered to select the needed profile in the popup window. Sign in to move to your app and you will be redirected back to the **Import Classrooms** page.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/OfxFxAU7yk6VsfVOycWT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Now you can see all the classes available in your Google account. You can import all classes or select just several and publish them.

<figure><img src="/files/bUzKuUW7psFilWPV6yvV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

Once the classrooms are imported and published, you can see them on the Google Classroom Archive Page:

<figure><img src="/files/KdR7AfUrmqEIRFDzwV5l" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Students can find the course codes to enter the required class.

<figure><img src="/files/oQbe1mbFkznAnmzSuA02" alt=""><figcaption><p>Google Clasroom Page</p></figcaption></figure>

## Addon Settings <a href="#googleclassroom-enablingpopup" id="googleclassroom-enablingpopup"></a>

You can find the addon settings in the [Imported Classrooms ](#user-content-fn-1)[^1]page:

<figure><img src="/files/enRrkvLmwqKS9VYbbdhS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Only signed-in students will see the code** - enable this option so that only students who are signed in will see the Google Classroom code

### Enabling Popup <a href="#googleclassroom-enablingpopup" id="googleclassroom-enablingpopup"></a>

This setting lets you display a modal pop-up notice about the available Google Classrooms on your website when users visit. It occurs only on the first visit.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/EdxoadKwkHCe1zv9521F" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here are the available settings:

* **Popup Title** - provide a title for the pop-up.
* **Popup Editor** - write down the brief description of the classrooms feature and describe why they are necessary. You can write whatever you want and design it using the special text editor.
* **Popup Image** - indicate the image that will be used to display on the pop-up. Once the user clicks on the image, it brings users to the special page that you specified.
* **Google Classrooms page** - indicate the URL of the page that users will be directed to by clicking the Pop-up Image. You can also use the link on the classes page on your Google Classroom account.

## Google Clasroom Elementor Widget

You can customize the Google Classroom page using the special widget for Elementor.&#x20;

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
that Open the page that you want to specify as a Google Classroom page using Elementor:

<figure><img src="/files/9COsBhaXxrRkc8R4TDTo" alt=""><figcaption><p>WP Dashborad > Pages > All Pages > Edit with Elementor</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Search for '**Google Classrooms**' and add the widget to the desired place according to your needs:

<figure><img src="/files/xOayM5kKm5TgFOHCqGAE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
You can provide the title for the Grid and indicate the number of the items (classes) need to be displayed:

<figure><img src="/files/ARs8SIRDymflI9cBi4qV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Once you finished, you can publish/update the page:

<figure><img src="/files/Hhs70XZFlvHhsl9m6gkF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

[^1]: WP Dashboard > Classrooms > Importeed Classrooms


# Udemy Course Importer

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=1379s&v=98LKgphFSCY>" %}

Do you want to import courses from Udemy and display them on your website? You can enable the Udemy Course Importer addon in the **MasterStudy LMS Settings > Addons** section of the WordPress dashboard menu. You need to click on the "**Enable Addon**" and a gear icon appears over the image of the addon where you can set up Udemy Settings and import courses.

![](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2F-MDO9V_qgvV5cQdw04iz%2F-MSShqYZD-Q24p5g7w8P%2F-MSW-fnY-BqQIC7Yk4mU%2Fudemy.png?alt=media\&token=f4c6c747-1282-4b49-9a1a-98ff7ce15326)

In the Credentials tab of the MasterStudy LMS Udemy Settings section, you need to add your [client ID](https://www.udemy.com/user/edit-api-clients/), [Secret API keys](https://www.udemy.com/user/edit-api-clients/), and [Udemy Rakuten Affiliate script](https://cli.linksynergy.com/cli/publisher/portfolio/automate/automate.php).

![](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2F-MDO9V_qgvV5cQdw04iz%2F-MSShqYZD-Q24p5g7w8P%2F-MSW0AmumQmVz-9MxPi-%2Fudemy1.png?alt=media\&token=1322da08-db89-4ae5-9755-2e1b51bdc89e)

## Udemy API Client <a href="#udemycourseimporter-udemyapiclient" id="udemycourseimporter-udemyapiclient"></a>

You need to click on the [**Udemy API**](https://www.udemy.com/user/edit-api-clients/) link in order to get your Udemy credentials.

![](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2F-MDO9V_qgvV5cQdw04iz%2F-MTZEStM40EXQ_QxPkg4%2F-MTZIAVjuZ1DxFBQggvz%2FScreenshot_162.png?alt=media\&token=976ef5f4-936d-4b5d-ae62-373213210b4f)

When your API Client request is approved, API credentials will be available in the API Clients section.

![](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2F-MDO9V_qgvV5cQdw04iz%2F-MTZEStM40EXQ_QxPkg4%2F-MTZIISCZQTTkESVnVIi%2Fbobby_udemy.png?alt=media\&token=bb8e5ae8-6394-4b97-8c1e-43335f858828)

## Udemy Rakuten Affiliate script <a href="#udemycourseimporter-udemyrakutenaffiliatescript" id="udemycourseimporter-udemyrakutenaffiliatescript"></a>

For the **Udemy Rakuten Affiliate** script, you need to register on the Rakuten Marketing website and generate a unique Rakuten Automate script.

![](https://support.stylemixthemes.com/storage/stm-manuals/April2020/udemy-8.png)

Here you can read more about the Rakuten Automate tool - [**https://blog.rakutenmarketing.com/news/attention-publishers-announcing-automate-new-deep-linking-tool/**](https://blog.rakutenmarketing.com/news/attention-publishers-announcing-automate-new-deep-linking-tool/).

## Import and manage Udemy courses <a href="#udemycourseimporter-importandmanageudemycourses" id="udemycourseimporter-importandmanageudemycourses"></a>

After adding Udemy API credentials, you will be able to search and import Udemy courses in the Search tab.

![](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2F-MDO9V_qgvV5cQdw04iz%2F-MSShqYZD-Q24p5g7w8P%2F-MSW0LkoP7I1t75oXsOd%2Fudemy2.png?alt=media\&token=e7f4b3f6-4b07-4c8c-a967-7a6343132573)

The Imported Courses tab contains options for managing your imported courses.

![](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2F-MDO9V_qgvV5cQdw04iz%2F-MSShqYZD-Q24p5g7w8P%2F-MSW0XOQzzIRXFefmqpy%2Fudemy3.png?alt=media\&token=e7eea222-e6f4-4db9-aef6-03fc87248e8d)

Your customers will be able to get published courses on Udemy from your website.

<figure><img src="/files/UTDaOrrbeVJNXS4SVtzC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Online Testing

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?t=1084s&v=98LKgphFSCY>" %}

Online Testing Addon allows you to paste any quizzes through the shortcode to any page.

### Benefits of Online Testing Addon

* **Flexibility** – Quizzes can be embedded on **any page**, enhancing user accessibility and experience. This allows seamless integration of assessments into course content, promotional pages, or informative sections.
* **Engagement** – Embedding quizzes directly within content increases interaction and user engagement. It encourages prospective students to participate actively, making the learning process more dynamic and appealing.
* **Privacy** – Test results are private and **accessible only to students**, fostering a secure environment for self-evaluation. This builds trust among users who prefer to assess their skills without external judgment.
* **Self-Assessment** – Students can independently evaluate their knowledge and skills through one-time quizzes. It provides valuable feedback without pressure, helping learners identify areas for improvement on their own.
* **Conversion** – Quizzes help potential students assess their readiness for courses, aiding in their decision-making process. This can lead to higher enrollment rates as users feel more confident about their choices.

## How to use it?

You can enable the Online Testing addon in the **MasterStudy LMS > LMS Settings > Addons** section of the WordPress dashboard menu.

<figure><img src="/files/rkQhxGqhhQ8vOD6PQS7K" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

By clicking on the **Gear icon** you will find a shortcode that you need to use to paste a quiz to any page.

![](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2Fmasterstudy-theme-documentation%2F-MDUkedOkTL5xCgSlPaR%2F-MDUqwqP8MdaFa8VcALF%2F103776295.png?alt=media)

Go to the Quizzes page and add a new Quiz (see this article to learn how to create and add quizzes)

{% hint style="info" %}
Create a quiz and insert a shortcode with quiz ID on a page. Shortcode: \[stm\_lms\_quiz\_online id=QUIZ\_ID\_HERE]
{% endhint %}

On the Quiz editing page from your right, you can see the **Online Testing** with the ready-to-use shortcode. Just copy the shortcode and paste it to the page.

![](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2Fmasterstudy-theme-documentation%2F-MDUkedOkTL5xCgSlPaR%2F-MDUqwqQyRffZ-XnN5jx%2F103776301.png?alt=media)

Alternatively, you can find the shortcode of the quiz in the [**course builder**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder) as well:

<figure><img src="/files/6QSLP12rwS4jR9xPZroR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Using any page editors (Gutenberg, Elementor, WP Bakery, etc) just paste the copied shortcode to any place:

<figure><img src="/files/aI1Cj4B6Wj9ICJE4hX77" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="danger" %} <mark style="color:red;">**IMPORTANT**</mark>

You **can not** use this shortcode inside of your [**lesson content**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/lessons), for instance in [**Text Lessons**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/lessons#text-lesson)!

***

Instead, you have to create **a separate lesson** with the [**Quiz Lesson Type.** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/quizzes) In that case, you can also view the [**student's answers** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/quizzes#quiz-review)for the quiz as well.
{% endhint %}

On this particular page, there will be a quiz that you can start and finish.

<figure><img src="/files/7wZVdz5pVOPZTMJJPXAH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Users can pass the quiz that has been embedded with the Online Testing addon **only once.**
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/4QaNKYaUKl80SYNKHa1H" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Please note that Quiz results are connected to the user’s IP address, which is why the result will be the same in different browsers.
{% endhint %}


# Course Builder

The MasterStudy LMS Course Builder is a tool that helps users create online courses. With this tool, users can create courses that are both attractive and useful for their students. The tool can be used in both the Backend and Front-end of a website, making it easy to build courses from either perspective.&#x20;

## How to add a course <a href="#how-to-add-a-course" id="how-to-add-a-course"></a>

How to add a new course and set it up? Look for the answers in this manual and learn how to add and maintain courses with the easy-to-use  Course Builder.

### Adding a New Course using Course Builder on the Backend <a href="#add-a-new-course-via-backend-course-builder" id="add-a-new-course-via-backend-course-builder"></a>

To begin creating a new course in MS LMS, navigate to the **MS LMS > Courses from the Wordpress Dashboard.** Click the **Add New** button and start creating content for your new course.

<figure><img src="/files/0P3A3H9QVK6jZmNGUsu6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
If you encounter a **blank page** when accessing the **Course Builder** or **Courses**, first ensure that your [**Permalinks settings**](/masterstudy-lms/troubleshooting/404-errors#permalinks) are correctly configured.
{% endhint %}

After that, you will be redirected to the main page of the Course Builder to add Course information:

<figure><img src="/files/l3pCw7GYRtdCLeMqh78l" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Creating a New Course using Course Builder on Front-end

Instructors registered on a platform can utilize the front-end course builder. Each instructor will have their own personal Admin panel or Profile page, which is user-friendly. To create a new course, an instructor simply needs to go to their profile and click the Add New Course button.

<figure><img src="/files/9BQ55yNlhGpcHW4TUqRG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The **"Add Course**" button can be accessed from two different locations on the website - the User account dropdown and the Floating Side Profile Menu. This provides instructors with multiple options to easily add a new course to their account.

<figure><img src="/files/LTypUAmJG4zIYfYpePzg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Once the instructor has clicked the "Add Course" button, they will be automatically directed to the main page of the Course Builder, where they can input all relevant information about the course they are creating.

### Course Information

The Course Builder includes important information about a course such as its name, URL, category, level, and image. This information is essential as it gives potential students a clear understanding of what the course is about and helps them make an informed decision about whether to enroll or not.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/RyhmrVReoNHWz8VFQ34Q" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
To allow instructors of a website to add new categories, the website admin needs to enable the option "**Allow instructors to create new categories**" under the "Course" section of the **LMS settings**. This will give instructors the permission to create and add new categories to the website's course structure.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/TGUdAzAoEo6qYCRjPFBS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Read more about Course categories from the link below:

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MderhYFGBO3KvpiJdPO" %}
[Courses Category](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/courses-category)
{% endcontent-ref %}

After filling out the course information, click the "**Create**" button to manage **Course Curriculum** and lessons.

### Course **Curriculum**

A curriculum is a collection of lessons and assessments that will be taught by an instructor. As soon as a new course is created on the left side of the screen course curriculum section appears.

<figure><img src="/files/u4ARoJtcLc0zWIpFGs2J" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Dividing a course curriculum into sections helps in organizing the content in a logical and structured manner. This makes it easier for learners to navigate the content, understand the flow of the course, and identify the topics that are most relevant to their learning goals.

Instructors can add as many sections as they want to a course curriculum, and they can customize the **section titles** to reflect the content covered in each section.

<figure><img src="/files/HzI9ZKJrjfBM5jISYNEt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

By clicking on the "**Add lessons**" button, Instructors can create new lessons:

<figure><img src="/files/XL4AJ3PqwmlWqobmT7rW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This action adds a new lesson to the existing list of lessons. It's a simple and convenient way to add more lessons to the course curriculum.

To add previously created lessons to the curriculum, simply click on the "**Search materials**" button.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/bHEURi4sqL5TdKvHOc8d" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This feature allows you to easily locate and incorporate relevant materials into your curriculum without having to recreate them from scratch.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
The **Lessons** section of this manual contains detailed information about the different types of lessons available.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

{% content-ref url="/pages/-Mder9CS2Zl8cjIYb-lk" %}
[Lessons](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/lessons)
{% endcontent-ref %}

### Drip

Drip content is a method of releasing educational material gradually and unlocks lessons only after the student has passed the required lesson or assessment.

{% hint style="info" %}
Drip content is available in the Pro Plus version of the plugin and requires the Drip Content addon enabled:
{% endhint %}

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MdemzC\_gifOkeYdHDvh" %}
[Drip Content](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/drip-content)
{% endcontent-ref %}

To create a new dependency between lessons in the Drip tab of the course builder, the "Create new dependency" button can be clicked:

<figure><img src="/files/UnAmAfevRSM3TxTRuT0G" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Next, drag lessons, quizzes, and assignments to the right side to create drip content:

<figure><img src="/files/IRc71cTEtqvgllF1GsEo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Settings

The "Settings" tab in a course builder allows you to configure various settings for your course, such as the course name, description, enrollment options, access, and pricing. You can also set up course completion certificates for students.

#### Main

The main settings of a course builder refer to the general options that define a course, such as a course's title, URL, description, and status:

<figure><img src="/files/Sg7vRoWlRy7vQ6SqndC7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Access

The **Access tab** allows limited access to the course based on the student’s enrollment date, manages the [**Upcoming Course Status**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/upcoming-course-status), and can make the course [**Trial.**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/trial-courses)

<figure><img src="/files/1DwYoxaM0uSZyiFRiJjX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
The trial course and Upcoming Course Status options require the [**Trial Courses**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/trial-courses) **and** [**Upcoming Course status**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/upcoming-course-status) addons.
{% endhint %}

Enabling the **Time Limit** option allows for setting a specific expiration date for a course, which means that the course will no longer be accessible after a certain number of days.

<figure><img src="/files/FxBeje3DRwAba4n9t0Xw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
This can be useful in situations where access to the course needs to be restricted to a certain timeframe or when the course material is time-sensitive.
{% endhint %}

When users enroll in the course, they will see how many days are left until the course becomes inaccessible. Additionally, after enrolling, students will receive notifications about the course's expiration.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/DyYo9FhVbN9xORrtUw5o" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This feature helps students better manage their time and stay on track to complete the course before it expires.

Check the following documentation to learn more about **Trial Courses** and **Upcoming Course Status** Features:

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MdemoMYFexDepBlZP21" %}
[Trial Courses](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/trial-courses)
{% endcontent-ref %}

{% content-ref url="/pages/Nx3e3jEIOx7Wi1E4UNEn" %}
[Upcoming Course Status](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/upcoming-course-status)
{% endcontent-ref %}

#### Prerequisites

Prerequisites are the required courses that students must complete before they are able to enroll in the next course of a higher level.

<figure><img src="/files/3fs3EBCrabPJDRSxrbaR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
The Prerequisites is available in the Pro Plus version of the plugin and requires the  **Prerequisite** addon enabled:
{% endhint %}

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MdekfkM\_CJbccfwesDn" %}
[Prerequisites](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/prerequisites)
{% endcontent-ref %}

If students are interested in taking the course, they will discover that there is a requirement they must meet before enrolling.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/x7G9F9Gl1sxKTz3dT8TL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This prerequisite must be completed before they can register for the course.

#### Course files

This section of the platform provides the ability to upload course materials in any file format. To do so, simply click on the "Select file" button and choose the files you wish to upload.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/ZXGnHEqlM9t3Q6JOVfoh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Once uploaded, the file will be available for students to access as part of the course materials.

<figure><img src="/files/Yy1U1JazeuVT2M6YlfUh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### Certificate&#x20;

The certificate tab is a feature that allows instructors to choose from a selection of pre-made certificates that students will receive upon completing a course.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/lTwm0XpcIr1vkk6PmCzg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Essentially, it's a way for users to showcase their achievements and completion of the course. Learn more about **Certificates**:

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MdepdKe4E2d8IELFo6Q" %}
[Certificate Builder](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/certificate-builder)
{% endcontent-ref %}

#### Course Page Style

Using this feature of the **MasterStudy LMS** you can set the **Course Page style** for this course only. If you do not indicate the course page style here, the course page style that has been set to [**the course category**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/courses-category#add-a-new-category-from-the-admin-panel) will be applied. If the course page style is set as **none** for the **course category as well**, the [**global Course Page style**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/course#course-page-styles) will be applied to this course that you have set in **MS LMS Settings > Course > Course Page Style.**&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
Note that, selecting the Course Page style in **Course Builder** ignores any settings, and directly applies this style to the course.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/cXTPDEs9RKT6KG8OFqZy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here you can see the available single **Course Page Styles:**

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Style 1" %}

### Default

The [Default](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/) course style presents a balanced and user-friendly layout, designed to streamline navigation and deliver course content with clarity and accessibility

<figure><img src="/files/4uzZp7YUpeRXoT2978VK" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Default Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 2" %}

### Classic

The [Classic ](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=classic)course style offers a clean and straightforward layout for easy navigation and a clear presentation of course content.

<figure><img src="/files/51ivplAQFYGOu3KUdeiu" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Classic Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 3 " %}

### Industrial

The [Industrial](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=modern) course page style features a modern and dynamic layout, tailored to accommodate complex course structures and engage learners with its visually immersive design.

<figure><img src="/files/CgLlpPE4pGTBtZXUbgxR" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Industrial Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 4" %}

### Timeless

The [Timeless](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=timeless) course style embodies a classic and elegant layout, offering a timeless appeal that prioritizes simplicity and ease of use, ensuring an enduringly enjoyable learning experience.

<figure><img src="/files/xktjsYW7Ano6FeORPu5T" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Timeless Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 5" %}

### Sleek with Sidebar

The [Sleek Sidebar](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=sleek-sidebar) course style showcases a contemporary design with a distinctive sticky sidebar feature, enhancing user experience with convenient navigation placed beneath it, providing easy access to course materials and resources.

<figure><img src="/files/LbsP6K1iktxsHVrwspul" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Sleek Sidebar Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 6" %}

### Minimalistic

The[ Minimalistic](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=minimalistic) course style offers a clean and uncluttered design, focusing on essential course elements for a streamlined learning experience.

<figure><img src="/files/7DiVklBXM5qepgxifuil" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Minimalistic Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 7" %}

### Dynamic

The [Dynamic](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=dynamic) course style presents course information in a fluid and interactive manner, utilizing dynamic elements and modern design principles to engage learners effectively.

<figure><img src="/files/um2TPpQwrOV7Bu3fx2oO" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Dynamic Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 8" %}

### Modern with Curriculum

The[ Modern with Curriculum](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=modern-curriculum) course style resembles our modern design but integrates the course curriculum into a sidebar on the left for enhanced accessibility.

<figure><img src="/files/PyNUnl03HrkN9hWcnla3" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Modern with Curriculum Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 9" %}

### Dynamic with Short Sidebar

The [Dynamic with Short Sidebar](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=dynamic-sidebar) course page style includes a sticky sidebar for effortless navigation throughout the course content.

<figure><img src="/files/fG1NVDxNqB6JBwd1PM0b" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Dynamic with Short Sidebar Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 10" %}

### Bold with Full Width Cover

The [Bold with Full Width Cover](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=full-width) course page style prominently features a full-width course photo at the top, creating a visually captivating introduction to the course content.

<figure><img src="/files/LGVxMZuQvdFHwBPP3Wct" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of Bold with Full Cover Course Page</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Pricing

The Pricing section allows instructors to define how learners can access a course. Only one pricing model can be active at a time. Users must choose between **Free**, **Paid**, or **Affiliate** and configure the related settings.

<figure><img src="/files/oAWzom3C74PBv5U75FeC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

There are three pricing options you can choose:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Free" %}
The **Free** tab allows instructors to make the course available at no cost. Learners can enroll without payment, while instructors can still provide additional course information or restrict certificates.

<figure><img src="/files/YKymAuwSn2mlKEVLXans" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Price info -** A text field used to display additional pricing notes on the course page. Useful for explaining that the course is free for a limited time or part of a promotion
* **Do not provide certificate -**  When enabled, students will not receive a completion certificate.
  {% endtab %}

{% tab title="Paid" %}
The **Paid** tab allows instructors to sell the course directly through the platform with flexible pricing options such as discounts, subscriptions, and alternative purchase methods.

<figure><img src="/files/M8VcKk9it1PYJUX1NrGF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **One-time purchase** - Enables a single payment model that grants lifetime access. Enter the number in the blank to set the course price, or leave the field empty to make the course free.
  * **Price** - Sets the regular base price of the course for one time purchase
  * **Sale price** - Defines a discounted promotional price for one time purchase
  * **Sale start date** - Specifies when the sale price becomes active
  * **Sale end date** - Specifies when the sale price expires and the regular price returns
* **Price info** - Displays additional pricing notes or conditions on the course page
* **Do not provide certificate** - Disables certificate generation for course completion
* **Subscriptions** - Enable selling the course through recurring subscription access. Click [**here to learn more**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/subscriptions) about the subscription system.
* **Group course price** - Allows special pricing for enterprise group enrollments. Click here to [**learn more about**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/group-courses) the group courses feature.
* **Not included in membership** - Excludes the course from the membership level, even if the course category is included in the [**membership**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/subscriptions) plan. To use the option, it is necessary to have the Paid Membership Pro plugin installed on your website.
* **Buy with points** - Indicate the price of the course in terms of coins. Students can buy the course using these coins instead of real money. Click here to [**learn more about**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/point-system) the points system.
  {% endtab %}

{% tab title="Affiliate" %}
The Affiliate tab redirects students to an external platform where the course is sold instead of processing payments inside the LMS.

<figure><img src="/files/k4wubq7pIMbruvNOcOu9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Button text** - Sets the label of the redirect purchase button
* **Button link** - Defines the external URL where students are redirected to buy the course
* **Price for affiliate** - Displays an informational price inside the LMS without processing payment
  {% endtab %}
  {% endtabs %}

#### **Price Info**

Here you can put any text that will be shown with the purchase button as price info

<figure><img src="/files/QgvvueSjeZiiStBINq56" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### FAQ&#x20;

Create the FAQ section to predict possible misunderstandings. Add one by one: items, questions, and answers.

<figure><img src="/files/7fsybPtMMT2OFirr2Wb7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Click on the New FAQ item to add a new question and answer. Enter the question/answer in the spaces provided.

### Notice

The notices, formerly known as announcements, are used to communicate important course-related information to enrolled students.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/8GA7haXqxOHooGoEdaNh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Make important announcements for your learners whenever you need to. Write your text in the space provided.

### WYSIWYG Editor

The Course Builder of the **MasterStudy i**s powered by the **WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get)** editor. You can see this editor in writing notices, short descriptions of the lesson, and lesson contents:

<figure><img src="/files/OSA3FOYTzIZQZbqmnZJj" alt=""><figcaption><p>WYSIWYG Editor in the Course Builder</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/iEnhwPT3p99BFoRGN7mS" alt=""><figcaption><p>WYSIWYG Editor Tools</p></figcaption></figure>

From left to right:

* **Undo** - undo the last operation, `CTRL + Z /  Command + Z.`
* **Redo** - Redo the last undone operation, `CTRL + Y / Command + Shift + Z.`
* **Bold** - Make the selected text bold, `CTRL + B / Command + B.`
* **Italic** - Italicize the selected text, `CTRL + I / Command + I.`
* **Underline** - Underline the selected text, `CTRL + U / Command + U.`
* **Strikethrough** - Apply strikethrough to the selected text.
* **Text Color** - Change the color of the selected text.
* **Highlight** - Highlight the selected text with a background color.
* **Paragraph Format** - Change the paragraph format (e.g., heading levels, normal text).
* **Clear Formatting** - Clears all formatting to the selected text.
* **Align Left** - Align the text to the left.
* **Align Center** - Center the text.
* **Align Right** - Align the text to the right.
* **Subscript** - Apply subscript formatting to the selected text.
* **Superscript** - Apply superscript formatting to the selected text.
* **Bulleted (Unordered) List** - Create a bulleted (Unordered) list.
* **Numbered (Orderd) List** - Create a numbered (ordered) list.
* **Source Code** - Shows the source code of the content inside of the editor in HTML. You can make changes and save them using an HTML editor.&#x20;
* **Hyperlink** - Insert or edit a hyperlink.
* **Table** - Insert a table.
* **Insert/Edit Media** - Insert video and image by uploading / embed code / URL. Once you are inserting via URL make sure your URL ends with the correct media format (e.g .MP4, .JPG, .PNG)
* **Media Gallery** - opens[ **Media File Manager**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/media-file-manager) to insert audio/video/image&#x20;
* **Fullscreen** - Toggle fullscreen mode.

{% hint style="danger" %}
When **copying** text from another website or document, ensure you **Clear Formatting** <img src="/files/iHYOjTc8NjBuHdclqkKq" alt="" data-size="line"> first!

Assigning a custom **Text Color** will display the text in that color regardless of the Course Player Mode **(Dark or Light).** If you copy text with a custom black text color, it appears black regardless of the mode, causing visibility issues in dark mode. The same applies to text with **white colors.**

Therefore, be cautious when working with **white and black** colors.
{% endhint %}


# How to Add Math Equations in MasterStudy?

**MasterStudy LMS** has built-in support to add math equations, formulas using [**LaTeX** system](https://www.latex-project.org/).&#x20;

<details>

<summary>What is LaTeX?</summary>

*LaTeX* is a document preparation system used for the communication and publication of scientific documents. It is widely used in academia for the communication and publication of scientific documents and technical note-taking in many fields, owing partially to its support for complex mathematical notation. It also has a prominent role in the preparation and publication of books and articles that contain complex multilingual materials, such as Arabic and Greek. LaTeX uses the TeX typesetting program for formatting its output, and is itself written in the TeX macro language.

Source: <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/LaTeX>

</details>

To use the functionality, a free [**MathJax-Latex**](https://wordpress.org/plugins/mathjax-latex/) plugin should be installed and configured accordingly.

## Install and Configure MathJax-Latex

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Search for the **MathJax-Latex** by following **WP Dashboard > Plugins > Add New** and **Activate** it:

<figure><img src="/files/CmLHR8m1zVNEFxUR4FGh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
After the plugin activation, follow **WP Dashboard > Settings > MathJax-Latex** and check the **Force Load** option, and **Save Changes**:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/84zXPMhcLwu7huYAMOSi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
That's it! Now you're free to use LaTeX syntax to add math equations on your website!
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Example Usage in Course Builder

LaTeX written math equations and formulas can be used in the **Lesson contents**, and both the [**Question** and **Answers**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/questions) part of the [**Quizzes**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/quizzes). There is only one rule to follow:

{% hint style="info" %}
Before and after the LaTeX syntax code, `$$` symbols should be added in the [**Course Builder.**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder)
{% endhint %}

| Correct LaTeX Syntax for Course Builder  | Display on the Course Player            |
| ---------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------- |
| `$$[ x^n + y^n = z^n]$$`                 | $$\[ x^n + y^n = z^n ]$$                |
| `$$\lim_{a \rightarrow b} \frac{x}{y}$$` | $$\lim\_{a \rightarrow b} \frac{x}{y}$$ |

Here is the example usage in the **Quiz**:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Course Builder View (Back-end)" %}

<figure><img src="/files/yPYLIbiXr8EyMIP6OyMs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Course Player View (Front-end)" %}

<figure><img src="/files/UNKUj94Cb2Eizs5PSt3e" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

{% hint style="success" %}
To convert the math formulas into **LaTeX** syntax, you can use the available LaTeX Conversion Editors [**like this**](https://www.sciweavers.org/free-online-latex-equation-editor) on the internet.&#x20;
{% endhint %}


# Lessons

**MS LMS** > **Lessons** menu on the WordPress dashboard includes your Lessons list. The lessons' content can be edited with [**Course Builder.**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder)

**MasterStudy LMS** offers seven types of learning content:

<figure><img src="/files/dRl0S7EsZDT9SV0zYHWs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Text Lesson

[**Text lesson**](#text) - a learning module that primarily presents information to learners through written text. Text lessons are often used to introduce new concepts or ideas, provide background information, or summarize key points.

{% hint style="success" %}
Be familiar with the [**WYSIWYG Editor**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder#wysiwyg-editor)**,** which will help you avoid mistakes.
{% endhint %}

### Video Lesson

[**Video lesson**](#video) - is an instructional module that consists primarily of a video as the main teaching tool. It is a type of e-learning content that can be used to deliver lectures, presentations, tutorials, or demonstrations.

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MderHKDVtKM6kjledYj" %}
[Video Lessons](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/how-to-add-video-to-the-lesson)
{% endcontent-ref %}

### PDF Lesson

[**PDF Lesson**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/pdf-lessons) -  allows instructors to upload and display `.pdf` documents directly inside a lesson using a sleek and distraction-free interface. Students can read course materials without downloading files or leaving the lesson page. You can also require students to complete the PDF before they can move to the next lesson, helping ensure full engagement with the material.

{% content-ref url="/pages/Ftac4m0bUZLIeyijtxB8" %}
[PDF Lessons](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/pdf-lessons)
{% endcontent-ref %}

### Stream Lesson

[**Stream lesson**](#stream) - allows instructors to embed a live YouTube video directly into their online course content. This can be useful for delivering lectures, hosting virtual discussions, and providing multimedia resources to students.

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MdenB1eyEBtxq-e8gsp" %}
[Live Streaming](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/live-streaming)
{% endcontent-ref %}

### Zoom Lesson

[**Zoom lesson**](#zoom) - a lesson that is delivered using Zoom, a popular video conferencing platform that enables real-time audio and video communication, as well as screen sharing and other collaborative features.

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MdepPqLRzcqUDJnTrsO" %}
[Zoom Conference](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/zoom-video-conferencing)
{% endcontent-ref %}

### **Audio Lesson**

[**Audo Lesson**](#audio) - provides learning content through audio recordings. Audio lessons are useful for delivering lectures, language learning, storytelling, or discussions that learners can listen to on the go. They support flexible learning and are accessible through various devices.

{% content-ref url="/pages/BvfVv0KW0fZvaPGUolTO" %}
[Audio Lesson](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/audio-lesson)
{% endcontent-ref %}

### **Google Meet Lesson**

[**Google Meet Lesson**](#google-meet) - a lesson type conducted via Google Meet, a video communication platform that supports live interaction between instructors and learners. It enables real-time video and audio communication, screen sharing, and collaborative discussions in a virtual classroom environment.

{% content-ref url="/pages/nr604naQjMVLZETtr2zo" %}
[Google Meet](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/google-meet)
{% endcontent-ref %}

That is how students will see each lesson type:

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Text" %}

<figure><img src="/files/MyFX5ljhV3J39Hdoy5KZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Video" %}

<figure><img src="/files/SuehDvM27apM4ErwVlHn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Stream" %}

<figure><img src="/files/5jC7fTEcK2IvH3nZEAo0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Zoom" %}

<figure><img src="/files/QnBr6DVdHvj8gUQwDOos" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Audio" %}

<figure><img src="/files/gb5TP6zDNRSJyYr7sn3p" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Google Meet" %}

<figure><img src="/files/u8FL9QI7TcvYJENnBmiM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

The lessons will look like the following picture on the Curriculum tab on the Course Page. If you set the lesson duration, the duration will be shown. But if not, the type of this lesson will be displayed.

<figure><img src="/files/rKr7FKo0w6ZV7tr8yqcl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After adding a title for the lesson, the following fields should be filled out:

* **Lesson Type:** Text, [Video](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/how-to-add-video-to-the-lesson), [Zoom Confirence](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/zoom-video-conferencing);
* **Lesson Duration**: Any information about the duration of the lesson;
* **Lesson Preview**: Makes the Lesson open/private for visitors;
* **Lesson Frontend Description**: Description of the Lesson that will be visible in the Course Curriculum;
* **Lesson Materials:** Files that can be used during the lesson.

<figure><img src="/files/5r5rZ8oNbjXILKWPP6tO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
When the [Zoom Conference](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/zoom-video-conferencing) addon is enabled in MS LMS, the Zoom Conference lesson type will be available with additional settings.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/nSYA8hgNwQUQtjJxAXPs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
When the **Video** lesson type is selected, additional fields appear, and how to upload a video is detailed in the next section
{% endhint %}


# Video Lessons

Want your lessons to be more exciting? Just add video content to the lesson. It is very easy to do by means of the Video lesson type. While creating or editing lessons it is required to select the Video lesson type and choose one of the available video sources. MasterStudy enables you to add [**Timecodes** ](#timecodes)and [**Required Passing Percentages**](#required-video-progress) to the Video Lessons as well!

<figure><img src="/files/BB17juaSdRfXegeO8qID" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
**Important:** The video upload is only active for Video Type lessons. Don’t forget to specify the lesson type.
{% endhint %}

## Preferred Video Source

By following **MS LMS > Settings > Course**, the admin must select the preferred video sources so they can choose one for the Video lesson type.

<figure><img src="/files/5KkgD1bagYXdjxB5MfJx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### HTML (MP4) Source type

HTML (MP4) Source type allows instructors to upload video files to the lesson directly.

<figure><img src="/files/3Iw3Tlv0HqZJ3tE3xaXK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Lesson settings include the following options for HTML (MP4) Source type:

* **Lesson video:** By clicking the upload button video file can be selected from Media Gallery. If the video does not exist on the Media Gallery, it is possible to select it from the computer and upload it to the lesson.
* [**Required Video Progress (%)**](#required-video-progress) – the minimum video percentage a student must watch to complete a lesson.
* **Lesson video poster:** The preview image that displays before playing the video.
* **Lesson video width:** Maximum Video Width.

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Please note:** The loading speed can be **decreased** after video upload depending on server limits, and if the video doesn't upload it is required to check server parameters.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="success" %}
Students can continue watching the video from the point they stopped before, so even returning to the lesson day after they still can continue from the minute they left.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
**We recommend using CDN to improve the site speed and performance if uploading large video files is planned.** It will be better if large files are uploaded on external video hostings like **YouTube** or **Vimeo** to save limits on the hosting side.
{% endhint %}

### YouTube Source type

YouTube Source type allows instructors to add videos to the lesson from popular video hosting.

<figure><img src="/files/v2Dye93D79wTQD6znJaH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Lesson settings include the following options for YouTube Source type:

* [**Required Video Progress (%)**](#required-video-progress) – the minimum video percentage a student must watch to complete a lesson.
* **YouTube video URL:** The direct URL of the video that can be copied from the Browser address bar:

<figure><img src="/files/UxoG5IAEGJQGvbPRXF2X" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Vimeo Source type

Vimeo Source type allows instructors to add videos to the lesson from popular video hosting.

<figure><img src="/files/W5iixAzzi4CdUUX8x4yo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Lesson settings include the following options for Vimeo Source type:

* [**Required Video Progress (%)**](#required-video-progress) – the minimum video percentage a student must watch to complete a lesson.
* **Vimeo video URL:** The direct URL of the video that can be copied from the Browser address bar:

<figure><img src="/files/E2W74Uzq1LTGSAN1Mi9R" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### External Link Source type

External Link Source type allows instructors to insert direct links to the videos from external sources:

<figure><img src="/files/RMr4c8fFlyRr256q4mHV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Lesson settings include the following options for External Link Source type:

* [**Required Video Progress (%)**](#required-video-progress) – the minimum video percentage a student must watch to complete a lesson.
* **External link:** The direct URL of the video that ends with an extension of the file: *<https://site-name.domain/videos/sample.mp4>*

### Embed Source type

Embed Source type allows instructors to embed videos from external sources:

<figure><img src="/files/mVNUIYF3U9DL9gXImk4P" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Lesson settings include the following options for Embed Source type:

* **Embed iFrame content:** The embed code of the video that can be copied from the player or while sharing:

<figure><img src="/files/S1qOxamRKdY4e36hLlh7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The following code is a sample for embed code:

{% code overflow="wrap" lineNumbers="true" %}

```html
<iframe allowtransparency="true" title="Wistia video player" allowFullscreen frameborder="0" scrolling="no" class="wistia_embed" name="wistia_embed" src="https://fast.wistia.net/embed/iframe/1w9z4zg847" width="400" height="225"></iframe>
```

{% endcode %}

### Shortcode Source type

Using the shortcode, it is possible to display videos in the lesson content processed by other additional plugins.

<figure><img src="/files/EMJMTVEjcUDxf78pMKQK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Lesson settings include the following options for Shortcode Source type:

* **Shortcode:** The code can be copied out from the third-party plugin which can process videos.

The following code is a sample for shortcode:

{% code overflow="wrap" lineNumbers="true" %}

```html
[video_player id=401]
```

{% endcode %}

### Presto Player Source type

{% hint style="info" %}
This source type is available when the [Presto Player plugin](https://wordpress.org/plugins/presto-player/) is installed and activated.
{% endhint %}

{% content-ref url="/pages/L550YgGClkicopQXhDFA" %}
[Presto Player Integration](/masterstudy-lms/additional-features/presto-player-integration)
{% endcontent-ref %}

Using the Presto Player source type allows selecting a video that was edited using the Presto Player plugin that takes video to another level and delights viewers will a modern video experience.

<figure><img src="/files/3cVMqPagFSemGDxp5A2m" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Lesson settings include the following options for Presto Player Source type:

* **Presto Player videos:** Select one of the available videos that were edited using the Presto Player plugin.

{% hint style="info" %}
More detailed information on Presto Player integration can be found in this [manual](/masterstudy-lms/additional-features/presto-player-integration).
{% endhint %}

That is how students will see a video lesson:

<figure><img src="/files/s7rfDo6rBc3b8XfMhbmd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### VdoCipher Integration

[**VdoCipher**](https://www.vdocipher.com/) is a secure video hosting and streaming platform designed to protect your premium video content from unauthorized access, downloads, and piracy. It is widely used in e-learning, media, and business sectors to ensure high-quality, secure video delivery.

{% hint style="info" %}
VdoCipher integration [**should be configured**](/masterstudy-lms/additional-features/vdocipher-integration) accordingly to use it as a video source.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

Select the VdoCipher as a **source type** and paste the **Video ID** to the designated area:

<figure><img src="/files/2pIR4IQHfmFx7YT3ibke" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

It appears like this in the Course Builder:

<figure><img src="/files/yAwvY9YrFGqEEDEb09sO" alt=""><figcaption><p>VdoCipher hides the videos when screenshot is taken</p></figcaption></figure>

To get more info about VdoCipher integration, kindly refer to this manual:

{% content-ref url="/pages/g4wTwEMtAt3RneQ6J8MS" %}
[VdoCipher Integration](/masterstudy-lms/additional-features/vdocipher-integration)
{% endcontent-ref %}

## Required Video Progress

{% hint style="success" %}
**The Required Video Progress** feature is included in the :star:[**Pro Plus**](https://r.freemius.com/3434/4723181/) version of the plugin.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

The **Required Video Progress** feature ensures that learners watch a certain percentage of a lesson’s video before marking it as complete. As they watch, a progress indicator displays how much of the video has been viewed, and the **Complete** button remains disabled until the specified watch threshold (e.g., 75% or 100%) is met—this helps maintain course quality by requiring students to fully engage with the content.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Required Video Progress** is **available in all video source types** except [**Embed** ](#embed-source-type)and [**Shortcode**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/shortcodes-1) types. They **do not** function with them, as those methods **lack direct access** to the video player's time data, preventing progress tracking.
{% endhint %}

### How to Set Required Video Progress Percentage?

This is quite a straightforward process.&#x20;

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Create or edit any video lesson except [**Embed** ](#embed-source-type)and [**Shortcode**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/shortcodes-1) source types in [**Course Builder**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder) and write down the **Required Video Progress** **(%)** percentage to see:

<figure><img src="/files/A8HsTZyjeR5jctNiMcEM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
**Save** the changes:

<figure><img src="/files/DVwshkmDuNNfyAhc9eWS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

Here is how it will look to students:

<figure><img src="/files/s0jHCIUSDF8YyZLOeJTX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Because the Required Video Progress feature only **controls the lesson’s completeness**, a student can still **access the next lesson** via the **curriculum** or a direct link **even if** they haven’t met the watch percentage.

***

However, if you want to prevent moving to the next lesson without completing this lesson and ensure proper lesson sequencing, you can use the [**Drip Content**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/drip-content) **add-on.**&#x20;

***

To add an extra layer of control, you can prevent students from skipping ahead in the video by enabling the **Disable Video Seeking** option. To activate it, go to **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Settings > Course Player > Disable Video Seeking**.
{% endhint %}

## Timecodes

{% hint style="success" %}
Adding timecodes to video lessons is included in the :star:[**Pro Plus**](https://r.freemius.com/3434/4723181/) version of the plugin.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

**Timecodes** let you link specific points of a video to text in your lesson, so learners can jump straight to the exact moment they need. This is especially helpful for longer videos with multiple topics, allowing students to quickly navigate to relevant sections without manually scrubbing through the entire video.

{% hint style="warning" %}
Timecodes **are available in all video source types** except [**Embed** ](#embed-source-type)and [**Shortcode**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/shortcodes-1) types. They **do not** function with them, as those methods **lack direct access** to the video player's time data, preventing progress tracking and timestamp jumps.
{% endhint %}

### How to Add Timecodes to Video Lessons?

This is quite a straightforward process.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Create a video lesson in Course Builder:

<figure><img src="/files/fdVNgLWRlHkF0a7tInjm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Choose **any** source type **except** embed and shortcode types, then provide the rest of the information:

<figure><img src="/files/vdzX5zcKTkmRnEFmbvt8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

### Timecodes Format

Scroll down to the **Lesson Content** section and wrap the timestamp and its title/description in curly braces `{}.` For example:

```
{wrapped text 01:25}
```

* This signals the LMS that “<mark style="color:purple;">**01:25**</mark>” is a timestamp for your video, and “<mark style="color:purple;">**wrapped text**</mark>” is simply a label or description.

You can use the timestamp in different positions like this example:

```
#Timestamp at the beginning
{01:25 wrapped text}

#Timestamp in the middle
{wrapped 01:25 text}

#Timestamp at the end
{wrapped text 01:25}
```

<figure><img src="/files/PJg44o46Syyqrb7THFeR" alt=""><figcaption><p>Example of Timecodes in Lesson Content</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
To get timecodes easily, there is a **Preview** button that opens the video you provided right in the[ **Course Builder:**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder)

<figure><img src="/files/ENPXhqQx8EjrpH7v7aCP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/rHeVpJG1qdkUsvo8vjKG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Here you can see how it will look to students:

<figure><img src="/files/TzV1VdDyzk2iRcknciom" alt=""><figcaption><p>Timecodes in front</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

### Timecodes in Discussions

Students and instructors can use the timecodes to highlight the exact moment of the audio and video lessons. They have to follow [**the same format**](https://docs.stylemixthemes.com/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/how-to-add-video-to-the-lesson#timecodes-format) as in the Course Builder:

<figure><img src="/files/xvxNGnWj7raKc5MRjren" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is how it will look after the submission:

<figure><img src="/files/q8dcxbfLc53aVrEG3V6V" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Video Lesson Markers

{% hint style="success" %}
Video Lesson Markers are included in the :star:[**Pro Plus**](https://r.freemius.com/3434/4723181/) version of the plugin.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

Markers feature in MasterStudy LMS enhance video lessons by dividing them into hoverable, topic-based segments. This improves navigation, supports self-paced learning, and increases engagement. It also opens possibilities for interactive elements, better content organization, and valuable insights into learner behavior, making video lessons more effective and user-friendly.

<figure><img src="/files/E1pGegjd44CHkkwqowFx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
For external source types like [**YouTube** ](#youtube-source-type)and [**Vimeo**](#vimeo-source-type), video markers are only supported when using the [**MasterStudy player**](#securing-video-lessons-in-masterstudy-lms-removing-youtube-and-vimeo-icons), as their native players do not support marker integration.
{% endhint %}

Let's see how to implement them.&#x20;

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
In your video lesson, move to the **Markers & Questions** tab and click on the <mark style="color:green;">**+ Add Marker**</mark> button to create a new marker:

<figure><img src="/files/nIrFUCdluC97I8vGPChv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Adjust the **timecode** in `HH:MM:SS` format (*hour:minute:second*). Then provide the **Marker Caption**, and click the **Save** button.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/k48PuZFzt43FNAiVNP58" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
You can change the timecode and the text of the markers anytime. Make your modifications and click on the **Update** button. Moreover, there is a special delete 🗑 button to remove the marker:

<figure><img src="/files/AtRKyPtwuRgKQuA7sccK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
**Here is the result:**

<figure><img src="/files/qyccRCysSxa34vpPq6Ie" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Video Subtitles

{% hint style="success" %}
Adding subtitles to video lessons is included in the :star:[**Pro Plus**](https://r.freemius.com/3434/4723181/) version of the plugin.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

MasterStudy Video Player also supports subtitles for video lessons, allowing instructors to upload subtitle files to improve accessibility and learner comprehension. This feature enables multilingual support and enhances the learning experience for users with hearing impairments or those studying in varied environments.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** Subtitles are only supported for [**HTML (MP4)**](#html-mp4-source-type) and [**External Link**](#external-link-source-type) video source types. Other source types do not allow external subtitle files due to their own playback restrictions.
{% endhint %}

### How to Add Subtitles to Videos

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Choose one of the [**HTML (MP4)**](#html-mp4-source-type) or  [**External Link**](#external-link-source-type) as a video source type:

<figure><img src="/files/rBLwF4ccQqo1nsWN6yFa" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
After uploading the video, scroll down, and you will find a special **Subtitles** field to upload `.vtt` subtitle files:

<figure><img src="/files/IKnZdOZDPEDeKSQAzTFB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Upload your subtitle files strictly in `.vtt` format. You can upload several subtitle files as well. As an example, here are the English and Spanish versions of the subtitles uploaded:

<figure><img src="/files/xh2ktI1eCPwKBi4519QX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
There is an option to rename the subtitles that will be displayed to users by clicking the:pencil2:**pencil** icon:

<figure><img src="/files/UaeNvdR8c9LsVi3bpfHo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Here is how they will look to students:

<figure><img src="/files/tneQDiZYBO7jspWgqr2z" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Students can choose the necessary subtitle by following the:gear:**Player Settings > Captions:**

<figure><img src="/files/WTRNFeMkqxg2NvXoyp51" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Video Lesson Questions

The **Video Lesson Questions** feature in MasterStudy LMS allows instructors to insert interactive questions directly into video lessons. This tool transforms passive video content into an engaging, learner-driven experience by enabling real-time questioning at any point during playback. Instructors can choose from multiple question types and customize when and how they appear.

<figure><img src="/files/ysvf1LzYKgKxtsi3Dm0s" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

To learn more about the feature and settings, follow this manual:

{% content-ref url="/pages/zUCrTP4BtcogjG58OaY9" %}
[Video Lesson Questions](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/how-to-add-video-to-the-lesson/video-lesson-questions)
{% endcontent-ref %}

## Securing Video Lessons in MasterStudy LMS: Removing YouTube and Vimeo Icons

Do you want your video lessons to stay secure and avoid unauthorized sharing among your students? MasterStudy LMS provides a feature that allows you to remove YouTube and Vimeo icons from video lessons. This prevents students from accessing the direct link to your videos on these platforms, thereby enhancing the security of your content.

**Why Remove the Icons?**

Removing the icons serves a dual purpose:

* **Enhances Content Security:** Keeps the educational content within the course environment without redirection to external platforms.
* **Reduces Unauthorized Sharing:** Minimizes the risk of students sharing direct video links with non-enrolled users.

**How to Use This Feature:**

* Navigate to your WordPress admin dashboard.
* Go to MS **LMS > Settings > Course Player** and toggle on the platform you wish to edit and do not forget to save the settings

<figure><img src="/files/f7mube8WwSJKML4ViVfJ" alt=""><figcaption><p>Turning on Securing videos: Youtube &#x26; Vimeo</p></figcaption></figure>

Preview the lesson to ensure that the video player no longer displays the platform icons.

YouTube Video Hosting Platform

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Visible YouTube icon" %}

<figure><img src="/files/0e2KyOPZnmNSgumJG7Oy" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot From MasterStudy LMS Video Lesson (YouTube visible)</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Invisible YouTube Icon" %}

<figure><img src="/files/bpEPM866eWH8Do6jaND6" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot From MasterStudy LMS Video Lesson (YouTube invisible)</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

Vimeo Video hosting Platform

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Visible Share Icon" %}

<figure><img src="/files/zkOFQXsKbC2nfdc0S3qj" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot from MasterStudy LMS Video Lesson (Vimeo visible)</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Invisible Share Icon" %}

<figure><img src="/files/opc9JbQ16AcfyJgSsoww" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot from MasterStudy LMS Video Lesson (Vimeo invisible)</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

**Conclusion**

By utilizing this feature, you can maintain a controlled and secure learning environment, ensuring that your video content remains exclusive to your students. Remember to review your settings regularly to uphold the highest level of content security in your online courses.&#x20;


# Video Lesson Questions

Pro Plus Feature

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/J7GTYWb0Pbg?si=QxavyZdifqWrSlw8>" %}

The **Video Lesson Questions** feature in MasterStudy LMS allows instructors to insert interactive questions directly into [**video lessons**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/how-to-add-video-to-the-lesson). This tool transforms passive video content into an engaging, learner-driven experience by enabling real-time questioning at any point during playback. Instructors can choose from multiple question types and customize when and how they appear.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Video Lesson Questions** are **available in all video source types** except [**Embed** ](#embed-source-type)and [**Shortcode**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/shortcodes-1) types. They **do not** function with them, as those methods **lack direct access** to the video player's time data, preventing progress tracking.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/sfsNcpSsQxLAiObrYUTz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
**Note:** Video Lesson Questions are for engagement only and are not graded like [**quizzes**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/quizzes). Instructors cannot review answers of students, and there are no pass/fail conditions or attempt limits.

Instead, there is a special [**Require Answering All Questions to Proceed**](#require-answering-all-video-questions-to-proceed) feature.
{% endhint %}

## Overview

In the video lessons, along with the Markers, questions will also be displayed along with the indicator:

<figure><img src="/files/Xlbn6a7HWAABj7uevNRY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Once the student reaches the question, the video disappears, and the question opens:

<figure><img src="/files/vrtWzy8b0bacNl4isJqf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Students should answer the question or rewatch part of the video where the answer to this question is provided by clicking the relevant buttons. If the **"Require answering all video questions to proceed to next lesson**" setting is **disabled**, they can also skip the question.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/hVN07BuKKrq9WQ526Ner" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

If the student answers incorrectly, he can re-answer only after he re-watches the part of the video by clicking the **Rewatch** button:

<figure><img src="/files/wEEnLXJhyI5usmreFfAY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

At the bottom of the Video Lesson, all the video questions will be displayed along with their status (answered: correct, incorrect). You can navigate to the question by simply clicking one of them:

<figure><img src="/files/ojYztCZ6xkJBy4dkdbx4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## How to Add Questions to Video Lessons?

To add new questions to the [**video lessons**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/how-to-add-video-to-the-lesson), first open the video lesson with [**Course Builder.**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder)

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
In the video lesson, move to the **Markers & Questions** tab, and click on the <mark style="color:green;">**+ Add Question**</mark> button to create a new question:

<figure><img src="/files/cjqewKCT1mqI9MRacAxy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Enter your question title, then provide the following:

<figure><img src="/files/afZgulA51TdhdvuUQNI7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Timecode** - indicate the exact moment when the video question appears in `HH:MM:SS` the format (*hour:minute:second*). Once the student reaches this time, the video player closes automatically, and the question will appear on the student's screen.
* **Rewatch Timecode** - enter the exact moment where students should be redirected once they click on the Rewatch button, which appears after they answer the question.
* **Question Type** - choose one of the available question types:
  * **Single Choice** - basic multiple-choice format where students are presented with several possible answers, but only one is correct.
  * **Multiple Choice** - allows students to select more than one correct answer from a list of options.&#x20;
  * **True/False** - designed for simple statements where the learner must decide whether the statement is accurate or not.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Single Choice" %}

<figure><img src="/files/g7dFavG7nbUymj3UJqgp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Multiple Choice" %}

<figure><img src="/files/x7d2WwJTjOkH00DotI95" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="True/False" %}

<figure><img src="/files/5LrQur0az1GYz0UA40Cc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Once you have entered these details and answers for the question, click on the **Save** button, and that's it!

<figure><img src="/files/1JZF0rrSIO4OtzYhwtaE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
You can change the question content or the timecodes provided.  Make your modifications and click on the **Update** button. Moreover, there is a special delete 🗑 button to remove the question:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/InZJxM9wAEOoFlJrs9CW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
That's all! Following the same process, you can add as many questions as you want :tada:
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Require Answering All Video Questions to Proceed

On the Markers & Questions tab of the Video Lessons, enable the setting "**Require answering all video questions to proceed to next lesson"** to ensure that students must answer every question correctly in the video before they can access the next lesson. This helps promote active participation and keeps learners engaged throughout the video content.

<figure><img src="/files/aTdtTTI7ruMcm7nfa8eF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Students must answer all the questions correctly to mark the lesson to proceed to the next lesson:

<figure><img src="/files/fmNm9ipHtxmqIveqmugS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# PDF Lessons

Pro Plus Feature

**The PDF Lesson** allows instructors to upload and display `.pdf` documents directly inside a lesson using a sleek and distraction-free interface. Students can read course materials without downloading files or leaving the lesson page. You can also require students to complete the PDF before they can move to the next lesson, helping ensure full engagement with the material.

## Overview of PDF Lesson

Here is the interface of the sample PDF Lesson:

<figure><img src="/files/Am7hLsRwxg8H8mwutOPM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

PDF Lesson Tools (from left to right):

* <kbd>Page</kbd><kbd>**1**</kbd><kbd>of</kbd><kbd>**3**</kbd> - Current Page Number and Quick Page Navigation
* &#x20;<kbd>-</kbd><kbd>**100%**</kbd><kbd>+</kbd> - Zoom
* <i class="fa-download">:download:</i> - Button to download the PDF document
* <i class="fa-print">:print:</i> - Button to print the PDF document&#x20;
* <i class="fa-up-right-from-square">:up-right-from-square:</i> - Open PDF in a new tab
* <i class="fa-down-left-and-up-right-to-center">:down-left-and-up-right-to-center:</i> - Full Screen

### Bookmarks

You can save the necessary pages and get back to them quickly next time using PDF Lesson Bookmarks:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/1I7cwV0oFV6TTvVlscwy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Make sure you have enabled them from the **WP Dashboard > Settings > Course Player:**

<figure><img src="/files/J3qFLS1alW3EVziISfgy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* &#x20;**Allow students to create bookmarks in PDF lessons** - enable students to add bookmarks in PDF lessons to quickly revisit important pages.
* **Bookmarks Section Title** - here you can indicate the title for the Bookmarks section in the PDF Lessons.&#x20;

## Creating PDF Lessons

There is nothing to turn on and set up. Creating PDF Lessons is quite straightforward, as **Text Lessons.**

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Edit any course with **Course Builder** and click on the <kbd>Add Lesson</kbd> button. You will see the PDF lesson there:

<figure><img src="/files/gbsYC0eXTbMzWgHXLUoU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Enter the lesson title,  then provide a short description, lesson content, duration, and other details of the lesson according to your needs:

<figure><img src="/files/0PcARwKs7FNO0iSoSOjo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
There is a special **PDF file** field that you have to provide PDF document needs to be used in this lesson:

<figure><img src="/files/wQCcl6w4RUigxgDvIp5m" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Now the lesson is ready to be published. Click on the <kbd>Create</kbd> button:

<figure><img src="/files/HGTvo6RIbqMiU1DaUCgk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

{% hint style="success" %}
That's all. Now this lesson is available on the course :tada:
{% endhint %}


# Quizzes

A quiz can be created via the **MS** **LMS > Quizzes** menu. Each Quiz may include unlimited **Questions**. You can add either existing questions to your Quiz or create a new one via **Add new question** field.

<figure><img src="/files/gF6li5O1qEdIPDyebPv7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Quiz Questions

Under the Quiz Question section, you can add questions to the quiz.

![](/files/EYpnUEntdfpnxWei9KZn)

Click on the "**+Question**" button and select the question type from the dropdown menu.

![](/files/Bm6XQHMeJ2kUx8NHDDDz)

After adding a question, you can modify its type, order, delete it, or add an answer to it.

![](/files/4Swr8DfFj66r8rKMt4f4)

You can find all your questions under **MS** **LMS > Questions** menu. Question types can be&#x20;

* **Single Choice -** Single Choice questions require the selection of one answer from a list of options provided.
* **Multi Choice -** A question type presents several options for the user to choose the correct answer from
* **True or False -** A question type requires a simple answer of either true or false to a given statement.
* **Item Match -** In this question type, learners match items from two columns based on their corresponding attributes.
* **Image Match -** In the Image Match type of questions, learners are asked to match pairs from different pictures
* **Keywords -** Keywords question type requires a brief answer in the form of a few words or a short phrase.
* **Fill the Gap -** Fill the Gap question type presents a statement with a missing word or phrase that the learner must complete.

**Follow the link to learn more about questions, types, and related settings:**

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MderVNPI0\_wM8jrH2Yz" %}
[Questions](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/questions)
{% endcontent-ref %}

Besides this, the Quiz Questions section allows you to set a Question bank and use the searching feature.

That's how students will see quizzes:

<figure><img src="/files/IMISipAxzMtbRlsRhXSR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/slspuRVJ4qdpKRmsB26M" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Quiz Settings

{% hint style="success" %}
To change the **Global quiz settings**, like enabling [**Quiz Attempt History**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/quiz#quiz-attempt-history) or [**Retake After Passing**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/quiz#retake-after-passing) options, kindly follow [**this manual.**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/quiz)
{% endhint %}

Quiz settings include the following options:

<figure><img src="/files/6g7F8v809HkuCGsqnQbn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Short Description of the Quiz**: Description of the Quiz.
* **Quiz duration & Time Unit**: duration in minutes/hours/days.
* **Quiz Style**: one of the [**Pagination or One Page style**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/quizzes#quiz-paginated-style)**.**
* **Randomize Questions:** enable automated question randomizer.
* **Show correct answer**: displays the correct answer at the end of the Quiz.
* <mark style="color:red;">**\***</mark>**Attempts:** the number of attempts to retake the quiz.
* **Passing grade:** Minimum percentage of correct answers for passing the quiz.

<mark style="color:red;">**\***</mark>*the setting will appear if the* [*corresponding setting*](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/quiz) *is enabled in MasterStudy LMS settings*

#### Points Cut After Retake

* **Points cut after retake:** The percentage that will be cut after **the first** retake of the quiz. Even if the student correctly to all questions, his score will not be 100.

<figure><img src="/files/txTvGTNsf037tCN9o1zF" alt=""><figcaption><p>8/8 is correct, but the result is 90%</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
A retake option will be available if the student cannot earn enough scores to pass.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/2ez7XudAwlYh4AVBBZsx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
The limits for the retaking can be enabled from **MasterStudy LMS Settings > Quiz > Attempts to retake courses**
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/EZHPON88SPF1AT789jYv" alt=""><figcaption><p>MasterStudy LMS Settings > Quiz > Attempts to retake courses</p></figcaption></figure>

## Quiz Paginated Style

To organize a quiz view more conveniently, you can choose the appropriate **Quiz style**. Quiz style allows you to display all questions at once (on one page) or break them down into many pages, so one separate question will be displayed on a separate page.&#x20;

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="One Page" %}

<figure><img src="/files/wYfgFDX3J10pom9oxbx3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Pagination" %}

<figure><img src="/files/wxFO9S4r8wSBKtgPXiKP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

To select the Quiz Style follow **Dashboard > MasterStudy LMS Settings > Quiz** and choose the needed option. This setting will be applied to all the quizzes on your site.

<figure><img src="/files/ApWJPIcannQo4NX9qfX7" alt=""><figcaption><p>MasterStudy LMS Settings > Quiz Style</p></figcaption></figure>

If you'd like to apply the style to one exact quiz only, follow **Quizzes >&#x20;*****Quiz Name (select the quiz)***. \
On the editing page go to the Quiz Settings section and select the needed option from the dropdown for Quiz Style.&#x20;

![](/files/SyV7kDOSYIlCwlduyBev)

* **Default** - uses the style specified in the LMS 'Quiz' settings.
* **One page** - displays all the questions on one page.
* **Pagination** - displays questions on separate pages.

## Question Bank

Switch to the tab of **Question Bank**. Here you can add the name of the new bank which is literally a group of questions that relate to a similar topic. Set the number of questions allowed in the bank.

![](/files/THzPkfZnwtNtZe314Mhe)

To search for questions, click the Questions Library button which will open a new window.

<figure><img src="/files/pVkPgcUQkY5rgwP3rKm8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can use the search field and search for questions.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/t9PLzLMRvK4yVjrGO2Lw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Also, you can select questions from the list. Just check the needed items and click the "**Add Questions"** button.

## Quiz Review

Check quiz results using the **Quiz Review** option. Conduct a full review of students' quiz attempts. Look through their answers and analyze their results.

1. Follow **WordPress Dashboard > MasterStudy LMS > Courses > Manage Students**:

<figure><img src="/files/eptIfEUI3LrJGXxuchrL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. On the opened page you can see the list of students and their progress. Choose the student that you would like to check quiz results and click on **Progress**:

<figure><img src="/files/kN6dOptZCABxCU8BmuoW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. Select the required quiz to see the data. Click on the **Show Student Answers** button to get a detailed review of the quiz:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/xSWV032tjNknEpAwwKco" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. Here is the Quiz Review for the selected student.

<figure><img src="/files/wQ52sIwj2u47hPHH0ptc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
It will help you to get statistics and identify where the common issues arise, so in the future, you can improve the quiz or detect what topics and questions might need revision.
{% endhint %}


# Questions

The **Questions** feature in MasterStudy LMS allows instructors to create engaging and interactive assessments to test students’ knowledge throughout the course. This tool offers a variety of question types, including multiple-choice, true/false, item match, and other formats, providing flexibility in building quizzes that suit different learning styles. With easy-to-use settings, instructors can configure question points, add hints, and even incorporate media such as [**images or videos**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/question-media-addon) to enhance the learning experience. The **Questions** feature ensures that assessments are not only comprehensive but also adaptive to the needs of both instructors and students, supporting effective knowledge retention.

## How to Create a New Question?

There are several ways to create new questions:

* [**in Course Builder**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder)
* [**in WP Dashboard**](#create-questions-in-the-dashboard)

You can create questions first and later you can add them to your [**quizzes**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/quizzes). One question can be added to several quizzes as well.

### Create Questions in Course Builder

New questions can be created inside of quizzes as well.

1. Follow **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Courses**  and edit the course you want to add questions with **Course Builder:**

<figure><img src="/files/NrYLxR2l8fACuaEo6B4N" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. You can add questions to the existing quizzes or just create a new quiz and add questions:

<figure><img src="/files/00UCPgrxZ2URYjPacjDD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. In the **Questions tab**, click on the '<mark style="color:purple;">**+ Question**</mark>' button and choose the [question type:](#question-types)

<figure><img src="/files/wFf1MRq6Zt7L47aUy7et" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. Based on the question type, fill in the details. You can power the question titles with [**HTML Editor** ](#html-editor-for-question-title)and [**media**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/question-media-addon). Once you added all the needed questions, click on the **Save button** to save the quiz:

<figure><img src="/files/0omXSEsdD6gW6GDZpoW0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Create Questions in the Dashboard

Questions can be created one by one in the special tab of the dashboard.&#x20;

1. Follow **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Questions:**

<figure><img src="/files/e3fPSxoB5VBdaVRDA4Ai" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. On the opened page, you can see the list of all questions that you have created. You can **create** new questions or **edit** existing ones on this tab. Click on the **Add New Question** button to create a new question:

<figure><img src="/files/NWarmVdR33tSgmTUhPwi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. Enter the question title, answers, and result explanation, and indicate the question category according to your needs. You can empower your question titles with HTML Editor and [Media](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/question-media-addon)

<figure><img src="/files/RRemDGgFnKPUkcYcMgxi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
The **answers** section may be different according to the [question type.](#question-types)
{% endhint %}

4. Click on the **Publish** or **Update** button to save the changes:

<figure><img src="/files/x2HxqaoMCHwyFGxmVGCq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### HTML Editor for Question Title

You can adjust the formatting of the **question titles** with the HTML Editor of MS LMS.&#x20;

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="HTML Editor in Course Builder" %}

<figure><img src="/files/ptwOR2PLnchPZzowMW0L" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="HTML Editor in Dashboard" %}

<figure><img src="/files/1xnM6tYmMyEKJ0K8sKFh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

From left to right:

* **Paragraph Format** - Change the paragraph format (e.g., heading levels, normal text).
* **Bold** - Make the selected text bold, `CTRL + B / Command + B.`
* **Italic** - Italicize the selected text, `CTRL + I / Command + I.`
* **Underline** - Underline the selected text, `CTRL + U / Command + U.`
* **Strikethrough** - Apply strikethrough to the selected text.
* **Align Left** - Align the text to the left.
* **Align Center** - Center the text.
* **Align Right** - Align the text to the right.
* **Hyperlink** - Insert or edit a hyperlink.
* **Bulleted (Unordered) List** - Create a bulleted (Unordered) list.
* **Numbered (Orderd) List** - Create a numbered (ordered) list.
* **Hyperlink** - Insert or edit a hyperlink.
* **Clear Formatting** - Clears all formatting to the selected text.
* **Fullscreen** - Toggle fullscreen mode.

## How to Add Math Equations in Quizzes?

Math formulas and equations can be used in quizzes via LaTeX syntax. Check this manual to learn how to do it:

{% content-ref url="/pages/q5wj1wjxy854Gd0Opc54" %}
[How to Add Math Equations in MasterStudy?](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder/how-to-add-math-equations-in-masterstudy)
{% endcontent-ref %}

## Question Types

**MasterStudy LMS** provides a variety of question types to create versatile and engaging assessments, allowing instructors to assess learners in different ways. These options enable instructors to diversify their quizzes with multiple formats, improving the learning experience while catering to different testing needs. From simple, objective questions to more interactive formats, MasterStudy LMS ensures that the process of testing students is both comprehensive and flexible.

<figure><img src="/files/SDB04Df7SdiswQawhazX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**There are 8 types of quiz questions available:**

* [**Single Choice**](#single-choice)
* [**Multiple Choice**](#multi-choice)
* [**True-False**](#true-or-false)
* [**Matching**](#item-match)
* [**Image Match**](#image-match)
* [**Keywords**](#keywords)
* [**Fill the Gap**](#fill-in-the-gap)
* [**Ordering**](#ordering)

> Firstly, let's see the overview of the question settings. We see the examples in the [**Course Builder** ](#create-questions-in-course-builder)interface.&#x20;

Here is the overall question adding interface in the **Course Builder:**

{% hint style="success" %}
There is the ability to format Question Titles in the [**HTML Editor**](#html-editor-for-question-title) and attach [**Media**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/question-media-addon)**.**
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/dpuOJsidpsNEAstbuDxP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
**Question Categorie**s will **not be displayed** to students, and it is not mandatory to give categories to each question. However, they enable you to add several questions to the quiz with a single selection.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

{% content-ref url="/pages/-MderPCkfaaeL6UYHpuO" %}
[Quizzes](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/quizzes)
{% endcontent-ref %}

You can also provide explanations for the answers, so your students can easily understand their mistakes:

<figure><img src="/files/FW7YrjBR2M9d940LRAt7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Students can see these explanations after the quiz submission:

<figure><img src="/files/sHstC7rLR0iXNGXtp0h5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Answers to the questions can be given in two formats: **Text** and **Image**. Answer mode can be easily switched using these buttons:

<figure><img src="/files/cBeGZh4koKFhmROGfkOr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Answers as Text" %}

<figure><img src="/files/QrP59GX2JzQdSL1ZVn57" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is the result in front:

<figure><img src="/files/huhpm0zxJLDPTUQnakps" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Answers as Image" %}

<figure><img src="/files/9ic4JyFE3qgcUx4uPoCf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is the result in front:

<figure><img src="/files/aX5p1E70GAb5CXjmnhEC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

Media (audio and video) can also be added to the question itself (not to the answer). To turn on this feature, please turn on the **Question Media Addon.**&#x20;

{% content-ref url="/pages/5xE34TW3xASwqh7S9rAI" %}
[Question Media](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/question-media-addon)
{% endcontent-ref %}

**Now let's see each question type one by one** :ballot\_box\_with\_check:

### **Single Choice** <a href="#single-choice" id="single-choice"></a>

The **Single Choice** question type is a basic multiple-choice format where students are presented with several possible answers, but only one is correct. This format is ideal for straightforward, objective questions that require learners to identify a single correct answer from a list of options. It helps in quick assessments of students' understanding of a specific topic.

<figure><img src="/files/jDLCGUaOJrsO3gEvIud9" alt=""><figcaption><p>Sample of the Single choice question</p></figcaption></figure>

You can indicate only **one answe**r as correct:

<figure><img src="/files/ZPKTi6ciF9MSt4y6ulqr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Multiple Choice <a href="#multi-choice" id="multi-choice"></a>

The **Multiple Choice** question type allows students to select more than one correct answer from a list of options. This format is useful when there are multiple correct answers to a question, promoting deeper understanding by requiring learners to evaluate each option.

<figure><img src="/files/TFFrbcx6WUut0r00RHFK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

As compared to [Single Choice](#single-choice) question type, you can mark several answers as correct:

<figure><img src="/files/ZK7XkdLP9VF6inyIZzhj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### **True or False** <a href="#true-or-false" id="true-or-false"></a>

The **True or False** question type is designed for simple statements where the learner must decide whether the statement is accurate or not. This format is a quick way to assess students' understanding of fundamental concepts, where the answers are binary.

<figure><img src="/files/vpDVa9hOiVVYpHodjWg0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Unlike other question types, you can not add answers to the True-False questions. Just select the correct option:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/hxmqw2mbvSTFAFEXNtsc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### **Matching** <a href="#item-match" id="item-match"></a>

The **Matching** question type requires students to match related items from two columns. This format is excellent for testing students’ ability to recognize relationships or associations between different concepts.

<figure><img src="/files/aKsCFFF8LFuSRxI48wLg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Just enter the matching pairs in the boxes **Question** and **Answer** respectively:

<figure><img src="/files/uwGyLMhxX7FSOD1lzw82" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Image Match

The **Image Match** question type allows instructors to create questions where students match images to corresponding text or other images. This is particularly useful for visual subjects or assessments that require image recognition.

<figure><img src="/files/zjQdZexpz63G5Kookcrd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Click on the Upload Image button and choose the image for both columns. You can also provide texts to the images as well.

<figure><img src="/files/ZDQXv1Q1wYbFmeX0HdFP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### **Keywords** <a href="#keywords" id="keywords"></a>

The **Keywords** question type challenges students to identify and provide specific keywords as answers. This format is useful for evaluating learners’ ability to recall precise terms, definitions, or concepts from the course material.

Keywords ask students to enter their answers in the provided boxes. They can write more than one answer at a time. Their answers should coincide with the keywords you entered.

<figure><img src="/files/E1w0TvFgY4Rn7KYBe0cD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Answers are not case-sensitive. If you write '**CPU**' as one of the correct answers and the user enters '**cpu**', it is considered correct :white\_check\_mark:.

The system will not take any inputs other than what you specified as correct. If a student wants to enter a keyword other than the one you have entered, it will not be accepted and added to the keyword box.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

Select the Keywords as **Question type.** Enter the answers in the space provided.

<figure><img src="/files/NkxQwG1ug68BZiKB6Olz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### **Fill in the Gap** <a href="#fill-in-the-gap" id="fill-in-the-gap"></a>

The **Fill the Gap** question type presents students with sentences or statements that have missing words or phrases. Learners must fill in the gaps with the correct words to complete the statement. This format is helpful for assessing detailed knowledge of definitions, formulas, or specific content.

<figure><img src="/files/PXx5KLrZLr6eoOuo0EPv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is the result after the quiz submission:

<figure><img src="/files/6WnRDG2gFQjG3oLC7TBa" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Select **Fill the Gap** Type. Type the text, which will be your task, and do as it is shown in the example. Separate the future answers (missing words for the students) with the **“**<mark style="color:purple;">**|**</mark>**”** symbol. Here is the sample correct input:

```
Deborah was angry at her son. Her son didn't |listen| to her. Her son was 16 years old. Her son |thought| he knew everything. Her son |yelled| at Deborah.
```

<figure><img src="/files/ng4ZwIsjQcrKW2e2bxLc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Answers are not case-sensitive. If you write 'listen' as correct answer and the user enters '**Listen**', it is considered correct :white\_check\_mark:.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="success" %}
The answer field for the Fill in the Gap question type offers a [**WYSIWYG editor.**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder#wysiwyg-editor)
{% endhint %}

### Ordering

The Ordering question type asks students to arrange a set of items in the correct sequence. Learners are given several elements, such as steps, events, or concepts, and they must place them in the proper order based on logic, chronology, or process flow. This format is ideal for testing understanding of procedures, timelines, rankings, or structured workflows. It helps evaluate how well students understand relationships and the correct progression between items.

<figure><img src="/files/2SGg8wVJmWopjjCNEsAT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can define the correct sequence of all items, and students must reorder the options to match that exact order:

<figure><img src="/files/HBL9wfIeTDOHKyivmETE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is how it will look after submission:

<figure><img src="/files/e6PdNHlrUIwQAvxd3pru" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Reviews

The review feature in MasterStudy LMS plays a crucial role in enhancing the overall learning experience by enabling students to provide feedback on courses, instructors, and learning content. This feature helps build course trust and credibility, allowing potential students to make informed decisions based on real user experiences. Here’s a detailed overview of the review feature in MasterStudy LMS:

**Benefits for Students and Instructors:**

* **Students** benefit by reading honest feedback from their peers, which helps them choose courses that best meet their learning needs.
* **Instructors** gain insights into how their courses are received, allowing them to make necessary adjustments to improve the learning experience.
* **Platform Growth**: Reviews build a community of engaged users who actively participate in the feedback process, fostering a culture of continuous learning and improvement.

<figure><img src="/files/vl4CHVAmGw6XzQZVBDDs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Instructors will be rated on a 5-star scale based on all the reviews they receive. These ratings can be visualized in Instructors Profile and [**LMS Widgets**](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets) (available in [**Gutenberg**](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets/gutenberg-blocks#instructor-card), [**Elementor**](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets#instructors-carousel), and WP Bakery)

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Instuctor Profile" %}

<figure><img src="/files/YEp1LAcj8BDoEzeVJrzM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Top Instructors Widget" %}

<figure><img src="/files/4Xj68FugNQSG7XsyLKHL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Instructors Carousel" %}

<figure><img src="/files/nkgvAZ0V6MNC1Od7737b" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

## How to Enable Course Reviews

To turn on the Course Reviews, follow the **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Settings > Course > Course Reviews.** By default, it will be enabled:

<figure><img src="/files/JB4Pl9ftud4J7rhNaxYV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

With the help of the setting, you can control to display of **course reviews** on all course pages, bundles, and widgets. Disabling this option will hide reviews **throughout the site.**

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Course Reviews ON" %}

<figure><img src="/files/bAFhr3cVBbZzBHwBQQ4C" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Course Reviews OFF" %}

<figure><img src="/files/dVHcLr3lFzXmJaayK3Pn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

{% hint style="info" %}
If the setting is **disabled**, all of the **related features** with [**Course Reviews**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/reviews) will **also be** **disabled**, such as the[ **Reviews tab**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/analytics-for-admin/reviews) in [**Analytics.**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/analytics-for-admin)
{% endhint %}

## How to leave a review (student)?

1. Open the [main course page](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/course) and move to the Reviews tab:

<figure><img src="/files/nnGpBud9Vr00QlS2zckS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Click on the **Write Review** button, and leave your review.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/XUvxk1QZBibAy5Rt56J2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. Use the **WYSIWYG editor** to style your review, and rate the course with **1 to 5** star rating:

<figure><img src="/files/y7THUdTgRFuJDpFKZVCD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. Your review will remain in '**Pending for Review**' status until it is approved by the admin:

<figure><img src="/files/zsGEm8BAp2YTk5z1IExJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="danger" %}
Instructors are not allowed to leave reviews for their own courses. Students can leave only one review for each course they are enrolled in.
{% endhint %}

## Managing Reviews (admin)

1. To see the Reviews left on your site, follow **WP Dashboard > MasterStudy LMS > Reviews** and edit the needed on&#x65;**:**

<figure><img src="/files/RdA9kUXwxXzCyIgfuhVU" alt=""><figcaption><p><strong>WP Dashboard > MasterStudy LMS > Reviews</strong></p></figcaption></figure>

2. On the opened page, you can edit the review text, star rating, course, and even the user who submitted the review. After carefully reviewing the details, you can publish it:

<figure><img src="/files/BUsJOI4QivK35aobVla8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. Now it is on your website:

<figure><img src="/files/Ufyzxx2qQjhmqYxzpOs3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Reset Demo Course Ratings

Demo course ratings can be reset by following **WP Dashboard > Tools > LMS Course Ratings:**

<figure><img src="/files/bAk6kvjJCjM7IQ5aYF82" alt=""><figcaption><p>WP Dashboard > Tools > LMS Course Ratings:</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
This action **will not delete** any reviews left by students. It only removes demo ratings that **come with the plugin.**&#x20;
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/BlPDIZCuscKmiWN4V4d0" alt=""><figcaption><p>Confitmation Message</p></figcaption></figure>


# Orders

## What is an Order in MasterStudy LMS?

In **MasterStudy LMS** an **order** refers to the transaction made by a user when they purchase access to a course. This order includes the details of the course bought, the payment processed through [integrated gateways](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods), and the transaction status (completed or pending). Once an order is successfully placed, the user gains access to the course materials, and administrators can manage these orders through the special **Orders** tab in their dashboard.

{% hint style="success" %}
This guide will cover how users can make orders and how administrators can manage them within the MasterStudy LMS Plugin.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
This section covers the orders that have been made through the native [**payment methods**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods) of **MasterStudy LMS**. [WooCommerce orders](/masterstudy-lms/woocommerce/woocommerce-integration) should be managed by the [**WooCommerce Orders tab**](/masterstudy-lms/woocommerce/orders-management). Courses that have been purchased **by membership subscriptions** should also be managed by the [**Paid Memberships Pro Orders tab.**](/masterstudy-lms/additional-features/membership-system)

***

However, the[ course purchase process](#how-to-make-an-order) and [order management](#how-to-check-orders) for students are **the same** for both native MS LMS payment methods and WooCommerce.
{% endhint %}

## **Orders Management as a Student**

In **MasterStudy LMS,** instructors and admins can also purchase other instructors' courses.

### How to Make an Order?

**Making an order** is just a synonym of the **Purchasing Course(s).** So, if you decide to buy the course, click on the get now button, and you will see the available methods to purchase the course:

<figure><img src="/files/2zqGNnMPm2CeetQe6V60" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After that, the course will be added to **the cart.** You can go there by clicking **Go to Cart** button:

<figure><img src="/files/21NYa2apU2n5tw1MkpQU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

There is an availability to add several courses to the cart. Review your order and choose the preferred [**payment method**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods)**,** then proceed with the payment:

<figure><img src="/files/xXjnhN5JtfFFW50oUGE3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

After the successful payment, you will get the confirmation page with the order status:

<figure><img src="/files/Z1QPGgskK5mxlfPAJJe0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
The user is automatically enrolled in the purchased course and can access the course materials through their dashboard.
{% endhint %}

If you configured the [**Email Manager**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager) add-on accordingly, the user and admin receive an order confirmation[ **via email.**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager/email-templates#orders)

<figure><img src="/files/akOZQdgsnExLUFjMh17Y" alt=""><figcaption><p>Sample email to admin</p></figcaption></figure>

### How to Check Orders?

Users can review their made orders on the Orders tab in their dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/BpyzE4Kz52t59sNdxhdz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

On this page, users can see the full list of their orders and detailed order info (ID, issue date, status, etc):

<figure><img src="/files/52htNEdICNikW0b6wAgm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Order ID** - a unique code that represents your order. Students can use this code to refer to their order with the admin.&#x20;
* **Date** - issue date of the order.
* **Payment method** - the way the student made the purchase.
* **Order Status** - the status of the order, which indicates the course's accessibility to the student. There are 3 statuses:
  * **Completed** - the order has been confirmed successfully by the system or admin. T**he student has full access to the course.**
  * **Pending** - the order is awaiting moderation. Admin should check the payment and other details, then manually change the status to **Completed**. Cash (offline) payment methods and wire transfer orders will have pending status and online payment methods can have pending for some time. **The student doesn't have access to the course.**
  * **Cancelled** - the order has been canceled by the system or admin. **The student doesn't have access to the course.**

{% hint style="info" %}
**WooCommerce** orders are also displayed here for students.
{% endhint %}

***

## Orders Management as Admin

Administrators have complete control over order management, including checking the details of every order and managing transactions.

{% hint style="info" %}
This section covers the orders that have been made through native [**payment methods**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods) of **MasterStudy LMS**. [WooCommerce orders](/masterstudy-lms/woocommerce/woocommerce-integration) should be managed by the [**WooCommerce Orders tab**](/masterstudy-lms/woocommerce/woocommerce-integration#purchase-process). Courses that have been purchased **by membership subscriptions** also should be managed by the [**Paid Memberships Pro Orders tab.**](/masterstudy-lms/additional-features/membership-system)
{% endhint %}

However, the admin and instructor can check the **sales (orders**) on the **My Sales page** in their dashboard. To get **more info** about the feature, refer to this manual:

{% content-ref url="/pages/Cf704ca0m0dPdtSH1QlE" %}
[Sales Page for Instructor](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/orders/sales-page-for-instructor)
{% endcontent-ref %}

### How to Check Orders?

Follow **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Orders** to get the full list of orders on your platform:

<figure><img src="/files/JMN1RGjDlzsV5W55Hyep" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### How to Update Order Status?

On the [**Orders tab**](#how-to-check-orders-1), **edit** the order that you want to modify:

<figure><img src="/files/UKcGNaxju3OZt0JTS7qp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

On this page, you can also find the detailed order info. Change the **order status,** then click on the update button:

<figure><img src="/files/CeGCb4saJr2zaZTzDGh0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

There are three types of order statuses:

* **Completed** - the order has been confirmed successfully by the system or admin. T**he student has full access to the course.**
* **Pending** - the order is awaiting moderation. Admin should check the payment and other details, then manually change the status to **Completed**. Cash (offline) payment methods and wire transfer orders will have pending status and online payment methods can have pending for some time. **The student doesn't have access to the course.**
* **Cancelled** - the order has been canceled by the system or admin. **The student doesn't have access to the course.**

At the bottom, you can leave an internal note (visible only to admin) and check the list of items included in this order:

<figure><img src="/files/Nh3IL7YqIs1PwDyTru17" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
If [**email settings**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager) have been set accordingly, the admin will receive each time [**a new order is placed.**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager/email-templates#orders)

For payment methods,[ **Cash (offline payment)**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods#offline-payment) and [**Wire Transfer**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods#wire-transfer), the admin **should always manually change** the order status to **Completed** or **Cancelled** from **Pending** according to the payment status.

As for PayPal and Stripe, it is also recommended to check the received funds regularly and review the order statuses.
{% endhint %}

Reports over **Revenue** and **Course purchases** can be checked by the Advanced Analytics feature of **MasterStudy**:

{% content-ref url="/pages/XxU7zcOVd382G9jJWiDF" %}
[Analytics for Admin](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/analytics-for-admin)
{% endcontent-ref %}


# Sales Page for Instructor

Pro Feature

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/5gIqKbB5ibc>" %}

The **My Sales Page** allows instructors to track and manage their course sales efficiently. This feature provides an overview of all transactions associated with their courses and enables instructors to drill down into detailed reports for individual sales. The interface is user-friendly, offering key insights into payment statuses, user information, and course details.

{% hint style="info" %}
If you are using [**WooCommerce Checkout**](/masterstudy-lms/woocommerce/woocommerce-integration) to sell courses, the sales tab inherits the data from **WooCommerce Orders** directly.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/SnkPVOgBasRbKIVGM3LA" alt=""><figcaption><p>Overview of the My Sales Page</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
The **advantage** of the **My Sales** page over the [**Revenue tab**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/analytics-for-instructors/revenue) **of the Analytics** is that in the My Sales table you can review all of the orders made (courses purchased) **in detail** and **one by one.**&#x20;
{% endhint %}

## How to Access My Sales Page?

Instructors can easily access the **My Sales** page from their **dashboard**:

<figure><img src="/files/nviRDKWpGs8RU9TtFrBt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Overview of My Sales Page

Here is the **User Interface Overview** of the My Sales Page:

<figure><img src="/files/I4CWl6ebdY0xJauYm6xh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The page enables to set the **filter by date range** on the top right corner, so only the orders made **within the selected period** will be shown:

<figure><img src="/files/3AoQJZTYEUyuyK8FW4UT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
As shown in the **UI Overview**, there are searching and pagination options as well.
{% endhint %}

Columns are powered by **ascending** and **descending sorting options:**

<figure><img src="/files/DPeWolWLsaWIo39XGiK3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is the overview of the Sales Table by columns:

* **№ -** Displays the unique **Order ID.**
* **Date -** Date and time of the transaction.
* **User -** Name and email of the buyer (student).
* **Order Items -** Number of items purchased in the transaction.
* **Payment Method -** Method used for [payment ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods)(e.g., Cash, Stripe, Wire Transfer, WooCommerce etc).
* **Status -** The current status of the payment. [Colors ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/general)of the Order Statues will be inherited from **MS LMS > Settings > General > Colors/Base Colors.**
  * **Completed** - the order has been confirmed successfully by the system or admin. T**he student has full access to the course.**
  * **Pending** - the order is awaiting moderation. Admin should check the payment and other details, then manually change the status to **Completed**. Cash (offline) payment methods and wire transfer orders will have pending status and online payment methods can have pending for some time. **The student doesn't have access to the course.**
  * **Canceled** - the order has been canceled by the system or admin. **The student doesn't have access to the course.**
* **Total -** Total amount billed for the sale.
* **Detailed Report Button -** Link to view a detailed report of the specific sale.

> To get more info about the Orders feature, refer to this manual:

{% content-ref url="/pages/-Mdercuklo\_mCRhfFIQx" %}
[Orders](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/orders)
{% endcontent-ref %}

### Detailed Report for the Order

This page opens when the **Detailed Report button** in the last column of the **Sales table** is clicked. Here is the overview of the page:

<figure><img src="/files/8r6EwBV5FPT5dZwTkk6v" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

On this page, you can find the all info related to this order. Such as **items included in the order, the billing address,  payment method, Transaction ID (Order ID), Status, Order Creation Date,** and a **special button** to print the order details.&#x20;

On the Order Details Page, there is a special button to print the order details:

<figure><img src="/files/6Cee4Lk0Zk1yTOAF8voN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
If your are using MasterStudy [Payment Methods](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/ecommerce/payment-methods) as a checkout, the system takes the **logo of the website** as a header.
{% endhint %}

The system collects the order information and generates ready-to-print `.pdf` document:

<figure><img src="/files/awaDF2DC4yuffSW6s4lo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

If you are using WooCommerce in a checkout process, the logo of your website for this document can be uploaded by following  **MS LMS > Settings > General > WooCommerce Logo Upload:**

<figure><img src="/files/NfvueVdCvb6C5fjfFlts" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Courses Category

All the courses on the website can be divided into categories. Both admins and instructors can create Course Categories.

## Add a new category from the admin panel <a href="#add-a-new-category-from-the-admin-panel" id="add-a-new-category-from-the-admin-panel"></a>

To add a new course category, follow **Dashboard > MS LMS Settings > Courses Category.** There are already lots of categories coming with the demo content that you can use for your courses such as Art, Music, and Photography with a variety of subcategories. Or you can also create a new one.

![](/files/P9J2xPUHiYggyZ3wK08D)

Enter the name of the new category. You can also upload an image for it, select the icon and color, and provide the description.

<figure><img src="/files/GbNxLHu8eZABIVO5WlcM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Name** - enter the name of the category
* **Slug** - enter the category's slug. The **slug** is the URL-friendly version of the name. It is usually all lowercase and contains only letters, numbers, and hyphens.
* **Parent Course Category** - Assign a parent term to create a hierarchy. The term Jazz, for example, would be the parent of Bebop and Big Band.
* **Description** - give the description to the group
* **Course Page Style**<mark style="color:red;">**\***</mark> - you can change the single [**Course Page Style**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/course#course-page-styles) for this category. **The none** option applies the [**selected course page**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/course#course-page-styles) style for all courses globally in **MasterStudy LMS Settings > Course > Course Page Style.**&#x20;
* **Category Image** - indicate the image for the category that can be displayed in the [**Course Categories widgets.**](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets)
* **Category Icon** - indicate the icon for the category that can be displayed in the [**Course Categories widgets.**](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets)
* **Category Color** - indicate the color for the category that can be displayed in the [**Course Categories widgets.**](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets)

<mark style="color:red;">**\***</mark>Here you can see the available single [**Course Page Styles:**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/course#course-page-styles)

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Style 1" %}

### Default

The [Default](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/) course style presents a balanced and user-friendly layout, designed to streamline navigation and deliver course content with clarity and accessibility

<figure><img src="/files/4uzZp7YUpeRXoT2978VK" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Default Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 2" %}

### Classic

The [Classic ](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=classic)course style offers a clean and straightforward layout for easy navigation and a clear presentation of course content.

<figure><img src="/files/51ivplAQFYGOu3KUdeiu" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Classic Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 3 " %}

### Industrial

The [Industrial](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=modern) course page style features a modern and dynamic layout, tailored to accommodate complex course structures and engage learners with its visually immersive design.

<figure><img src="/files/CgLlpPE4pGTBtZXUbgxR" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Industrial Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 4" %}

### Timeless

The [Timeless](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=timeless) course style embodies a classic and elegant layout, offering a timeless appeal that prioritizes simplicity and ease of use, ensuring an enduringly enjoyable learning experience.

<figure><img src="/files/xktjsYW7Ano6FeORPu5T" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Timeless Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 5" %}

### Sleek with Sidebar

The [Sleek Sidebar](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=sleek-sidebar) course style showcases a contemporary design with a distinctive sticky sidebar feature, enhancing user experience with convenient navigation placed beneath it, providing easy access to course materials and resources.

<figure><img src="/files/LbsP6K1iktxsHVrwspul" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Sleek Sidebar Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 6" %}

### Minimalistic

The[ Minimalistic](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=minimalistic) course style offers a clean and uncluttered design, focusing on essential course elements for a streamlined learning experience.

<figure><img src="/files/7DiVklBXM5qepgxifuil" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Minimalistic Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 7" %}

### Dynamic

The [Dynamic](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=dynamic) course style presents course information in a fluid and interactive manner, utilizing dynamic elements and modern design principles to engage learners effectively.

<figure><img src="/files/um2TPpQwrOV7Bu3fx2oO" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Dynamic Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 8" %}

### Modern with Curriculum

The[ Modern with Curriculum](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=modern-curriculum) course style resembles our modern design but integrates the course curriculum into a sidebar on the left for enhanced accessibility.

<figure><img src="/files/PyNUnl03HrkN9hWcnla3" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Modern with Curriculum Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 9" %}

### Dynamic with Short Sidebar

The [Dynamic with Short Sidebar](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=dynamic-sidebar) course page style includes a sticky sidebar for effortless navigation throughout the course content.

<figure><img src="/files/fG1NVDxNqB6JBwd1PM0b" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Dynamic with Short Sidebar Course Page Style</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Style 10" %}

### Bold with Full Width Cover

The [Bold with Full Width Cover](https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/%20?course_style=full-width) course page style prominently features a full-width course photo at the top, creating a visually captivating introduction to the course content.
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

{% hint style="warning" %}
If the Course Page style has been set in the [**course settings using Course Builder**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/course-builder#course-page-style), **MasterStudy LMS** ignores the Course Page style that has been set in the Course Category.
{% endhint %}

Click the **Add New Course category** button to save the changes and add a new category:

<figure><img src="/files/avdluHi4Gej5LqikzgBN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Also, you can create a new category directly from the course editing page.

<figure><img src="/files/7800qOwjTcz8ofEBVki0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Add a new category from the instructor account  <a href="#add-a-new-category-from-the-instructor-account" id="add-a-new-category-from-the-instructor-account"></a>

Besides this, instructors are also allowed to add new categories for the courses. To enable this feature website admin need to go to LMS Settings > Course and enable the option Allow instructors to create new categories.

![](/files/LXVj8HdxvOWKIDjbPB4u)

After this, instructors will be able to add categories via Course Builder. Reveal the dropdown menu of the Category and choose the option **Add new category**.

<figure><img src="/files/bEj3rcHJkpxdJSw70XQF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Custom Course Pages

Pro Plus Feature

The customizable course page templates feature in **MasterStudy LMS** allows users to define the layout and structure of course pages according to specific requirements.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
A single template can be applied [**globally** ](#assign-default-course-page)**to all courses**, while **courses** can also **be assigned** a **different template** [**individually** ](#assign-individual-course-page)as needed.
{% endhint %}

You can edit predefined templates or create new ones using MasterStudy widgets within the **Elementor** page builder. For **non-Elementor users**, there are also[ **10+ native course**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/course#course-page-styles) page style&#x73;**.** This provides flexibility in presenting course content while maintaining consistency with the site design.

{% embed url="<https://stylemixthemes.com/wordpress-lms-plugin/course-style/?utm_source=stylemix&utm_medium=docs&utm_campaign=custom_course_pages>" %}
Promo Page with the Widgets Look
{% endembed %}

{% hint style="success" %}
The main goal of using **individual course pages** is to transform them into **conversion-driven mini landings.** With [**50+ customizable Elementor widgets**](#list-of-masterstudy-course-widgets)**,** you can build clean, purpose-driven layouts with full control or apply advanced pre-built templates.
{% endhint %}

<details>

<summary>What is a Course Page?</summary>

*Course Page* or *Single Course Page* is a page in your LMS website that will display all details, information - course short description, long description, cover image and video, curriculum, reviews, number of enrolled students, etc. With this page, you will advertise your courses, and students will buy the course via the **Get Course** button here. That's why it's important to develop a friendly and promotional page for it.

</details>

Here are the available Advanced **Customizable Course Page Templates:**

<table data-view="cards" data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Masterclass</strong></td><td><a href="/files/DsHlvEigb1noVBvc85MO">/files/DsHlvEigb1noVBvc85MO</a></td><td><a href="https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/?course_style=masterclass-2">https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/?course_style=masterclass-2</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Minimalism</strong></td><td><a href="/files/BmeVztvMqLLo5xYbCQTZ">/files/BmeVztvMqLLo5xYbCQTZ</a></td><td><a href="https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/minimalism/?course_style=minimalism-3">https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/minimalism/?course_style=minimalism-3</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Streamline</strong></td><td><a href="/files/2HajTjK0LWjBGedridlT">/files/2HajTjK0LWjBGedridlT</a></td><td><a href="https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/fashion-photography-from-professional/?course_style=streamline-3">https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/fashion-photography-from-professional/?course_style=streamline-3</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Assign Default Course Page

You can change the default course page template that will be applied to all courses globally from the MasterStudy plugin settings.&#x20;

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Follow **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Settings > Course:**

<figure><img src="/files/Czzm2Yc8cocxWHyFOwTA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
There is a section lets you choose the template that will be used as a default **Course Page** template. You can use the Preview button to check how it will look on the front-end.

<figure><img src="/files/zVzKzjrQLbkGkTJp5khA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
To change the template, click on the Change Template button:

<figure><img src="/files/t4OOAYDxaIKBf24sNuDU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
It opens a page consisting of three different tabs:

* **Template Library** - a list of fully customizable **Elementor-built templates**. They have been built with [**MasterStudy Elementor widgets**](#list-of-masterstudy-course-widgets). You can select them and change them according to your needs. The copy of the selected template on this tab will be displayed on the **My Templates** tab as a new template.&#x20;
* **Native Templates** - pre-built [**native course page templates**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/course#style-1) of MasterStudy. Some sections on the course page can be enabled or disabled from the **MS LMS > Settings > Course Page** tab, but the layout and the design of these templates are not customizable. They work best for those users who **do not use the Elementor** page builder and like to standardize all courses.
* **My Templates** - on this tab there will be displayed your saved course page templates.

<figure><img src="/files/w7iqTQmZoeRXxv6m2mhq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here are the available Advanced **Customizable Course Page Templates:**

<table data-view="cards" data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Masterclass</strong></td><td><a href="/files/DsHlvEigb1noVBvc85MO">/files/DsHlvEigb1noVBvc85MO</a></td><td><a href="https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/?course_style=masterclass-2">https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/?course_style=masterclass-2</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Minimalism</strong></td><td><a href="/files/BmeVztvMqLLo5xYbCQTZ">/files/BmeVztvMqLLo5xYbCQTZ</a></td><td><a href="https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/minimalism/?course_style=minimalism-3">https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/minimalism/?course_style=minimalism-3</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Streamline</strong></td><td><a href="/files/2HajTjK0LWjBGedridlT">/files/2HajTjK0LWjBGedridlT</a></td><td><a href="https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/fashion-photography-from-professional/?course_style=streamline-3">https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/fashion-photography-from-professional/?course_style=streamline-3</a></td></tr></tbody></table>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
You can **select any of the ready templates** from the **Native Templates** and **My Templates** tabs. Once you are done, click on the save button:

<figure><img src="/files/KtSV50mkvCA0OmihzAMz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Assign Individual Course Page

You can assign different course page styles for courses individually. It means different courses on your website may have a different look. It's a very handy tool if you want to **emphasize** and **give more attention** to some specific courses.&#x20;

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Edit the course you wanted to assign a different course page than the default one:

<figure><img src="/files/XXZm0VH9SeJoMP7dPKJb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Move to the **Settings > Course Page:**

<figure><img src="/files/C9grDS2f7VPlWhtfibIe" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
You can choose any ready template in the **My Templates** or **Native Templates** tabs and **save** the changes:

<figure><img src="/files/s6dLngdSU2dk1QQ032Db" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Creating Custom Course Page Templates

Custom Course Pages are created using **Elementor page builder** and special 50+[ **MasterStudy Course widgets.**](#list-of-masterstudy-course-widgets) That's why make sure you have activated Elementor on your website.&#x20;

Let's see an example by editing the ready Elementor build template. Following the same logic, you can craft your course page from scratch

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Reach the **Template Library** tab. You can go there from the plugin settings or in the course builder:

<figure><img src="/files/JdwssAyZeTvRTOZyEtbP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here are the available Advanced Customizable Course Page Templates:

<table data-view="cards" data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Masterclass</strong></td><td><a href="/files/DsHlvEigb1noVBvc85MO">/files/DsHlvEigb1noVBvc85MO</a></td><td><a href="https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/?course_style=masterclass-2">https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/basics-of-masterstudy/?course_style=masterclass-2</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Minimalism</strong></td><td><a href="/files/BmeVztvMqLLo5xYbCQTZ">/files/BmeVztvMqLLo5xYbCQTZ</a></td><td><a href="https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/minimalism/?course_style=minimalism-3">https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/minimalism/?course_style=minimalism-3</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Streamline</strong></td><td><a href="/files/2HajTjK0LWjBGedridlT">/files/2HajTjK0LWjBGedridlT</a></td><td><a href="https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/fashion-photography-from-professional/?course_style=streamline-3">https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/courses-page/fashion-photography-from-professional/?course_style=streamline-3</a></td></tr></tbody></table>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Choose the template and click on **Copy & Edit**:

<figure><img src="/files/cmpOlLAjhbSrmJR36v2s" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Give a name to the template and click on continue. By doing so, the system creates a copy of that template, and it will be displayed on the My Templates tab.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/9rKtKcS5KBrIhs4jCZRu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Move to the Templates tab. On this page, you will see the template you have created. We will **edit it with Elementor.** Moreover, on this page, you can check  the preview of the saved templates, copy or delete them:

<figure><img src="/files/isZb0jtJNMVIkZN6h5Nw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
It will open the template in Elementor:

<figure><img src="/files/0Y59C7eJbFlrhOVMxjVu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
There are two types of widgets used in these templates:

* **Dynamic** - these types of widgets come with **MasterStudy**, and they display info based on the course. You will not enter the information fully. For example, course image, course curriculum, course review, etc. The system automatically takes the information from the database and displays it. You can not manually change them in Elementor. They are labelled as <kbd>LMS</kbd> and <kbd>LMS Course</kbd> and grouped into sections named **MasterStudy.**
* **Static** - these types of widgets are mostly default Elementor widgets and some MasterStudy widgets used in landings. You can change their content within Elementor. For example, cards, containers, pictures, some statistics, testimonials, etc.

<figure><img src="/files/1zRJo1RSf5odCqYqEdR5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
If you select the widget, on the left sidebar, its preferences will be opened:

* **Content** - this tab is unique for each widget. Usually, you will set the number of items displayed, choose the preset, etc.
* **Style** - on this tab, typography settings and colors for the widget can be adjusted.
* **Advanced** - there are different settings you can adjust like paddings, margins, actions, etc.

<figure><img src="/files/hnjC0kAeVo7gSEujDqHA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
For static widgets, you have to check all texts and adjust them according to your needs. Because they will show the same results for all courses that you use this template.

<figure><img src="/files/6fd2RDJ4JTsTEbeGUmVj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Once you are done, click on the <kbd>Publish</kbd> button:

<figure><img src="/files/AEf0gylCCbSu2UcR5Xvv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

{% hint style="success" %}
You are done! Now, this template can be assigned to any course or used as the default course.
{% endhint %}

## List of MasterStudy Course Widgets

Here you can  check all available  Elementor Course Widgets by MasterStudy:

{% embed url="<https://stylemixthemes.com/wordpress-lms-plugin/course-style/?utm_source=stylemix&utm_medium=docs&utm_campaign=custom_course_pages>" %}
Page with the Widgets Look
{% endembed %}

<table><thead><tr><th width="187">Widget Name</th><th width="211">Presets</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Categories</strong></td><td><em>Standard, Classic with icon</em></td><td>Displays the  <a href="/pages/-MderhYFGBO3KvpiJdPO"><strong>Course Category</strong> </a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Updated</strong></td><td>-</td><td>Displays the last updated date  and time of the course</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Enrolled</strong></td><td>-</td><td>Displays the date and time which student is enrolled in the course. The widget will not be displaye in front-end if the student is not enrolled in. </td></tr><tr><td><strong>Details</strong></td><td><em>Standard
, Horizontal
, Horizontal Divided, Grid, Grid Compact</em></td><td>Displays the full course details: <strong>Course Duration, Number of Lectures, Videos, Quizzes, and Course Level.</strong></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Icon Box</strong></td><td><em>Standard, Vertical</em></td><td>Display the selected icon with some text. Do not take any info from the course. Text should be provided within Elementor.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Curriculum</strong></td><td><em>Standard
, Classic</em></td><td>Displays the Course Curriculum. You can choose the specific section to display as well.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Notice</strong></td><td>-</td><td>Displays the<a href="/pages/-MdeqF1oqtZ4cQauA6Zp#notice"> <strong>Course Notice</strong> </a>by the instructor.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Current Students</strong></td><td><em>Classic
, Classic with icon</em></td><td>Displays the number of students enrolled in the course. </td></tr><tr><td><strong>Excerpt</strong></td><td><em>Full Text
, Shortened Text</em></td><td>Displays the short description of the course.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>FAQ</strong></td><td>-</td><td>Displays the <a href="/pages/-MdeqF1oqtZ4cQauA6Zp#faq"><strong>Course FAQ</strong></a><strong>.</strong></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Instructor</strong></td><td><em>Standard
, Compact</em></td><td>Displays the author of the course.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Materials</strong></td><td>-</td><td>Displays  the attached course materials<strong>.</strong></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Info</strong></td><td><em>Basic Info, Course Requirements, Intended Audience</em></td><td>A universal info widget that displays the relevant information based on the chosen preset.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Popular Courses</strong></td><td><em>Vertical
, Horizontal</em></td><td>Displays the popular courses on your website.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Price Info</strong></td><td>-</td><td>Displays the price information of the course.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Rating</strong> </td><td><em>Standard
, Standard Row
, Classic
, Compact</em></td><td>Displays the current Course Rating in the form of numbers and stars based on <a href="/pages/-MderZ3sJN525pGeNAPR"><strong>student reviews</strong></a>.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Related Courses</strong></td><td><em>Horizontal, Vertical</em></td><td>Displays the related courses matching the course category and topics.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Reviews</strong></td><td><em>Standard, Rewievs Grid</em></td><td>Displays the detailed course reviews or the latest reviews by students based on the chosen preset.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Complete</strong></td><td>-</td><td>Displays the date and time which is completed the course. The widget will be hiddan in case the course is not completed by the student. </td></tr><tr><td><strong>Share Button</strong></td><td><em>Standard
, Extended</em></td><td>Displays the social media buttons to share the course.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Wishlist</strong></td><td><em>Standard
, Standard without label</em></td><td>Displays a button that lets users save the course to their wishlist. </td></tr><tr><td><strong>Countdown</strong></td><td><em>Standard
, Gray Card</em></td><td>Displays a contdown with the specified date in the Elementor.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Status</strong></td><td>-</td><td>Displays the course status like <em>Hot, New, Special etc.</em></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Thumbnail</strong></td><td>-</td><td>Displays the Course Cover image.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Title</strong></td><td>-</td><td>Displays the Course Title.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Expiration</strong></td><td>-</td><td>Displays the Course Expiration date.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Buy Button</strong> </td><td>-</td><td>Displays a button that adds the course to the checkout page. Users will buy the course using this button. </td></tr><tr><td><strong>Grades</strong></td><td>-</td><td>Displays the  Course Grade if the student has completed the course. The <a href="/pages/TMn1PatGYg3aQBqkfVml"><strong>Grades addon</strong></a> should be activated and set up accordingly to use the widget.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Coming Soon</strong></td><td>-</td><td>Displays the course start date with a countdown and a notification button if the course has a coming soon status. The <a href="/pages/Nx3e3jEIOx7Wi1E4UNEn"><strong>Upcoming Course Status</strong> </a>addon should be enabled to use the widget.</td></tr></tbody></table>

If you want to learn about other **MasterStudy LMS Widgets**, refer to this manual:

{% content-ref url="/pages/047rYBKyxx3sjJcSGWrl" %}
[LMS Widgets](/masterstudy-lms/getting-started-1/lms-widgets)
{% endcontent-ref %}


# Course & Lesson Materials

**The course & Lesson materials** feature allows instructors to attach various types of files to the courses and lessons.

## Course Materials <a href="#course-materials" id="course-materials"></a>

Course files can be uploaded from the backend panel, as well as by using the frontend course builder, which is especially beneficial for instructors.

To add a file go to **MS LMS > Courses**, and select the course you want to edit. In the course settings, you will find the **Course Files** section. Upload the file by clicking on the **"Select File"** button and entering the title.

![](/files/ZXGnHEqlM9t3Q6JOVfoh)

You can add absolutely different types of files. Students will be able to download all the attachments.

Below is the course page view, where all the attachments are available under the course description.

<figure><img src="/files/WdeqLIRr6adalQ8PLDHP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Lesson Materials <a href="#lesson-materials" id="lesson-materials"></a>

In addition to course files, you can add attachments to the specific lessons. To do so, go to **Lessons** and select the lesson you want to add files to. Or you can access the exact lesson from the **Course curriculum**. In the **lesson settings**, you will find the **Lesson Materials** section. Simply use the **Plus** button to add a new attachment, title it and save.

![](/files/oDYwOz3bDj5Dai0KNPQN)

You can easily delete any attachments and view the file.

In each lesson, students can find the attachment with the name and size specifications and easily download them.

<figure><img src="/files/iQyoNdXQJdV4s5R1QaFV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Course Drafts for Instructors

Course Drafts allow instructors to prepare courses more thoroughly and save any changes in the draft until they are ready for publication.

When creating a course with Course Builder, at the top right corner check the option "**Make Draft**" in order to save the course in a draft format.

![The screenshoot takent from the Masterstudy theme](/files/xdMTzVr65Zl2balJ7Hgk)

Also, you can change the status of the already published course.

![The screenshoot takent from the Masterstudy theme](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2F-MDO9V_qgvV5cQdw04iz%2F-MIOebIAL80drHosYZbS%2F-MIOrp6h7agDaaS3ppGN%2Finstuctor_draft.png?alt=media\&token=bfae6d68-c0a3-4751-be71-49dd7016c9f0)

Courses saved as drafts **won't be displayed** in the search results on the website, and if the user tries entering the course page, it will notify the user that the page doesn't exist.

![The screenshoot takent from the Masterstudy theme](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2F-MDO9V_qgvV5cQdw04iz%2F-MIOebIAL80drHosYZbS%2F-MIOryha1SZlcwePxMcS%2Fdraft_course_open.png?alt=media\&token=ae9dd40b-5048-4059-9c3b-141d23d2b4c5)

Please note if you enable the **Course Pre-Moderation** option when publishing the course it will have a **Pending** status, meaning the admin has to approve it. Only after approval, the course will be visible to students.

![](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2F-MDO9V_qgvV5cQdw04iz%2F-MTKWx_-0lP22N1uXSrR%2F-MTKZoZ4KHtDaPztTC9d%2FScreenshot_60.png?alt=media\&token=29c76fa8-786a-425b-a36a-15bd5e5f2b02)

![The screenshoot takent from the Masterstudy theme](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2F-MDO9V_qgvV5cQdw04iz%2F-MIOebIAL80drHosYZbS%2F-MIOsG2Lwrr6FY4FZoHT%2Fpending_approve.png?alt=media\&token=83fd2dd6-3340-4cfe-9c27-a20380db0178)

The course is marked as drafted (instructor's page):

![The screenshoot takent from the Masterstudy theme](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2F-MDO9V_qgvV5cQdw04iz%2F-MIOebIAL80drHosYZbS%2F-MIOsULzg4owuftUCMg2%2Finstructor_drafted_course.png?alt=media\&token=32b2a9d3-4150-474c-b0d7-d975f96c272a)

Published course:

![The screenshoot takent from the Masterstudy theme](https://gblobscdn.gitbook.com/assets%2F-MDO9V_qgvV5cQdw04iz%2F-MIOebIAL80drHosYZbS%2F-MIOsde1Qflab8eSRM6Z%2Finstructor_published_course.png?alt=media\&token=05567f1c-eec9-4734-9572-a92b6905b28c)


# Manage Students

There are two ways to manage students in MasterStudy LMS:

1. **Students Tab** - here you can check the whole students list from all courses and take necessary actions (removing from the course, exporting list to CSV file, etc). Best for managing students globally.&#x20;
2. **Manage Students tab in Courses Page** - here you can perform several actions related to the course progress of the enrolled students for that specific course.

{% hint style="success" %}
Also, **instructors** have[ **a special interface** ](#managing-students-as-an-instructor)in their dashboard without accessing the backend.
{% endhint %}

## Students Tab

To access the students tab, follow the **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Students:**

<figure><img src="/files/hObaOYm22q7rIjQjvKBP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is the breakdown of the table by **columns**:

* **Student Name** - displays the name of the student.
* **Email** - registered student email address.
* **Joined** - the date students registered on your LMS.
* **Course enrolled** - the number of courses a student enrolled in.
* **Points** - if you have enabled the [**Point System**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/point-system) on your LMS, in this column, students' earned points will be displayed.

At the top of the page, there are sorting and filtering options:

<figure><img src="/files/9OrH5xkMbnXdtupOfC9T" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Remove Students

Selected students can be removed from your website by clicking the <kbd>Remove Selected</kbd> button:

{% hint style="danger" %} <mark style="color:red;">**THIS ACTION CAN NOT BE UNDONE!**</mark>

This button **removes** the selected student from **ALL COURSES** they have enrolled in. Their **course progress will also be lost** permanently. However, the student account stays on your website, which means they can enroll again to courses.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/TdTKn3cCTzgxPT1EPshS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The system will ask for your permission again, and after the confirmation, they will be removed:

<figure><img src="/files/fOgzwCW3Utgz0T4Y2dr6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Reports for the Selected Student

You can access the detailed analytics about the student simply by clicking the View button at the end of each row:

<figure><img src="/files/NT2UsE2HKdGnK4AOnkP9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

On the opened page, you can find all information about the students, such as Revenue from the student,  purchased membership plans, orders made, courses enrolled, a detailed overview of the courses, lessons, quizzes, and assignments completed or failed, reviews given, and more:

<figure><img src="/files/ITSyi0GQ6ixeeb3wDeKF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Export Students CSV

You can export the students' list by clicking the <kbd>Export CSV</kbd> button. In the CSV file, students' email, first name, last name, course ID, and the course title they enrolled in will be included.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
Clicking this button will export the entire student list, **regardless** of whether any students are **selected** or **which page you're on.** Selections and pagination do not affect the export.

To limit the number of exported students, apply filters such as course, date range, or other available criteria before exporting.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/w9OqyMJ2jCD2NqiS3Rhb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Manage Students Tab in Courses Page

In this method, you can perform several actions related to the course progress of the enrolled students for the specific course.

### Managing students as an Admin

<figure><img src="/files/oB8r7pe5n2R3yfzIM1YB" alt=""><figcaption><p>Courses page and highlighted Manage Student buttons</p></figcaption></figure>

Go to **MasterStudy LMS > Courses**. In the **Course Students** column, click the **Manage Students** button for a course. This opens a page where you can [**add**](#adding-students-to-the-course) or [**remove**](#removing-students-from-the-course) students, [**import**](#importing-student-list-csv) or [**export**](#exporting-student-list-csv) student lists, and **monitor** student progress for that course.

On the Manage Students page, you can find the full list of the course students: student name, email, start date, and their progress in percentage.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/Qt8kfflsWoMq99MrdlUF" alt=""><figcaption><p>Students of the course 'Minimalism, How to make things simples'</p></figcaption></figure>

To get further info about student progress, just click on the **Progress** button:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/l0FC3Mgy0XRfblTV5kVu" alt=""><figcaption><p>Hover the student and Progress button will be visible</p></figcaption></figure>

On this page, you can check the performance of a student more precisely and see the completed lessons and tasks. In addition to this, you can reset the results and mark, for example, a complete lesson as unfinished (just uncheck the item).

<figure><img src="/files/U4FqUPT3bDCtkpgnK4KJ" alt=""><figcaption><p>Student Progress Page</p></figcaption></figure>

### Removing Students from the Course

&#x20;To remove a student from the course on the **Manage Students** page, follow these steps:

1. **Hover** over the student’s name that you want to remove.
2. Click the **delete button** (trash can icon) next to the student’s name.

This action will kick the student from the course.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/9PmkMMtmH4ARJKrwKBMn" alt=""><figcaption><p>Removing Student from the course</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="danger" %}
Deleting the students will also remove their course progress and all associated data.
{% endhint %}

### Adding Students to the Course

Invitation links can be sent to their emails to add them to the course by admin or instructors. To do it just click on the Add Student button then indicate the email address of a student.

<figure><img src="/files/sHvylVAQYWUEONPYtrRJ" alt=""><figcaption><p>Add Student Button</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/yCsJwAamMSHFMSeaREA9" alt=""><figcaption><p>Indicating student email to send invitation</p></figcaption></figure>

### Exporting Student List (CSV)

To export the student list (email, first name, and last name) in CSV format, simply click the **Export CSV** button on the **Manage Students** page. The download will start automatically:

<figure><img src="/files/xtHQrbD8XTwQd8hj9pZZ" alt=""><figcaption><p>Export CSV button</p></figcaption></figure>

### Importing Student List (CSV)

Students can be imported from one course to another. In this scenario, no email or invitation will be sent to them. After importing, they will have access to the course you’ve imported.

To import the student list in CSV format, click on the **Import CSV** button:

<figure><img src="/files/4rrhr2cC3yChHu2ZdTbM" alt=""><figcaption><p>Import CSV button</p></figcaption></figure>

Upload the exported CSV file to the opened pop-up and click on the Import button:

<figure><img src="/files/esP9LN1OFwFtgbBJgYrx" alt=""><figcaption><p>Importing CSV file</p></figcaption></figure>

You can download a CSV file template and manually fill it in. Later, you can use it as an exported CSV file. When doing so, ensure that you don’t alter the formatting and only input accurate information.

{% hint style="warning" %}
Invalid email addresses will not be imported!
{% endhint %}

## Managing Students as an Instructor

First, as an admin, make sure you have given permissions to instructors to access the students' page and add students to courses by email. This can be done by following **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Settings > Profiles > General:**

<figure><img src="/files/v29eFO2gzz7Sdr0DckO0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Instructors can view and manage students *only* for the courses they teach. They do not have access to students enrolled in other instructors' courses.
{% endhint %}

Instructors can access the [**Students page**](#students-tab) from their dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/Lc9BDmH07ek8lAHKk6DR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Similar to administrators, instructors also have access to [**manage students.**](#manage-students-tab-in-courses-page) To do so:

1. Open the instructor dashboard.
2. Scroll down to the courses section.
3. Hover over the course for which you want to manage students.
4. Click on the **Manage Students** button

<figure><img src="/files/744heyyNljnsubs21pOt" alt=""><figcaption><p>Manage Student in the Instructors Dashboard</p></figcaption></figure>

Settings are completely the same as the admin:

<figure><img src="/files/YfH5XefhZOxRCBB5cg1p" alt=""><figcaption><p>Manage Students Page for Instructors</p></figcaption></figure>


# Change Course Author

The **Change Author** option allows the **admin** of the website to **redefine** the certain **course's author**.

To change the course's author go to the courses page  **MS LMS > Courses**. On opposite to each course name, you can see the field with the course's initial author name and the **Change Author** button.

![](/files/-Mdjdjeb_2XlMLLB8r3i)

Click the field with the author name and you will see a list of available instructors' usernames.

![](/files/-MdjdrOgUV7nThOgklZQ)

Select your needed instructor's username, click the **Change Author** button and you will get a notification on the screen.

![](/files/-Mdjdz-LM9CfTdxqvCCZ)

{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important:** If you change the course's author, all the lessons, quizzes, and assignments related to this course also will be automatically assigned to this author.&#x20;

If these lessons, quizzes, and assignments were added to other courses, they will be unavailable for those courses.&#x20;
{% endhint %}


# Instructors Requests

**The instructor requests** option allows the admin to manage users' requests to become an instructor.

## Authorization Settings

First of all, you have to check the Users and Instructors Authorization settings on your website. To do it, follow **MS LMS > Settings > Profiles > Authorization**:

<figure><img src="/files/3TstR7fpWdO9haVTlXrN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Turn off registration for all new users** - this option disables all new user registration on your website
* **Instructor registration** - when this option is turned on the checkbox “Register as an instructor” is shown in the registration form
* **Instructor pre-moderation** - when this option is enabled the user role “instructor” is set automatically, otherwise, you need to do it manually by changing the user
* **Show instructor registration form on separate page** - directs new instructors to a dedicated sign-up page

{% hint style="success" %}
In this manual, we will see dealing with **Instructor Requests** which means, **Intructors Registration** and **Instructor Pre-Moderation** settings are <mark style="color:green;">**enabled**</mark>.
{% endhint %}

## How to Submit Instructor Request?

There are two ways to submit a request to become an instructor:

* [**as a non-registered user in the registration form**](#as-non-registered-user)
* [**as an existing user**](#as-an-existing-user)

### As Non-Registered User

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Click on the **Sign-Up** button on the login page:

<figure><img src="/files/JtriAFkJEZ6V3eBCTGb2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Fill in the registration form: enter email, username and password:

<figure><img src="/files/t6KVWGTmnashHjtRtWnF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Check the box '**I want to sign up as Instructor**' and fill out the **Become Instructor Form:**

<figure><img src="/files/2Gqh2YXloymh5giB68Yp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
**Become Instructor Form** can be constructed/modified using the [**LMS Form Editor**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/lms-form-editor)**.**
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
The status of the request can be checked in the profile settings

<figure><img src="/files/8lA488xWi2sWU0iKW0rF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

<figure><img src="/files/M67nxXHDygDgcBKD6yeS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

After that, the user will be registered as a subscriber (student) on your system and remain in this role until the admin [**approves the request.**](#instructor-requests-management)

### As an Existing User

In this case, the user should have a student (subscriber) status. The **New** **User Default Role** should be set to **Subscriber** on your WordPress to give every newly registered user this status. To configure it:

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Follow **WP Dashboard  > Settings > General** and find the **New** **User Default Role**. Make sure it has been set to **Subscriber:**

<figure><img src="/files/xyb1aAlLebmggcC0lH0m" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Click on the **Save Changes**:

<figure><img src="/files/UI3m3YOmlrXnQ4265rdE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

Now, let's see how to submit a request to become an instructor **as a student** :white\_check\_mark:

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Go to the **User (student) dashboard** and click on the **Settings**. It will bring you to the profile settings:

<figure><img src="/files/MMAsgDQKtAxsODAyMPcQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
There will be a special button to submit a request to become an instructor:

<figure><img src="/files/GXDrAFI3OeaYC06yJjcL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
**Request Form** will be opened as a popup modal. Fill in the form and submit the request:

<figure><img src="/files/OiLCxM7V5Y8m1K4wvSBW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
This form is constructed using [**LMS Form Editor**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/lms-form-editor). You can [**modify** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/lms-form-editor)it according to your needs by following the add-on settings.&#x20;
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
That's it, you have successfully submitted a request:

<figure><img src="/files/V6SzlWedI9VPHMVdI2IQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

After that, the admin will [**confirm or decline**](#instructor-requests-management) the request.&#x20;

## Instructor Requests Management

Admin will be notified [**via email**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager/email-templates#become-an-instructor-email-to-admin) after each request submission:

<figure><img src="/files/VmRp8uEf6f30tAxlGmPe" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

To manage the requests follow **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Instructor Requets** tab:

<figure><img src="/files/jF54lor2bBMjBBbaXkWE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here you can see all the details about the requests. Review them and write your message about approval or denial of the request:

<figure><img src="/files/Eb95mS3G8iC1eZxXwFVl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Breakdown of the list by columns:

<figure><img src="/files/0x3X0hgQNymESB0rKGPL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **User ID** - the unique ID of the user on your system.
* **Username** - unique username of the user on your platform.
* **User Email** - email of the request sender.
* **User Info** - here will be displayed the answers of the user for the **Become Instructor form**. For the uploaded files, the links to them on your website will be provided. &#x20;
* **Submission Date** - date that the request has been submitted.
* **Actions** - here you can leave a message to the user about the request and approve or decline the request.
* **History** - if you click on the link, there will be displayed the request history on the opened pop-up modal. Users can submit requests again if they do not receive approval for the first time. However, as an admin, you can BAN the user so he will not be able to submit the request anymore.
* **Ban** - restricts the user from submitting the **Become Instructor form**. You can recheck the checkbox to remove the ban.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
After the approval or denial, instructors will be notified about the request results. You can modify the emails by [**Email Manager**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager) addon and do not forget to set up **SMPT settings** on your website.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/EWUeJuIhwRotV6XHhg6K" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Declined requests will be notified in the user dashboard with the **message** from admin:

<figure><img src="/files/zPqpLNGGm7aBQqLYeoWD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Video Preview for Single Course

The **Video Preview for Single Course** feature allows instructors to add a video preview to the course page. This enhancement provides potential students with a visual and engaging introduction to the course content, increasing their likelihood of enrolling.

<figure><img src="/files/vTL4TMD0knxUDbRsXoiH" alt=""><figcaption><p>Video Preview on the Single Course Page</p></figcaption></figure>

## **Importance and Benefits**

Adding a video preview to your course page offers several benefits:

* **Increased Engagement**: Videos can capture the attention of potential students more effectively than text alone.
* **Better Understanding**: A video preview gives a clear and concise course overview, helping students understand what they can expect.
* **Enhanced Credibility**: High-quality video previews can improve the perceived professionalism and credibility of the course.

## **How to Add a Video Preview**

To add a video preview to your course, follow these steps:

1. Edit the Course that you want to add Video Preview using **Course Builder**. You can do it in two ways:

* Click on the Edit with Course Builder button **on the Single Course page** of the course that you want to add a video preview:

<figure><img src="/files/aPwv5BTyawd7BReVvOUH" alt=""><figcaption><p>Editing the course with  Course Builder via Course Page</p></figcaption></figure>

* Using the Courses section in the WordPress Dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/NfbUiisTLCXyEgUXADm9" alt=""><figcaption><p>Editing the course with Course Builder via WP Dashboard</p></figcaption></figure>

2. Navigate to **Settings ->Main -> Source type for video preview:**

<figure><img src="/files/oee3SnaM7beaKS87UDXU" alt=""><figcaption><p>Source type for video preview settings</p></figcaption></figure>

3. **Select Video Source**: Indicate the type of video you want to use for the preview. The available video sources are:

* [**HTML (MP4)**](#html-mp4)
* [**Embed**](#embed)
* [**YouTube**](#youtube)
* [**Vimeo**](#vimeo)
* [**External Link**](#external-link)

{% hint style="warning" %}
Make sure to check [Preferred Video Sources](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/how-to-add-video-to-the-lesson#preferred-video-source) in the plugin settings to get these options.
{% endhint %}

***

### HTML (MP4)

**The HTML (MP4)** option allows you to upload a high-quality MP4 video file directly to the course page. Additionally, you can enhance the visual appeal of the video by uploading an **image poster**, which will be displayed before the video starts playing. This option is ideal for providing a professional and seamless video preview experience to potential students.

<figure><img src="/files/BSAEiS7VtWxOtkN2HFKG" alt=""><figcaption><p>HTML (MP4) option</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Poster for a video preview** -use dragging & dropping to add an image poster to the video or just click on the upload button.
* **Video Preview** - as a poster image you can use the drag & drop method or just use the special button to upload your video in **.MP4** format.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="On the Settings" %}

<figure><img src="/files/Ge9fJpqL96319Fyxo2Or" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="On the Course Page" %}

<figure><img src="/files/0t3FvwQ37OJoQ4Psb4qO" alt=""><figcaption><p>Image Poster </p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/2gRhfU0Eu3QQYXxBUQrG" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of playing video</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note:** The loading speed can be **decreased** after video upload depending on server limits, and if the video doesn't upload it is required to check server parameters.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="success" %}
**We recommend using CDN to improve the site speed and performance if uploading large video files is planned.** It will be better if large files are uploaded on external video hostings like [**YouTube**](#youtube) or [**Vimeo**](#vimeo) to save limits on the hosting side.
{% endhint %}

### YouTube

The YouTube option allows you to easily add a video preview to your course page by entering the YouTube video URL. This method leverages YouTube's robust hosting and streaming capabilities, ensuring a high-quality viewing experience. By using the YouTube option, you can provide potential students with an engaging and accessible video preview, showcasing your course content effectively.

<figure><img src="/files/Ev9R1L7U6RtEXg8Rnkzu" alt=""><figcaption><p>Settings four YouTube Video Preview</p></figcaption></figure>

To get a proper YouTube Video URL:

1. Click on the **Share Button** in YouTube Video:

<figure><img src="/files/xWXRwganhN9UgK2HA3zr" alt=""><figcaption><p>YouTube Video</p></figcaption></figure>

2. Copy the URL and paste it to the designated area in the Course Builder:

<figure><img src="/files/A75KdJ7QJfHImoTGcCSn" alt=""><figcaption><p>YouTube Video URL</p></figcaption></figure>

### Vimeo

Integrate a Vimeo video preview into your course page by entering the Vimeo video URL. This uses Vimeo's high-quality hosting for an excellent viewing experience. Provide potential students with an engaging and professional preview of your course content.

<figure><img src="/files/D6db1DrXDY6JTOosUiRk" alt=""><figcaption><p>Vimeo as a prefered video source</p></figcaption></figure>

Choose Vimeo as a source type and paste the video URL.

<figure><img src="/files/r75mCiDCzyV4niRsa20u" alt=""><figcaption><p>Vimeo as a Source</p></figcaption></figure>

### External Link

The External Link option allows you to add a video preview to your course page by providing the URL of a video hosted on an external platform. Additionally, you can upload an image poster to display before the video starts playing. This option is ideal for using videos hosted on your own servers or other video platforms, offering flexibility and a professional preview experience for potential students.

<figure><img src="/files/756uEj4ChZ74lYBJYMyB" alt=""><figcaption><p>External Link as a Source</p></figcaption></figure>

You can also add a poster image for video preview as [HTML (MP4)](#html-mp4) option.

{% hint style="warning" %}
The direct URL of the video that ends with **an extension of the file**: <https://site-name.domain/videos/sample><mark style="color:red;">.mp4</mark>
{% endhint %}

### Embed

**The Embed** option allows you to include a video from an external source by pasting the embed code provided by the video hosting service. This method supports various platforms and enables seamless integration of your video content into the course page. The Embed option is perfect for utilizing videos hosted on platforms like Dailymotion, Brightcove, or Wistia, ensuring a smooth and professional video preview experience for potential students.

<figure><img src="/files/Rj5Oj1Lc8kSS0ZuyHJLR" alt=""><figcaption><p>Embed Code Settings</p></figcaption></figure>

Just enter the embed code in the designated area.

<figure><img src="/files/at71LpHKeg9XY55iTGGu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here is an example of the correct embed iframe code:

{% code overflow="wrap" lineNumbers="true" %}

```html
<iframe allowtransparency="true" title="Wistia video player" allowFullscreen frameborder="0" scrolling="no" class="wistia_embed" name="wistia_embed" src="https://fast.wistia.net/embed/iframe/1w9z4zg847" width="400" height="225"></iframe>
```

{% endcode %}

## **Tips**

* Ensure your video preview is engaging and relevant to the course content.
* Use high-quality images for video posters to create a professional look.

By following these steps, you can enhance your course page with a compelling video preview, making your course more attractive to potential students.


# Course Announcements

The Course Announcements feature of the **MasterStudy LMS plugin** offers several core benefits that significantly enhance the educational experience. It facilitates direct and timely communication between instructors and students, ensuring that all course participants receive essential updates and information promptly **via email**.&#x20;

This functionality allows instructors to efficiently disseminate important announcements, such as schedule changes, upcoming deadlines, and other critical course-related information, thereby fostering a more organized and transparent learning environment. The user-friendly interface simplifies the process of creating and posting announcements, enabling instructors to keep students informed without any technical difficulties. Ultimately, the Course Announcements feature helps maintain student engagement and promotes better management of course activities.

{% hint style="danger" %}
To make this function work, ensure to configure [**SMTP settings**](/masterstudy-lms/troubleshooting/email-not-sending) on your website.
{% endhint %}

## How to Create an Announcement (instructor)?

**Course Announcements** can be created easily with **Instructor Dashboard.**

1. Open the Instructor Dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/ds0jUwAJxjtXEI2TyAGL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Write your message to the designated area and click on **Create Announcement:**

<figure><img src="/files/7hX90kP8u7RfQ3y7VlAr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Choose Course** - select the course that you want to send the announcement
* **Message for Course Students** - write down your message here and it will be received by all students of the selected course

Here is the email that students **will receive after this announcement:**

<figure><img src="/files/843jbadpc7jeNUEmnqi4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
Make sure that the[ **Announcement from the Instructor**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager/email-templates#announcement-from-the-instructor-email-to-students) email is **ON** from the [**Email Manager.**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager)  By default, it will be <mark style="color:green;">enabled.</mark>
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/Watcl3PpcAwywFHieut4" alt=""><figcaption><p>MasterStudy LMS -> Email Manager -> Instrcutors -> Announcement from the Instructor</p></figcaption></figure>


# Public Profiles

MasterStudy LMS allows instructors and students to have public profiles showcasing their educational activities, achievements, and other relevant information. These profiles help create community, enable transparency, and offer potential learners insight into instructor qualifications and student achievements.

{% hint style="info" %} <mark style="color:blue;">**NOTE: For Old Users**</mark> \
**T**he **User Public Account** page will be moved to a new field called **Instructor Public Profile** in the [**LMS Pages.**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/lms-pages)

Meanwhile, the page for selecting the **Student Public Profile** will remain without a page, and the admin needs to generate[ **it through the settings.**](#assign-student-public-profile-page)

***

Both settings ([Instructor Public Profile](#instructor-public-profile) and [Student Public Profile](#student-public-profile)) will be enabled after the update. By default, the **Compact** style will be selected for both pages as the main layout.
{% endhint %}

In your LMS platform **names** or **usernames** of instructors and students can be found in some places. For example, in the [Single Course](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/course#course-page-styles) page, you can see the name of the instructor and **by clicking** it you will be **redirected to the public profile** **of the instructor**. In this table you can see the references to the **Public Profile Redirections** of the **Instructor** and **Student**:

<table><thead><tr><th width="410">🔗 Redirection places</th><th data-type="checkbox">👨‍🏫 Instructor </th><th data-type="checkbox">🧑‍🎓Student </th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdehSr-zKU7vzW8E7fL#instructors-archive-page"><strong>Instructors Archive Page</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>false</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/GEw5iD9h0dJ7ir81wdgX#instructor-carousel"><strong>Instructor Carousel</strong></a><strong>,</strong> <a href="/pages/GEw5iD9h0dJ7ir81wdgX#featured-teacher"><strong>Featured Teacher</strong></a><strong>,</strong> <a href="/pages/GEw5iD9h0dJ7ir81wdgX#instructors-grid"><strong>Instructor Grid</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>false</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdegdOYFs3M2RKt64Vr#course-page-styles"><strong>Single Course</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>false</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/047rYBKyxx3sjJcSGWrl"><strong>Popular Courses Widget</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>false</td></tr><tr><td><a data-footnote-ref href="#user-content-fn-1"><strong>Discussion Forums in</strong> </a><a href="/pages/CrJwJMEdMurj6A7rDFbk"><strong>Course Player</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="#reviews"><strong>Course Reviews</strong></a></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a data-footnote-ref href="#user-content-fn-2"><strong>My Messages Tab In Dashboard</strong></a></td><td>true</td><td>true</td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/-MdesyyGhbtU7Eei4OJ3"><strong>Manage Students</strong></a> <strong>(both in front-end and back-end)</strong></td><td>false</td><td>true</td></tr></tbody></table>

*e.g. - the first row can be read like "On the Instructors Archive Page there is a link to the Instructor Public Profile"*

***

## Instructor Public Profile

**The Instructor's Public Profile** provides an overview of the instructor’s experience, courses, and student engagement. This profile highlights the instructor’s biography, social link, buttons to send messages, and his portfolio enhancing their credibility and attracting potential students.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Compact" %}

<figure><img src="/files/7JpEB9Ar5QaqlSzFM6dE" alt=""><figcaption><p>Instructor Public Profile</p></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Extended" %}

<figure><img src="/files/GQxHhqbI5PHTrwGs6rkf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

Instructor Public Profile can be divided into two parts as shown in the picture:[ **Instructor Bio**](#personalize-instructor-bio) and **Instructor Portfolio.**

<figure><img src="/files/Bkorwg1vzVf4zmkQJfjT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Instructor Bio** - this part displays the information about the instructor that has been[ **entered by himself**](#personalize-instructor-bio) in the settings of his profile.
* **Instructor Portfolio** - this is the system-generated set of courses and reviews that the instructor is involved in. It consists of four different tabs.
  * [**Courses** ](#courses)- displays the courses of the instructor.
  * [**Co-Owned Courses**](#co-owned-courses) - displays the courses that the instructor is assigned as [co-instructor](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/multi-instructors). [Multi-instructors](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/multi-instructors) add-on should be enabled.
  * [**Bundles**](#bundles) - displays the [**bundled courses**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/course-bundles) of the instructor. [**Course Bundles**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/course-bundles) add-on should be enabled.
  * [**Reviews** ](#reviews)- displays the [course reviews](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/reviews) that have been given by students. This tab [**can be disabled**](#show-reviews-on-the-instructors-page) in **MS LMS Settings > Profiles > General** tab.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Courses" %}

<figure><img src="/files/wfEQu5O8AnE9x4CG4ob1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Co-Owned Courses" %}

<figure><img src="/files/hTpPBI53rc0YJsgh36zy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Bundles" %}

<figure><img src="/files/gIhDNsF6sKmUPuVHYvCQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Reviews" %}

<figure><img src="/files/bFmNGJV0mDusA87TbJUl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Enable Instructor Public Profile

Enabling Instructor Public Profiles is a straight action.&#x20;

1. Follow **WP Dashboard > MS LMS Settings > Profiles > General:**

<figure><img src="/files/oUxNDp0LiQK2Rmold3xP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. On this page turn on **Instructor Public Profile:**

<figure><img src="/files/BT3jdcV7OdhEEzvmFWLI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Once you turn on the Instructor Public Profile, two more settings will also appear: **Show reviews on the instructor's page** and **Choose a layout for the instructor profile.**

#### **Show reviews on the instructor's page**

<figure><img src="/files/lG9CEB6kjeEmM08KEdh0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This option enables to display **student reviews** for their courses:

<figure><img src="/files/bFmNGJV0mDusA87TbJUl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### &#x20;**Choose a layout for the instructor profile**

<figure><img src="/files/3rzccZWeZk4x3ZDkDS0m" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can choose one of the two layouts for the instructor's public profile. There is also an availability to check the **demo preview** by clicking the specified button.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Compact" %}

<figure><img src="/files/7JpEB9Ar5QaqlSzFM6dE" alt=""><figcaption><p>Instructor Public Profile</p></figcaption></figure>

{% embed url="<https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/instructor-public-account/3139/?public=compact>" %}
Link to Live Demo Preview
{% endembed %}
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Extended" %}

<figure><img src="/files/GQxHhqbI5PHTrwGs6rkf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% embed url="<https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/instructor-public-account/3139/?public=extended>" %}
Link to the Live Demo
{% endembed %}
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Assign Instructor Public Profile Page

{% hint style="info" %}
Before assigning the **Instructor Public Profile Page**, make sure that you [**have enabled it.** ](#how-to-enable-instructor-public-profile)
{% endhint %}

1. Follow **WP Dashboard > MS LMS Settings  > LMS Pages:**

<figure><img src="/files/5PZ2imYGO7wgu1cUe9Tn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Select any page that you have created manually as the **Instructor Public Profile Page**. Alternatively, you can use the **Generate Pages** button, so MasterStudy will create and assign **all the necessary pages automatically**:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/PltP3S2V0ZZxyaD7baqk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. **Save** the changes:

<figure><img src="/files/Hls2VNiszgUynuz1uhiZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Personalize Instructor Bio

The instructor's bio is a key part of the profile that shares the key information, social pages, and more. Instructor bio will be entered by the instructor himself. However, the admin has the privilege to indicate what kind of information can be entered by the instructor and be displayed in the public profiles in the [**Profile Form**](#modifying-profile-form-via-lms-form-editor) with[ **LMS Forms Editor.** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/lms-form-editor)

1. On the Instructors dashboard, click on **Settings:**

<figure><img src="/files/A8Jp6k72gdaTCJIJbrxH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. The opened page is called **Profile Form** and can [**be modified** ](#modifying-profile-form-via-lms-form-editor)by the LMS Form Editor. Enter the required info and **Save** the changes.

<figure><img src="/files/1yhA3wPRq3KCPaDOEUJ7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Student Public Profile

**The Student Public Profile** highlights the student's achievements, completed courses, and active engagements within MasterStudy LMS. It serves as a digital portfolio, showcasing the student's progress and certifications.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Compact" %}

<figure><img src="/files/Dir1JzlHtMVh3kvoE0xH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Extended" %}

<figure><img src="/files/BB8X3KP31coiw8ygqhKF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

Student Public Profile can be divided into **three sections** as shown in the picture:

<figure><img src="/files/2u7b3ttzM1AfHAxSxbLl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Completed Courses** - displays the list of completed courses by the student. With the help of the **View Certificate** button, you will be redirected to the page with the corresponding course certificate.
* **Bio** - displays the user-entered info in the student profile settings.
* **Student Progress** - displays the general statistics about the student's progress in the platform. This section [**can be disabled**](#show-progress-on-the-students-page) in the **MS LMS Settings > Profiles > General.**

### Enable Student Public Profile

1. Follow **WP Dashboard > MS LMS Settings > Profiles > General:**

<figure><img src="/files/oUxNDp0LiQK2Rmold3xP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. On this page turn on Student **Public Profile:**

<figure><img src="/files/AiEH9KmEhlohn92jGxlc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Once you turn on the Student Public Profile, two more settings will also appear: **Show progress on the student's page** and **Choose a layout for the student profile.**

#### **Show progress on the student's page**

<figure><img src="/files/leLuaEvOfPPeWmKwOgQl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This option enables to display **students progress statistics** on the platform:

<figure><img src="/files/cg2UiHEfgDvWOqotQLHj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### &#x20;**Choose a layout for the student profile**

<figure><img src="/files/3rzccZWeZk4x3ZDkDS0m" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You can choose one of the two layouts for the student's public profile. There is also an availability to check the **demo preview** by clicking the specified button.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Compact" %}

<figure><img src="/files/Dir1JzlHtMVh3kvoE0xH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% embed url="<https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/student-public-account/3394/?public=compact>" %}
Link to the Live Demo
{% endembed %}
{% endtab %}

{% tab title="Extended" %}

<figure><img src="/files/BB8X3KP31coiw8ygqhKF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% embed url="<https://masterstudy.stylemixthemes.com/lms-plugin/student-public-account/3394/?public=extended>" %}
Link to the Live Demo
{% endembed %}
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

### Assign Student Public Profile Page

{% hint style="info" %}
Before assigning the **Student Public Profile Page**, make sure that you [**have enabled it.** ](#enable-student-public-profile)
{% endhint %}

1. Follow **WP Dashboard > MS LMS Settings  > LMS Pages:**

<figure><img src="/files/5PZ2imYGO7wgu1cUe9Tn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Select any page that you have created manually as the **Student Public Profile Page**. Alternatively, you can use the **Generate Pages** button, so MasterStudy will create and assign **all the necessary pages automatically**:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/RYTBNXjMU3kMfAgw3oRn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Personalize Student Bio

Personalizing a student's bio is completely the same [**as the instructor's.**](#personalize-instructor-bio)&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
You can [modify the profile form](#modifying-profile-form-via-lms-form-editor) with LMS Form Editor.
{% endhint %}

1. In the Student Dashboard, click on Settings:

<figure><img src="/files/p5NsP4g4sdPelMi9uvo5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Enter the needed info and save the changes:

<figure><img src="/files/EJT94DClm7rKgbJzLZlt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Modifying Profile Form via LMS Form Editor

1. First, make sure to enable the [**LMS Form Editor**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/lms-form-editor) add-on. Then, follow **WP Dashboard > MS LMS > Forms Editor:**

<figure><img src="/files/61U8K8wbvbe6Uwr4fFwB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Change the form to **Profile Form** and modify it according to your needs. Put a tick to **Show in Public Profile** option to the fields that you would like to display in the public profiles (both for students and instructors).&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/oIV44ts3faucuhJAzny9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
Ensure you have indicated **Field ID**. You can write **anything unique** there, but leaving it **empty** **will cause errors.**
{% endhint %}

[^1]: In the left side of the Course Player there is a discussion forum which is only accessible to enrolled students and instructor & co-instructor.&#x20;

[^2]: Students and instructors can send direct messages. In the chat, the instructor and the student can be redirected to their public profiles. They have to access it from their dashboard (front-end)


# General Settings

First of all, the percentage of commission that will be taken by the instructor should be determined. You can do it in **MS LMS > LMS Settings > General.**

![](/files/-MjTItW8785qVn5ni_PT)

{% hint style="info" %}
PayPal Fee will be withdrawn from the admin's account.
{% endhint %}

## PayPal Settings

{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important!**

It is required to Enable the PayPal Payment method from the LMS Settings and make it Default.
{% endhint %}

To do this, go to **MS LMS ->** **LMS Settings.**

![](/files/-MjTKOJXOJtG6EgfIYNb)

Click on the **Payout** section and in opened tab click on the **Enable payment method** button.

![](/files/-MjTLc3fB4UaJUvSbyDt)

Then click on **Make Default.**

![](/files/-MjTM3ctyGW0r77JFBvS)

## Time Zone Setting

The PayPal account time zone should be the same as the website time zone.

You can change the time zone in **Settings -> General.**

![](/files/-MjTMQql51jqIA0a1Vnl)

## SSL Certificate

{% hint style="warning" %}
**NOTE:** The website should be with an SSL certificate. The site link should look like [https://sitename.domain](<https://sitename.domain >).
{% endhint %}

## Enabling Payment Methods

Build-in payment methods should be enabled since Payouts only works with LMS orders. To do this, you should go to **LMS Settings -> Payment Methods**.

![](/files/-MjTNNKlMbH9gtiwhdbj)


# Business Account Settings

## Creating a **Business Account**

To make Payouts work no matter what type of PayPal you use, you need to create a [**Business account**](https://www.paypal.com/us/webapps/mpp/account-selection)**.**

![](/files/-MjTTBk9AaQXMeT88yLG)

## Managing the Time Zone

After you have created a business account, you need to set **the same time zone on your PayPal account as on the website.**

![](/files/-MjTTUCVDPYUYBfXSzIq)

{% hint style="danger" %}
**Important!**

For the Payouts to work correctly, the website owner should have enough funds in his PayPal account.
{% endhint %}


# Developer Account Settings

To open the **Developer Account Settings** click the Developer from the main page of the PayPal account as shown on the screenshot below.

![](/files/-MjTY0ZGH8kjnDi0vn5M)

Then you should **Log in to Dashboard**.

![](/files/-MjTZBbtIvN-rnUSooCR)

Afterward, go to the **My Apps & Credentials** section. Here you should select your account type - choose between Sandbox and Live.

![](/files/-MjTZFKXi6UuIVTTC1gz)

Click the **Create App** button and enter the required information.

![](/files/-MjTZLTtMcNNgy_1rQsd)

After creating the app, the webpage with the Client ID and Secret Key will be available.

![](/files/-MjTZUsm1hzsEnKh7JH5)

To see the Secret Key, click on the **Show** button, as shown above. Copy Client ID and Secret Key.

![](/files/-MjTZa_cmGqYtrlUGCNM)

Now, you should open **PayPal Settings.** To do this, go to **LMS Settings -> Payout -> Payment method for payout**. Click on the PayPal settings icon.

![](/files/-MjcbrW_tzcNt_d6IiBB)

Here you should fill out the form, using the **Client ID** and **Client Secret** from above.

![](/files/-MjTZqW68j6Xh-svOC-M)

Return to App settings and scroll down to the Webhooks section. Click the **Add Webhook** button.

![](/files/-MjTZvdg5LN46hpaijNi)

In the opened tab you will need to fill a field **Webhook URL.**

![](/files/-MjT_8HkMW2iu3SNJY3V)

In order to get the **Webhook URL,** open Payout settings and click on the **PayPal settings icon**.

![](/files/-MjT_DoF4CBCaPOsxnG7)

Below you will find the Webhook URL. Copy it.

![](/files/-MjT_KOKFYu-143oDN_0)

Paste the webhook URL into the required field in **Sandbox webhooks.**

![](/files/-MjT_PA3aW0Mtgs9LS-T)

**Then, to display all transactions** in the PayPal account you should check the **All events** box as shown below.

![](/files/-MjT_hOtM2HmZVgs993N)

Save all the changes. After this, the **Webhook ID** will be generated.

![](/files/-MjT_o6r5fC-nfiKOW-6)

Copy the Webhook ID and go to LMS Payout settings.

Paste the Webhook ID to the required field, check the **Verifying webhooks** box, select the PayPal mode, currency, and save settings.

![](/files/-MjT_wL_MPRJ2gBv8liR)

{% hint style="success" %}
Developer Account Settings have been set.
{% endhint %}


# Instructor Settings

Instructors should also create an app to accept payments (receive money) in their PayPal account. They must configure their [**PayPal email**](#payout-app-for-instructor) and indicate it [**in their dashboard.**](#set-up-paypal-payout-in-the-dashboard)

## Payout App for Instructor

{% hint style="info" %}
We will show the guide in **Sandbox (test) mode**. After configuring settings, make sure to change the mode to **Live** to start receiving real mone&#x79;**.**
{% endhint %}

1. Go to <https://www.paypal.com/> and sign in to your **PayPal business account**, then move to the developers' dashboard:

<figure><img src="/files/FlsX3xT8rEBnYyXl9puC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Move to the **Apps & Credentials** tab:

<figure><img src="/files/H24bRukw9DqvIk8mDPv6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. To create an app, click on the **Create App** button:

<figure><img src="/files/G5WXLa3pq8t8drYSUSw8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. On the opened pop-up, name your app, indicate the app type, and create it:

<figure><img src="/files/OEPH1isTsFkpTTs0I4kI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

5. On the opened page, you can see your email associated with the app:

<figure><img src="/files/Iv2UFDmusy9VEvHRQuiy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

6. <mark style="color:blue;">Optional:</mark> If you want to change the email (rename), click on View Details:

<figure><img src="/files/4woJJGbdM487AsI8AkGW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

7. Click on **Change Email:**

<figure><img src="/files/PWsdT4lrZ5siliuYK0XC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

8. Write the new email and save the changes:

<figure><img src="/files/IGCcakr856k7o6PQz2HJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

9. You have successfully updated the email:

<figure><img src="/files/X7Ar3NkaLBdGHSxVat7a" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

10. After setting up everything and testing, kindly change the mode to <mark style="color:purple;">**Live**</mark><mark style="color:purple;">:</mark>

<figure><img src="/files/FG9KmzdHXn9b7YhzKtzT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Set up PayPal Payout in the Dashboard

1. Go to your (instructor) dashboard and open the Payout tab:

<figure><img src="/files/3a6O122umDwJ68AWe7cb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Enter the email in your [**PayPal app**](#payout-app-for-instructor) and click on Save:

<figure><img src="/files/SHdafgkfFrILhXD9wMxg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

On this page, you can also get the statistics and all the associated data about your payouts:

<figure><img src="/files/NEb5mGpYuVTb0OrPUY8m" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Payouts Process

To set up Payouts Process, first, go to **MS LMS -> Statistics.**

![](/files/-MjTdYv8c_Hkx88jREHY)

Click the **Create Payout** button.

![](/files/-MjTdgfbqiFHORoS4a40)

You will see the **Success** inscription. This means that everything is configured correctly and the Payout request has been sent.

![](/files/-MjTdtUYRrS8OA9ekgbd)

Wait from 10 to 15 seconds. Then go to the Payout section. You will see the created payout here.

![](/files/-MjTdyW3yUXDixVR2UsI)

You can check the PayPal business account and make sure that the transaction to the instructor's account has been completed successfully.

![](/files/-MjTezGnjBgjHe_tK51j)

Instructors will see the transaction in their account as shown below.

![](/files/-MjTf5LbAXhSFk7_stxg)

Here you can see that the instructor received exactly the amount that was indicated in the statistics. That means, that the fee was withdrawn from the website owner's account.

{% hint style="success" %}
If everything is set up correctly, the process will occur automatically!
{% endhint %}

## Payouts statuses

* **Success** - everything was set up correctly.
* **Pending** - that means, that payout is pending (this process takes 10-15 seconds). After pending, it will automatically change to success (you will need to refresh the page).
* **Create** - the Payout was created but the request was not sent, you need to look through all the steps above and repeat.

{% hint style="warning" %}
**NOTE:** Create status means that you can have problems with correct Payouts, that's why you should set up everything correctly before creating Payouts.
{% endhint %}

* **Unclaimed -** the recipient's account is not accepting transactions. This issue is related to PayPal settings and does not depend on the MasterStudy LMS plugin.


# Automatic Payouts (Expert)

## Adding a Cron Job for Payouts <a href="#statistics-and-payouts-addingacronjobforpayouts" id="statistics-and-payouts-addingacronjobforpayouts"></a>

In order to automate Payouts, you can use Cron Jobs on your server/site.&#x20;

First, you need to edit the **wp-config.php** file and paste the following line of code anywhere above the line that says "That’s all, stop editing! Happy blogging":

```
define('DISABLE_WP_CRON', true);
```

After that, you need to add a cron job from the cron tab in your hosting.

![](/files/-MjThbSgHGX_VD0DPRup)

{% hint style="info" %}
**Example:**\
Cron At 00:00 on day-of-month 1.\
0 0 1 \* \* wget -O /dev/null <https://yoursite.com/wp-cron.php?doing_wp_cron>
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="success" %}
**Here are some manuals for adding cron jobs:**\
cPanel - [**https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YwpUjz1tMbA**](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YwpUjz1tMbA)\
Vesta CP - [**https://www.plothost.com/kb/create-delete-cron-jobs-vesta/**](https://www.plothost.com/kb/create-delete-cron-jobs-vesta/)\
Kinsta Hosting - [**https://kinsta.com/knowledgebase/how-to-write-a-cron-job/**](https://kinsta.com/knowledgebase/how-to-write-a-cron-job/)
{% endhint %}


# Analytics for Admin

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/7NqPcDGVOZM>" %}

## Overview of Analytics

The Advanced Analytics feature provides detailed insights into the performance and engagement of your courses, users, and content. This feature is organized into four key tabs and three sub-tabs:&#x20;

* [**Revenue**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/analytics-for-admin/revenue)
* [**Engagement**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/analytics-for-admin/engagement)
* [**Users**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/analytics-for-admin/users)
* [**Reviews**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/analytics-for-admin/reviews)
  * [**Detailed Report for the Course**](#detailed-report-for-the-course)
  * [**Detailed Report for the Student**](#detailed-report-for-the-student)
  * [**Detailed Report for the Instructor**](#detailed-report-for-the-instructor)

<figure><img src="/files/GBtntSBynmto0q7kD4EY" alt=""><figcaption><p>Screenshot of the Analytics tab on the Admin Dashboard</p></figcaption></figure>

There is also an availability to receive weekly or monthly recurring [**emails to get notifications.** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/email-manager/email-templates#reports)

<figure><img src="/files/ZpRLBGhhqamhDFw6CBj5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Follow this page to learn about available analytics for **instructors**:

{% content-ref url="/pages/CmFjPs8jW74CP8p3GbP4" %}
[Analytics for Instructors](/masterstudy-lms/lms-analytics/analytics-for-instructors)
{% endcontent-ref %}

### Hide/Show Statistics

Using the **gear icon** on the top right corner you can choose which information to show in every analytics tab:

<figure><img src="/files/cFHsAlC9WtWevB4TVSoi" alt=""><figcaption><p>Gear Icon on the Revenue tab of Analytics</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/65mN7K8dqocJ80UBuZzG" alt=""><figcaption><p>Pop-up Menu after clicking the Gear Icon</p></figcaption></figure>

### Date Range

In the top right corner of each tab, you’ll find a date range selector that allows you to specify the period for which you want to view the statistics:

<figure><img src="/files/r9YEjEqX402N1aCd1HPQ" alt=""><figcaption><p>Date Range Field</p></figcaption></figure>

You can manually select the custom dates or use the available preset date ranges:

<figure><img src="/files/Rc3qzFh8qSTSHST9fnWv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Today -** Quickly view the statistics for the current day.
* **Yesterday -** Displays the data for the previous day.
* **This Week -** Shows statistics for the current week.
* **Last Week -** Provides data for the previous week.
* **This Month -** Displays data for the current month.
* **Last Month -** Shows statistics from the previous month.
* **This Year -** Provides an overview of statistics for the current year.
* **Last Year -** Displays data for the previous year.
* **Navigation Arrows -** Use the left and right arrows to move between months when selecting dates.
* **Reset Button -** Resets the date range back to the default setting, allowing you to start fresh with a standard period.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Calendar and date settings** (Date format, Start day of the week, etc.) will be **inherited** from the **site settings**. You can freely modify them by following **WordPress Dashboard > Settings > General.**
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/5QPqrzcA7q0He4h5fp4E" alt=""><figcaption><p><strong>Example of changing the start day of the week</strong></p></figcaption></figure>

### Chart and Graph Colors

The colors to differentiate data in charts and graphs will be inherited from MasterStudy LMS Settings.

<figure><img src="/files/9xit6fsRkaoeEZ0Z60t5" alt=""><figcaption><p>Type of Reviews Graph</p></figcaption></figure>

You can change these colors by following **MasterStudy LMS Settings > General > Colors:**

<figure><img src="/files/cLBSBur1BGklylirhaZt" alt=""><figcaption><p>Changing the Colors and Base Colors of the MasterStudy LMS</p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
This documentation is designed to provide users with a quick yet comprehensive overview of what each section of the analytics dashboard offers and how they can utilize it for better management and optimization of their LMS platform.
{% endhint %}

***

## Detailed Report for the Course

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/7NqPcDGVOZM?t=503>" %}

This page provides a comprehensive breakdown of this specific course’s revenue, enrollment trends, assignments engagement, and lesson performance. The data gives insights into student progress, financial success, and areas where improvements or interventions may be needed.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/jGUcic8dYF7438bN1VRL" alt=""><figcaption><p>Detailed Revenue for Web Coding and Apache Basics course</p></figcaption></figure>

### Top Summary Metrics

<figure><img src="/files/1aXZLwXelycmVqRFMjDE" alt=""><figcaption><p>Top Summary Metrics</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Revenue -** Displays the total revenue generated from this course
* **Enrollments -** Shows the total number of enrollments
* **Orders -** Indicates the number of orders placed for this course
* **Bundles -** Shows the number of bundles this course is part of
* **Lessons -** Displays the number of lessons included in this course
* **Reviews -** Indicates the number of reviews received for this course
* **Certificates Given -** Shows how many certificates have been issued for this course

### Revenue Trend Graph

This line graph tracks the revenue generated over the specified date range.

<figure><img src="/files/76W1vtrKRYeRoX0RRL6J" alt=""><figcaption><p>Revenue Trend Graph</p></figcaption></figure>

### Enrollments and Preorders Trend Graphs

These graphs show the **enrollment** and [**preorder**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/upcoming-course-status#course-preordering) trends for the course over time.

<figure><img src="/files/DGJFlMPfwY2itQU4rvxQ" alt=""><figcaption><p>Enrollments and Preorders Trend Graphs</p></figcaption></figure>

> <mark style="color:blue;">**Total**</mark> - the total number of enrollments.\ <mark style="color:green;">**Unique**</mark> - the number of unique enrollments. Once a student registers and immediately buys the course, it is called unique enrollment.&#x20;

### Enrollments by Status and Assignments Engagement

These sections offer a snapshot of student progress and performance. They highlight how many students are at different stages of the course *(not started, in progress, completed)* and how well they are doing on [**assignments**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/assignments), providing a clear view of overall engagement and success in the course.

<figure><img src="/files/6gHOYO0WZXRqNAVNsHsK" alt=""><figcaption><p>Enrollments by Status and Assignments Engagement</p></figcaption></figure>

### Lessons Engagement

<figure><img src="/files/ldhnTUjEEkXGC0G3AmKR" alt=""><figcaption><p>Lessons Engagement</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Lesson Name** - The name of each lesson
* **Completed -** The percentage of students who completed each lesson
* **Dropped -** The percentage of students who dropped each lesson
* **Not Completed -** The percentage of students who haven’t completed the lessons
* **Total -** The total number of students enrolled for each lesson
* **Lesson Type -** Indicate the [**type of the lesson**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/lessons)
* **Date Created -** The date the lesson was created

## Detailed Report for the Student

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/7NqPcDGVOZM?t=573>" %}

This page gives a comprehensive view of the student’s engagement, progress, and performance across courses, quizzes, and assignments, along with additional metrics that provide insight into their overall activity on the platform.

<figure><img src="/files/mrfImxzH3O0muxSzTQKd" alt=""><figcaption><p>Detailed Revenue Report for the Student</p></figcaption></figure>

### Top Summary Metrics

<figure><img src="/files/EC7l9UeUwHAZsjjbuEQF" alt=""><figcaption><p>Top Summary Metrics</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Revenue -** Displays the total revenue generated from this student’s purchases
* **Orders -** Shows the number of [**orders**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/orders) placed by the student

### Courses Overview

This section provides an overview of the student’s engagement with the courses:

<figure><img src="/files/1uvqYImayIKZmNPE8Cia" alt=""><figcaption><p>Courses Overview</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Enrolled -** Indicates the total number of courses the student is enrolled in
* **Completed -** Shows how many courses the student has finished
* **In Progress -** Reflects the number of courses currently being worked on by the student
* **Not Started -** Highlights the courses that the student has enrolled in but has not yet begun

> The graph shows the timeline of when the student started engaging with courses and tracks their progress over time.

### Course Progress Table

This table details each course the student is enrolled in:

<figure><img src="/files/Pl3vtd6AQgnKgMP13jyo" alt=""><figcaption><p>Course Progress Table</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Course Name -** The title of each course
* **Duration -** The estimated time required to complete the course
* **Started -** The date when the student began the course
* **Progress -** The percentage of the course that the student has completed, represented visually with a progress bar

### Quizzes and Assignments

This section tracks the student’s performance on [**quizzes** ](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/quizzes)and [**assignments**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/assignments):

<figure><img src="/files/69X88LrAcmAUvbOhU7bH" alt=""><figcaption><p>Quizzes and Assignments General Stats</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Passed -** The number of quizzes/assignments the student successfully completed
* **Failed -** The number of quizzes/assignments the student did not pass

### Additional Metrics

<figure><img src="/files/mkqVPH71OUwmGULvM6tz" alt=""><figcaption><p>Additional Metrics</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Bundles -** Indicates the number of [**course bundles**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/course-bundles) the student is enrolled in
* **Groups -** The number of [**groups**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/group-courses) the student is a part of
* **Reviews -** The total number of[ **reviews**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/reviews) the student has left for courses.
* **Certificates Given -** Shows the number of [**certificates**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-settings/certificates) the student has received after completing courses
* **Points -** Displays the [**total points**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/point-system) earned by the student, which could be related to platform engagement or rewards.

## Detailed Report for the Instructor

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/7NqPcDGVOZM?t=644>" %}

The detailed report for instructors offers a comprehensive analysis of an instructor’s performance, including both revenue and student engagement metrics. The combination of visual graphs and tabular data helps identify which courses are the most successful and when the instructor’s content performs best. This report is essential for understanding an instructor’s overall contribution to the platform and provides actionable insights for course management and marketing strategies.

<figure><img src="/files/SFcFL3RAKKJgJSbL83Sf" alt=""><figcaption><p>Overview of the Report of the Instructor</p></figcaption></figure>

### Total Revenue Graph

This line graph tracks the instructor’s revenue over time within the selected date range. The graph highlights peak earnings and fluctuations in revenue, making it easy to visualize when the instructor’s courses generated the most income.

<figure><img src="/files/q9YFgnpxZhpUpwPDj60n" alt=""><figcaption><p>Total Revenue Graph</p></figcaption></figure>

### Total Enrollments Graph

This line graph shows the total enrollments over time. It differentiates between total enrollments and unique enrollments, providing insights into when the instructor’s courses attracted the most students and whether the same students enrolled in multiple courses.

<figure><img src="/files/xTFidmVAo4Cy7eJbzDDt" alt=""><figcaption><p>Total Enrollments Graph</p></figcaption></figure>

> <mark style="color:blue;">**Total**</mark> - the total number of enrollments.\ <mark style="color:green;">**Unique**</mark> - the number of unique enrollments. Once a student registers and immediately buys the course, it is called unique enrollment.

### Courses Table

This table provides detailed information about each course created by the instructor:

<figure><img src="/files/O1WBLIy0UkfjWRrgBMvF" alt=""><figcaption><p>Courses Table</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Course Name -** The title of each course.
* **Enrollments -** The total number of students enrolled in each course.
* **Revenue -** The total revenue generated by each course.
* **Views -** The number of views each course received, giving insight into its visibility and popularity.
* **Date Created -** The date when the course was first published.
* **Detailed Report Button** - Click on the button to open the [**detailed report**](#detailed-report-for-the-course) of the selected course


# Revenue

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/7NqPcDGVOZM?t=97>" %}

**The revenue** tab offers a summary of your platform’s financials, covering total revenue, orders, and membership sales. Visuals include trend graphs, pie charts, and revenue breakdowns by products and students. It also tracks payouts, detailing instructor earnings and platform commissions. Detailed tables enable in-depth analysis of the course, group, bundle, and students, helping to monitor performance and spot revenue trends.

<figure><img src="/files/zTQwYXh3zgPkMalTYI80" alt=""><figcaption><p>Overview of the Revenue Tab</p></figcaption></figure>

### Top Summary Metrics

<figure><img src="/files/ZQrMLrxrkYg2uxfjtYTk" alt=""><figcaption><p>Top Summary Metrics for Revenue</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Revenue -** Displays the **total revenue** generated
* **Courses -** Shows the revenue generated specifically from courses
* **Bundles -** Indicates the revenue from selling [**course bundles**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/course-bundles)
* **Orders -** Shows the total number of [**orders**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/orders) made
* **Memberships -** Displays the number of [**memberships** ](/masterstudy-lms/additional-features/membership-system)sold

### Revenue Chart

The following graph illustrates the **total revenue (Y-axis)** by the **period (X-axis)** that you specified. You can hover over the dots to get exact data.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/oSBqgWivRLa1ZYySPQov" alt=""><figcaption><p>Total Revenue Chart</p></figcaption></figure>

### Earning by Product, New or Existing Students, and Payouts

<figure><img src="/files/Ec1Tpx1QVaNyBapQ5qdk" alt=""><figcaption><p>Pie Charts to illustrate Earning by Product, New or Existing Students, and Payouts </p></figcaption></figure>

* **By Product -** A visual representation of revenue distribution between courses and bundles
* **By New vs Existing Students** - Highlights how much revenue comes from new versus returning students
* **Completed Payouts** - Tracks the payouts made to instructors and the commission kept by the platform

### Revenue Tables

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Courses" %}
**Revenue Breakdown by Course**: Lists individual courses along with enrollment numbers, total revenue, views, and course creation dates.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/5NVbuqPjXtgIKsr5gbWS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Course Name -** The title of the course
* **Enrollments -** The number of students enrolled in each course
* **Revenue -** The total revenue generated from each course
* **Views -** The number of times the course has been viewed. This can be useful for assessing how much interest the course is generating compared to its enrollments and revenue
* **Course Created -** The date and time when the course was initially created
* **Detailed Report Button** - Click on the button to open the [**detailed report**](#detailed-report-for-the-course) of the selected course
  {% endtab %}

{% tab title=" Groups " %}
**Revenue Breakdown by** [**Groups**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/group-courses)**:** The table in the Revenue tab provides a detailed breakdown of revenue generated by different groups.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/DxFo88EUBBr690pk2VSb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Group Name -** The name of the group, such as "Ninjas" or "First Group."
* **Orders -** The number of orders placed by the group, representing purchases made.
* **Courses -** The number of courses associated with each group.
* **Students -** The total number of students enrolled within each group.
* **Revenue -** The total revenue generated from each group.
  {% endtab %}

{% tab title="Bundles" %}
**Revenue Breakdown by** [**Course Bundles:**](/masterstudy-lms/lms-pro-addons/course-bundles) This table helps users quickly assess the financial performance of different course bundles. It highlights which bundles are driving the most sales and revenue.

<figure><img src="/files/lV0H1QYv4quMViLUcqT7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Bundle Name** - The title of the course bundle
* **Orders -** The number of orders placed for each bundle
* **Courses Inside -** The number of courses included in each bundle
* **Revenue -** The total revenue generated from each bundle.
  {% endtab %}

{% tab title=" Students" %}
**Revenue Breakdown by Students:** This table in the Revenue tab provides a breakdown of revenue generated by individual students. It highlights which students are the most valuable in terms of revenue.

<figure><img src="/files/OnPBQjjcON3iDyBX41ol" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Name -** The name of the student
* **Total Orders -** The number of orders placed by each student
* **Courses -** The number of individual courses purchased by the student
* **Bundles -** The number of bundles purchased by the student
* **Purchased Group Courses -** The number of group courses purchased by the student
* **Revenue -** The total revenue generated from each student’s purchases
* **Detailed Report Button** - Click on the button to open the [**detailed report**](#detailed-report-for-the-student) of the selected student
  {% endtab %}
  {% endtabs %}

There is an availability to check the **sales (orders) made in detail** on **My Sales Page**. To learn more about this feature, refer to this manual:

{% content-ref url="/pages/Cf704ca0m0dPdtSH1QlE" %}
[Sales Page for Instructor](/masterstudy-lms/lms-course-features/orders/sales-page-for-instructor)
{% endcontent-ref %}




---

[Next Page](/llms-full.txt/1)